JP2020044369A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of giving an unexpectedness to a player even while executing a performance in which a performance content is determined in advance.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 for executing a lottery relating to a win/lose of a main control board 4100 and providing a game as to whether or not a game state advantageous to a player is imparted on the basis of the lottery result comprises: display means (a liquid crystal display device 1900) having a predetermined display area; and display control means (a peripheral control board 4010) for controlling the display means to display a predetermined performance therein. A predetermined performance to be displayed and controlled by the peripheral control board 4010 includes: an expectation performance to be executed on the basis of the lottery result; and a normal performance to be executed within a predetermined period regardless of execution/non-execution of the lottery.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 161

Description

  The present invention relates to a so-called ball-and-ball game machine (hereinafter, also referred to as "pachinko machine" or "pachinko machine") and a torso type game machine (generally also referred to as "pachislot machine" and "slot machine"). It relates to a gaming machine.

  In a general pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball (game medium) enters a start port provided in a game area, a lottery is performed on whether or not to generate a big hit advantageous to a player. And, based on the result of the lottery, a gaming machine that informs a player of the result of the lottery by selecting any one of a plurality of effects and executing the selected effect is widely known (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-131278 A

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if an effect selected from among a plurality of effects is executed, the predetermined effect contents of the effect are only presented, and the unexpectedness is poor. Was getting bored.

  In view of the above-described problem, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can provide a player with unexpectedness even during an effect in which the effect content is determined in advance.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a game is performed in which a lottery according to a win is executed, and a game is performed based on the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to give a player an advantageous gaming state, Display means having a predetermined display area; and display control means for controlling the display means to display a predetermined effect, wherein the predetermined effect is an expected effect executed based on a result of the lottery. And a normal effect that is performed within a predetermined period regardless of whether or not the lottery is performed. The effect is configured to appear at a specific timing, and when the execution of the expected effect is determined when the normal effect is displayed on the display means, the effect of the normal effect on the display means. Continue However, when the specific timing has arrived, a game projection machine characterized by comprising: effect projecting means for displaying the specific effect in the expected effect on the display means in preference to the normal effect. It is.

  Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide a player with unexpectedness even during the execution of an effect whose effect is determined in advance.

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main part frame was opened to the outer frame of the pachinko machine concerning an embodiment, and the door frame was opened to the main part frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame of the pachinko machine as viewed from behind. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper support of the main body frame and the upper support of the outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support bracket of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) viewed from below. It is a rear view of the upper support metal part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of the upper support metal part for demonstrating the effect | action of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the disassembly. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front by exploding. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the right side decoration unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left side decoration unit after disassembly. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of a left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the plate unit and disassembled from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the plate unit. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the part of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the upper right front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state where a pressing operation unit in the operation unit is pressed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame, which is exploded and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device which is exploded and seen from the rear. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front from the disassembly of the foul cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. It is a front view showing the state where the front cover of the foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. It is a rear view of a ball feed unit. FIG. 2A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member viewed from the front, and (D). It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a door frame in the substantially vertical center. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main-body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the main frame from the front by disassembling. It is the perspective view which looked at after disassembling the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main part frame base in a main part frame. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a hit ball launching device in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit ball launching device in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the prize ball unit from the exploded view. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after award ball unit was disassembled. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit in an exploded view from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the prize ball apparatus in the prize ball unit later and disassembled. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution path of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board unit in a main part frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the board unit from the exploded view. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the board unit. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit disassembled and viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the fastening mechanism in the back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a slide rod for a glass door and a slide rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors and the sliding rod for main body frames in a lock device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main-body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the game board from the exploded view. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the game board. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back in FIG. 103. FIG. 104 is a cross-sectional view of a gaming panel of the gaming board of FIG. 103, which is cut in a vertical direction. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a front component according to an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like, as viewed from the front by exploding. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind in FIG. 106. FIG. 2 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state where a game board was stored in a main part frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally back. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit, which is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit, which is disassembled for each main member and is viewed from behind. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit of the attacker unit when disassembled and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 1st unit in an attacker unit after disassembly. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 2nd unit in an attacker unit from the disassembly. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 2nd unit in an attacker unit after disassembled. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a third unit of the attacker unit, which is disassembled and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 3rd unit in the attacker unit after disassembling. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit in the attacker unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 4th unit in the attacker unit after disassembling it. It is a front view which cuts and shows a part of attacker unit. (A) is a perspective view of the front side unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front side unit viewed from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role from diagonally upper right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role from diagonally lower left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role thing from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the center role thing for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the center role thing for every main member and looked after. It is the perspective view which looked at the front right middle production unit of the center role from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front right middle production unit of the center role from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the front-stage middle effect unit from front and disassembled. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after decomposing | disassembling the middle right production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled 2nd Embodiment of the fixed decorative body in the front right middle production unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 after exploded. (A) is a perspective view of the front cover and the effect sheet of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from a position slightly to the left with respect to the front, (C) is a perspective view seen from a position further leftward than (b). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the effect sheet in the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of lighting out, (c) shows the light emission decoration mode at the time of blue lighting. It is explanatory drawing, (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission decoration mode at the time of red lighting. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and looked at after. It is the perspective view which looked at the back side production unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back side production unit in the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side effect unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side effect unit for every main member, and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at one rotary decoration body unit in a back side production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at one rotation decoration body unit in a back side production unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation decoration body unit of the back side production unit from the front and disassembled. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation decoration body unit of the back side production unit from the disassembly and looked after. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the center right production unit of the center role in the front unit. (A) is a perspective view of the front right middle movable decorative body of the front right middle directing unit in a normal position when viewed from the front slightly above, and (b) is a front view of the front right middle movable decorative body in an appearance position. It is the perspective view seen from a little above. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the back side production unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the back upper production unit and the lower back production unit in the back unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a main control board. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a normal state facing the window of the center role, and (b) shows the back right production unit and the back left production unit while rotating the rotating decorative body, and displays the liquid crystal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect example which divides the display screen of a display means into three, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which stopped the rotary decoration body following (b). 163 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect obtained by dividing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device into six regarding the appearance of the back right effect unit and the back left effect unit, unlike FIG. 163; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect which makes the rotation position of a rotary decoration body differ, and makes it appear before a back right production unit and a back left production unit appear. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt process periodically executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for a lottery process for a big hit, (B) is a reach determination table used for a lottery process for a reach, and (C) is a lottery process for a big hit type. It is a symbol determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design change processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16ms regular processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing example of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a process of the decoration design change start process. It is a figure for explaining the relation between the judgment result and the production time in the special symbol change pattern. It is a figure (distribution table 1A) for demonstrating the distribution of the effect pattern containing a hit effect. It is the figure which put together the reliability at the time of each hit effect produced using distribution table 1A. It is a figure (distribution table 1B) for demonstrating the distribution of the effect pattern containing this drop effect. It is the figure which put together the reliability at the time of each hit effect produced using distribution table 1B. It is a figure for explaining transition of an effect picture at the time of performing a normal type of hit effect. It is a figure for explaining transition of a production picture at the time of execution of a winning effect of SP1 type. It is a figure for explaining transition of a production picture at the time of a winning effect of SP2 type being performed. It is a figure (distribution table 2A) for demonstrating the distribution of the effect pattern containing this drop effect. It is a figure (distribution table 2B) for demonstrating the distribution of the effect pattern containing a hit effect. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect by the 1st effect pattern is performed. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the transition of the effect image when an alternative effect by the 1st effect pattern is performed. It is another figure (the 1) for demonstrating the transition of the effect image when an alternative effect by a 1st effect pattern is performed. It is another figure (the 2) for explaining transition of a production picture when an alternative production by a 1st production pattern is performed. It is a time chart for explaining an alternative production by a first production pattern. It is a time chart for explaining an alternative production by a second production pattern. It is a time chart for explaining an alternative production by a 3rd production pattern. It is a time chart for explaining an alternative production by a 4th production pattern. It is a specific effect image (the 1) in the liquid crystal display device when the continuous defeat effect is executed. It is a specific effect image (No. 2) in the liquid crystal display device when the continuous defeat effect is executed. It is a figure for explaining a game progress at the time of winning a big hit. FIG. 205 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect display accompanying the game progress shown in FIG. 205. It is a figure for explaining a change pattern of a high probability time saving state. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern of a forced battle based on a big hit type. It is a figure for explaining display production by a forced battle. It is a figure for explaining display production by a special PC image. It is a figure for explaining display production by a special selection mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect by a special line. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a second control example for preparing for discontinuous fluctuation. It is a figure for explaining shift from a demonstration production to a transition production.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and a door frame is opened with respect to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front.

  1 to 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and an open front side that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and is openable. A game frame 4 having a box frame-shaped main frame 3, a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a front face of the main frame 3 and the game panel 4 A door frame 5 pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball is arranged below the game window 101 and stores game balls. A dish-like upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 are provided, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has, as viewed in a front view, an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2. At a position below the main frame 3 and the door frame 5, a decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged such that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the right end of the door frame 5 are moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is configured such that, when viewed from the front, a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a game window 101 having a substantially circular shape is desired, and protrudes forward below the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. A handle device 500 for a player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 while game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the player rotates the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting ball strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that the player can play a game.

  Although details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the inside of the game area 1100 can be visually recognized by the player, the player cannot see the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is not possible to touch a game ball, an obstacle nail G (see FIG. 110), various winning openings, an accessory, and the like in the game area 1100. In addition, various control boards are provided on the rear side of the main body frame 3, and a cover 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper support of the main frame and the upper support of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support member of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of FIG. 14A viewed from below. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction and left and right sides extending in the vertical (up and down) direction. It comprises frame plates 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13. By connecting them, they are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). And an engagement notch 15 which is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In addition, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, a mounting step 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step 10a. It has become.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal material (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protruding portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extending direction) is provided, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 108). A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facilities of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there are some drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like. The plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extends from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the up-down direction, and is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13. And a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted into and engaged with the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetric. And a vertical piece 18 is formed separately in front and back. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes. Have been.

  The connecting member 14 has an upper surface and a lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 has an engagement notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. A predetermined screw is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 in a state where the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame 11 are inserted and engaged in the portion 15. It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. The connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates through the side frame members 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper inner side surface of the side frame members 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw is formed. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12, 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates through the side frame members 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower inner side surface of the side frame members 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw is formed. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The four connecting members 14 allow the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 to be connected. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is fixed to an upper support bracket 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower side of the left side frame plate 12 so as to face the upper support bracket 20. A lower support metal member 21, a reinforcing metal member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal member 21, and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13; Decorative cover 23. The upper support member 20 and the lower support member 21 support the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper support bracket 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b projecting forward from a front end of the upper frame plate 10 from a front end of the fixing piece 20a, A support hook hole 20c formed by notching so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame that hangs downward from the left ends of the fixing piece 20 and the support protrusion 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) abutting on the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e (see FIG. 14), and a stop hanging part 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the support hook hole 20c. A support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support 20. In addition, the upper support fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 with the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

  In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the support projecting piece 20b is increased by a hanging wall 20e hanging down from the outer edge of the support projecting piece 20b. Can be concealed so that the lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player cannot be seen from the player side, so that the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a V-shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. The width of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support member 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal piece 22, and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-shaped support protrusion 21c protruding forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin-shaped protrusion protruding upward from near the front end of the support protrusion 21c. And a support projection 21d. A main frame support formed on a main frame support 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21. After the support projection 21d of the support fitting 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main frame support 644 of the main body frame 3, the pivot pin 633 of the upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 at a predetermined distance from each other in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24, 25 are formed in a substantially L-shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are connected to the hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described later in detail, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  Further, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing bracket 22. The guide plate 26 is provided for smoothly guiding the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  In addition, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, as shown in FIG. It is rotatably supported with respect to it. The lock member 27 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a stopper 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and a length shorter than the stopper 27a rightward from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. An operating portion 27b protruding, an elastic piece 27c protruding from a side opposite to a position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and a distal end of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L-shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. The elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a smaller width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a to the left increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the distal end contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c has a hanging wall. The stopper 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20c so that the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the leading space of the support hook hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of the present example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the distal end space of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper 27a A state in which the leading end side faces the stop hanging part 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the leading end side of the stopper part 27a and the stopping hanging part 20f, so that they are in contact with each other. In the normal support state (not shown), each of the support pin 633 located in the distal end space of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c formed to be bent and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper 27a. The center is displaced in an oblique direction and faces each other. In this normal pivoting state, the pivoting pin 633 that pivotally supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the distal end portion of the support hook hole 20c. Since the load is hardly applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper 27a from the above, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. In addition, since the tip of the stopper 27a is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d, when the operation part 27b is turned to rotate the lock member 27, the lock member 27 is turned smoothly. Has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip end surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the pivot pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and comes into contact with the arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, the acting force F is supported by the pivot. A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the distal end surface 27d) acting on a contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, and one side of the inclined hole of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, so that the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 There is no moment for rotating the tip in the direction (clockwise direction in the figure) in which the tip departs from the support projecting piece 20b, and the pivot pin 633 moves between the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c. Maintain the state of being sandwiched between To. For this reason, even in a normal pivoting state or a state in which the acting force of the pivoting pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is constantly applied to the elastic piece 27 c of the lock member 27, and the elastic piece integrally formed of synthetic resin is used. The plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep can be prevented, and the pivot pin 633 can be prevented from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Note that even if an excessive force is applied to rotate the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 in a direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) to be disengaged from the support projecting piece 20b, one side of the tip of the stopper 27a may be rotated. The lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b because the lock member 27 does not rotate in the direction in which it comes into contact with the stop hanging portion 20f and further comes off.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc shape, the distal end portion of the stopper member 27a faces the outside of the support projecting piece 20b at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) of the lock member 27 at a position where a rotational moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Even if the member 27 is rotated, the applicant has pointed out that the locking member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b because only one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the body frame 3 is supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support bracket is provided in a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the body frame shaft support 644 (see FIG. 63) of the body frame 3. 21 need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16 (A), the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed in. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. When the pivot pin 633 reaches the leading space of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivot pin 633 does not come into contact with the tip side surface of the stopper 27a. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the entrance portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a faces the pivot pin 633 so that the pivot pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the body frame 3 is lifted, and the engagement between the body frame shaft support hole formed in the body frame shaft support 644 and the support protrusion 21 d of the lower support metal 21 is released, so that the body frame 3 is moved to the outer frame 2. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the related art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island because the extruded material is an aluminum alloy). However, since such an operation is performed by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be easily hammered, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed on the existing island equipment without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material, the thickness can be reduced while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The game board 4 having a large left-right width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inner side of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3 and, at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13, which form the outer shell of the outer frame 2, are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. The outer frame 2 is fastened tightly to the inner surface, and is fastened in a state where the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged. It can be used as a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member that protrudes outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, (Adjacent ball rental machine) can be mounted in close contact.

[1-2. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the right rear. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  As shown, the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game window 101 having a vertically long rectangular shape and a slightly vertically long circular (elliptical) inner peripheral shape. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 includes a dish unit 300 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 below the gaming window 101, an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and a door penetrating the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball; and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. , A ball feed unit 580 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and mounted to close the gaming window 101 behind the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 590.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit when viewed from behind, and FIG. FIG.

  As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of the present embodiment has a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner circumference formed in a vertically elongated substantially elliptical shape. A frame base body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the front left and right outer sides of the gaming window 101 on the front of the door frame base body 110, and a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110. And a handle bracket 140 attached to the front lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110 for supporting the handle device 500.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view. Further, a cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not interfere when the side speaker 130 is mounted or removed. It has become.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is made of a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and a lower portion of the gaming window 101 covered by the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be mounted, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably mounted at a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) ), Which is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the fire cover 191. A handle device relay board 192 for relaying the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, and a rear side of the handle device relay board 192 is covered. The door frame is disposed on the side opposite to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192, etc. (right side of the center in the left-right direction (axial support side) in rear view) with the handlebar relay board cover 193 and the center in the left-right direction interposed therebetween. A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and pivotally supported by the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. A wiring holding member 197 for holding a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) for connecting the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of the present example, a reinforcing unit 150 in which a metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like is fixed to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of a synthetic resin, thereby increasing the overall rigidity. In addition, it has sufficient strength to sufficiently support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. 4140, and includes an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In the present example, each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280, the decorative substrates 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a and 432b provided in the operation unit 400, respectively. 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the wire lending unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc., and the wiring code 196 connecting the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. After being gathered and bundled at the position of (support side), it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends rearward, as will be described in detail later, and the main relay terminal plate 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by a synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The substantially elliptical gaming window 101 is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the left and right inner edges of the gaming window 101 are formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, whereas the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. A square notch 101a at the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the pivot side (left side in front view). Are formed. In the door frame base body 110, the upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and the width of the left and right sides are the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. , And the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

  The door frame base main body 110 is, besides the gaming window 101, a speaker mounting portion 111 disposed on both left and right outer sides of a lower side of the gaming window 101 for mounting and fixing the side speakers 130, and a ball feed unit 580. The game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 for the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle mounting for mounting a handle bracket 140 which is inclined obliquely so that a right (open side) end of a front surface which is located at a lower right corner and swells forward when viewed from the front is retracted. A wire passage opening 115 through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114; Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 has a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 below the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in rear view. A board mounting portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (supporting side) for mounting the door frame base substrate 194, and a position closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the left side (open side) of the lower end of the gaming window 101 in rear view (open side). The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 protruding rearward, and the door frame base body 110 have a rearwardly recessed glass unit 590 substantially along the inner circumference of the gaming window 101. The glass unit supporting step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface can be abutted, and the glass unit locking member 190 projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be rotated. Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower side by a predetermined amount, and the door frame protrusion 110c is engaged with an engagement groove 603 of the body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. However, the tool can be prevented from entering by the door frame projection 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and fits into the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3 is provided. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d into the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base body 110 has a plurality of mounting bosses 110e protruding forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, a number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. In the door frame base body 110, a mounting portion 110g for mounting a speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18 and the like) for mounting the side speaker cover 338 are respectively provided at appropriate positions. Is formed.

  Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feed unit mounting concave portion 112 and the substrate mounting portion 118, the lower tray ball supply port 310g in the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 described later and the At a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Further, the door frame base body 110 has a shallow dish-shaped security recess 120 formed on the front side of the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape from the front side is inserted into the security recess 120. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape with a front side opened by bending a metal plate. Accordingly, in order to perform an illegal act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, a hole made by a thin drill or the like from a joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the plate unit 300 is made of metal. It can be prevented by the security member 121, and it is possible to prevent improper conduct.

  Although the detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the center axes is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1 .5m), so that the sound reaches the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. The side speaker 130 mainly outputs sounds in the middle and high frequency range, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, sounds with high stereo feeling can be output.

  The outer periphery of the side speakers 130 is sandwiched between the substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and the speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame is closed. It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is mounted on the mounting portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  The door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape having an open front side, as shown in FIGS. Is provided with a step 195a which is recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending long in the lateral direction, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, and has an I-shaped cross section. , Made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 has a plurality of (in this example, three in each case, upper and lower) holding holes 197a at both upper and lower ends at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction. When the door frame 5 is assembled, the end of the wiring holding member 197 on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 is vertically attached to the rear step portion 195 a of the door frame base board cover 195. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported around the extended axis, and although not shown in detail, the wiring holding member 197 is rotated toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 by the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base board cover 195 can be accommodated in the step portion 195a.

  The wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling with a pair of holding holes 197a vertically arranged with a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and fastening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in a direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. The portion is pushed forward to rotate in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base board cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 toward the main body frame 3 is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the end. Then, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the closed door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively separated from each other. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base board cover 195 (toward the body frame 3). Thereby, the wiring cord 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to the present example, the end of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved so that the free end moves toward the body frame 3. The rear frame is rotatably supported and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles (breakage of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connector, etc.) caused by being caught or pinched.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin. The wiring cord 196 can be prevented from blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent the occurrence of a problem.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is formed between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the door frame 5 cannot be closed or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like as the main body side electric device, and the door side Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, Bundle 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, so that when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled. Since the force can be released, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connector is disconnected. it can. In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197. 2), the wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted through a plurality of through-holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 together with the binding band 198 can be reliably prevented from falling off from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position apart from the side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring 196 is formed by the wiring holding member 197. Since the wiring 196 can be prevented from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding (guidance), the strength and rigidity of the body frame 3 on the side of the door frame 5 supported by the shaft are enhanced. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention against fraudulent acts.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with ridges projecting from both ends in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least to the side along which the wiring 196 extends, the wiring is formed by a pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a favorable state.

  Further, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the main body frame 3 in the wiring 196 is extended. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axis of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the pantograph-like link is formed at the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, the wiring for opening and closing the door frame 5 is formed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, and the like can be made smooth, so that the opening and closing work can be easily performed, and a problem such as a disconnection occurs by reducing an excessive force acting on the wiring 196 or the like. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 extending from the distal end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back at the distal end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame 5 is recessed in the door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 so that the door frame 5 is opened toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base board cover 195. Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and The wiring 196 can be compacted, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is in the closed state, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced as much as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force, an impact force, and the like for opening and closing the door frame 5. Thus, it is possible to surely achieve the function and effect described above. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, the space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having the larger game area 1100 by increasing the size of the game area 1100, and has the large game board 4 and can strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 of the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft from the rear end of the tubular portion 141 to the axis of the tubular portion 141. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction, and a plurality (three in this example) of ridges projecting into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is mounted on the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although not shown, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wire passage opening 115 when attached to the handle attaching portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 of the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three grooves 502a of the handle device 500 match. I have. Accordingly, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which the handle base 502 cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 which is inclined obliquely, so that the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward in front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also inclined obliquely.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back side of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and a door frame base body. 110, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the back side of the open side of the door frame base body 110, And a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and these are formed into a square shape by being mutually fastened with screws or rivets.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be vertically slidable on an upper surface thereof, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are supported by the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 formed on the upper and lower support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is moved relative to the main body frame 3. It can be freely opened and closed.

  Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially equal to the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110, and is formed at the lower long side edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protruding piece 159 which is bent forward (see FIG. 25); and an upper bent protruded piece 160 which is bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view. And a vertically bent protruding piece 161 that is bent rearward at the center of the upper long side edge and extends vertically. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by a lower bent protrusion 159 and an upper bent protrusion 160. The vertically bent protruding piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at a lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent protruding piece 161 is locked by the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction. It can be restricted from moving backward. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101 a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes open-side outer bent protruding pieces 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. And an open-side inner bent protrusion 164. The open-side inner bent protrusion 164 is formed to extend rearward longer than the open-side outer bent protrusion 163 as shown in the drawing. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 is provided at the rear lower portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped support-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at an outer end of a long side thereof and opens outward on the support side (FIG. 108). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 includes bent protruding pieces 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of the longer side.

  The supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported on the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of the upper supporting part 156 and the lower supporting part 158. When an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a bur is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the supporting metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large. Although the act may be easily performed, the strength of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased because the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the supporting-side U-shaped protrusion 166. , The pivot-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. The U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape (FIG. 108), insertion of a tool can be prevented, and only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the security function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 180 is provided with a security function for covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized devices from entering the game board 4. As shown in the figure, the security cover 180 is made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153 of the game board 4, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It has a contact recess 181 formed, and a post-crime prevention projection 182 projecting rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, on both left and right ends of the security cover 180, security rear end protruding pieces 183 projecting rearward along the end shapes thereof are provided, respectively. In addition, in the rear view, the right side (supporting side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183 is configured to extend rearward longer than the opposite side (open side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, a security projection 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, and a left and right side outside the security prevention projection 184. And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end of the mounting member.

  In the security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) is mounted on the plate. By being mounted on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back surface side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although not shown in detail, the security pre-projection piece 184 fits with the outer periphery of the lower portion of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, half of the pivot support side is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and half of the open side is projected forward when the door frame 5 is closed. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool is to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the entry can be prevented by the post-crime prevention protrusion 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the security cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent a ball hitting the glass plate 594 from hitting or returning the guide path portion.

  Thereby, in this example, since the security cover 180 covers the lower outer periphery of the rear side of the glass unit 590 (the game window 101) in the door frame 5, the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are formed from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to insert a highly flexible tool into the pachinko machine and perform an illegal action inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100), the security cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, and Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with a fitting portion 190a that rotatably fits into a locking member mounting portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. A locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is configured to be rotatably supported on the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward on the rear side. The finger is used when operating.

  The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. In addition, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In a state where the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hit ball firing device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decorative unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front by exploding. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  As shown, the right side decorative unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right outer half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 except for the lower part in front view, and the inside is the gaming window 101. It is formed in the shape of an arc along with, and the outside is formed in the shape of a straight line along the perimeter of door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a side inner lens 212 disposed behind the side lens 210, A right side upper decorative board 214 on the rear side of which the plurality of LEDs 214a (full-color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted on the rear side of the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from a substantially vertical center and a side inner side on the lower side A lower right side decorative board 216 on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LED) and 216b (white LED) are mounted on the surface and disposed on the lower side from substantially the center in the vertical direction of the lens 212, and a rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214 The right side mounted on the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the right side upper decorative substrate 214 An upper decorative substrate cover 218 and a right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and is attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the right side lower decorative substrate 216 therebetween. ing.

  The right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in a circumferential direction of the game window 101 on a front surface of the side lens 210 and a side outer cover 202 attached to an upper right corner of the side lens 210. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending about the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side inner lens 206 An inner lens bracket 208 to be attached to the 212 and an upper right speaker 222 to be attached to the upper side inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, the side outer cover 202, the side flash lens 204, the upper side inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the upper side inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surface of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surfaces (front surfaces) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed behind the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, respectively. 216a, 216b and the like cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The front surfaces of the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 are white, and the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like allows the right side decorative unit 200 to efficiently emit light. The decoration substrates 214 and 216 are not so noticeable when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 are respectively connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can emit light.

  As shown, the side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 in a front view, and a left end thereof as a game window 101 in a front view. Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a having a plurality of curved surfaces having a substantially spindle shape, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens portion 210b having a prism surface. As shown, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centered on the lower center portion of the game window 101 in a front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is formed to be recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  In addition, the side lens 210 includes a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. By the side diffusion lens portion 210c, light from the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 can be widely diffused rightward and vertically in the pachinko machine 1. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker in the side lens 210, so that sound from the upper right speaker can be favorably transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on a crest-like portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a and protruding forward. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light by using a wrinkle-shaped portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses. In addition, the perspective can be made to look strange and unclear.

  The right upper decorative board 214 and the right lower decorative board 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a used have relatively large irradiation angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b of the side lenses 210 emit relatively light. Those having a small angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used. Note that the LEDs 214c of the upper right side decorative board 214 are red and green LEDs in this example.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a sound in the middle and high frequency ranges similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion extending obliquely forward and downward at the left and right centers of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view, and on the back side of the upper end of the horn portion, The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side in a front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the present example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 to the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and generates noise for other pachinko machines. It is becoming difficult. In addition, similarly to the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 also has a front surface formed in a wrinkle shape, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed in a crest portion protruding forward in a wrinkle-shaped portion. Thus, light can be irregularly refracted and irregularly reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged to be inserted into the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b which is recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and simulates a rocky surface formed by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210 that has been set. In addition, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the upper right decorative board 214 and the lower right decorative board 216 disposed on the rear side, and can also perform the peripheral lens section 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed from the front by being disassembled. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph.

  As shown, the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating a left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in a front view, and the right side is the gaming window 101 as viewed from the front. It is formed in an arc shape along with the left side and the upper side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a plurality of large window frames 242a extending substantially in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with a width substantially equal to the width of the right side decoration unit 200, and an elliptical shape arranged between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped lower side decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, and two large window frames 244a continuous with the upper side of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and arranged in a row. And a frame-shaped upper side decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  Further, the left side decorative unit 240 includes a side flash lens 246 fitted into the small window frames 242a, 244a of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and a side flash lens 246 on the rear side. And a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a that are supported from behind and are fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side. A plurality of slits 251a which are arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extend in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and have an inner decoration member 251 having a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface; and a rear side of the inner decoration member 251. Bands extending radially around the lower left and right centers of the gaming window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from above substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) mounted on the surface thereof. A substrate 254, a lower side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed below the lower side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256 a (full color LED) and 256 b (white LED) mounted on the surface; A left upper decorative board cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper decorative board 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. Left side lower decorative board cover attached to side lens 250 so as to sandwich lower decorative board 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is provided with an upper left speaker 262 disposed in front of the side inner lens 252 and at the upper right portion in front view, and a transparent upper portion speaker 262 which supports the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the upper right portion of the front of the side inner lens 252. A diffuser formed by an upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of belt-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted into the inner decoration member 251 on the upper right in front view from the rear side and extending radially around the lower left and right centers. And an upper right inner lens 266 having a 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  In the left side decorative unit 240, the lower side decorative frame 242, the upper side decorative frame 244, the left side upper decorative substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. The surface of the decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). The side flash lens 246 has translucency and is entirely formed of a milky synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 (the small window is located in the radial axis direction centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101). Opening frames 242c, 244c penetrating the side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 in a cut-out state are formed on both sides of the frames 242b, 244b), and the small window frames 242b, 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by a side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, the rear side of the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 cannot be viewed from the player side by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the player side through 250a. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251. The light is diffusely refracted by the diffusion part 252a, so that the light passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and is behind the side inner lens 252. The side is not clearly visible. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 disposed behind the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly recognized from the player side.

  The front surfaces of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 are white, and the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like allows the left side decorative unit 240 to efficiently emit light. The decorative boards 254 and 256 are not so noticeable when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The upper left decorative board 254 and the lower left decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each of the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Is emitted as appropriate, so that the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 of the left side decorative unit 240 of the present example extends vertically along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open rear side. The lower side decorative frame 242 includes a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small frame disposed between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A window frame 242b, and an opening frame 242c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the gaming window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1), penetrating in the front-rear direction, and notched to the side, are provided. Is formed.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Are fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

  Further, the upper side decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 has a substantially triangular form in front view, which is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is formed in a U-shaped cross section with an open side. The upper side decorative frame 244 includes two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b, and an opening frame 244c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the gaming window 101 side and outside the pachinko machine 1), penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is cut out to the side surface, and is formed of synthetic resin. ing.

  The upper side decorative frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decorative frame 244 can form a peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and an outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The upper side decorative frame 244 forms a design that is continuous with the lower side decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

  In this example, the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a, 244a, the small window frames 242b, 244b, and the opening frames 242c, 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 appear to be emphasized.

  The side lens 250 in the left side decorative unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244, and has a size extending to the left side and the upper side of the game window 101 from the center to the left side. I have. The side lens 250 has a peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and a concave shape rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens part 250b in which a side flash lens 246 is disposed on the front side. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one smoothly curved surface, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Further, the inner decoration member 251 of the left side decoration unit 240 is provided behind the peripheral lens portions 250a of the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the drawing, the inner decorative member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is also concentric with the center of the gaming window 101 in the width direction. There are several. The inner decorative member 251 has a front surface on which a plurality of slits 251 a are formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250. Note that the inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and is visible from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. I have. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decoration member 251 is inserted from the rear side into each of the inner decoration members 251. The diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 has a plurality of belt-like lenses extending radially around the center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface. The decoration member 251 is configured to intersect (substantially orthogonal) to the direction in which the slit 251a extends.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The rear side is not clearly visible through the portion 252a. As shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusing portions 252a, and the light from the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  The left upper decorative board 254 and the left lower decorative board 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and have a larger size than the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have relatively wide irradiation angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °). LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246). 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 6 °). °) it is used.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a sound in the middle and high frequency ranges similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. I have. The upper speaker bracket 264 supporting the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn (not shown) projecting obliquely forward and downward at the left and right centers of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed via a protective plate 268 behind the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the upper left speaker 262 is not seen from the player side in front view. It has become. In addition, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent mischief by the upper left speaker 262 and breakage of the cone of the upper left speaker 262 to insert an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. Has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 to a player below, so that it is difficult for other pachinko machines to make noise.

  Next, a description will be given of a characteristic light emission effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of the present example. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and includes a side lens 250 having a curved transparent peripheral lens part 250a, and a rear lens part 250a disposed on the rear side and on the surface. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a having a metal glossy plating layer and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and extending in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends, which is disposed on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251; A left inner upper decorative substrate 254 and a lower left lower decorative substrate 256 having a side inner lens 252 provided with a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of belt-shaped lenses, and a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a mounted on the rear side of the side inner lens 252; (See FIG. 35 and the like). Accordingly, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252, and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. Irradiation is performed from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 to the player side so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated.

  By the way, the light irradiated forward (to the side of the side lens 250) through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 is partially transmitted to the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, light reflected toward the inner decorative member 251 on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is transmitted to the surface of the inner decorative member 251. At the (front), the light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, so that the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear side) converges, and the light reflected on the outer side (front side) is diffused, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a receives direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and peripheral light. The indirect light reflected on the front surface of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is applied to the shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused and intersected by the diffusing portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252 in a stripe shape with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a. (Substantially orthogonal) are diffused. Therefore, a plurality of striped lights having different shadings are radiated (projected) to the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 so as to be longer than the width of the slit 251a and extend in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends. As a result, a fantastic light-emitting decoration with a perspective can be provided (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as viewed from the rear after being disassembled.

  As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and is located between the upper edges of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 on the central side. It is attached between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b that extends elongated from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right, and becomes thinner toward the tip. A front decoration member 281 having a frame-shaped lower extension frame 281c extending from the lower portion of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becoming thinner toward the front end, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower portion arranged behind the front decoration member 281. A light-transmitting upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a surface disposed behind the upper central lens 284. A plate-shaped diffusion lens 285 on which a plurality of fine prisms are formed; an annular lens support member 286 which holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282; and a rear side of the lens support member 286 And a light-shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286; and a light-shielding member 287 disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light-shielding member 287. A plurality of LEDs 288a, and an upper central decorative board 288 having a plurality of LEDs 288b disposed at positions corresponding to the outside of the cylindrical portion 287a mounted on the front surface.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light blocking member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289 and arranged on the front surface. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a is mounted, the board cover 291 which covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290 and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 289, and which is mounted on the lower rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends rearward. A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 which is attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extends rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281; And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the board cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a cutout 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295, a plate-shaped lid member 296 for closing the cutout portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 attached to the right side of the unit base 289 in a front view and formed into a predetermined shape are provided. .

  In the upper decoration unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, and the front decoration member 281 shines with light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central annular lens portion 282b facing the center frame 281a of the front decoration member 281 at the outer periphery of the through hole 282a, and an upper extension in the front decoration member 281. A frame 281b and an extension frame lens portion 282c facing inside the frames of the lower extension frame 281c. The upper lens 282 has a plurality of belt-shaped lenses radially extending on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b arranged in the circumferential direction, and the center of the through-hole 282a on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. Thus, the light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms and the band-shaped lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, and a plurality of concentric lenses on the rear side. Is invisible to the public.

  In the upper central decorative board 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are each a full-color LED, and the upper central lens 284 and the central frame 281a in the front decorative member 281 are provided. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 and the outer periphery thereof can be separately illuminated. Further, in the upper side decorative board 290 of the upper decorative unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are each a full-color LED, and these LEDs 290a are connected to the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the insides of the frames. The upper side decorative board 290 can emit light and decorate the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281 by appropriately emitting the LED 290a.

[1-2E. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the plate unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the dish frame unit at the portion of the door frame at the ball lending unit.

  The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls dispensed from a prize ball device 740 described later, and a game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hit ball firing device 650 described later via a ball feed unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-shaped plate unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate main body 312 fixed to substantially the center of the front surface and opened upward and rearward, and the left side (the pivot side) in front view swells greatly forward. An upper plate upper panel 314 that is formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward when viewed, an upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and an upper plate front An upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314, and a right upper portion of the upper plate upper panel 314 that is continuous with a right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316. A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  The plate unit 300 is mounted on the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left and right center to the lower surface on the right side and has a plate-shaped substrate mounting base 320 on which a plurality of fine prisms are formed, and is mounted below the substrate mounting base 320. And an upper plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be light-emitting decorated.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 below the upper plate main body 312 and is open at the top and the rear. A dish-shaped lower dish main body 324 formed so as to become lower as it goes forward, and is fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish main body 324, and the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is bulged forward substantially in the same manner as the lower dish body 324, and the front end is left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000 described later at a portion that covers the lower front end of the lower plate main body 324 and extends rightward in front view. A lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 to the left and right center. A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  The plate unit 300 also includes a lower plate upper left side cover 332 that extends obliquely and covers the left front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and is disposed at the lower end of the lower plate left upper side cover 332. A lower cover left lower side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate in which the opening 334a of the lower plate left lower side cover 334 is closed from the rear side to allow sound to pass therethrough, and protection. A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left lower side cover 334. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered with the upper plate front decorative member 316.

  In addition, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left cover 332 are designed in design. A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and formed in a continuous shape, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338; And a cover body 339 having a disc-like shape and a plurality of holes that are gently curved so as to close the 338a from the rear side and swell toward the front side.

  In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 339 is not easily deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected. The side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

  Further, in the plate unit 300, an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 to pull out game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for pulling down the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 and a lower unit upper portion on the left side when viewed from the front of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the upper plate main body 312, the upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the lower plate main body 324, the lower plate top plate 326, the lower plate cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on an upper edge extending in the left-right direction. Provided. A ball lending unit mounting portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a and penetrates in the front-rear direction to mount the ball lending unit 360. The dish unit base 310 is disposed below the ball lending unit attachment part 310b (near the upper left corner in front view) and has a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. An upper tray ball discharge port 310d which extends in the front-rear direction below and below the right end of the decorative portion 310a in the front-rear direction below the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310); A pair of lower plate support portions 310e, which are disposed immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c, protrude forward and have the same upper surface, are provided. The upper bowl discharge port 310d is formed continuously up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower bowl support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower plate support portions 310e, is fitted with the lower ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and has a horizontally long rectangular lower plate support formed in a front view. It includes a groove 310f, and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed at a lower portion on the right side of the center of a portion surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h that extends rearward so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an opening side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. A notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size that allows a game ball to pass therethrough.

  An upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the cutout portions 101a and 162 of the door frame base body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The first sphere outlet 544a of the unit 540 is communicated with. At the front end of the upper dish ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends long in the right direction as viewed from the front and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in a front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. Is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 through the foul cover unit 540, Since it is impossible to linearly enter the upper plate 301 forward from the upper plate supply port 310c, the dispensed game balls contact the game balls having the front side of the upper plate supply port 310c closed and roll. The direction is changed, guided so as to roll in the guide recess 310j rightward in front view, and discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game balls close the front of the upper plate supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game balls by hand. Even so, it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling troublesome in storing the game balls in the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by focusing the player on the operation of hitting the game ball or the game with the hit game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Is available.

  The upper bowl discharging port 310d of the bowl unit base 310 is connected to the opening 344a of the upper bowl removing base 344 of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 through the door. Further, in the lower counter ball supply port 310g, the lower counter ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower counter ball supply gutter 310h is connected to the upper counter ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removing passage 344c of the upper ball removing base 344.

  In addition, in this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower tray ball supply port 310g is provided with an opening 310k that expands leftward when viewed from the front. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early occurrence of ball clogging in the lower dish ball supply port 310g due to game balls in the lower dish 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower dish ball supply port 310g. The balls can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is entirely lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. I have. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 has a rear end on the pivot side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310 and a rear end on the open side in the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls that are formed so as to be located near the vertical intermediate position, respectively, and that are supplied to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) from the upper plate ball supply port 310c are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate main body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can be in contact with the game ball at the rear end of the bottom surface from the center in the left-right direction to the open side. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed), so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 such that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 projects forward, and is located outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper ball removing button 341 to be described later penetrates vertically. The upper plate upper panel 314 has a front end formed in a stepped shape lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c formed in a stepped shape lower than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position on the front side of the upper plate main body 312 at the center in the left-right direction and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later. I have.

  The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate front decorative member 316 has a smooth shape on the left side and a plurality of curved surfaces curved in the shape of a spindle on the right side, while the left side is formed from a position closer to the right in the center in the left-right direction. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Although a detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate front decorative member 316 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the right rear surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and can diffuse light erratically. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and has a surface provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster. ing. Thus, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, while the upper plate upper inner decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side. The part seen through is seen from the player side as unclear and the sense of distance is uncertain.

  The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is formed by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces like the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316. In addition to being formed in a shape integral with the right side portion, the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of an upper tray ball removing button 341 described later. Further, the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface) so that light can be irregularly refracted and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. I have. Note that an upper plate decorative board 322 is disposed behind the right side of the upper plate decorative member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is turned on. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can emit light as appropriate.

  The lower plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed in a fan shape in a plan view and a rear end formed linearly in the left-right direction and a substantially center of an upper surface being lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from a front end and a side end excluding a rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is lower on the front side and higher on the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

  In the lower plate main body 324, the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. In addition, the lower plate hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and has a silver-plated layer having a metallic appearance (a matte state such as sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower plate side cover 330 has a plate-like portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  The lower plate upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The lower plate left lower cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a red metallic luster on its surface. Is provided. The opening 334a of the lower plate left lower cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of a speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 described later so that sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left cover 334 is a punched metal having a plurality of holes formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein.

  In the plate unit 300 of this example, the bottom surface except for the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower cover 334, and the lower plate side cover 330, the lower plate left lower cover 334, and Is closed by a lower bowl removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper bowl removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl removing button 341 and an upper bowl removing button 341 which are attached to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper upper panel 314 so as to be able to move up and down. The operation piece 342 which is moved up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removal button 341 to be supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310, and the actuation piece 342 is operably (rotatably) supported and the dish unit base 310 is supported. And a contact piece that slides up and down by the up and down movement of an operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and that comes into contact with an operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 in a ball feed unit 580 described later. An upper plate ball removing slider 343 which is provided on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 and includes an upper plate ball removing slider 34; The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the operation piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper countersunk button 341 so that the upper countersunk button 341 is located at the upper moving end is omitted. It is urged upward by a coil spring. In addition, the upper dish removing slider 343 is urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish removing slider 343 and the upper dish removing base 344.

  The upper bowl removing base 344 of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 closes the upper bowl discharging port 310d of the bowl unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper bowl discharging port 310d to open forward 344a (FIG. 43), and a ball guiding flow path 344b (FIGS. 42 and FIG. 42) that guides a game ball that has communicated with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper bowl removing base 344 and that has passed through the opening 344a, and then guides the game ball backward. 44), extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, and then extends substantially along the lower side of the upper bowl removing base 344 toward the right side (axial support side) end in rear view. And a ball removal channel 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  The opening 344a communicates with the upper bowl discharging port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guiding flow path 344b that communicates with the opening 344a is formed of the ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the ball feeding unit 580 is provided. It can be supplied to.

  The upper end of the ball removing channel 344c of the upper bowl removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivot side communicates with the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 can be used. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower portion of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by an upper ball removing channel cover 345.

  When the upper counter-ball-pulling button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper counter-ball-pulling mechanism 340 slides the upper counter-ball-pulling slider 343 downward, and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. Then, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 from the upper plate discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate extraction base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. The ball is then discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball drain channel 344c of the upper ball drain base 344, and from the lower ball feed 310g to the lower tray 302 via the lower ball feed gutter 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper counter ball removing slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by a coil spring. Even if the game ball is supplied vigorously onto the partition 581a, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that urges the slider 343 through the operating rod 583c. It is possible to prevent the game balls from being damaged and to prevent the game balls from bouncing off at the partition 583a.

  The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 is disposed between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish left lower cover 334 below the lower dish main body 324 and forms a bottom central portion of the dish unit 300. A punching base 351, a plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball extracting base 351 and capable of opening and closing a lower dish ball extracting hole 324 b of the lower dish main body 324, and a rotating shutter 352. And a lower plate removing slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower plate removing base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate removing button 354 attached to the front end of the lower plate removing slider 353. I have.

  The lower bowl removing base 351 includes a base bowl removing hole 351a vertically penetrating at a position facing the lower bowl removing hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower countersunk ball hole 324b, and a shutter ball extracting hole disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in a vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower countersunk ball holes 324b. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring 356 so as to be at a position for closing the lower countersunk hole 324b and the base ball extracting hole 351a with respect to the lower countersunk hole base 351. .

  Although not shown in detail, the opening / closing shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin that can be brought into contact with the lower plate ball removing slider 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b move rearward by the lower plate removing slider 353, and the lower plate removing slider 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring 356. You can do it.

  Also, the lower ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower bowl removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower countersunk ball removing slider 353 at a predetermined position is further provided to hold the slider 353 at the predetermined position.

  In a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the like, the lower plate ball removing button 350 moves to the front end in the closed state. In this state, the lower plate hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, game balls can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower ball pull-out button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower ball pull-out button 354 and the lower ball pull-out slider 353 slide rearward, and the lower plate pull-out slider 353 is opened and closed by sliding backward. The shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter hole 352b move rearward against the urging force of the coil spring 356.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps the lower ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and then the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower ball hole 352b. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged below the plate unit 300 via the lower plate ball hole 324b. When the lower ball removing slider 353 moves backward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate removing slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower ball removing slider 353 is locked (held), the lower ball removing button 354 is kept in the open state in which the lower ball removing button 354 is retracted backward, and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is connected to the lower ball removing hole 352b. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate 302 is not held down by holding the lower plate ball release button 354 in a state of being aligned with the hole 3324b.

  On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower bowl removing hole 324b, when the lower bowl removing button 354 that has been retracted is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower bowl removing slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower bowl removing slide 353 is released. The ball-pull slide 353 can slide, and the opening / closing shutter 352 in which the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in a direction to close the lower plate ball hole 324b, the closing portion 352a is urged by the urging force. It turns in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the slide 353 for pulling out the lower platen ball slides forward, the closing portion 352a closes the hole 324b for lowering the platen ball, and the button 354 for lowering the platen ball is pressed down. It returns to the closed position substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, so that game balls can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower bowl removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

  The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display section 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and presses a ball lending button 361 to place a predetermined number of game balls in the plate unit 300. Can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash or the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the borrowed amount is returned. I have. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball lending unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decoration portion 310a at the upper end of the plate unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  More specifically, the ball lending unit 360 includes a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the remaining lending display unit 363, a lending remaining display unit 363 that is disposed behind the front cover 365, and has a lending button 361. And a ball lending unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the return button 362 is attached, and a rear side of the ball lending unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball lending unit board 366. And a rear cover 367 which is attached to the rear cover. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball lending unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 to which the ball lending unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362, and is formed between the button openings 310m. A transparent front cover 365 that includes a rectangular display opening 310n closed by the cover 365 and protrusions 310o formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and protruding forward, respectively, and closing the display opening 310n. , The remaining lending display portion 363 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protruding portion 310o of the plate unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

  As shown in the drawing, the ball-lending unit 360 of this example has the ball-lending unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate supply port 310c, and has a front surface. It is arranged to face. In the ball lending unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball lending button 361. In this example, the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362 are colored differently from the plate unit base 310 (ball lending unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362.

  Further, the ball lending unit 360 includes a protruding portion 310o that protrudes forward (toward the player) from the outer periphery of the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301, Since the hand touches the protrusion 310o before the hand touches the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of the 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and the pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage plates can be used. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new type of pachinko machine) can be reminiscent of a pachinko machine 1 (a new type of pachinko machine) so that anxiety and the like given to a player can be reduced and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played. Has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit when the pressing operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and includes a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player. And an operation unit 405. The operation unit 405 can receive an operation of the player according to a game state, and can operate the dial operation unit 401. , So that the user can also participate in the effects during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to a lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 meshing with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416 a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, It has a spring 418 that urges upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached to the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covers the lower surfaces of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the plate unit 300; and a plating having a silver metallic luster on the surface, which is disposed above the cover main body 426 and formed in a predetermined shape. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylindrical portion 401c of the dial operation unit 401 can pass.

  Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a which is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 and the inner cylinder 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass. A dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of a circle, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. 432b, a pressing detection sensor 432c for detecting operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration board 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation section holding member 416 by the board holding claws 416g of the operation section holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of the present example is formed of a translucent material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder 401a extending in the up-down direction, and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extension surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a tubular shape, and being shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a; And a flange portion 401d extending annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d in the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a in the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operating section 401 includes a connection locking section (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder section 401a. 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a in the center direction at a position lower by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylinder 401a. Although details will be described later, the protrusion 401 f can be brought into contact with the step 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation section 405, and the step 407 a of the button cap 407 The contact with the portion 401f can prevent the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) from further immersing into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the drawing, the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lower as going toward the center of the dial operating portion 401. The contact surfaces are large when they come into contact with each other. Thereby, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  The pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a closed upper end, and has a button body 406 having a bottomed cylindrical shape, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, a button cap 407, A cap inner 408 which is arranged inside the 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 is provided. The button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom is narrowed downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end face of the truncated cone, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b extending downward from the outer peripheral lower part and having a lower end protruding outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis. By locking with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is prevented so that the button main body 406 does not fall out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) does not rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. In addition, a predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap causes the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  In addition, the button body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a position different from the lower part of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration board 432. The pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (the pressing operation section 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction is smaller than an upper diameter, and a step portion 407a is provided between the upper and lower sides. Are formed. The button cap 407 (pressing section 405) has a lower portion below the step portion 407a and a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and a portion above the step portion 407a has a dial operating portion. The diameter of the inner tube 401 is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner tube 401a, and is larger than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder 401a from above the dial operation unit 401, the step 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. The button cap 407 (pressing section 405) cannot be immersed further into the inner cylinder section 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on the outer periphery of the annular shape. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular sliding surface on the lower surface that abuts the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 slides and rotates substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. I can do it.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b extending upward from a position facing the upper end and protruding inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking unit 401e of the inner cylinder 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at a constant interval in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432, and details of the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c will be described later. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operating portion 401, can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detecting piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear meshing with the driven gear 410 as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to be able to rotate integrally with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control a rotation direction, a rotation speed, and a rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 drives the drive gear 412 to rotate via a rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operating motor 401 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) forward and reverse by the dial drive motor 414 in small increments. In addition, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for each predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 can be clicked. The feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a cylindrical shape and is inside. A button support tube 416b that slidably supports the button in a vertical direction, and a locking protrusion 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom inside the button support tube 416b and lockable with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and 50), and a through hole 416c that passes light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration board 432 through the center of the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b and sends the light to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 that vertically penetrates the bottom outside the button support cylinder 416 b and is attached to the button decoration substrate 432. An opening 416d through which the holes 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e penetrating vertically through the bottom of the button support tube 416b, and which the pressing detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration board 432 desires from above, and downward from below. A pair of substrate holding claws 416 g for locking and holding the extended button decorative substrate 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation unit holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b, and forms a predetermined gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and locks the same. It further includes a plurality of abutting portions capable of abutting on the claw 406b. With this contact portion, the button body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) can rotate within a predetermined angle range, and does not rotate around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420 and positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432 are appropriately positioned. It is provided in.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be capable of dynamic rotation. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be supported via the button main body 406 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. . A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is urged upward.

  The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is unlikely to be damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit hard. The base member 420 allows the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 to be fitted therein and is recessed upward, and the base member 420 vertically penetrates the bottom (ceiling) of the lower recess 420b. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is arranged on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and which is recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. Have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower concave portion 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower concave portion 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) legs 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the respective legs 420e are provided.

  Further, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover body 426 disposed above and outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located above a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of substrate mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative substrate 430 protruding therefrom. Further, although detailed description is omitted for the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning each member, mounting holes, and the like are formed at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

  The operating member holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower concave portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from below into the central opening 420a. Is screwed from above into the operation section holding member 416 through the ceiling of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation section holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly higher than the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower concave portion 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper concave portion 420c in a state where the operating portion holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and arranged in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. , And the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with its lower part opened, and has an opening 422a on the top plate having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder part 401c of the dial operation part 401 can pass and the flange part 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and is provided with engaging claws 422b projecting downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper surface is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c extending downward from the outer periphery of one of the short-axis directions (the front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) (the front side in the pachinko machine 1) and having a lower end protruding outward. It has. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

  The upper cover 422 has a base member 420 on which an operation part holding member 416, a driven gear 410, a dial decoration board 430, a dial member 401, and the like are attached. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the dial operating part 401 can be prevented from being pulled out upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape whose upper side is open, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422, and a leg portion of the base member 420 at a predetermined position on the bottom upper surface. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 has an engaging portion 424b at an upper portion of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1) which can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422. The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown, the cover main body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a penetrating vertically in the center and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extending outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a to attach the operation unit to the plate unit 300. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of the present example is configured to be attached to the plate unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is mounted with the lower surface slightly floating (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) than the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. The cover main body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when the user presses or hits the button.

  In this operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300 with a predetermined screw. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are mounted on the upper surface of the cover body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has the circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432 has a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 equal to 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detecting piece 410 in the circumferential direction. It has been. As a result, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs between the detection and non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is performed. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detecting piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Although details will be described later, the operation unit 400 of the present example can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial driving motor 414. . In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step-by-step with the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, The rotation can be assisted, prevented from rotating intentionally, and a click can be given to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can cause the dial operation unit 401 to vibrate by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button unit Since the pressing operation unit 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot enter into the inner cylindrical portion 401e any more, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed through the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. The pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, so that it is hard to break.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment gradually rotates the dial drive motor 414 in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed so that the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projection portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be caused to vibrate together with the dial operation unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 surprises the player and allows the player to enjoy a game or an effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed by the player are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, even if the player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, the operation unit 400 can be prevented from being damaged, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely provided to the player. In addition to being able to be operated, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game by making the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 fun. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the ring-shaped dial operation unit 401, and if the user tries to hit the pressing operation unit 405 strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is likely to hit, too. The force for tapping 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, so that the impact of the tapping is prevented from being concentrated and the operation unit 400 and the plate unit 300 are prevented from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 withstand strong blows, and to allow the player to freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. The operability of the 405 can be improved, and the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, thereby preventing the interest in the game from being reduced. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. As described above, the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300, and when the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with an impact or a load is applied. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 contacts the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact or a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is in contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the plate unit 300) causes an impact. Since the load can be received, it is possible to disperse the impact and the like from the operation units 401 and 405 to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like, and to reduce the impact resistance and the load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300. Can be enhanced.

  Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of downwardly projecting legs 420e at positions away from the positions where the operation units 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are attached to the operation unit of the plate unit 300. Even if an impact from the operating portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by abutting against the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not disposed immediately below the impact, so that the operating portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. Is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the plate unit 300. The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 is held by the operating unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operating unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in a plan view. Even if the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 is disengaged from the base member 420 and moves downward when the operation unit 401 is hit hard from above, the dial operation unit 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420. The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and the fall of the dial operation unit 401 can be favorably prevented.

  Furthermore, since the dial operating unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operating unit 401 that rotates (rotationally drives including vibration) without permission. With this, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the effects of the operation units 401 and 405, and can entertain the player. In addition, by appropriately driving the dial operation unit 401 by the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit The effect using the 401 (pressing operation unit 405) can be made more varied and hard to get tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the driving gear 412, and the position of the rotating shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is likely to be adjusted by the dial operating unit 401 (the driven gear). Since the position of the rotation axis can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotation axis of 410), even if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation section 401. The direct drive motor 414 can be prevented from being directly applied, and the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even when the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from the 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 can It is possible to reliably prevent the temperature from dropping below 420. Further, since the dial operating section 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating section 401 and the operating section holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operating section 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation section holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing an impact or a load from the operation section.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating and driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Even if the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite the fact that the dial drive motor 414 is rotationally driven, even if the amount of heat generated by the excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and radiated through the base member 420, so that it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from malfunctioning due to overheating, and to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being overheated. Can withstand high loads. , It is possible to sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, it is provided with rotation detecting sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rotation of the dial operating unit 401 and a pressing detecting sensor 432c for detecting pressing of the pressing operating unit 405. Since the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player can be detected, it is possible to perform an effect in accordance with the operation of the player based on the detection signal. It is possible to provide an effect with a bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 for decorating the operation units 401 and 405 with light are provided. Since the operation units 401 and 405 can be decorated with light, the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation section 405 and the protruding section 401f of the dial operation section 401 are in contact with each other. Is pressed, the dial operating unit 401 is repeatedly rotated forward and backward within a predetermined angle range by the dial driving motor 414 and vibrated, so that the dial operating unit 401 is in contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 via the stepped portion 407a. The pressing operation section 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, it is possible to give the player an operational feeling for the pressing operation 405, and to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought to have not moved without permission, and something good. It is possible to make the user think that there is a chance, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move without permission, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. The operation unit 400 can be easily operated and the operation unit 400 can be positively operated by the player, and the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed, thereby reducing the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This makes it possible to distribute the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 also to the dial operation unit 401 side even when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, so that the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is hit hard, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged, thereby preventing the game from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the interest of the player from playing the game from decreasing due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation portion 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the up-down direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation portion 405, the dial driving is performed. Even when the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to reliably recognize the respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400, and to guide the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The character "PUSH" is not turned or tilted greatly, so that the player can easily read the character. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operating portion 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner circumference of the inner cylindrical portion 401a to the axial center side, and has a smaller diameter on the outer circumferential surface of the pressing operating portion 405 than a predetermined vertical position. Since the step portion 407a formed by the step 407 is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operating portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible to the upper end of the operation unit 400. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign substances such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation section 401 to rotate or to press the pressing operation section 405 due to the entry of foreign substances. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, a contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling of being inclined (a position deviated to the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the pressing operation unit 405 is surely brought into contact with the dial operation unit 401. Thus, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the press operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are in annular contact, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 and The impact resistance can be further improved.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 via the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. Further, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially dispersed outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing concentration of the load, and preventing the operation unit 400 from withstanding the load. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased. The occurrence of malfunctions during the game is reduced as much as possible, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of normal rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 can be simply stopped at a predetermined position as well as simply rotated, and can be switched between normal rotation and reverse rotation. The operation unit 400 (sling machine 1) that can easily vibrate by repeating the operation and has the above-described effects can be embodied reliably.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 provided with the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 are high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a strong blow to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation section 405), and it is possible to easily entertain an effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 51 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment includes a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the dish outer cover 334 of the dish unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges round in the direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a front face of the handle body 504. A front end cover 506 which is arranged and is fixed to the handle base 502 and cooperates with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the handle main body rear 504.

  Further, the handle device 500 has an inner base 508 attached to the front side of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle body 504, and a rear end and a front end rotatably supported by the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506. A shaft member 510 rotatable integrally with the shaft 504 and having a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 meshing with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a rotatable integrally with the transmission gear 511. And a rotation position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Further, the handle device 500 has one end side attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 via the transmission gear 511 in a clockwise direction in a front view. An auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 mounted on the rear side of the inner base 508, and a touch stop sensor 516 mounted on the rear surface of the inner base 508 at different positions, A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported to actuate the firing stop switch 518, and one end is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end is attached to the handle main body 504, so that the handle main body 504 is in the initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). End of rotation in the direction of A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present embodiment has a form in which a front end is opened and a rear end portion which extends rearward in a cylindrical shape from a front end portion which is rounded and bulged rearward is formed. Three grooves 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. Are located. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 such that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis is formed in the handle body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. Thus, the rotation range of the handle main body 504 is restricted by the circumferential end of the slit 504a of the handle main body 504 abutting on the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506.

  In the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 504b projecting rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coil-shaped handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is urged by a handle return spring 522 attached at one end to the handle base 502 so as to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

  The handle device 500 of the present example is configured to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via a handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face outward (open side) when viewed from above when viewed from above. The device 500 is also inclined outwardly in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the device 500 is inclined with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1 so as to be directed outward of the pachinko machine 1). 5 is attached and fixed. Thus, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and can easily perform the rotation operation without a sense of strangeness in the rotation operation.

  In the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor. When the handle body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is transmitted via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hit ball firing device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle main body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the player hits the game ball. Is available. In other words, even if the player attempts to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven, and the player cannot drive the game ball. It is possible to prevent a player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  When the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 161) operates the firing solenoid 654. The rotation drive is stopped. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, the operation before the single-shot button 520 is operated is released. A game ball can be fired at the driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle main body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then, based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512, the firing control unit 4120 Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball firing device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 are connected to the door as in a conventional pachinko machine. When the frame 5 is closed, there is no need to provide a mechanical (eg, a joint unit) mechanism so that the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, so that the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. As well as eliminating the occurrence of malfunctions in the joint unit, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player due to a malfunction of the game ball being hit. Thereby making it possible.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the door cover frame in a disassembled state as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the door cover frame as viewed in a disassembled state. FIG. 53 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

  The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hit ball firing device 650. In spite of this, game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the inside of the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of flow paths for game balls therein, and a front cover 544 for closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 is disposed at the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the cover base communicates with the first ball inlet. A first ball passage 542b that spreads rightward in front view toward the front end of 542, a second ball inlet 542c that is arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball inlet 542a; A second ball inlet 542c is provided inside the cover base 542, which communicates with the second ball passage 542d and extends downward and is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower right corner in front view. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are connected to the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542 has a portion that extends in the left-right direction along the lower end and has a height that is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is disposed substantially at the upper center in the left-right direction and is open to the upper side with a foul ball inlet 542e, and can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e to guide game balls to an upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operating piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542 g contacts the spherical contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The opening / closing shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, and communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540 to penetrate in the front-rear direction. And a second ball outlet 544b disposed at the lower right corner in front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is configured to be connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h in the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present embodiment transfers the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet 542b. 544a can be supplied to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 transfers the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c to the second ball outlet 542d through the second ball passage 542d. The lower plate 302 can be supplied from 544b to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

  Further, although details will be described later, when foul cover unit 540 is in a state where door frame 5 is closed with respect to main body frame 3, foul ball inlet 542 e is positioned below foul space 626 of main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball firing device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls down in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game balls received at foul ball inlet 542e from second ball outlet 544b to lower plate 302 of plate unit 300 through foul ball passage 542f and second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and is swingably movable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. A rocking member 548 pivotally supported by the first and second sensors, a full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting rocking of the rocking member 548, and a spring for urging the rocking member 548 in a direction in which the full tank detection sensor 550 is in a non-detection state. 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported by the cover base 542 and an upper end that rotates leftward in a front view. In such a state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is urged by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a projecting outward on a side surface opposite to the storage space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of accommodation space 546 in second ball passage 542d, a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of cover base 542 in rear view, respectively. , So that static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to the distribution of game balls can be removed.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540, Even if the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the ball stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 is closed. When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, game balls flow to the full tank passage 775 through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). From the full tank outlet 776, the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544 It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  Then, when the inside of the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 becomes full of game balls, the game balls cannot come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and have stayed in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and many game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the stored pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 moves to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 161) stops paying out the game balls from the prize ball unit 700 and plays the game. The user is notified of urging the player to discharge the game balls in the plate unit 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is performed. The detection is not performed, and the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2I. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 54A is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and FIG. 54B is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. FIG. 55 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 56 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit in a disassembled state as viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit in a rear case with the rear case removed. Further, FIG. 57 (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front. (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also play the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110, and are fed in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, a rear end of the front cover 581 closed, and a front opened. A rear cover 582 having a hit box supply port 582a for supplying a game ball which has a box shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction and penetrates from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball firing device 650, a rear cover 582 and a front cover 581, which is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and partitions the entrance 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b behind the front cover 581. a, and the game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. The ball feeding member 584 is rotatably supported around the axis. The ball feeding solenoid 585 rotates the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, a ball feed member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and a ball punching member 583 is provided on the left side of the ball feed member 584, and a ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the right side thereof. Are located.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feed unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 described later extends forward from 581c. The front cover 581 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding flow path 344b in the upper bowl removing base 344. It is formed so as to close.

  In addition, the ball removing member 583 has a partition part 583a below the entrance 581a and between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b, the upper surface of which is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584, and a partition part 583a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584 and bends in a V-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, with the lower end extending around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c protruding forward from an upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110. The upper end of the abutment piece 343a of the upper dish removing slider 343 of the upper dish removing mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is contacted via 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. The ball holder 584b includes a spherical holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the spherical holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the rotation axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 to move the rod portion 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis in the left-right direction. ing.

  The ball feeding member 584 is configured such that the blocking portion 584a faces the partitioning portion 583a and the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a at the same time as the supply position, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partitioning portion 583a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is at the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650, and enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the ball stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partitioning portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the rod portion 584c side closes the hit ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  The ball feed unit 580 is moved forward and backward by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed action rod 586 which swings up and down. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates about the axis extending in the vertical direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about the axis that extends in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extending in the left-right direction, and a side of the engagement part 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. A shaft 587b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582; a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

  The ball feed unit 580 of the present example transmits the movement of the ball feed operation rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves up and down by the ball feed operation rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587, so that a ball feed member is provided. 584 can be rotated. When the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the ball-feeding operation rod 586 is separated from the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 585 and the tip that swings is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is located at the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball firing device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball pulling member 583 rotatably supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise in front view by the weight portion 583c. When the operating rod 583c protruding forward abuts on the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removing slider 343 in the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 of the tray unit 300, the rotation thereof is restricted. In normal times, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that game balls do not enter the ball outlet 581b. Then, when the player presses down the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300, the upper tray ball removing slider 343 slides down together with the contact piece 343a to make contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  As described above, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the abutting piece 343a of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340, the bowl removing member 583 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the entrance is formed by the partition 583a. The partition between the ball opening 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered through the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball discharging channel 344c of the upper plate ball discharging base 344 of the plate unit 300. Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 contacts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is supplied vigorously onto the partitioning portion 581a. In addition, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, so that the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be used. The partition 583a can be prevented from bouncing off.

  In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56 (B) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582 is formed. At the same time, a fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feed unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 582 a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, this fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape having a horizontally long overall outer diameter in a rear view, and is located on the opposite side from a substantially center in the up-down direction at the tip on the left side in the rear view. The upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, which are vertically divided by a dividing line 588a extending toward the base end side (right side) of the upper piece 588b, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c. By bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b away from each other in the vertical direction (rearward) with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 588, V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c. It has a U-shaped cut portion 588d, and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tip of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

  As shown in the figure, as shown in the figure, the cutting portion 588d is formed by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b so that the distal end (left end in rear view) of the upper piece 588b moves rearward. It is formed in a V-shape in plan view, and a wire Iw attached to an incorrect game ball I is inserted into the V-shape. The cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece 588b and the upper side of the lower piece 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed as follows.

  Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It has become. In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582, as shown in the drawing, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582. Is formed in a form that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the same time as the part where the is formed and communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I to which the wire rod Iw is attached is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the hit ball launching device 650, and the illegal game ball I is transferred by the hit ball launch device 650 to the game area of the game board 4. When the player hits the ball 1100 into the inside, the illegal game ball I fired by the ball shooting device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the shooting rail 660 in front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Through the game area 1100. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire Iw is different from the movement locus of the illegal game ball I, Within the route within the shortest distance. Accordingly, the wire rod Iw extending from the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball firing device 650 side through the hitting ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 causes the game ball I to move to the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). Thus, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a so as to move on the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to a portion extending to the right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a (inside the mounting concave portion 582b) is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 disposed at that position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled rightward in rear view by the force of the illegal game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the force of the illegal game ball I in the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (to the left in front view). The wire Iw is cut by the friction and shearing force applied by the cutting portion 588d (see FIG. 57 (D)). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is attenuated due to friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, the fraud between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660 does not enter the game area 1100. Will be discharged through

  Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, so that an illegal act is performed on the illegal game ball I attached to the wire rod Iw in the game area 605. Can be prevented. Even if the illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the illegality preventing member 588 as described above, so that the illegal operation cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw cuts into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the momentum of the illegal game ball I, thereby reducing the game area 1100. It is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, so that it is possible to prevent fraud.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the player operates the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 so that the player can handle the ball. When operated, the game ball is sent to the hit ball launching device 650 by driving the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580, and the game ball is shot into the game area 1100 by the hit ball firing device 650, so that the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is opened. The game is played in the game area 1100 which can be visually recognized through the door frame, so that the player can be entertained and a feed mechanism (a ball feed member 584 or a ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a ball feed unit 580 provided with a discharge mechanism (ball pulling member 583), so that only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 are used. The ball sending member 584 and the hitting ball launching device 650 are also as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the ball remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. The number of game balls can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bad and to prevent the player's interest from lowering.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game balls can be driven. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early by the operation, or to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled with the game balls at an early stage. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player by reducing the annoyance of the player, and to reduce the interest of the player, and to reduce the size of the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301. The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's interest strongly.

  In addition, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 are compared with a separate ball feeding member 583. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in assembling can be simplified, and the feed unit 580 can be easily replaced. However, by replacing the ball feed unit 580, the problem can be easily solved.

  Furthermore, since the ball feed unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, so that the upper bowl ball is provided. There is no need to configure a transmission mechanism (upper plate ball removal mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable and closable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration relating to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened is compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the body frame 3 side. By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism is worn out early and malfunction or breakage, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580 and the like can be avoided. And durability can be improved.

  In addition, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301 Of the game ball from the player can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the operation of removing the ball in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball release button 341.

  In addition, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-pulling member 583 is made to move by the movement of the ball-pulling-out slider 343 that slides up and down in response to the operation of the ball-pulling-out button 341. The partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal moving range of the slider 343 and the partition 583a in the horizontal direction can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

  Further, the slider 343 is pushed upward, and the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the ball supply port 582a when the slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a from the upper plate 301, the impact can be mitigated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removing member) 583) can be improved in durability. Further, since the impact on the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper bowl removing slider 343, even if the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, it is difficult to repel the game ball. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing a problem.

  Further, since the partition 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition 583a is related to the case where the partition 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper bowl button 341, and the moving range of the partition 583 a can be reduced in planar projection, and the same as above. The effect of the invention can be obtained.

  Also, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are communicated with each other, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, the partition 583a is used. Is rotated by its own weight, so that the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since the game is discharged to the player without being played, the player can be made to recognize that a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be moved to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem to enjoy the interest. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, since the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the bent rotary rod portion 583b, when the game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the impact is bent and the rotating rod portion is bent. By dispersing by the 583b or absorbing by bending of the rotating rod 583b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being transmitted linearly to the rotating shaft, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when discharging the game balls in the upper plate 301, the left and right of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 are set. The movement in the direction can be minimized, and the play of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be improved so that the game balls can be discharged well. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be made as short as possible. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to suppress the ball feed unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

  Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the hitting ball firing device 650. Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the state of the highest speed (with momentum) immediately after being fired by the hit ball firing device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d By rapidly (strongly) pulling the wire Iw, the wire Iw can be surely cut, and at the same time, the momentum of the unauthorized game ball I is attenuated to prevent the illegal ball Iw from entering the game area 1100. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the illegal game ball I from performing an illegal act.

  Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting concave portion 582b which is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from protruding rearward from the rear end face of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the tamper-proof member 588 can cause injury to the worker during assembly or the like. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent backward across the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate. Thus, since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. This glass unit 590 has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 formed of synthetic resin and having an opening of substantially the same size as the gaming window 101, and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 108). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two stoppers 592a disposed at the upper portions on both left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-shaped engagement member extending in the left and right direction along the lower end and extending downward. A stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end so as to engage from the upper rear with the vertically bent protruding piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stopper piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame is locked. It is configured to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Shaped decoration in door frames]
Next, the molding decoration, that is, the shape decoration in the door frame 5, will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. FIG. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at substantially the center in the vertical direction. As shown, the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below a vertically long elliptical game window 101. For driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in a front view. The handle device 500 is arranged. In the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged so as to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the gaming window 101, and surround the lower side of the gaming window 101. Dish unit 300 is arranged as described above.

  The outer appearance of the door frame 5 is greatly different on both sides across the gaming window 101, and the right side has an appearance of a natural rock-like feeling rugged by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decorative unit 200. On the other hand, the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 are visible on the left side from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240. Has become.

  58, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 differ in the amount of forward projection, and the right side decoration unit 200 has a left side decoration unit as shown in FIG. It protrudes forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed to have a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed to have a slightly curved flat shape.

  Accordingly, in the door frame 5 of the present example, the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 look similar to each other when viewed from the right front (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 look similar to each other. When viewed from the right side, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240 and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, so that a different impression can be given depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In other words, the appearance of the present pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the present pachinko machine 1, and it can be illusioned as a pachinko machine of a different model. , The pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical left and right, for example, when the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a plurality of rows in the left and right direction in an island facility or the like of a game hall, the exterior of the entire island facility is solid and solid. The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 having different forms are alternately arranged to give a rhythmical impression and to give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). This makes it possible to enhance the appeal to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

  In addition, the door frame 5 allows the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, and the like provided in the units 200, 220, 280, and 300 to emit light, thereby causing the gaming window 101 to emit light. Can be illuminated with an arbitrary luminescent color so as to surround. Also, of the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 220, the LEDs 214b, 216b disposed behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254b, 256 are turned on or off, so that the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the gaming window 101 can be changed.

[1-2L. Light-emitting decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light-emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of the units 200, 240, 280, and 300 includes decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, and 322 on which LEDs are mounted. Can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except for the lower side of the game window 101, and the plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250 are formed. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered on the lower center of the gaming window 101 in the left-right center. Are disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to the lens.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is formed. Is formed by one smooth and gentle curved surface. In the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is disposed between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

  Further, the door frame 5 is provided at the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, on the right side upper decoration board 214, the right side lower decoration board 216, and the left side upper decoration board 254. , And a lower left side decorative substrate 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a are disposed at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are disposed at positions corresponding to the emission lens units 210b and 250b (side flash lenses 204 and 246). . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens units 210a and 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the radiation lens units 210b and 250b have relatively high luminance. It is an LED. The two LEDs 214c disposed at the upper right end of the upper right side decorative board 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surfaces of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower side left decorative substrate 256 are made of white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, and the like. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit, light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating the appearance, and to reflect light emitted from the LEDs 210a and 210b and the like to the player side by the substrate, so that The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated with light.

  As described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper portions of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer portion outside the central annular lens portion 282b. , And four extension frame lens portions 282c. The extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294 on the front surface.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed behind the central annular lens portion 282b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and a laterally extending upper lens 282 extending from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the extension frame lens portion 282c and the upper central decorative substrate 288. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decoration substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b. And can be separately illuminated. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front side of the upper side decorative substrate 290, so that each extension frame lens portion 282c can be individually illuminated. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, 290a of the upper central decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces having a substantially spindle shape, and has an external appearance that is continuous with the external appearance of the right side decorative unit 200. In the dish unit 300, an upper dish decorative board 322 is disposed behind the upper dish front decorative member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper dish decorative board 322 allow the upper plate front decorative member 316 to be mounted. The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 for decorating the right side portion and the front outer periphery of the upper plate ball removal button 341 can be illuminated. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative board 322 is a full-color LED.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation unit 401 and a light-transmitting cylindrical pressing operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are arranged below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 includes a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. The button decoration board 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full-color LED. The surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, it corresponds to each peripheral lens part 210a, 250a of the side lens 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 which cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. The LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a include a first annular group 102 (within a hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) near the gaming window 101 and a second annular group 103 disposed outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60), and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light as appropriate, so that they are substantially concentric so as to surround the gaming window 101. A plurality (two in this example) of light emitting decorations can be made. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the area of the hatch near the gaming window 101 is decoratively illuminated annularly, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the second annular group 103 are turned on. When all light is emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the gaming window 101 is decoratively illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. A radial group 104 (FIGS. 59 and 60) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. (Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radiated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the upper right side decorative board 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is a notification group 105. Various information can be notified to a player or an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 288 a and 288 b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282 b in the upper decoration unit 280 for decorating the upper center of the gaming window 101 include the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. Is formed as an upper central group 106 which emits light at the upper center. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106, the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated. It is possible to make a luminous decoration that becomes a point. The LED 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 for emitting and illuminating the left and right sides of the upper center group 106. The boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated by appropriately emitting the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322 a corresponding to the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 arranged below the game window 101 makes the upper plate 301 emit light. The dish group 108 is provided. In the door frame 5, LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the game window 101 and at the center of the upper part of the plate unit 300, operate the operation unit 400. An operation unit group 109 for performing light emission decoration is provided. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be illuminated, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be notified.

  The light-emitting decoration of the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment will be described in further detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong, corresponding to the control systems. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided with 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each peripheral lens unit 210a, 250a of the side lens 210, 250. Have been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens units 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250). ing. Also, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems: a central part 106a, a right part 106b, and a left part 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in front and rear and left and right. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include a pair of LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405 as a set of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems, one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. In light emission control, the number of systems is tripled to 84. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high-luminance white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. One system is connected, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs of normal luminance, and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b constituted by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, so that the same number of ten systems is used in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting and blinking are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, it is possible to perform an expressive light emission effect.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequentially in the same color or a similar color) to spread outward around the gaming window 101. A light emission effect, or conversely, a light emission effect such that light is converged from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light (same color or similar color sequentially) from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102, Alternatively, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 emit light at the same time, so that a light emission effect or the like can be performed such that the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 emits light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with the LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first annular group 102 near the gaming window 101, and the first annular group 102 With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside, it is possible to perform a more expressive light-emitting effect, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to make the player entertain and entertain. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

  In the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, the respective systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j emit light as appropriate, so that the upper part of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Light emission can be performed such that light moves toward the center lens 284 or light moves from the upper center lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into ten systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (ten divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about eight systems (approximately eight divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emission effect in which light orbits the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, and simultaneously with the radial group 104, the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 emit light. The light emitting effect of causing the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly by causing the light emitting group 101 to emit light, or the radial group 104 emitting light (lighting / flashing) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103. Or a luminous effect for giving an accent to the luminous decoration. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b) orbit can be performed.

  In addition, the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, so that a chance is given to the player or a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a probable change game state, a time saving game state, a probable change time short game state). , Etc.) can be performed.

  Further, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108, a light emission effect for lighting and decorating the upper plate 301 is performed, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation For example, a light emission effect for prompting the operation of the unit 405 can be provided. In addition, by appropriately emitting light from the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, a light emission effect for prompting the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and guiding the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform a light emission effect with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness for each 109 or for each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is supported on the left side of the outer frame 2 in a front view, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 behind the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by a door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5 from the front side.

  The main body frame 3 according to the present embodiment forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support 630 and a lower shaft support 640 attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2 and supporting the door frame 5, respectively; A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving game balls into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 and pays out game balls to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the body frame base 600. Ball unit 700 for mounting and blocking the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and is attached to the front of the body frame base 600. Ball exit opening It includes a unit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes a door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and various control boards for controlling electric components provided on the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. , A back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view. And a locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front to open and close the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and open and close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, has a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 when viewed from the front, and is substantially in the front-rear direction. It is formed so as to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). Thus, when the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear of the main frame base 600, the main frame base 600 is laid face down. In addition, the rear surface of the body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D of the body frame base 600, so that the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted, and the workability related to the assembly of the body frame 3 is improved. Can be better.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding opening capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within about 3/4 of the entire area from the upper part to the lower part. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side when viewed from the front, Frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the upper side, upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in reinforcing unit 150 of door frame 5, and open side protruding rearward of open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. An engagement groove 603 into which the bent protruding piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 and spreads in a left-right direction in a plate-like lower rear wall portion. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 projecting rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forming an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The free end portions (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 has a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding opening 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall section 604 and has a game board placement section 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and a game board placement section 606. A positioning projection 607 that projects upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 and a game board of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the front. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate-like shape that is suspended downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 is fitted with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the rearward direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate that the right side of the game board 4 in the front view is moved in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. I have. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in a front view will be described later, the movement of the side security plate 950 in the front-rear direction is regulated by the positioning member 956.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a bracket attachment for attaching the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 to a rear surface of a free end (upper left and right ends in a front view) of a U-shaped front end frame 602. A portion 610 is provided (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending up and down and left and right, and is capable of mounting the upper shaft supporting member 630 and the lower shaft supporting member 640 with sufficient strength. Is available. The main body frame base 600 has a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and a door frame 5 formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base main body 110, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 that is formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front. And a solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of the present example has the lower rear wall portion 604 formed at a position one step lower than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. On the front surface, the hitting ball firing device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the hit ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. A fale space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 that penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right centers of the lower rear wall portion 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the openings 614 and on both left and right sides in a front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692 to pass through the lower rear wall portion 604. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having a front wall.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion rotatably supporting a game board fixing tool 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 to the vicinity of the upper front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the fixture supporter 616 when viewed from the front and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing device 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis supported by the fixing device supporting portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. An operating piece 690b extending outward from one end in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a protrudes above the game board placing portion 606, and is inserted into the fixing recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixing device 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts on the stopper 617, and the abutment with the stopper 617 regulates the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. Has become.

  Further, the body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the body frame base 600 is provided with a body frame opening switch 619 for detecting opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on a rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that penetrate vertically (in the front-rear direction) inwardly (in the axial support side) from the engagement grooves 603 on the right side (open side) in the front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock hole 621 penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and arranged side by side in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed near the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially at the center in the vertical direction. The upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock holes 621 are adapted to be engaged with engagement protrusions 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000, and the front end frame portion 602. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in front view in FIG. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620, and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Further, the main body frame base 600 gently and obliquely descends from the upper right side toward the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then lowers the lower rear wall portion 604 at the approximate center in the left-right direction. And a main frame base ball removal passage 622 from which a game ball is allowed to hang down from the middle in the up-down direction to a slightly upward position. The rear side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 is closed by the substrate unit base 810 of the substrate unit 800. Although details will be described later, game balls flowing through the ball passage 741d of the prize ball device 740 are used for the game balls. It is circulating.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in rear view, and the back cover shaft support portions 623 rotatably support the support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front left side of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the lock device 1000 on the right side (opening side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 of the main body frame 3 are respectively attached to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 in a front view using a predetermined screw, so that the upper bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. A front extension portion 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and an axial pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. And a door frame support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction into which the door frame 5 is inserted. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) for regulating the end. In the upper bracket 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 640 includes a door frame support 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a body frame 3 that is disposed below the door frame support 642 and supports the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main frame support 644. The door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extending portion 642b, and a front extending portion. And a stopper 642d that stands upward from the left end of the front view 642a when viewed from the front and regulates the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft bracket 642, a mounting portion 642a, a front extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main frame support 644 of the lower support 640 is attached to a metal mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions. A front extension portion 644b extending forward, and a main frame support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. In the main frame supporting member 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are also integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In this example, the lower bracket 640 is configured such that the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft mounting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the body frame shaft mounting 644 overlap (contact) with each other in the front-rear direction, and the door frame. With the front extension 642b of the shaft bracket 642 and the front extension 644b of the body frame shaft bracket 644 separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, it is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the body frame base 600. It has become.

  The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, and the shaft support pins 633 of the upper shaft support 630 and the body frame shaft support holes (not shown) of the lower shaft support 640. Are positioned coaxially. The main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main frame support 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support 21, the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the main frame 3 into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support bracket 20, the main frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  When the upper bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support holes 634 of the upper shaft bracket 630 and the door frame shaft supports of the lower shaft bracket 640 are provided. The metal fitting 642c is positioned coaxially with the door so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640. After placing the lower shaft support 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension 642 b of the door frame support 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so that the door frame 5 can be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. The door is once slid downward so that the upper support 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension 632 of the upper support 630 vertically overlap, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hit ball firing device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the hit ball firing device in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the hit ball firing device in the main body frame. The hitting ball firing device 650 can hit a game ball supplied from the ball feed unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to a rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment has a launching base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654 a protruding forward from the lower rear surface of the launching base 652. Launching solenoid 654, a hammer 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654 a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and a movement locus of the hammer tip 658 A tip of a ball hitting hammer 656 between a firing rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left and a front end of the firing base 652 attached to the front of the firing base 652, and a firing rail 660 above the base end of the firing rail 660. A ball stop that forms a gap through which game balls cannot pass at the same time that the game balls 658 can pass and holds the game balls at the base end of the firing rail 660 The pin 662 and the ball stopper 662 regulate the rotation of the hitting hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) toward the firing rail 660 from a hitting position at which a game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit. And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting hammer 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a gently extending arc extending from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b to which a hammer tip 658 is fixed at the tip in the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and capable of contacting the stopper 664 are provided. ing. When the stopper 656c of the hitting hammer 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip 658 of the tip of the hitting ball 656 rotates toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position (rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is being regulated.

  Further, the firing rail 660 of the hit ball firing device 650 is formed in a loose arc shape with its lower part depressed substantially along the extension of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped concave shape, so that a game ball hit by the ball hammer 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting ball firing device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of a stopper 664 that can regulate a turning end of the hitting hammer 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting hammer 656 that is away from the hitting position. A stopper 668 for regulating an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber so as to be able to absorb the impact when the hitting hammer 656 abuts and to suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. You can do it.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, when the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launching rail 660 is lower at the approximate center in the left-right direction. It is located below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the game board placement section 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601), and the outside of the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111 and a predetermined width in the left-right direction and extends downward. The hitting ball launching device 650 of the present example launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view of the launching rail 660, thereby driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Is available. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the gaming area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into the ball but falls into a foul ball falls through the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  Further, the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. Is driven in synchronism with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball firing device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven. Is released (OFF), the ball sending member 584 sends the received game ball to the hitting ball firing device 650 side, so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball feeding unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously with the ball feeding solenoid 585. By performing (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting hammer 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit exploded and viewed from the rear. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit in an exploded view from behind. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and viewed later. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then issues a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 to receive and store game balls supplied from the island facility side. A tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730 A payout device 740 that pays out based on the instruction, and a game ball that is paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the game ball that is paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes a rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage cover 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof on the rear surface thereof and for fastening the back cover 900 to the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a as viewed from the rear. (See FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In this prize ball unit 700, a prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L-shape along the upper side and the left side of the main frame base 600 in a front view, and a prize ball tank 720 and a tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. Along with the arrangement, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. An external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L-shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view as shown in the figure. And are integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends substantially rearward along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends substantially inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a at a predetermined width. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, so that when mounted on the main body frame base 600, it is possible to form a space in which the game board 4 can be stored. ing.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 includes a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate disposed next to the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the upper side lower end of the rear wall portion 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall portion 710b. A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 to the prize ball device, a prize ball passage 715 that guides a game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and a rear wall. And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full branch unit 770 at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 has an escape hole 717 for letting out the payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and a back hole 717. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted in the prize ball base 710, mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., and the main frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed.

  76, the prize ball tank 720 of the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open top as shown in FIG. 76, and a bottom wall portion having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall 721 and protrudes rearwardly from the bottom wall 710 in a rectangular shape only at the right rear (opening rear) in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall A discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the right side rear wall 721 protruding rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 and opening downward, and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) of the discharge port 723 in plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Eaves 724, a rod-shaped shaft 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves 724 in plan view, and a prize ball tank formed near the base end of the shaft 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 on the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Also, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 becomes lower toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730 described below, and can level and align game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially half of the upper side of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent a game ball from overflowing from inside the tank rail unit 730, and to prevent the game ball from overflowing. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view becomes lower toward the right side. The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in a plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and at the same time, from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. Gaming balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extends in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter-like shape having a predetermined depth with an open upper portion, and has a width (depth) in which game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so that is lower. The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (axial support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and a front lower surface. A plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 74) projecting further downward and locked from above from the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710.

  The tank rail 731 has a right end (open side) end in front view located immediately below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and plays a game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720. After being received, it can be rolled to the left and transferred from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the prize ball base 710 by locking the locking projection 731 c of the tank rail 731 with the attachment locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is connected to an alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper part of the alignment gear 732, and a right end of the gear cover 733 in a front view. A ball holding plate 734 for closing the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper piece that can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731 a. 735, and an earth plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and can contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two aligning gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 includes a mounting portion 734a to which a ball stopper 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in a vertical direction and through which a protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. I can do it. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that were not at one level by the ball leveling member 727 at one level, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

  The alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery as shown in the drawing, and is axially supported so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by a half pitch. Thus, when the upper portion of the game balls flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the downstream outlet 732 while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately one by one. It is sent to the device 740.

  In addition, the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically, so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls down from the narrow groove. Has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is externally grounded via a grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via a grounding metal 782, though not shown in detail. When the game ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, and causes the protruding piece 735a of the ball stopper 735 to pass through the slit 734a into the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding pieces 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side can be stopped. I have.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 of the prize ball unit 700 pays out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Things. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 mounted on the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710 as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79 and the like. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 has a supply path which is open at the upper end on the rear side and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction at a width slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. A distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and communicating with a lower end (open side) of the distribution space 741b on the rear side on the rear side and bent in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. A prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (axial support side) in rear view and extends downward to open at the lower end are provided. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball ejection passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter length in the vertical direction than the unit base 741, and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a payout motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743, and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744 a projects rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotating shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744. A first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 and supported by the unit base 741, and meshed with the second gear 746 A third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and a payout cycle which rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween so as to be integrally rotatable, and have a plurality (three in this example) of detecting slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  The prize ball device 740 includes a ball cutout switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and flowing in the prize ball passage 741c. , A rotation angle sensor 752 that detects a detection slit 749a of a rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotator 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball cutout switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. Have.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection board 749). ), A gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply path ground that can contact a game ball flowing in the supply path 741a of the unit base 741. A metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and a grounding connection for the dispensing motor 744, and a back cover 742 detachably supported on the unit base 741. And a detach button 759.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back lid 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball-extraction passage 741d are opened rear ends. Is to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a shape in which a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, and can alleviate the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730. I can do it. In addition, the unit base 741 is partially cut out on one side (left side in rear view) below a position of the supply passage 741a that swells rearward, and is outside the cutout position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball cutout switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear side penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. And a motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By mounting the cut-out switch 750 on the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the cut-out switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence or absence of the playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball cutout switch 741e. In a state in which the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball-out switch 741e (a ball-out state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is to be notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748), and the switch mounting part 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. And a button support hole 741j which is provided on the unit base 741 and supports a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742. Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal 757 can be brought into contact with game balls in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage grounding metal 757 to the grounding metal mounting portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal 757 is in contact with the rear end of the lower end of the U-shaped grounding metal 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply passage 741 a via the supply passage grounding metal 757 is removed. Is available.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole, and an upper end bulging rearward. A button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on a substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and an relay board mounting on the upper part of the back cover 742. The sensor board mounting portion 742c is provided below the portion 742b to mount the sensor substrate 753, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the grounding metal mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

  In this example, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is made of an aluminum plate, and comes into contact with a metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that heat generated by the payout motor 744 is released. Heat can be easily dissipated.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three concave portions 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. As the 748 rotates, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. In addition, three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the positions between the concave portions 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The prize ball device 740 of the present example is configured such that a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the payout motor is operated by operating the ball removal switch 860b. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 rotates. The third gear 747 that meshes with is rotated. A payout rotator 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747 and a rotation detection board 749 is fixed to the rear side thereof so that the payout rotator 748 and the rotation detection board 749 can be rotated together with the third gear 747. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotator 748 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted by the counting sensor 751 one by one and then transferred to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated clockwise in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side. The game balls paid out to the ball removal passage 741d by the ball removal passage 741d from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, the ball removal passage 778 of the full tank distribution unit 770 described later, the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, the board unit The pachinko machine 1 can be discharged to the rear outside through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Even when the unit base 741 is assembled to the main frame 3, the prize can be received from the front side of the main frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball ejection passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as clogged balls can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game balls can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to pay out the game balls.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to an upper portion in the front-rear direction at a substantially upper portion of the center of the prize ball base 710 and is fixed to an attachment locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 and at a rear upper portion of the lower portion of the lower portion of the prize ball base 710. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixed portion 770b to the fixed portion 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  As shown in the figure, the full-branch branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole becomes lower from the rear end toward the front end, and is opened upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving game balls flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 disposed below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward to front the front end. A normal ball exit 774 opened at the right end of the view, and a full tank passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball forward from a position farther to the right in rear view than immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball ejection opening 777 that opens upward at the left end of the upper rear end in front view and receives a game ball flowing down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball received by the withdrawal opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball exit 774 and a normal ball outlet 774 are provided at the left end in front view. And a ball ejection port 779 opened at a position behind the full tank exit 776.

  In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first cover of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 is connected to the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c so as to face and communicate with each other. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball ejection port 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the body frame base ball ejection passage 622 in the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear, and the game ball discharged from the ball ejection port 779 is used for the body frame base 600. Is transferred to the body frame base ball passage 622.

  In the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes from the first ball outlet 544a onto the plate unit 300. It will be supplied to the dish 301.

  By the way, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game ball that cannot be moved out of the upper plate 301 from the 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts moving in the branch space 772 in the horizontal direction and moves in the horizontal direction. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, under the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  The full branch unit 770 of the present example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign matters such as dust and dirt that have entered the full-filled branch unit 770 and the occurrence of clogging without disassembling the full-filled branch unit 7700. .

  As described above, when the game balls are full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example automatically converts the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full game balls are released. The lower plate 302 can be supplied to the lower plate 302, so that the upper plate becomes full and the ball release button on the upper plate is operated as in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball firing device. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball from being interrupted, to eliminate the troublesomeness during the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Also, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game balls to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Since the game balls stayed in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit by the ball launching device. By 650, the game ball can be directly driven, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. In other words, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. Can be. Therefore, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be played. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided, and the wide gaming area 1100 can entertain the player.

  Further, since the two normal sphere outlets 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage dish so that the receiving port (first Even when only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c) are provided, game balls can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can correspond to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls (the full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. In addition, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope with the change without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 related to the change of the door frame 5 is provided. , And various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, game balls sent from the normal ball exit 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 are preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray is provided. Even if the game ball is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a shortage of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes. .

  As long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the operation of hitting the game ball and the like, thereby suppressing the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, and even when the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage dish, The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a or the like can be set at the same height as the first ball inlet 542a or the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage dishes. It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls by making the storage dish deep, so that the player can play the game without worrying about the amount of storage frequently. Can be performed, and the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be accommodated without changing the body frame 3 side, thereby increasing the cost of changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be ejected from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game ball stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. As a result, the substantial storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged from the normal ball exit 773 or the full ball exit 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is located as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the storage amount of the substantial game balls stored in the storage plate can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full branch unit 770). The number of pachinko machines 1 can be increased as much as possible and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  Further, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 have a width that allows game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows. Since it is possible to increase the number, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount including the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from being reduced even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is different. The pachinko machine 1 can correspond to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, game balls are clogged in the full tank branch unit 770, causing a problem. In this case, the location of the clogged ball can be easily found from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and the malfunction can be eliminated at an early stage, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is mounted on a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. Of the game ball can be cut off.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is mounted on a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 in front view so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 792 held in a shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing shutter 792 ascending via the opening / closing crank 793. And an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the shutter.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in a front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed on a front surface of a left end portion in a front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in a front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged near the upper left portion from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

  Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) which project from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide grooves 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally-long rectangular drive hole 792b that is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction by a crank supporting portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view. A drive rod 793b extending outward to the right and extending to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b; Drive pin 793c, an abutting portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of an open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface in the middle of the drive rod 793b. ), And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed behind the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere exit 774 and the full sphere exit 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 can be visually recognized.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example is configured such that the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates vertically in an arc shape by rotating the opening / closing crank 793 about an axis extending in the front-back direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c The opening / closing shutter 792 slides up and down through the drive hole 792b into which the is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is opened. Is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770. You can do it.

  In this way, in response to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are automatically set by the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling out of the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776. You can do it.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front by disassembly. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after exploded. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 88 (A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit taken apart and viewed from the front. FIG. 89 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and FIG. 89 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 mounted on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 mounted on the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 when viewed from the front, and a board unit base 810. A power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the power supply board 810, a power supply box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the power supply box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surfaces of the power supply box box 850 and the speaker box 820. And payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the 860 in a front view, and a main relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral relay terminal plate 882 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810. Have.

  As shown, the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 of the present example is formed to extend long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped down one step and gradually gently inclines toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the left-right direction and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 in front view. A plurality of vertically elongated slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the speakers 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface and the cylindrical duct portion 814 penetrated. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game balls can be prevented from falling down from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-back direction. You can do it.

  In the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In a state where the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are mounted on the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are positioned on the front side through the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It has come to face. In addition, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side through the duct 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing section 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing section 816 is disposed on the rear side, and the box housing section 816 and the front box housing section 843 are formed. Thus, an accommodating recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is provided with a speaker 821 attached to the front side literally. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with a space on the rear side of the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinthine passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 and leading the front side. And a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting a deeper sound with respect to the caliber of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well to the front. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The launch power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launch power supply board 831, and receives heat from electronic components and the like through slits 830 a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  The fired power supply board box 830 is detached from above into a storage recess opened upward formed by a box storage portion 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box storage portion 844 of the power supply box holder 840 described later. It is to be accommodated as possible. Thus, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a failure occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily attached / detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, the firing power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the firing power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. , And the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 to be driven. In the firing power supply board box 830, slits 830a as heat radiation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the firing power supply board 831 to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, a side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed has a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the firing power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b for dividing the internal space into two spaces, that is, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the inner wall of the lower surface are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner surface to the lower surface. Thus, when the firing power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830 to close the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830, the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 is accommodated by the partition wall 830b to accommodate the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b is provided with a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , And a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being released to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored. Therefore, heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. The heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is radiated to the heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively, which communicate the housing space 830d and the outside air. By releasing the heat to the outside through the slit 830a, it is possible to prevent this released heat from entering the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the firing power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its miniaturization, and the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 can be facilitated, which can contribute to shortening of the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the state in which the firing power supply board 831 is still attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830, that is, the entire firing power supply board box 830 can be replaced.

  Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life, and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game must be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 can be performed. Since the game can be easily performed, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be resolved at an early stage to resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute, every time when the driving solenoid is fired by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from an AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, the charge and discharge are not performed repeatedly at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. , Compared with the launch power supply board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration caused by the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches its end of life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851, so that the lifetime is improved. Electronic components associated with long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. Thus, it is possible to prevent the electronic component from being replaced with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life due to aging with a long life.

  Further, since the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed in order to change the hitting characteristics. In order to attach or detach the firing power supply board 831, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601, and it is difficult to replace the firing power board 831. In this way, it is possible to prevent fraud that deliberately changes the optimized driving strength of the firing power supply board 831 that has been fraudulently modified, and to suppress fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent the player who has been frustrated or the like from developing into a fraud such as a fraud.

  Further, since the firing power supply board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is tampered with, the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced and the tampering is performed. It is possible to shorten the period of interruption of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the frustration and disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage, It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the firing control unit 4120 for controlling the hit ball firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (the launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, which matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By replacing the launching power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the hitting characteristics, the hitting characteristics of the hitting ball firing device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be changed to a new game. It can be matched to the board 4. Therefore, the driving characteristics of the game balls can be easily adjusted to the concept of the game board 4, so that the game using the new game board 4 can be sufficiently enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player is suppressed. can do.

  Further, since the firing power supply board 831 of the firing control unit 4120 is detachable from the front side, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 with respect to an island facility such as a game hall when replacing the firing power supply board 831. The time and effort required for the exchange can be simplified, the exchange can be performed in a short time, and the burden on the game hall can be prevented from increasing. In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is replaced. Can be reduced, and the burden on the hall and the like can be reduced.

  Further, when changing the model or the like, only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5, the body frame 3 and the like can be used as they are, so that the fire control unit 4120 can be used for a long time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is deteriorated, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above. Troubles can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, the interruption of the game can cause frustration or disappointment to be resolved early. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the launch power supply board 831 (the launch power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. In order to detach the firing power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing wrongdoing enters through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the game board 4 causes the unauthorized tool to reach the firing power supply board 831. Can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the launch power supply board 831 from being tampered with, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high defense power against tampering.

  Further, the firing power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding opening 601. Probably, the position for supporting the firing power supply board box 830 is behind the front surface of the main body frame 3; A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and has the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the launching power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and the launching power supply board 831 can be easily attached and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the launching solenoid 654. Therefore, even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (the firing power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the trouble can be eliminated early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives the game ball discharged upward and released downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the front left side from the center right and left in the front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 for guiding the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging the same, and a front surface (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. A front box receiving portion 843 which is opened forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply board box 830 and a front end of the power supply board box 850 which is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply box holder 840 is depressed forward. And a rear box storage portion 844 capable of storing the data.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810 and that the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. It flows through the body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, passes through the opening 812 of the board base unit 810, and the rear side of the board unit base 810. The game balls that have flowed down and the game balls that have been discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, which will be described in detail later, are passed through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be discharged to

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box storage section 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box storage section 816 and the front box storage section 843 accommodate the fired power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and transfers heat from the electronic components and the like to the outside through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 includes a vertical wall protruding rearward along a lower side of an opening facing a rear side of a power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to a lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 which is disposed on the front side and below the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a simple gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece are provided. Is locked so that the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power supply board box 850 has the upright wall portion 850b connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 and the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854, and is slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, a connector is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the wiring cord 854 wrapping around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked on the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal from which the wiring cord is extended is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and the wiring cord is pulled toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed against the terminal, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) faces the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if the connector 855 is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to wrap around (turn back) by the standing wall portion 850 b projecting rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Moreover, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c that protrude rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall 850b, the rear end of the rear wall 850b is not moved. The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring code 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring code 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring code 854 is moved from the standing wall portion 850b. Can be made hard to come off, and the wiring code 854 can be immediately turned to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d after the wiring code 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be performed, and the work process related to the assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed such that the size in the front-rear direction when they are assembled to each other is substantially the same as the size in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush.

  Further, in this example, after the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 facing the opening of the power substrate box 850 covering the power substrate 851, the connector is formed by the upright wall 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal to which the connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. 853 can be actuated in such a direction as to cancel the connection with the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

  Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the wiring cord 854 can be bent more loosely than when there is no vertical wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected by an unreasonable force and causing a problem.

  Further, an upright wall portion 850b is provided near the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853. Since the upright wall portion 850b is located at a position adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and cannot be forced. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting, and to prevent a problem such as disconnection from occurring.

  In addition, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the upright wall 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the upright wall 850b, and the assembling work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, and the like that may cause a problem from attaching to the power supply board 851, and to mount the power supply board 851 on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (e.g., resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) that are difficult to touch or replace, thereby increasing the defense against fraud. Has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 on the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminal 855 is mounted on the power supply board 851 with respect to the power supply terminal 853. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. Of the power supply terminal 853 from the power supply substrate 851 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 in which a failure hardly occurs can be provided.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claws and the locking pieces, the wiring code 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring code 854 is formed. Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 via the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power terminal 853 can be prevented from being released, and the connector can be prevented. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained, and problems such as poor contact and poor conduction can be prevented.

  Also, since the rear end of the rear end of the power supply board box 850 where the wiring code 854 is folded back is provided with the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the vertical wall 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall 850b. It is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 which can prevent the above operation and effect reliably.

  In addition, the wiring guide 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 causes the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall 850b to be moved toward the standing wall 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall 850b. Thus, the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved, and the wiring code 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and immediately the wiring code 854 is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. This makes it possible to perform a series of operations continuously, thereby simplifying the operation steps related to assembly and suppressing an increase in cost.

  The dispensing control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and has an open rear, and a thin box-shaped cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear and is open at the front. 862, and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 161) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation and cutting portions 863 protruding outward from the left end in rear view and formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 from the cover 862, the box base 861 cannot be separated without cutting the separation cutting section 863. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace is left. . Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the dispensing control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the dispensing control board 4110 face the rear through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). In the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. To the board base 871, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in which the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 a is mounted on the substrate mounting portion 871 a of the substrate base 871 from the rear side, and the substrate cover mounting portion 871 b of the substrate base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening 873b extending from the rear wall portion 873a and extending vertically, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are mounted on the rear surface. Unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 to a frequency display for displaying the operation state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as the CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. Note that the board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are provided with external peripheral panel relay terminal boards 872 and CR unit connection terminals from the outside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. On the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the contents of the error code displayed on the frequency display or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 is formed at an upper portion inside the board mounting portion 871a and fixes a top end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown). A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided. The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  Further, the board base 871 has a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in a thin box shape opened to the rear side, and the inner circumference thereof is large enough to insert the outer circumference of the connection terminal plate cover 873. The inner peripheral wall is an outer piece 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends in a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and extends rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover attaching section 871b and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protruding ridges 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f disposed on the left outside of the board cover mounting portion 871b as viewed from the rear and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The projecting ridge 871e of the board base 871 is in such a state that the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly smaller than that of the outer piece 871c and, as shown in FIG. It is arranged so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the board base 871 is disposed on the right rear surface of the board cover mounting portion 871b at a rear surface on the right side as viewed in the vertical direction, and is arranged vertically apart from each other. A locking portion 871h, which is disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and is insertable into the board cover attachment section 871b surrounded by the outer piece 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall 873c, a rectangular opening 873b extending vertically through the rear wall 873a, and a rear wall substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 873b. An inner wall portion 873d extending forward from 873a (toward the substrate base 871), and a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed on the 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed at the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a board base 871 extending outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. And a pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-shaped engaging member formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. And a stop claw piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall portion 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with a front side opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. The connection terminal plate cover 873 can prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, so that the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. Has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the board base 871 and then locks the locking claw piece 873i into the locking hole 871f of the board base 871 to thereby fix the board. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a on the front side (rear side) for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall. In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball lending unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. I have.

  The board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and entirely open to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, through holes 875b corresponding to the opening portions 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through holes 875b. And a locking piece 875d that is locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 is capable of opening and closing the rear surface of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal board cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shafts 875a on the bearings 871g of the board base 871. I have. The board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c closer to the shaft portion 875a (a shaft-supported side) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and an impact wall farther from the shaft portion 875a. 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective impact walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear faces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It has become.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so as to be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example, when assembled, has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. 871e and the outer piece portion 871c, and the outer wall portion 873c and the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the side impact walls 875c are present, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegitimately flexible tool into the boundary (boundary) between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool from a direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be surely prevented, and illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

  Further, in this terminal board box 870, the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, so that the CR unit mounted as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be prevented. It has become.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871, on the shaft portion 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces. An impact wall 875c having a length extending between them is provided. Since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c, a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, making it more difficult to perform wrongdoing and reducing the deterrent. It can be expensive.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector will be performed. In this case, the insertion of the electrodes can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875, and illegal acts on the internal connection terminals 874b can be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so that the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the front side of the pachinko machine 1 are mounted. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through the gap or the like and the tip of the illegal tool is made to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the housed CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from being fraudulently acted.

  In a state where the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are arranged in a direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The ridge 871e and the outer piece 871c of the base 871 and the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 extend in the direction along the rear surface (the surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the collision wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an attempt is made to allow an illegal and highly flexible tool to enter between (boundary) between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871. Also, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent the intrusion of an unauthorized tool from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is provided. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can surely prevent the wrongdoing of the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is made to contact the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate and the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the use of the D-sub connector, the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion can be covered by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to reliably prevent improper conduct.

  Further, one end of the terminal base box 870 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like impact wall 875c extending forward from the axially supported side end of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the board base 871 to form a gap and allow an illegal tool to enter, the improper tool is connected by the contact wall 875c. It can be prevented from reaching the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side, thereby preventing improper conduct. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then open the connection terminal plate cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And deterrence against fraud can be enhanced. Further, the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c. Therefore, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 can be formed. Can be prevented from being distorted, and the formation of a gap can be prevented.

  Further, even if an illegal act of inserting a needle-shaped electrode through a gap between the connector body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is performed, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 is provided. The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent improper conduct from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord, and the crime prevention capability is high. Things.

  Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c is extended forward from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap in order to perform a wrongdoing, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the connection terminal plate cover 873 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is formed on the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from outside the terminal board box 870 without disassembling. Whether an incorrect tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, or the like housed therein, or whether the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like itself has been replaced with an incorrect one. Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like have been replaced with unauthorized ones. In addition, it is easy to detect wrongdoing, and it is easy to detect wrongdoing. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 5 so that the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 during maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal board box 870 face the operator (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 are connected to a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and a door frame. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals are directed to the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are so formed that their front sides are covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. At the same time, only connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The main relay terminal plate 880 is provided with a ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, and a rotation position detecting sensor of the handle device 500 in the plate unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, a touch sensor 516, a firing stop switch 518, and a connection between the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540 and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side and each of the decorative boards 430, 432 and the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of the present example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the back side of the game board holding opening 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes a rear opening of the game board holding opening 601, a side 904 that extends forward from a right side of the main body 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of support pins 906 that are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, project downward, and are supported by the back cover support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and prize balls formed on the upper left and lower left sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and a back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, respectively, and a back cover 900 near the lower engaging piece 908 is attached to the main body frame. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening the opening 3 so that it cannot be opened and closed.

  As shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 is a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically-long rectangular locking port 922 which is disposed at a predetermined distance to the left in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking section which is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and a main body 902 which is inserted through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924. It includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. The guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin, and is easily bent.

  Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely locked to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. Can be idle. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the elongated hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the elongated hole 923b. In addition to being able to slide in the left-right direction, it does not fall out of the elongated hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902 by the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 protruding forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is formed. The male screw part 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body part 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by supporting the pivot pin 906 on the rear cover supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. The engagement pieces 908 are engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage cover 780, whereby the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 substantially coincide with each other.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted into the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the distal end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked by the main body 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900, The state located at the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, from this state, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). In this case, the back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body 902. Since it is supported by the elongated hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  In this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by one fastening mechanism 920, the fastening or fastening can be easily performed by operating only one fastening member 924. It can be released, and the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve the maintainability.

  Further, the back cover 900 has a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in front view, and a confirmation opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape above the connection notch 910 in front view. 912, and a check notch 914 that is cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 and the like. Faces the rear side. The back cover 900 has a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 through the confirmation opening 912 facing the rear side. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the cutout portion 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to check the operation, the appearance, and the management state of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  Further, the back cover 900 has a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body portion 902 and the side portions 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is transmitted to the main body frame 3 (the pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside on the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined positions in the left-right direction that are wide and extend vertically in the left-right direction at a position slightly to the left from the center when viewed from the front. These through-holes 918 are provided on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is housed and held in the main body frame 3. It is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the printer, so that heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. Has become. Incidentally, the width of the through-hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through-hole 918.

  Thereby, in this example, the fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held on the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held on the main body frame 3 and the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance and the like on the rear side of the game board 4, Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 for fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is still the guide member 923. Through the back cover 900 to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left inside the pachinko machine 1. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since the fastening member 924 can be prevented from dropping from the opened back cover 900, it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 having been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. , Can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be easily performed.

  Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the opposite side to the locking opening 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924a is surely placed in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the security effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 movably with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion of the guide member 923 and the holding member 925, so that the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap between the guide member 923 and the elongated hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to cover the back cover of the main body frame 3. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. As a result, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts on the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced, thereby reducing the occurrence of problems. And can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screw-coupled to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, compared to a simple engagement with a locking claw, it is possible to fasten by just pulling. Cannot be released, the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the security effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent to illegal acts can be provided.

  Further, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (the insertion hole 921) can be further increased. It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or to move the male screw portion 924 straight in the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along the inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking hole 922 of the back cover 900, the locking hole is formed. Since the guide member 923 is elastically locked to the shaft 922, the distal end side (the long hole 923 b side) of the guide member 923 movably attached to the guide member 923 extends in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923 a can be pivotally moved around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be supported by the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 or the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 are further provided. By engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is performed. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the number of fastening operations can be reduced as much as possible using only one fastening member 924, and operations such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement pieces 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 (the rear side of the game board 4) in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a favorable state without increasing the number of fastening portions by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by supporting the back support pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover supporting portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, simply turning the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame 3 and fastening the back cover 900 with the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the main body frame 3. The holes 780b can be easily matched, and the fastening members 924 held on the back cover 900 through the insertion holes 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported on the body frame 3, even when the back cover 900 is opened by releasing the fastening by the fastening member 924 at the time of maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be kept in a state of being supported by the main body frame 3, and there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, thereby simplifying the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. As shown, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U-shape in plan view, a mounting bracket 954 fixed up and down near the inner front end of the main body 952 and mounted on the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaged with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 has a length substantially equal to the height of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the up-down direction and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side in front view from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance behind the front end piece 952b and projecting less than the front end piece 952b, and a front end from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending to the right in a direction longer than the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 108). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and a front component 1110 of the game board 4 is provided between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. The left side of the game panel 1150 when viewed from the front is inserted (see FIG. 108).

  The side security plate 950 of this example has a mounting bracket 954 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and a rear end piece 952 d of the main body 952 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the side security plate 950 is configured such that the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped protruding piece 166 to prevent insertion of a tool for performing wrongdoing between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. (See FIG. 108). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a front piece 952c arranged at right angles to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the entire main body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is located between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side plate 950. Of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (penetrated) into the substantially U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150, and the front end piece 952b is connected to the U-shaped projecting piece. Since the door frame 5 is sandwiched between the protruding pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door support 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. This makes it possible to prevent the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3 to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. That the door frame 5 is opened against the body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  Further, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the gap between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is formed. The strength and rigidity of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be hardly distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of a synthetic resin, and the security side plate 950 on the side supporting the door frame 5 (supporting side) is formed of metal, The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is formed of metal.

  Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one point between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is an unauthorized member such as a crowbar. Even when the door frame 5 is scooped by a simple tool, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 from spreading, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a of the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension of the side piece 952a in the front-rear direction is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the entire security side plate 950 can be further increased, and the crime prevention side plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and fraudulent. .

  Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extruded die, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It is possible to suppress the increase in cost even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and to reduce defects such as a decrease in strength generated at the time of processing as compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. It can be reduced as much as possible, and the security side plate 950 having high durability and strength can be obtained.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main frame, and FIG. 93 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94 (B) is a slide rod for a glass door and a slide rod for a main frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the lock device. (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device when disassembled, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. A door hook hole 620 formed on the upper right side (opening side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main body frame base 600 and a lock hole 621 formed on the lower portion; and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600. And a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. A sliding rod 1040, a main frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and a U-shaped sliding rod 1050 so that the sliding of the main frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally performed. Anti-fraud members 1023, 1032 attached to the lower portion of the base 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and has therein a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame. Are slidably disposed. It should be noted that the U-shaped base 1001 is much thinner in width than a conventional locking device integrated in a base formed into an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the left-right dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the left-right dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is mounted such that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the U-shaped base 1001 is U-shaped. The open side of the base 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. Thus, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-fraud structure in which it is difficult to perform an illegal act on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  The U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through-hole 1002, a screw stop 1003 protruding outward in the middle and above the side surface 1001 b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw stop A side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the protrusion 1003 protrudes protrudes forward from an upper end portion and an intermediate portion on the open side (front side), and lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. Locking projection 1004.

  The screw stopper 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. And when it is moved upward after being inserted into the lock hole 621 from the rear side, the screwing portion 1003 and the locking portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock mounting portion 625 via the intermediary, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking of the lock device 1000 with screws is performed not only at the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also at the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 to be described later and near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The locking device 625 is also fixed to the body frame base 600 with screws (not shown), so that the lower portion of the locking device 1000 can also be mounted.

  When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper door hook hole 620 and the upper lock hole. 621, and is positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. (The body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front and rear sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear fixing structure is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001b, which is in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling as compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b that is dense.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion hole 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the main frame sliding rod 1050 stored therein and caulking, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted into the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably mounted vertically.

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower three positions of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end portions of the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 formed respectively in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side face 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the open body frame base 600 and the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed on the closed side face at the lower part. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 and a vertical insertion opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a lateral relief hole 1022 are formed in a side surface 1001 b in contact with the peripheral wall 605. Although the details of the notch prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 has the side surface 1001b on the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009 that projects from the front end to the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and two mounting holes 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 by screws 1012 are used in upper and lower positions. And a screwing portion 1003 formed to mount the lower portion of the lock device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement projection 1017 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 for urging the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a lateral escape hole 1022 for forming an escape hole so as not to hinder the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. The engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotated. The end side is a second engagement projection 1018 that engages with the upward engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 during rotation.

  The cylinder lock 1010 is formed by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 from the rear side, and then mounting holes 1013 formed at two upper and lower positions of the lock mounting board 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the through hole.

  The anti-fraud members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 are provided with a sliding rod 1050 for the body frame, for example, using a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. Is to prevent the lowering of. As shown in FIG. 95, the anti-fraud members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 are connected by connecting pins 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is moved through the pivot shaft hole 1025 together with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower mounting hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are used for mounting.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically opened at a position overlapping with the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-shaped surface, and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. When the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates the projection insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. And the second engagement projection 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045. The first anti-fraud member 1023 has an obliquely inclined upper outer side in front of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. When the engagement cam 1016 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first tamper-proof member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. (In the clockwise direction in FIG. 97B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer side diagonally behind and below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and further from the position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. It has a regulating projection 1031 protruding downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 that penetrate in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically at the front side of the regulating projection 1031. The stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is engaged with the anti-fraud notch 1007 and the engaging notch 1066 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 when the main frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be prevented from illegally sliding. In addition, the regulating protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first anti-fraud member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Is available. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 rotatably by the connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second anti-fraud member 1032 connected to the first anti-fraud member 1023 is formed of an inverted “L” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring engagement hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The second anti-fraud member 1032 can be relatively rotatably connected to the first anti-fraud member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first anti-fraud member 1023. I can do it. The second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is urged upward. Further, the contact portion 1037 of the second anti-fraud member 1032 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the lower portion inside the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The door sliding rod 1040 is provided with three door frame hooks 1041 protruding forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state in which the door sliding rod 1040 is stored in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the lock device 1000 projects forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600, and Can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the. The hook portion 1041 for the door frame has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. The locked state with the 165 can be released.

  Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces and has a vertically long rivet long hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and a lower part of the uppermost rivet long hole 1042 and a door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, a guide projection 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040 is configured such that the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted thereinto, and the rivet 1006 is connected to the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically long so as not to disturb the ascent operation of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet long hole 1042 is in a state of contact. Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is configured such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. The sliding movement of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be guided.

  Further, the sliding hook 1040 for a door frame has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at an upper end thereof for locking one end of a spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward. Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and can prevent the door frame sliding rod 1040 from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It has become.

  Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame has a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower part. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engaging projection 1017 so as not to hinder the rotation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projection 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is configured such that the sliding movement of the engagement cam 1016 raises the door frame sliding rod 1040. For engaging with. Note that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is provided with an escape notch 1049 at the lower rear of the vertical side, which is notched in the vertical direction to be larger than the notch 1007. The escape notch 1049 is disturbed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is securely engaged with the anti-fraud notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding parts have been cut out so as not to be disturbed.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a metal plate upper hook member 1051, a metal plate lower hook member 1052, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not formed of one vertical metal plate as in the related art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting rod 1053. Thus, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet long hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates through the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. And a locking claw portion is formed upward.

  The rivet long hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed on the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to receive the guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with 1050.

  The spring hook 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured so that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. The connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, when the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is stored in the U-shaped base 1001, it comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001. It can slide smoothly without rattling.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from a lower end portion and a rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. A long hole 1061, a descending engagement hole 1062 arranged below the rivet long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the lower engagement hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the lower hook member 1052 at the front end side, and a coupling formed in the lower part of the lower vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. It has a notch 1066 and contact portions 1067 formed on the upper and lower sides of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates through the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. And a locking claw portion is formed upward. The rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed at the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is pierced, the rivet 1006 pierces the lowermost end of the rivet long hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the main frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. For engagement. The play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is provided with the second engagement protrusion 1018 so that when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the second engagement protrusion 1018 does not hinder the rotation operation. Is able to form a space in which the tip end can move. In addition, the projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

  In addition, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and When the hook member 1052 performs a sliding operation, the hook member 1052 can be smoothly slid without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet long hole 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In this state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 pass through the hook through-opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 while sliding the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame slider. After inserting the moving rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected with the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is connected to the pin hole. It is necessary that the guide pin 1028 be further inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after being fixed to the 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Further, in a state where the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 with the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and a spring 1035 is wrapped around the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. The member 1032 is brought into contact with the regulating protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the distal end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projection insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In this manner, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the hook-shaped locking projection 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw stopper 1003 projecting horizontally is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by making it coincide with the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while fixing the rear portion. Since the screw stopper 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling as compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 96, in a state where the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Then, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are locked, and the hook portions 1041 for the door frame and the door frame 5 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are locked. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The distal end of the first engaging projection 1017 engages with the downward engaging hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descend. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 toward the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 are inclined downward toward the outside, so that the main body frame 3 is forcibly pressed against the outer frame 2 so that the upper slopes of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are closed. Since the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame is lowered downward because of the contact with the lower end, the upwardly-facing claws of the hooks 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, and the sliding for the main frame is performed. The rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the two engagement projections 1018 engages with the ascending engagement holes 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes up the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, since the hooked state of the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is released, the door frame 5 is pulled forward by pulling the door frame 5 forward. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is upwardly inclined toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3 so that the inclined portion of the lower side of the door frame hook portion 1041 becomes a hook cover 165. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame rises upward by contact with the upper end of the door frame, and the downwardly-facing claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are again locked, so that the sliding for the door frame is performed. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. In addition, the sliding rod 1040 for a door frame in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hooks 1041, which are attached over the entire length and are the locking portions with the door frame 5, are formed at three positions of the upper end, the center, and the lower end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 over the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the gap therebetween. The act cannot be performed.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the door frame 5 can be unlocked from the main body frame 3. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act such that a piano wire or the like is hooked on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowered without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Is not possible. The first structure for preventing such misconduct is a lock mechanism including a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032, and the second fraud preventing structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space of FIG.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism as the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 are in contact with each other. It is in a state where it has been done. In this state, the first anti-fraud member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, and the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 moves to the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even when the piano wire or the like is hooked and pulled down on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 are engaged, so that the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is moved. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock), and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, in a case where the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the main body frame 3 is unlocked properly, as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first engagement protrusion 1023 abuts against the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017. The rotation starts in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

  When the main frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is in contact with the regulating protrusion 1031, so that the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally reach the state shown in FIG. Thus, the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 do not obstruct the closing of the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being performed illegally. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after release, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult. For this reason, the device is devised so that unauthorized operation on the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the housing are completely accommodated in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. In this state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 is pulled down, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 are pulled down. As a result, the intrusion of the fraudulent equipment into the closed space is prevented, so that the fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment includes the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device integrated into the conventional L-shaped base. The mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for slidably providing the body frame sliding rod 1050 and operating the lock device 1000 is set to a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is large, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed firmly.

  Further, since the U-shaped base 1001 is mounted so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, which are arranged in the same manner, are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame provided therein.

  When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock holes 621. It is a very simple structure because the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the closed side (rear part) of the U-shaped base 1001 at the upper, middle, and lower sides are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With such a structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and a portion near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 are formed as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. Although a structure in which the formed lock attaching portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attaching piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. A lock mounting hole to be screwed through the piece 1008 may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 only by fixing the screw device 1003 on the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly to the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of the present example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with rivets or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod are provided in a closed space defined by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (tablet base). A structure for accommodating 1050 may be provided, and the same operation and effect as the above-described lock device 1000 can be obtained.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-back direction) behind the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball tank 720 for storing game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned to rear wall portions 710b of the prize ball base. And a transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and a rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710. A portion attached to the rear side of the prize ball device 740 is transparent, and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main frame 600 has a rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 or the prize ball device 740. Since it has the transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane as the surface, the game board 4 held by the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. A pachinko machine that allows the operator to visually check the rear side and the rear side surface, and easily inspect (visually inspect) the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. Machine 1.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. When the game board 4 is detached from the front of the game board 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, they remain outside. Can easily be found from the device, and any trouble caused by the residue can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing wrongdoing are attached to the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent activities from being performed, and it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device or the like, and the pachinko machine 1 can have a high deterrent against illegal acts.

  Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed may contact the game board 4 or the game board 4 Foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from adhering to the rear side of the game board 4, and the game board 4 can be maintained in a good state, thereby suppressing the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is set to about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to be a flat shape. This makes it easier to perform the mounting operation of mounting the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (the main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, and the prize ball device 740 attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made a substantially flat surface, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being caught or abutted by other members in the installed island facility by eliminating the rearward projections. By doing so, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a simple-shaped cushioning material can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the collection efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. 4 can be made easier to see, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900. In addition, the heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control of the game due to the heat becomes unstable and the members such as the synthetic resin are deformed to suppress the occurrence of the trouble. be able to. Further, since the slits 916 and the through holes 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that does not allow game balls to pass through, for example, even if game balls are spilled to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, they pass through the slits 916 and the like. It is possible to prevent the game balls from entering the pachinko machine 1 and to prevent the occurrence of trouble due to the game balls from entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, a basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded and viewed from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board mounted on a pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from that of the example of FIG. 100 and the like viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is a game view of FIG. 103 viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of a game panel of the game board of FIG. 103 cut in a vertical direction. Further, FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the front component of the embodiment different from that of the example of FIG. 103 and the like viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a game board viewed from the rear of FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of FIG.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by the player operating the handle device 500 is formed to have a substantially rectangular shape in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed behind the front component 1110 and defining a rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed below the rear of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 that accommodates a main control board 4100 that is mounted on the rear surface of the game area and controls a game performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and attached to a predetermined position of the front component 1110 so as to be visually recognized by the player. To have. This game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, which are not shown in FIGS. It is further provided (see FIGS. 110 to 116).

  The basic structure of the game board 4 of this embodiment is formed by the front component 1110, the game panel 1150, the board holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and the game board 4 is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 of the game board 4 of the present example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and an inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower left edge to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view and passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper right diagonal; An inner rail 1112 that is disposed substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along a counterclockwise circumferential direction in a front view, the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. And an inner rail 1112 and an inner peripheral rail 1113 that are capable of contacting a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 by connecting the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 At the lower end of the game area 1100 at the lower end of the game area 1100, and is lowered rearward, and is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 to close between the outer rail 1111. As described above, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where it is rotated clockwise in front view and opened between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. A backflow preventing member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the front component 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 so that the main body frame 3 can be hit with a ball. It is adapted to be located on an extension of the firing rail 660 of the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball hit along the firing rail 660 of the hit ball firing device 650 is formed. , And jumps into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls up along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow preventing member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is moved. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the gaming area 1100.

  In addition, when a game ball is hit hard by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 is brought into contact with the stop 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the contact of the game ball with the stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Even if a game ball that has entered (has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. In this way, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game balls hit into the game area 1100 are not received in the starting ports 2101 and 2102 and the winning ports 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the front unit 2000 described later, the game balls flow down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, the player is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the rear lower side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball fired from the hit ball firing device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, a foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located below the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  The outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball is enhanced and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin disposed on a surface thereof, so that even if a game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. And the game ball can be repelled inward.

  The front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outside of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from below the out-port guiding surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security projection 1117 on the front component 1110 overlaps the security rear end protrusion 183 of the security cover 180 on the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thereby, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire enters from between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. Is not possible.

  When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 in the front component 1110 of the present example, the post-security projection 182 of the security cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. So that the projected piece 182 after security is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to substantially contact the outer surface (the opposite side to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. With the inner rail 1112, the rail security groove 1118, and the post-crime protruding piece 182, an illegal tool such as a piano wire penetrated from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the gaming area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component 1110 is disposed at a left end in a front view in a vertical direction and is disposed to be depressed from the front to the rear, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened to the left end, and vertically separated to a right end in a front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side in front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111, is opened downward, is formed in an arc shape on the upper side, and is recessed from the front side, and a front view, Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a notch 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape and extends upward from the lower end in the left-right direction. The positioning concave portion 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 in a front view. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-back direction. The game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By locking the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 in the front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  In addition, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110 allows the game board fixing tool 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 to be viewed from the front in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixing tool 690. It has become. The ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 is also formed with a similar ball passage notch 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used to hold the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. In this state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction at the lower side of the through hole 1123 from the center in the left-right direction to the left in the front view. It is provided with a fastening portion 1124 having a small thickness, and a certificate sticking portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in a front view for attaching a certificate for certification confirmation. The fastening portion 1124 of the front component member 1110 is not shown in detail, but when the present game board is attached to a conventional body frame, a predetermined fastening band is inserted into a fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame. The game board 4 can be made difficult to remove by being wound around and fastened to each other, and illegal removal of the game board 4 can be prevented.

  Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed outside the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right in front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from both left and right ends of a lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160. A predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126. By attaching, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. The positioning projection 1127 is fitted in an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position on the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a woody plate such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component 1110 at a lower portion substantially at the center in the left-right direction in front view, and a horizontally elongated front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end in front view. And a ball passage notch 1152 which is opened downward and has the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 which penetrates the lower right corner in front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1153 into which the 1182 is inserted.

  In the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions near the lower left and right ends corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110, and positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 to be formed, and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and having a lower end side opened downward (see FIG. 101). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component 1110 and cut out from the right end in front view so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of the present example can define a rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component member 1110, and within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100. When the game panel 1150 is assembled to the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 of the front component 1110. The game ball guided backward by the provided out port guiding surface 1115 enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened. In the substrate holder 1160, an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed to penetrate vertically in the front end of the bottom wall at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall is formed as an out-ball. The game balls formed so as to become lower toward the discharge portion 1161 and discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160, The ball is discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520, and are fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110. In a state where the board holder 1160 is fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 through the inside of the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 so that the board holder 1160 is attached to the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the board holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side at the rear left end of the rear surface of the rear wall, and a fixing portion. A locking portion 1164 that is arranged to face the 1163 and is capable of locking the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from behind. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 having an open rear side, and a thin horizontally long box shape having an open front side which covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. The main body includes a board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the board base 1171 in the rear view and is fitted to the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and the right end of the board cover 1172 in the rear view. And an elastic fixing piece that projects rearward and is elastically engaged with the engaging portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  As shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed on the right side of the rear view, two at a time, with the elastic fixing piece 1175 interposed therebetween, to seal the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a sealing seal (not shown) stuck over the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the sealing seal It has a protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking in any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Have been. In order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, the main control board box 1170 needs to cut the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking, so that the opening and closing traces of the main control board box 1170 remain. Has become. Thus, whether the main control board box 1170 has been illegally opened can be visually and clearly determined from the outside.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. In the main control board box 1170 of this example, a sealing seal is stuck over the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the sealing seal is cut. It must be peeled off or peeled off, and even with this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such misconduct.

  In the main control board box 1170, an opening that penetrates the board cover 1172 in the front-rear direction is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. In addition, by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from outside without opening the main control board box 1170, Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the hermetic seal are skillfully worked, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed by visual inspection, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance can be obtained. You can do it.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position on the front component 1110. The display unit 1181 is provided on the front surface of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

  On the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 102A, a game state that is changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in a front view. A game status indicator 1183 made up of one LED for performing the game, and two LEDs vertically arranged on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 to display the number of reserves for accepting a game ball to the first starting port 2101. 1st special symbol storage display 1184 for the first, and the first special lottery result, which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol storage display 1184 and which is drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2101, is used as the first special symbol. A first special symbol display 1185 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying as a second start port 210 which is disposed diagonally above and to the right of the first special symbol display 1185. The second special symbol display 1186 made up of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result selected by accepting the game ball as a second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol indicator 1186 And a second special symbol storage and display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port 2102.

  In addition, the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reserves related to the passage of the game balls through the gate portion 2105 arranged in a circular arc substantially along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol storage display 1188 made up of four LEDs for display, and a normal lottery result which is arranged below the normal symbol storage display and drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2105 is displayed as a normal symbol. And a regular symbol display 1189 composed of one LED for performing the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is arranged side by side on the diagonally upper right side of the normal symbol storage display 1188. And a round indicator 1190 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the open / close pattern 2103.

  The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red / green / orange color LED that can change its emission color. Depending on the combination, various game states (for example, a probability fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a probability change time reduction state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

  When the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol variably on the first special symbol display 1185, a game ball is received in the first starting port 2101. In this case, the display of the number of changes (the number of storages) of the first special symbol for which the start of the variable display is stored (held) is displayed. The first special symbol storage display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are used. Are turned on together, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks when the number of reservations is three, and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both. It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  When the second special symbol display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the second special symbol variably on the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is received in the second starting port 2102. In this case, the display of the number of changes (the number of storages) of the second special symbol for which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol storage display lamp 1187a, When the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a flashes and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is lit when the number of reservations is three, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Furthermore, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery selected by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. It displays the result and the second special lottery result. The 7-segment LED is stopped after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and is stopped by the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The special lottery result and the second special lottery result can be recognized by the player.

  Also, the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red / green / orange color LED that can change its luminescent color, and is a combination of a luminescent color that emits light and lighting / flashing. Accordingly, it is possible to display a normal lottery result which is selected by a game ball passing through the gate unit 2105. The display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 1189 is, similarly to the special symbol, changed and displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

  The normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate 2105 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored (stored) ordinary symbols is displayed. The ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, the number of reserved ordinary symbols can be displayed. In this example, up to four variable displays of the ordinary symbols are held (stored).

  Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round indicator lamp 1190a and a 15-round indicator lamp 1190b, each of which includes a predetermined LED. The number can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game state indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 of the function display unit 1180, and the normal symbol memory The display 1188, the ordinary symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 162). At the rear end of the rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached.

  In this example, the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, so that the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the configuration of the game board 4 embodied by the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by a store clerk or the like without being confused. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 each composed of 7-segment LEDs are each composed of eight LED groups. In addition, the first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each configured by four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is configured by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can also provide the same operation and effect as described above, and also, since the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are constituted by eight LED groups, the function display unit 1180 Compared with the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from being anxious during the game and becoming difficult to concentrate on the game. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable by focusing on movable effects and effect images.

[1-4F. Second Embodiment of Gaming Panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 having a different form from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the front component 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as that described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. The game panel 1200 according to the present embodiment is a plate-like member which is thinner than the above-described game panel 1150 and is capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110 from the outer shape of the front component 1110. It also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small external shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

  The game panel 1200 panel board 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, a methacrylic resin, or a glass or metal. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The thickness of the panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum thickness that can be sufficiently held even when the obstacle nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1211 which are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1212 which are arranged in the vicinity of the lower left outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend vertically. It has. These fitting holes 1211 and long holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. In addition, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a stepped engagement step 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to substantially half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion 1127 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500, which will be described in detail later. The attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed from the front side (see FIG. 115 and the like).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 of the game panel 1200 has a size that encompasses the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of a wooden board (in this example, about 20 mm) (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 has a holding step 1221 which detachably holds the panel plate 1210 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a front and rear portion having a size substantially equal to the game area 1100 inside the holding step 1221. And a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface substantially equal to the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. And are substantially flush with each other. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface having a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to a change in temperature or a change with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. The clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step 1221, and from the front of the holding step 1221 toward the front. It has a plurality of projecting pins 1223 which extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with respect to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engagement claw 1224 and an engagement piece 1225 that engage with the engagement step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured to protrude toward and engage elastically with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 has such a size that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 on the lower side of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and is located between the front side of the holding step 1221 and the panel. In a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed, a predetermined amount is extended upward (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction, through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, panel holder 1220 and front component 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided at its rear side with a mounting support portion 1227 which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower side and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to the mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed in a state where the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side projects rearward above a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth) can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 155 and the like) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment supporting portion 1227 (in this example, approximately 2.5 mm). And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010c can be prevented from protruding rearward from the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (Pachinko machine 1) can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding opening 601.

  Further, in the panel holder 1220, as shown in the drawing, a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodation recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 1229 is provided with a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure) that protrudes forward from a fixing portion 3010c formed in a front flange shape in the back box 3010). Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a substantially rectangular (square hole) blind hole as viewed from the rear.

  It should be noted that, for the mounting hole 1228, a hole having a large diameter and a hole having a small diameter are mixed, and a mounting hole having an appropriate diameter is selected according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that are open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Since the front face of the panel holder 1220 is substantially flat, the rear face of the front component 1110 disposed on the front face is substantially flat, and the game ball fired from the hit ball firing device 650 However, it is designed to be smoothly guided. Further, as shown in the drawing, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 1220. For example, a box-shaped rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 has a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to a positioning device such as an obstacle nail implantation device (not shown) or an assembling jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail implantation device. It can be set in the state where it was done. In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 of the front component 1110, and penetrating horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end in front view, and And a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protruding portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating the lower right corner in front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is recessed forward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and has a lower end side opened downward. A notch 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and cut out so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is formed on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). The positioning protrusion 607 provided is adapted to be fitted, and the outboard discharge groove 1235 is fitted to the positioning protrusion 607, so that the game board 4 relatively moves in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3. It is being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 and the engaging step 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. The panel nail 1210 can be set to the conventional obstacle nail implantation device while the panel plate 1210 is held in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation device, and the cost for implanting the obstacle nail G is increased. It can be suppressed.

  Although not shown, the gaming panel 1200 of the present example is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in a predetermined gauge array in a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. And the front unit 2000 can be attached. The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, since only the front unit is supported on the thin panel plate 1210, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted due to the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200, and to provide a transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Also, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel board 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel board 1210 in which the position of obstacle nails, winning holes and the like changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 having the game board 4 capable of supporting various models can be provided only by replacing the panel plate 1210 alone.

  Furthermore, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which is mounted and fixed to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if the positions are different. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of the front component]
Next, a front component 1110A in a form different from the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the gaming panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. Only the configuration is different from that of FIG. 103 to FIG. 105, and the detailed description is omitted here.

  The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 106 and 107 is different from the above-described front component 1110 in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrated in the front-rear direction is different and does not include the function display unit 1180. The points are very different. The other components are the same as those of the front component 1110, and are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted. In the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). 2000).

  As shown in the drawing, the front component 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending from the out-port guiding surface 1115 in the clockwise direction in a front view to the stop portion 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out-port guiding surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component 1110. ing. Specifically, a portion from the stop portion 1114 to a position immediately above the right stamp stamping portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stop portion 1114 is formed in a gentle arc shape, and the out port is formed from the lower end of the arc shape. It is formed in a linear shape that is inclined so that the space up to the guide surface 1115 becomes lower toward the out-port guide surface 1115.

  The front component 1110A of the present example can secure a wider game area 1100 as compared with the above-described front component 1110, so that the player can be more enjoyed by the wide game area 1100. I can do it.

  In the examples of FIGS. 106 and 107, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1110A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A game panel 1150 composed of a single plate as shown at 101 may be attached.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, a security structure of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 109 is a perspective view of a state in which the game board is accommodated and viewed from the rear side.

  First, as shown in FIG. 108, the security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. , And a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of a synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

  As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material, and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. At the same time, the size in the front-rear direction is larger than the size in the front-rear direction of the game panel 4 in which the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 are combined. The side security plate 950 extends in the up-down direction and extends in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the body frame 3, and a front end extending inward (open side) in a substantially right angle direction from the front end of the side surface piece 952 a. Piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance behind the front end piece 952b, and a substantially right angle inwardly extending from the rear end of the side piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Also, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 (main body 952) is increased by a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the entire body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed by forming a plurality of long metal plates into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like. The outer side of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the supporting side is provided with a supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section that is opened outwardly (on the supporting side). In the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the supporting-side U-shaped protrusion 166, and the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hardly bent. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is mounted and supported on the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support 156 and the lower shaft support 158, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side is provided. When an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a bur is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the supporting metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. There is a risk that wrongdoing will take place. On the other hand, in the security structure of the present example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c formed inside the front end of the security side plate 950. The rear side piece of the U-shaped projection 166 formed in the substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (penetrated), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. It is configured to be sandwiched by the side U-shaped protruding pieces 166. Thus, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door frame 5 abuts on the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 is closed. Can be prevented from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3, so that the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being cut open, and the main body frame can be prevented. 3 can be prevented from being fraudulently performed to open the door frame 5.

  Further, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be hardly distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a on the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 on the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 is temporarily behind the rear end of the side piece 952a. Is broken, an illegal tool such as a piano wire cannot enter the game area 1100 on the front of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and an illegal act is performed. Can be reliably prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 108, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the security side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. Is able to fully counter the vandalism. Generally, in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of an island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible for an unauthorized tool to penetrate behind the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Then, as a security structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 109, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731 and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branching unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3 are used for the game board 4. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is opened, it can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily detected, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed. Further, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against illegal acts. ing.

  In addition, since the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, the main body frame is used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached to / detached from the main body 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt, etc. remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, they are kept outside. , It is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of gaming board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 110 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the front right, and FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the front left. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the main components of the game board disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the main components of the game board disassembled and viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is formed by a player operating the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110A that defines the inner periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven, and a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 and attached to the rear side of the front component 1110A so as to close the game area 1100. A game panel 1150 having a plurality of openings 1158 (see FIG. 114 and the like) penetrating in the front-rear direction and defining a rear end of the game area 1100.

  The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wooden plywood such as a plywood.

  Further, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a back unit 3000 from the player side. A liquid crystal display device 1900 that is attached so as to be visible and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a substrate holder 1160 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear, and a rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 And a main control board box 1170 attached to the main control board.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the present example includes an attacker unit 2100 disposed so as to extend right above the out-port 1151 in a lower part in the game area 1100 and a right-hand front surface of the attacker unit 2100 in a pachinko machine. A function display unit 1180 attached to a position where the player can view the game state from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 when attached to the door frame 1, and a game area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. , And a frame-shaped center role 2500 arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 1100.

  The back unit 3000 of the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, has a front side opened, and has an opening 3010b formed in the rear wall 3010a, through which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A back box 3010, a back and side effect unit 3100 disposed above the opening 3010 b and both left and right sides in the back box 3010, and a back and above effect unit 3300 disposed above the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010; And a lower back effect unit 3500 arranged below the opening 3010b in the back box 3010.

  On the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board for accommodating a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 161) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150, which will be described in detail later. A box 1910 and an inverter board box 1920 accommodating an inverter board 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold cathode tube as a backlight are provided.

  In the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the gaming area 1100 is divided into right and left by a center role 2500 attached to the game panel 1150, and the right outer periphery of the center role 2500 and the game are played. Between the inner circumference of the area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component 1110A), the width is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer circumference on the left side of the center role 2500 and the inside of the game area 1100. Between the circumference (the inner circumference of the front component 1110A), a wide area through which the game balls can sufficiently flow is provided. In the area on the left and lower sides of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100, the game panel 1150 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge array on the front surface of the.

  In the gaming board 4 of this example, when a game ball is driven to the right side of the center role 2500 (with a predetermined strength or more), the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100 passes through the right outer periphery of the center role 2500. Flows down to the guide passage member 2142, and is guided by the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142, and is discharged downward from immediately above the gate portion 2105, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 with extremely high probability. I have. That is, the game ball can be easily entered into the gate unit 2105 by performing a so-called right strike.

  Although details will be described later, in this example, when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, the normal lottery result is drawn and executed in a very short time. Therefore, if the normal lottery result is “hit”, the movable piece 2106 retreats and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2102, and the game ball that has entered the gate portion 2105 moves to the second starting port 2102. It is designed to win. It should be noted that when the ordinary lottery is “losing”, the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2105 is discharged to the upper side of the special winning opening 2103. Therefore, by right-handing, it is possible to play a game directly aiming at the second starting port 2102 or the special winning opening 2103.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is driven into the left side of the center role 2500 (so-called left hit), the game ball is guided in the direction of the front side unit 2200 or the attacker unit 2100 by the plurality of implanted obstacle nails, A game ball can be won at the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200, the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the general winning opening 2104, and the like. When a game ball enters the warp entrance 2504 by being guided to the warp entrance 2504 connected to the stage 2510 of the center role 2500, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center role 2500. The game ball supplied to the 2510 rolls on the stage 2510 in the left and right direction, and can enjoy a movement different from the movement by the obstacle nail, and the game ball enters the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510. When released, it is possible to make the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 win with a high probability.

  As described above, in the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, the right and left sides of the center role 2500 can play games with different impressions, and provide a variety of games so as not to get tired. Is available.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 so as to extend from right above the out port 1151 to the right side, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1150. , A function display unit 1180 attached to the front of the right end in front view, a front side unit 2200 disposed on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and extending in an arc shape substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and a substantially central portion of the game area 1100. And a frame-shaped center role 2500 that is arranged on the right side of the game area and is supported by the game panel 1150.

  Although details will be described later, the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 pays out a predetermined number of game balls by accepting game balls and, at the same time, accepts the game balls so that a predetermined special lottery result is randomly selected. A starting port 2102, a special winning port 2103 for receiving a game ball according to a special lottery result and paying out a predetermined number of game balls by receiving the game ball, and a predetermined number of game balls by receiving the game ball. The game machine includes a general winning port 2104 to be paid out, and a gate unit 2105 from which a predetermined normal lottery result is drawn when a game ball passes.

  The first starting port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 of the present example are capable of always receiving game balls. The second starting port 2102 and the special winning port 2103 are variable winning ports that can change between a state where game balls can be received and a state where game balls cannot be received. The second starting port 2102 can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate 2105, and the special winning port 2103 is a first starting port 2101 or a second starting port 2102. The game can be accepted in response to a special lottery result that is selected when the game ball is accepted.

  The first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 of this example is disposed directly below the stage 2510 in the center role item 2500 on an axis passing through the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 (directly above the out port 1151). Further, the second starting port 2102 is disposed on the lower right side in front view of the first starting port 2101. Furthermore, the special winning opening 2103 is arranged such that the left end is located below the second starting opening 2102 and on the right side of the first starting opening 2101 in a front view, and is substantially directly below the second starting opening 2102. Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is arranged on the upper right side in front view of the first starting opening 2101. Further, the gate unit 2105 is disposed on the upper right side in front view of the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100, and immediately above the second starting opening 2102.

  As will be described later in detail, the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 has three general prize ports 2201 arranged on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 in front view and a game arranged on the upper left of the general prize port 2201 in front view. A shelf 2202 is provided which can guide a game ball flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 in the area 1100 in a front view to the right.

  Further, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a large opening 1158 formed substantially at the center of the game panel 1150, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged at the rear side, etc. Is formed in a frame shape having a window 2501 that can be viewed from the player side. The center role item 2500 includes a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502a in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, a peripheral wall portion 2503 for preventing game balls flowing down in the game area 1100 from entering the frame, A warp entrance 2504 that opens at a predetermined position of the peripheral wall 2503, a warp exit 2505 that releases a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2504 into the frame, and a game ball that is released from the warp exit 2505 are rolled in the left-right direction. And a stage 2510 to be released into the game area 1100 and recirculated later.

  The stage 2510 of the center role item 2500 is disposed immediately above the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and a game ball returned to the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510 has a high probability. The first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 can be received.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit of the attacker unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the second unit of the attacker unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the second unit of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit of the attacker unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed after. Further, FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit of the attacker unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed after. FIG. 130 is a front view showing a part of the attacker unit.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front into an opening 1158 formed at the lower part of the center of the game panel 1150 in the left-right direction. It is fixed. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) through which game balls hit into the game area 1100 can be accepted. Specifically, a first starting port 2101 which is arranged immediately above the out port 1151 in the game panel 1150 and is capable of always receiving a game ball, and a position on the right side and slightly below the first starting port 2101 in a front view. , A large winning opening 2103 located below the second starting opening 2102 and to the right of the first starting opening 2101 in a front view, and a first starting opening 2101. And a general winning opening 2104 disposed slightly above the first starting opening 2101 between the first starting opening 2102 and the second starting opening 2102.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 includes a gate unit 2105 from which a normal lottery result is drawn when a game ball passes. The gate portion 2105 is disposed substantially right above the second starting port 2102 on the right side and slightly above the general winning opening 2104 in a front view (see FIG. 130).

  As shown, the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is in a state where the game ball can always be received. In addition, the second starting port 2102 is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and has a plate-shaped movable piece 2106 that can move forward and backward with respect to the opened opening. Have. When the movable piece 2106 moves forward, the second starting port 2102 cannot receive the game ball, and when the movable piece 2106 retreats, the game ball can be received. The second starting port 2102 is a so-called variable winning opening. I have.

  The large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape whose front-to-left and right directions are 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball and whose vertical direction is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball, and faces forward. And a plate-like opening / closing member 2107 which can open and close the opened opening. The opening and closing member 2107 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis. When the opening and closing member 2107 is substantially vertical, it is impossible to receive a game ball and the opening and closing member 2107 is substantially horizontal. When the state is reached, game balls can be accepted, which is a so-called variable winning opening.

  Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, like the first starting port 2101, so that the game ball can always be received. ing. In addition, the gate portion 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed so that game balls can be circulated in a vertical direction with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls.

  The attacker unit 2100 of this embodiment will be described in further detail. The attacker unit 2100 has a first unit 2110 having a first starting port 2101 and a winning port 2103, and a second unit having a second starting port 2102 and a gate unit 2105. Two units 2120, a third unit 2130 having a general winning opening 2104, a fourth unit 2140 to which the function display unit 1180 is attached, a first unit 2110, a second unit 2120, a third unit 2130, and a fourth unit A unit base 2150 supporting the 2140 from the rear side, and an attacker solenoid 2113, a starting port solenoid 2124, a count sensor 2114, and a second starting port sensor 2125 attached to the rear side of the unit base 2150 are connected to the panel relay board 3025. Atta to relay And mosquitoes unit relay board 2160, and a.

  The first unit 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 has a first starting port 2101 and an opening 2111a facing the special winning opening 2103, and is a plate-shaped first base 2111 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1150; A box-shaped first rotatably supporting an opening / closing member 2107 which is attached to the rear side of the first base 2111 so as to face the special winning opening 2103 from the opening and has the large winning opening 2103 and opens and closes the special winning opening 2103. A case 2112, an attacker solenoid 2113 supported in the first case 2112 for driving the opening and closing member 2107 to open and close, and a count sensor 2114 supported in the first case 2112 and detecting a game ball received in the special winning opening 2103. And a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side and arranged on the rear side of the first case 2112 Is provided with a winning hole decorative substrate 2115, the.

  The first unit 2110 includes a middle object detection sensor 2116 attached to the front of the first base 2111 below the first starting port 2101, and a front unit of the middle object detection sensor 2116 disposed on the front of the first base 2111. A middle guiding decorative member 2117 having a predetermined decoration attached thereto, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the first base 2111 at a position corresponding to the middle object detecting sensor 2116 and the middle guiding decorative member 2117 and mounted on the front surface. An attacker decoration substrate 2118. The first unit 2110 is attached to the unit base 2150 via the first base 2111.

  The first base 2111 of the first unit 2110 is integrally formed with a first start port 2101 that projects forward (inside the game area 1100) from the front surface of the game panel 1150 and that is open at the top and the back, and has a rear end. When attached to the game panel 1150, it extends to a position substantially coincident with the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Thus, the game balls received in the first starting port 2101 can be guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

  The first case 2112 of the first unit 2110 has a box shape with an open front side, and is vertically divided by an upper case 2112a and a lower case 2122b. In addition, the first case 2112 includes a discharge port member 2112c that discharges the game ball received by the special winning opening 2103 and detected by the count sensor 2114 downward from a predetermined position. The first case 2112 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and guides light from the special winning opening decorative board 2115 disposed on the rear side to the opening / closing member 2107 to open or close the large winning opening 2103 or the open / close state. The member 2107 can be decorated with light.

  Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2113 of the first unit 2110 is supported by the first case 2112 so that the plunger moves in the left-right direction. The attacker solenoid 2113 can rotate the opening / closing member 2107 by a link member 2113a connected to the tip of a plunger which moves forward and backward by energization. Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2113 is provided with a spring that biases the plunger in the forward (projecting) direction, and the opening / closing member 2107 closes the special winning opening 2103 with the plunger advanced. Position. That is, in this example, when the attacker solenoid 2113 is energized, the plunger is retracted (submerged), the opening / closing member 2107 is rotated from the closed position to the open position, and the game ball can be received in the special winning opening 2103. It has become.

  Although not shown in detail, the middle object detection sensor 2116 of the first unit 2110 includes a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range in front. ing. In this example, the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the middle object detection sensor 2116 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and the front surface of the middle object detection sensor 2116 moves more vertically than an object moving in the left-right direction. The object to be detected is easier to detect.

  The middle guide decorative member 2117 of the first unit 2110 is provided with a decoration in which a downward arrow is arranged in a circle on the front surface, and a wall along the outer periphery of the decoration extends rearward behind the front decoration. It is provided with a cylindrical frame-shaped light shielding member 2117a that protrudes. Thus, the inside decoration and the outside of the arrow can be illuminated differently by the middle attacker decoration substrate 2118 disposed on the rear side of the middle guiding decoration member 2117.

  The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 has a plate-shaped second base 2121 attached to the front of the game panel 1150 and a front of the game panel 1150 attached to the front of the second base 2121 (in the game area 1100). And a passage forming member 2122 that projects to form a second starting port 2102 and a gate portion 2105, and a movable piece 2106 that is attached to the rear side of the second base 2121 and opens and closes the second starting port 2102, so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. A second case 2123 and a starting port solenoid 2124 supported in the second case 2123 to open and close the movable piece 2106 are provided.

  The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 includes a second starting port sensor 2125 supported by the second base 2121 and the second case 2123 to detect a game ball received by the second starting port 2102, and a second base. A gate sensor 2126 supported by the second case 2123 and the second case 2123 to detect a game ball passing through the gate portion 2105, and a second starter disposed behind the second base 2121 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A mouth decoration board 2127 and a light blocking member 2128 that is disposed between the second starting port decoration board 2127 and the second base 2121 and has a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided.

  The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 forms a part of a function display board 1191 in which a normal symbol display 1189 composed of two LEDs is mounted on a front surface of the second base 2121 at a predetermined position. A normal symbol display board 1191a is attached.

  The second base 2121 of the second unit 2120 has a substantially entire front surface formed as a flat surface along the surface of the game panel 1150, and game balls can flow to the front side in cooperation with the passage forming member 2122. A simple passage can be formed. In addition, the second base 2121 includes a through hole 2121a penetrating in the front-rear direction through which a game ball can pass at a lower left corner in a front view, and a concave portion 2121b concavely curved rearward near an upper right corner in a front view. . Further, although not shown in detail, the second base 2121 has an opening through which a plate-shaped movable piece 2106 can pass, a sensor support 2121b for supporting the second starting port sensor 2125 and the gate sensor 2126, and a normal. A substrate support 2121d for supporting the symbol display substrate 1191a, a wall 2121e extending forward from the right end in front view of the substrate support 2121d and covering the right side of the ordinary symbol display 1189 are provided. Note that the second base 2121 is formed of a material having a light-transmitting property. The second base 2121 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  As shown, the passage forming member 2122 of the second unit 2120 is formed in an anti-L-shape when viewed from the front, having a portion extending vertically and a portion extending leftward from the lower end thereof. Have been. The passage forming member 2122 is provided with a first passage 2122a having an upper end and a lower end opened at a position of a portion extending in a vertical direction when viewed from the front, which allows game balls to flow in a vertical direction. In addition, the passage forming member 2122 allows the game ball to flow in the left-right direction at the position of the part extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and opens upward at a position where the right end side is substantially opposed to the lower end opening of the first passage 2122a. A second passage 2122b having a closed left end is provided. The first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122 are vertically separated from each other by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Further, the passage forming member 2122 includes a plate-like wall portion 2122c connecting the lower end of the right side wall of the first passage 2122a in a front view and the right end of the right end opening of the second passage 2122b, and a first upper end of the wall portion 2122c. A right discharge opening 2122d that is open to the right side of the passage 2122a in front view and through which game balls can pass, and a right shelf 2122e that extends shortly from the lower end of the right discharge opening 2122d toward the right in front view, A left discharge portion 2122f formed by the left lower end of the first passage 2122a in front view and an upper end of the second passage 2122b on the opposite side of the wall portion 2122c with respect to the first passage 2122a and through which a game ball can pass; A left shelf 2122g formed at the upper side of the second passage 2122b and inclined downward to the left as viewed from the front, which is continuous with the lower end of the second passage 2122f; And a, a guide wall 2122h projecting rearwardly from the front wall at a height position definitive right outlet 2122d are formed.

  In this passage forming member 2122, an upper end opening of the first passage 2122a is a gate portion 2105, and a right end opening of the second passage 2122b is a second starting port 2102. The passage forming member 2122 is capable of supporting the gate sensor 2126 at a position substantially above the right discharge port 2122d at the substantially vertical center of the first passage 2122a and flowing through the first passage 2122a. The game ball being played can be detected by the gate sensor 2126.

  The passage forming member 2122 is formed at a position where the right end side opening of the second passage 2122b corresponds to the movable piece 2106 which moves forward and backward from the front surface of the second base 2121 in a state assembled as the second unit 2120. The opening on the right end side is the second starting port 2102. Further, the passage forming member 2122 can support the second starting port sensor 2125 at a position substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the second passage 2122b, and circulates through the second passage 2122b (that is, the second passage 2122b). , The game ball that has passed through the second starting port 2102) can be detected by the second starting port sensor 2125.

  In addition, the passage forming member 2122 can cover the front side of the ordinary symbol display substrate 1191a attached to the front surface of the second base 2121 at a position below the right shelf 2122e.

  The second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122 has an arc-shaped bottom wall located immediately below the right end side opening when viewed from the front, so that game balls that have passed through the right end side opening (second starting port 2102) can be smoothly moved. To the left. The guide wall 2122h formed in the first passage 2122a of the passage forming member 2122 is arranged at a position corresponding to the recess 2121b of the second base 2121, and is inclined in an arc shape so as to become lower toward the rear. The game ball that has passed through the upper end opening (gate portion 2105) of the first passage 2122a can be smoothly guided into the recess 2121b of the second base 2121.

  The second case 2123 of the second unit 2120 has a box shape with an open front, and can be vertically divided by an upper case 2123a and a lower case 2123b. The movable piece 2106 can be supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. In addition, the second case 2123 includes, in addition to the movable piece 2106 and the starting port solenoid 2124, a link member 2129 for transmitting the movement of a plunger that moves up and down in the vertical direction of the starting port solenoid 2124 to move the movable piece 2106 forward and backward. , Inside support.

  The starting port solenoid 2124 of the second unit 2120 is supported by the second case 2123 so that the plunger advances and retreats, and in a normal state (when not energized), the plunger projects downward. In this normal state, the movable piece 2106 protrudes forward from the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the tip of the plunger in the starting port solenoid 2124, and moves to the second starting port 2102. Of the game ball is blocked. On the other hand, when the starting port solenoid 2124 is energized, the tip of the plunger rises so as to be immersed, and the movable piece 2106 moves rearward from the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the tip of the plunger. As a result, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2102.

  The second unit 2120 includes a plurality of rectangular openings 2128a arranged in the left-right direction in the light-shielding member 2128, and each opening 2128a of the light-shielding member 2128 is provided on the front surface of the second startup port decorative board 2127. LEDs are mounted so as to correspond to each other, and light emission decoration can be performed for each opening 2128a.

  When the game ball enters the first passage 2122a from the upper end opening (gate portion 2105), the second unit 2120 passes through the gate sensor 2126 and is recessed in the second base 2121 by the guide wall 2122h inclined backward. After being once sent into the inside 2121b, it returns from the inside of the recess 2121b to the inside of the first passage 2122a again, and flows down onto the second starting port 2102. In the first passage 2122a, the guiding ball 2122h and the concave portion 2121b allow the game ball to meander, attenuating the flow speed of the game ball, and the movable piece 2106 and the second passage arranged on the downstream side. It is possible to reduce the impact applied when it comes into contact with 2122a.

  In this example, the passage of the gate portion 2105 is detected by the gate sensor 2126. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2126, a normal lottery is performed and a predetermined normal lottery result is selected. . When the lottery result of the lottery is a hit, the movable piece 2106 retreats from the front surface of the second base 2121 by driving the starting port solenoid 2124, the second starting port 2102 is opened, and a game ball can be received. The game ball flowing down from the first passage 2122a enters the second passage 2122b through the second starting port 2102. The game ball that has entered the second passage 2122b flows leftward in a front view by the arc-shaped bottom wall, and is detected from the left end of the second passage 2122b after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2125. The second unit 2120 is discharged (discharged) to the rear side (the rear side of the game panel 1150) through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 on the side. In this example, the time from when the gate sensor 2126 detects the passage of the game ball until the movable ball 2106 is slid by the driving of the starting port solenoid 2124 to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2102 is determined. If the result of the normal lottery is a short time (for example, 0.1 second to 1 second), the game ball that triggered the lottery is accepted to the second starting port 2102 with extremely high probability. It has become. In addition, the starting port solenoid 2124 is driven only for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second to 2 seconds) per one hit. When the driving is completed, the movable piece 2106 slides forward, and the second starting port 2102 is closed.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is a lost lottery, the starting port solenoid 2124 is not driven and the movable piece 2106 remains forward, and the game ball flowing down from the first passage 2122a is moved by the movable piece 2106. As a result, entry into the second starting port 2102 is prevented. Then, the game ball whose reception into the second starting port 2102 is prevented by the movable piece 2106 flows from the left discharge port 2122f between the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b to the left shelf 2122g, The game is released from the left end of the shelf 2122g (into the game area 1100 on the front of the game panel 1150). In addition, the movable piece 2106 is inclined such that the upper left side is lower on the upper surface, and even if the game ball tries to stay on the movable piece 2106, the movable ball naturally rolls leftward in front view due to the inclination, and It is configured to be discharged from the discharge port 2122f to the left shelf 2122g.

  In the second unit 2120, depending on the state of the game ball flowing through the first passage 2122a, the game ball may be released from the right discharge port 2122d in the first passage 2122a, and may be discharged from the right discharge port 2122d. The game ball passes through the right shelf 2122e and is discharged from the right end of the right shelf 2122e into the game area 1100.

  In addition, the third unit 2130 of the attacker unit 2100 has a general winning opening 2104 that can be brought into contact with the front surface of the gaming panel 1150, and has a through hole 2131a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the right side of the general winning opening 2104 when viewed from the front. A third base 2131, a lens member 2132 which is inserted into the through hole of the third base 2131 from the rear side and is attached to the third base 2131 and has a light-transmitting property, and is disposed behind the lens member 2132. A gate decoration substrate 2133 on which LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  The third base 2131 of the third unit 2130 protrudes forward (inside the gaming area 1100) from the front surface of the gaming panel 1150, and is integrally formed with a general winning opening 2104 that is open at the top and the rear, and the rear end is a game. It extends to a position substantially coinciding with the rear surface of the game panel 1150 when attached to the panel 1150. The third base 2131 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  The gate decoration board 2133 of the third unit 2130 can make the LED mounted on the front surface emit light in an appropriate color, so that the inside of the through hole of the third base 2131 can be illuminated and decorated by the lens member 2132. . Note that the gate decoration substrate 2133 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  The fourth unit 2140 of the attacker unit 2100 is attached to a front surface of the game panel 1150 and has a plate-shaped fourth base 2141 on which a function display substrate 1191 is attached to a lower rear surface, and a game panel attached to an upper front surface of the fourth base 2141. A guide passage member 2142 having a guide passage 2142a projecting forward (inside the game area 1100) from the front surface of the 1150 and guiding the game ball in the left-right direction; and a guide passage member 2142 disposed below the guide passage 2142a. A right object detection sensor 2143 attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141, and a right guide decoration member 2144 attached to the guide passage member 2142 and having a predetermined decoration so that the front surface is exposed forward on the right side of the right object detection sensor 2143. And

  The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 has a triangular shape in a front view when viewed from the front, and has a left-side oblique side substantially in the shape of an arc that substantially follows the inner peripheral shape of the game area 1100. The fourth base 2141 has a plurality of through-holes 2141a formed at the lower portion thereof, each of which faces a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the function display substrate 1191. The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 is adapted to be attached to the unit base 2150.

  The guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 extends along the upper side extending in the left-right direction of the fourth base 2141. The right end in front view is opened upward, and the left end is opened downward, so that a game ball can flow therethrough. It has. The guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 has a front side closed and a rear side opened, and the opened rear side is closed by the front surface of the fourth base 2141. The guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 is inclined so that the left side in the front view becomes lower.

  In addition, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2412 is configured such that, when assembled, the right end in the front view is located at a position close to the inner periphery of the game region 1100, and flows down along the right inner periphery of the game region 1100. The game ball that has entered enters the inside from the right end side opening. As shown in FIG. 130, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2412 is bent downward at the left end as viewed from the front, and the left end opening that opens downward when assembled as the attacker unit 2100 has a gate portion 2106. (The upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120). In the guide passage 2142a and on the front surface of the fourth base 2141 corresponding to the guide passage 2142a, ridges extending in the up-down direction are alternately arranged in the left-right direction. The flow speed can be attenuated by meandering. The left end side opening of the guide passage 2142a and the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a are separated from each other by a distance slightly longer than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The right object detection sensor 2143 of the fourth unit 2140 includes a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range in front. In this example, the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the right object detection sensor 2143 are vertically arranged in a row, and the front side of the right object detection sensor 2143 moves in the left-right direction more than the object moving in the vertical direction. The object to be detected is easier to detect. The fourth unit 2140 includes a sensor cover 2145 that covers the front side of the right object detection sensor 2143 and is attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141.

  The right guiding decorative member 2144 of the fourth unit 2140 has a decoration in which a rightward arrow is arranged in a circle on the front surface. On the rear side of the right guiding decorative member 2144, there is provided a cylindrical frame-shaped light shielding member 2146 whose wall along the decorative shape of the right guiding decorative member 2144 extends rearward. Thus, the inside and outside of the arrow can be illuminated differently by the back lower right decorative substrate 3021 of the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side of the right guiding decorative member 2144.

  The unit base 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front side is open. In addition, the unit base 2150 includes a discharge port 2150a that receives a game ball that has passed through the through hole 2121b of the second base 2121 of the second unit 2120 and discharges the game ball backward from the rear surface of the unit base 2150.

  In a state where the attacker unit 2100 of the present example is arranged in the game area 1100, the first starting port 2101 is located at the approximate center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1151 with the middle guiding decorative member 2117 therebetween. The large winning opening 2103 is located substantially at the center in the left-right direction between the first starting opening 2101 and the right inner periphery of the game area 1100.

  In the attacker unit 2100, the first starting port 2101 is located immediately above the out port 1151 and directly below the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2500 in the center role 2500 which will be described in detail later. Thus, the game ball released from the chance exit 2514 can be received at the first starting port 2101 with a high probability. The game balls received by the first starting port 2101 are sent to the rear side of the game panel 1150, and then sent to the guide path 3071 in the back left guide member 3070 of the back unit 3000 described later. I have.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 supports the function display unit 1180 so as to be positioned on the right side of the special winning opening 2103 in a front view, and has a right end (a right end of the function display unit 1180) inside the right side in the game area 1100. It is located slightly inside (left side) from the circumference. As a result, the game ball flowing down from above along the right inner periphery of the game area 1100 falls on the guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100, and the guide passage 2142a opened upward at the right end side. It is designed to enter inside. The game ball that has entered the guide passage 2142a is guided by the guide passage 2142a to the left in front view, and is discharged downward just above the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120, that is, directly above the gate portion 2105. ing. Then, the game ball released downward from the left end side opening of the guide passage 2142a enters the gate portion 2105 with an extremely high probability.

  The game ball that has entered the gate portion 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is guided backward by the guide wall 2122h of the passage forming member 2122 after the passage is detected by the gate sensor 2126 arranged in the first passage 2122a, and It enters into the concave portion 2121b of the base 2121. Then, the game ball that has entered the concave portion 2121b is guided forward at the lower end of the concave portion 2121b, contacts the rear surface of the front wall of the passage forming member 2122, and flows downward. That is, in the first passage 2122a of the attacker unit 2100, the game balls meander in the front-back direction and flow down.

  In this example, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, a normal lottery is immediately performed, and the result of the selected normal lottery is instantly displayed on the normal symbol display 1189, and On the other hand, when the lottery result of the lottery is a hit, the starting port solenoid 2124 is driven to move the movable piece 2106 backward, so that the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2102. Therefore, a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2105 can be accepted into the second starting port 2102 with a very high probability when a win is determined as a result of the normal lottery.

  Then, the game ball received by the second starting port 2102 enters the second passage 2122b from the second starting port 2102, is sent leftward in front view, and is detected by the second starting port sensor 2125. The course is changed rearward from the left end of the second passage 2122b, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 and the discharge opening 2150a of the unit base 2150. .

  When the result of the ordinary lottery is a loss, the game ball discharged downward from the first passage 2122a comes into contact with the movable piece 2106 closing the second starting port 2102, and the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b are connected. Is discharged from the left discharge port 2122f to the upper left shelf 2122g of the second passage 2122b, and after the left shelf 2122g is rolled leftward when viewed from the front, the left end of the left shelf 2122g enters the game area 1100. Is released to the area above the special winning opening 2103 in the.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 responds to a special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball in the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102 (for example, “big hit”, “middle hit”, “small hit” , Etc.), the attacker solenoid 2113 in the first unit 2110 is driven in a predetermined pattern, and the drive of the attacker solenoid 2113 causes the opening / closing member 2107 to rotate from the upright closed position to the substantially horizontal open position. The game ball can be accepted into the special winning opening 2103. The game balls received in the special winning opening 2103 are discharged to the lower side of the attacker unit 2100 after being detected by the count sensor 2114 on the rear side of the game panel 1150.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2104 arranged between the first starting port 2101 and the gate portion 2105 to the rear side of the game panel 1150, and thereafter, the back unit described later. At 3000, the upper right opening 3061 of the back right guiding member 3060 is fed into the right guiding passage.

[2-3. Front side unit]
Next, the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 (a) is a perspective view of the front side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 (b) is a perspective view of the front side unit viewed from the rear. The front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the inner side of the game area 1100 on the left side of the center in the left and right direction within the game area 1100 on the panel board 1210 of the game panel 1150 and below the center in the vertical direction. (The right side of the inner rail 1112 in front view) is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150.

  As illustrated, the front side unit 2200 of this example is formed in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 1100 in front view, and is arranged substantially along the arc from the right end to the left in front view. It is mainly provided with three general winning openings 2201 and a shelf 2202 that is arranged at the upper left of the three general winning openings 2201 and is inclined so that the right end side is lower. The three general winning openings 2201 of the front side unit 2200 have a front end extending forward from the front of the gaming panel 1150 and a rear end extending rearward from the rear of the gaming panel 1150. In the game area 1100, a game ball is formed so as to be able to be always received.

  The shelf 2202 of the front side unit 2200 is arranged at a position such that the left end is substantially in contact with the left inner periphery of the game area 1100, and has flowed down the area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100 on the left side in front view. The game ball can be guided rightward.

  The front side unit 2200 is attached to the front of the game panel 1150 and has a plate-shaped unit base 2210 having three general winning openings 2201. The front side unit 2200 is attached to the front of the unit base 2210 and projects forward from the front of the game panel 1150. A guide member 2211 having a shelf 2202 formed at the upper end thereof; a left object detection sensor 2212 disposed on the right side of the guide member 2211 in a front view and below the right end of the shelf 2202 and attached to the front surface of the unit base 2210; A left guiding decorative member 2213 attached to the guide member 2211 and having a predetermined decoration so that the front surface is exposed forward on the left side of the left object detection sensor 2212, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2210 and opened at the front side. And a shallow box-shaped transparent unit cover 2214.

  The unit base 2210 of the front side unit 2200 has a plate-shaped portion that contacts the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a frame-shaped portion that extends rearward from the plate-shaped portion and is inserted into the corresponding opening 1158 of the game panel 1150. And a plate-shaped portion, which is attached to the game panel 1150. The unit base 2210 has a shallow relief-shaped decoration on the front surface and is partially formed to have translucency.

  The guide member 2211 of the front side unit 2200 has a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a shelf 2202 that is linearly inclined so that the right side is lower on the upper side. The guide member 2211 has a circular through hole into which the left guide decorative member 2213 is inserted substantially at the center.

  Although not shown in detail, the left object detection sensor 2212 of the front side unit 2200 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range in front. ing. Note that, in this example, the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the left object detection sensor 2212 are vertically arranged in a row, and on the front surface of the left object detection sensor 2212, move more in the left and right direction than the object moving in the vertical direction. The object to be detected is easier to detect.

  The left guiding decorative member 2213 of the front side unit 2200 has a decoration in which a left-pointing arrow is arranged in a circle on the front surface, and a wall along the outer periphery of the decoration extends rearward behind the front decoration. A protruding cylindrical frame-shaped light shielding member 2213a is provided. In the attached state, the light-shielding member 2213a has a rear end extending to a position slightly in front of the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Thereby, the LED on the back lower left decorative board 3020 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side of the left guiding decorative member 2213 can make the inside and outside of the arrow light-emitting decoration differently.

  The outer shape of the unit cover 2214 of the front side unit 2200 is substantially the same as the frame-shaped portion of the unit base 2210, and the rear end of the unit cover 2214 is formed so as to have a rear end located slightly forward of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 in a mounted state. ing. The unit cover 2214 has a through hole through which the light shielding member 2213a of the left guiding decorative member 2213 can be inserted, and the rear end of the light shielding member 2213a faces rearward.

  The front side unit 2200 of the present embodiment can guide a game ball flowing down the left side of the center role item 2500 in the game area 1100 to the right by the shelf 2202 and at the downstream side of the shelf 2202. The game balls can be received by three general winning openings 2201 arranged in the. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1150, and passes through the left opening 3072 of the back left guiding member 3060 in the back unit 3000 described later to the left guiding passage. It is to be delivered.

[2-4. Center role]
Subsequently, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 144. 132 is a perspective view of the center role viewed from diagonally upper right, FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the center role viewed diagonally from lower left, and FIG. 134 is a perspective view of the center role viewed from back. is there. FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the center role as disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the center role as disassembled for each main component and viewed from the rear. FIG. 137 is a front perspective view of the center right production unit of the center role, and FIG. 138 is a rear perspective view of the center right production unit of the center role. Further, FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the front right middle effect unit exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the front right middle effect unit exploded and viewed from the rear.

  The center role 2500 of the present example is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 which is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. As shown in FIG. 110 and the like, a large window 2501 through which the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed in the front and rear direction in a frame shape occupying most of the game area 1100 and disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized is provided. ing.

  The center role product 2500 has a frame-shaped unit base 2502 having a flange 2502a that can contact the front surface of the game panel 1150 at the outer periphery of the window 2501, and bulges forward from the unit base 2502 to substantially center in the left-right direction. A peripheral wall portion 2503 is provided to guide the game balls flowing down in the game area 1100 to the left and right and to prevent the game balls from entering the frame (in the window portion 2501) as a boundary. Part of the peripheral wall portion 2503 is formed by the unit base 2502.

  Also, the center role item 2500 has entered the warp entrance 2504 (see FIG. 112) and the warp entrance 2504, in which a game ball that is opened on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and that can flow down the game area 1100 can enter. A warp exit 2505 for discharging game balls into the frame, and a game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2505 is rolled in the left-right direction and then released into the game area 1100 above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. And a stage 2510 disposed at the lower inner edge of the window 2501 for reflux.

  Further, the center role 2500 is disposed on the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and is a transparent plate-like partition member 2520 that closes the window portion 2501. A decorative board under the center 2521 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface thereof, a decorative board on the center 2522 in which the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the window portion 2501 and behind the peripheral wall portion 2503, and a unit; An upper flange member 2523 attached to the upper left portion of the front surface of the base 2502 when viewed from the front, and forming a part of the flange portion 2502a; a left rear decorative member 2524 attached to the left side of the rear surface of the unit base 2502 as viewed from the front surface to decorate the frame , Is provided.

  In addition, the center role 2500 is arranged on the right side of the stage 2510 when viewed from the front, and holds the number of reserved special lottery results obtained by accepting game balls in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102, and the gate unit 2105. A number-of-reserve display 2530 capable of displaying the number of reservations of the ordinary lottery results that are drawn by passing the game balls, and a number-of-reserve display 2530 are arranged and attached to the front side of the unit base 2502 to form the A center decoration member 2540 for decorating the front surface, and a predetermined logo decoration in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 arranged on the peripheral wall 2503 above the window 2501, and the center decoration member 2522 enables light emission decoration. It is arranged on the front production unit 2550 and on the right side of the window 2501 when viewed from the front. A front right middle rendering unit 2600 having a possible front right movable decorative body 2610, and a front right outer rendering having a predetermined decoration arranged around the outer periphery of the front right movable decorative body 2610 in the front right middle rendering unit 2600 And a unit 2700.

  A stage 2510 of the center role 2500 is provided with a game ball discharged from the warp exit 2505 and is capable of rolling in the left and right directions, and a first stage 2511 capable of discharging the supplied game ball forward from a predetermined position. A game ball is provided from the first stage 2511 and is arranged in front of the first stage 2511 so that the game ball can be rolled in the left and right direction, and the supplied game ball can be discharged from a predetermined position into the front game area 1100. The second stage 2512, the chance entrance 2513 in which the game ball can enter from a predetermined position on the second stage 2512, and the game ball entering the chance entrance 2513 are moved from the position below the second stage 2512 to the game area 1100. And a chance outlet 2514 capable of being discharged into the inside.

  The first stage 2511 of the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so that the left and right ends are the highest, and is formed so that the center in the left and right direction of the game area 1100 is high. It is formed in a U-shaped wave shape. The first stage 2511 is formed in a raised portion at the center in the left-right direction and becomes lower toward the front and has a wider width in the left-right direction. And a side emission portion 251 lb that is formed at a position and becomes lower toward the front and has a wider width in the left-right direction than the central emission portion 251 la.

  In the first stage 2511, a front end other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b protrudes upward, and it is difficult for game balls to be discharged forward from portions other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b. . Further, the first stage 2511 extends rightward so that the right end side in front view bites into the reserved number display 2530 side.

  The second stage 2512 of the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so as to extend in the left-right direction so as to straddle the two side emission portions 251 lb in the first stage 2511 and to have a lower center in the left-right direction. In the second stage 2512, the center in the left-right direction is slightly higher. The second stage 2512 is formed at a center position in the left-right direction and becomes lower toward the rear and has a wider width in the left-right direction. The second stage 2512 is formed at the lowest part on both the left and right sides of the center guide portion 2512a. And a side emission portion 2512b whose width in the left-right direction is wider than the center guide portion 2512a. In the second stage 2512, the front end other than the side discharge portion 2512b protrudes upward, and it is difficult for the game balls to be discharged forward from portions other than the side discharge portion 2512b.

  The chance entrance 2513 in the stage 2510 opens forward to a vertically extending wall-shaped portion formed between the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512, and has a central guide portion 2512a in the second stage 2512. It is located on the rear side. Thus, when the game ball rolling on the second stage 2512 is guided rearward by the central guide portion 2512a, it enters the chance entrance 2513.

  The chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510 is formed at a position below the center of the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction in the flange portion 2502a so as to open forward. The chance outlet 2514 is provided with a pair of ridges extending in the front-rear direction and separated in the left-right direction in a passage communicating with the chance inlet 2513. Thus, the game ball released from the chance exit 2514 is released into the game area 1100 in a state where the swing in the left and right directions is suppressed by being guided forward by the pair of protrusions. I have.

  The stage 2510 of the center role item 2500 is configured such that the chance exit 2514 is located immediately above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 in an assembled state, and a game ball enters the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514. When released to the first starting port 2101 with a high probability.

  The stage 2510 of the center role 2500 is substantially entirely formed of a transparent member, and can be illuminated and decorated by the decoration substrate 2521 under the center. The first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are integrally formed by a stage member 2515, and are attached to the rear side of the unit base 2502.

  In addition, the reserved number display 2530 of the center role item 2500 includes a reserved number display board 2531 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and each LED of the reserved number display board 2531 disposed on the front surface of the reserved number display board 2531. A grid-like light-blocking member 2532 for partitioning, a light-guiding member 2533 disposed in each grid of the light-blocking member 2532 to guide light from the LED of the reserved number display substrate 2531 to the front, and each light-guiding member 2533 to the front. A front cover 2534 having a plurality of openings facing each other and disposed in front of the light shielding member 2532, and a top cover 2535 that covers the upper side of the front cover 2534, the light shielding member 2532, and the reserved number display substrate 2531 are provided.

  As shown in the drawing, the upper surface cover 2535 of the reserved number indicator 2530 is inclined so that the left end side in front view is lower, and is formed in an arc shape with the center in the left-right direction bulging upward. The upper surface cover 2535 is disposed between the stage 2510 and the front right middle rendering unit 2600 (front right middle movable decorative body 2610), and a game ball deviates from the stage 2510 to the front right middle rendering unit 2600 side. Can be returned to the stage 2510 side. Note that the top cover 2535 is formed integrally with the unit base 2502.

  The top presentation unit 2550 of the center role 2500 is a table decoration member 2551 having a light-transmitting translucent logo formed in a shallow relief shape according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, although details of the decoration are omitted. A plate-shaped diffusion light-guiding member 2552 disposed on the rear side of the front decoration member 2551 and capable of diffusing light; a logo decoration substrate 2553 disposed above the diffusion light-guiding member 2552 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a lower surface thereof; , Is provided. The diffusion light guide member 2552 and the upper decorative member 2551 are attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502. The top presentation unit 2550 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED on the logo decoration board 2553.

  The right middle rendering unit 2600 of the center role 2500 has a fixed decorative body 2620 formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a ring-shaped rotating decorative body 2630 that is rotatable around the outer periphery of the fixed decorative body 2620. A middle right movable decorative body 2610, a middle right decorative board 2640 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side of the front middle movable decorative body 2610 and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front, and a middle decorative board 2640 arranged on the rear side of the right middle movable board 2640. A rotation drive mechanism 2650 for rotatingly driving the rotary decorative body 2630 of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610, a rotary drive mechanism 2650, a front right middle movable decorative body 2610, and a front right middle decorative board 2640, and a unit base 2502 Member 2660 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position on the side, and rotation for rotating the base member 2660 within a predetermined angle range Is provided with a moving mechanism 2670, the. The base member 2660 is rotatably supported by a support pin 2601 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2502.

  The fixed decorative body 2620 in the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 is a transparent front decorative body 2621 whose outer periphery is circular, the front surface swells forward, and the front surface extends in the front-rear direction in an irregular shape. A disc-shaped rear decorative body 2622 having a light-transmitting property in which the front surface is arranged inside the front decorative body 2621 and the front surface swells forward more loosely than the front surface of the front decorative body 2621 and predetermined characters are embossed on the front surface; , Is provided. Note that the front right middle decorative board 2640 has a plurality of LEDs mounted at positions on the rear side of the rear decorative body 2622, so that the rear decorative body 2622 and the front decorative body 2621 can be illuminated. I have.

  In addition, the fixed decorative body 2620 further includes a light shielding member 2623 which is arranged on the outer periphery of the front decorative body 2621 and has a plurality of radially protruding partition pieces 2623a in the circumferential direction. In addition, the front decorative body 2621 of the fixed decorative body 2620 includes a plurality of lens portions 2621a that protrude radially from the outer periphery and are disposed between the partition pieces 2623a of the light shielding member 2623, respectively. The front end of the lens portion 2621a of the front decorative body 2621 is formed in a star shape. The partition 26223a and the lens portion 2621a of the fixed decorative body 2620 are located inside the rotary decorative body 2630. Note that the front right middle decorative board 2640 has an LED mounted at a position on the rear side of the lens portion 2621a, so that the star-shaped tip of the lens portion 2621a can be illuminated and decorated. .

  The front decorative body 2621 of the fixed decorative body 2620 can be attached to the base member 2660 via the annular spacer member 2624 while sandwiching the rear decorative body 2622, the light shielding member 2623, and the front right middle decorative substrate 2640. Has become.

  The rotating decorative body 2630 of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is formed in an annular shape, and a predetermined decoration is formed three-dimensionally on the surface, and the space between the decorations penetrates in the front-rear direction. ing. In addition, the rotating decorative body 2630 is formed in a state where the rear side and the inner peripheral side are open, and the lens portion 2621 a of the front decorative body 2621 in the fixed decorative body 2620, the light shielding member 2623, and the front right middle decorative substrate 2640 are formed. It is designed to be inserted inside. The rotary decorative body 2630 has a rear end extending rearward of the front right middle decorative board 2640 and is rotatable with respect to the base member 2660 by being attached to an annular operating gear 2654 of a rotary drive mechanism 2650 described later. Is to be supported.

  The rotating decorative body 2630 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LED located on the rear side of the lens portion 2621a of the front decorative body 2621 in the front right middle decorative board 2640.

  The rotation drive mechanism 2650 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 includes a front first drive motor 2651 attached to the base member 2660 via the motor base 2665 at a position above the rotary decorative body 2630, and a front first drive motor 2651. A drive gear 2652 fixed to the rotating shaft, a transmission gear 2653 meshed with the drive gear 2652 and rotatably supported by the base member 2660, and a front surface meshed with the transmission gear 2653 and rotatably supported by the base member 2660. And an annular operating gear 2654 to which a rotating decorative body 2630 is attached.

  The front first drive motor 2651 of the rotary drive mechanism 2650 is attached to the front side of the motor base 2665, and the rotation shaft extends through the motor base 2665 to the rear side. The drive gear 2652 and the transmission gear 2653 are arranged between the motor base 2665 and the base member 2660.

  The operation gear 2654 of the rotation drive mechanism 2650 has a circular guide hole 2654a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The operation gear 2654 is disposed between the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624, and is rotatably supported in the guide hole 2654a via a bush 2656 supported by the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624. .

  In addition, the rotation drive mechanism 2650 includes a rotation position detection sensor 2655 that can detect the rotation position of the rotary decoration 2630. The rotation drive mechanism 2650 is provided with a plate-shaped detection piece 2652a extending outward from the drive gear 2652, and by detecting the detection piece 2652a with the rotation position detection sensor 2655, the rotation position of the rotary decorative body 2630 is detected. Can be detected.

  The base member 2660 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 is formed so as to cover the rear side of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 and the rotation drive mechanism 2650. The base member 2660 includes an arm 2661 extending upward from a portion supporting the front right middle movable decorative body 2610, and a bearing formed at the tip of the arm 2661 and supported rotatably with respect to the unit base 2502. A slit 2663 formed in the arm portion 2661 between the bearing portion 2662 and the bearing portion 2662 and the portion supporting the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 and extending along the radiation passing through the center of the bearing portion 2661 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. And The base member 2660 is configured such that a support pin 2601 attached to the bearing portion 2662 so as to extend rearward on the rear side of the unit base 2502 is inserted, and is rotatably supported by the support pin 2601. It has become.

  The motor base 2665 attached to the front side of the base member 2660 includes a guide piece 2664 extending in an arc shape centering on the bearing portion 2662 at a lower end corresponding to the lower side of the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right. . The guide piece 2664 has a plate-like portion extending in the front-rear direction at an outer peripheral end centering on the bearing portion 2662, and is formed in an arc-shaped groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition member 2520. Is to be inserted into. Thus, when the base member 2660 is rotated by the guide piece 2664, swinging in the front-rear direction is suppressed.

  The guide piece 2664 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 is located on an extension of the first stage 2511 on the stage 2510 on the right side in front view. Thus, when the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is rotated from the normal position to the emergent position by the rotation driving mechanism 2670 in the front left direction, the guide piece 2664 is positioned so as to cover the upper right end of the first stage 2511. (See FIG. 157), and even if the game ball jumps rightward from the first stage 2511, the game ball can be prevented from contacting the rotating decoration 2630 of the movable decoration 2610 in the front right. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being bounced off by the rotating rotating decorative body 2630, thereby preventing the original movement of the game ball from being spoiled and giving the player distrust. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the guide piece 2664 is inclined such that the left end side surface in front view is lower at the left end. Thus, when the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is in the normal position, the left end of the guide piece 2664 and the arc-shaped groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition member 2520 cause the lower side of the rotary decorative body 2630 to move downward. Since a space capable of accommodating the game balls can be formed, even if the game balls deviate rightward from the right end side of the first stage 2511, the game balls are accommodated and held in the above-described space, and the movement of the game balls is performed. Can be stopped, and the game ball can be prevented from moving differently from the original.

  In addition, the game ball accommodated and held in the above-mentioned space moves (rotates) the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 from the normal position to the appearance position in the left direction when viewed from the front, so that the left end of the guide piece 2664 is inclined. Due to the changed side surface, it rolls leftward (toward the first stage 2511) and is returned to the stage 2510. Therefore, depending on the speed at which the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is moved from the normal position to the appearance position, it is possible to fly the game ball housed and held at the left end of the guide piece 2664 to the stage 2510 side (see FIG. 158). Therefore, it is possible to show the player a movement different from the movement of the game ball rolling the stage 2510 within the frame of the center role 2500, and to make the player enjoy the movement of the game medium, thereby reducing the interest. Can be suppressed.

  The rotation drive mechanism 2670 of the front middle rendering unit 2600 includes a front second drive motor 2671 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 2502 so that the rotation axis extends in the front-rear direction, and a rotation shaft of the front second drive motor 2271. It has a disc-shaped link wheel 2672 to be fixed, and a link pin 2273 supported at a position eccentric from the rotation axis of the link wheel 2672 and slidably inserted into the slit 2663 of the base member 2660.

  In addition, the rotation drive mechanism 2670 includes a rotation position detection sensor 2474 that is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 2502 and detects the rotation position of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 via the base member 2660. The rotation position detection sensor 2675 is attached to a position where the right end of the guide piece 2664 of the motor base 2665 attached to the unit base 2660 can be detected in a front view.

  When the link wheel 2672 is rotated by the front second drive motor 2671, the rotation drive mechanism 2670 revolves on the circumference of a predetermined radius, and when the link pin 2573 revolves, At the same time that the link pin 2673 slides inside the slit 2663, the link pin 2673 presses the inner wall of the slit 2663 in a predetermined direction, and the base member 2660 rotates about the bearing 2662 (support pin 2601). I have.

  Since the link pin 2673 is disposed between the bearing portion 2662 of the base member 2660 and the front middle movable movable body 2610, the rotation drive mechanism 2670 has a front right middle movable decorative body that is larger than the revolving diameter of the link pin 2673. 2610 can be largely moved. In the front right middle rendering unit 2600 of this example, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is moved by the rotation moving mechanism 2670 to the normal position located on the right side of the window 2501 in front view and the center side of the window 2501 in front view. Can be rotated between the appearance position and the appearance position.

  The link wheel 2672 of the rotation drive mechanism 2670 is located on the front side of the partition wall member 2520, and a part of the outer peripheral surface faces the inside of the window 2501 (see FIGS. 112 and 133). This allows a worker, such as a maintenance person, to rotate the link wheel 2672 by touching the outer periphery of the link wheel 2672 from the front side of the center role item 2500 (game board 4). Even if a failure occurs in which the body 2610) stops at a rotation position other than the predetermined position, the base member 2660 can be returned to the normal position by rotating the link wheel 2672 from the front side without disassembling the center role 2500. It is possible to simplify the time and effort required for maintenance and the like, and it is possible to shorten the time during which the game is interrupted due to the occurrence of a malfunction as much as possible, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. I can do it.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the front right middle rendering unit 2600 of the center role product 2500 has a support pin 2601 (bearing portion) when the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is in the normal position at the rightmost position in front view. The support pin 2601 and the link wheel 2672 are arranged so that a vertical line passing through the center of the link 2662) passes between the center of the link wheel 2672 and the link pin 2673. Thereby, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 can be rotated to the left side when viewed from the front, and the appearance position of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is moved closer to the center to make it easier for the player to pay attention. You can do it. When returning the movable decorative body 2610 from the appearance position to the normal position in the front right, the revolving link pin 2673 moves across a vertical line passing through the center of the support pin 2601. During the revolving to the normal position after the vertical line is reached, the load from the front right center movable decorative body 2610 and the like acts on the link pin 2673 to apply a load to the front second drive motor 2671, and the right front center movable decoration Although the body 2610 may not be able to return to the normal position, as described above, by rotating the link wheel 2672 partially exposed in the frame of the center role 2500, the link pin 2673 is moved. The orbiting decoration 2610 can be returned to the normal position by orbiting.

  The front right outside rendering unit 2700 of the center role item 2500 has a front right middle movable decorative body 2610 in a normal position, and is arranged below the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 and has a predetermined character decoration on the front surface. The lower right middle lower decorative member 2710, the lower right middle lower decorative board 2711 which is arranged on the rear side of the front right lower middle decorative member 2710 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and the upper right lower middle decorative member 2710 on the front A front right middle upper decorative member 2720 having decorations of different characters and arranged above the front right middle movable decorative body 2610, and a front right middle upper decorative body 2720 and a front right middle lower decorative body 2710 An arc-shaped front right middle outer periphery decoration member 2730 which is arranged so as to surround the right outer periphery of the fixed decoration body 2620 in the movable decoration body 2610 and becomes wider upward, a front right middle outer periphery decoration member 2730 and a front right middle upper end Decoration member 2720 A plurality of LED on the front is disposed on the side is implemented as a table right in the outer peripheral decorative substrate 2733, and a.

  The front right middle lower decorative member 2710 of the front right outside effect unit 2700 is formed so that the character portion has translucency, and projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150 to form a part of the peripheral wall portion 2503. Has formed. The front right lower middle decorative member 2710 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502 at the position on the right side of the front view reserved number display 2530 so as to sandwich the front right lower middle decorative board 2711. The front right lower middle decorative member 2710 can be decorated by emitting light from the LEDs on the front right lower middle decorative board 2711 as appropriate.

  The front right middle upper decorative member 2720 is formed in a plate shape so that the character portion has translucency, and is attached to the upper front surface of the front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730. The front right middle upper decorative member 2720 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting corresponding LEDs on the front right middle outer peripheral decorative board 2733.

  The front right outer peripheral decorative member 2730 of the front right outside effecting unit 2700 is a frame-like shape having a plurality of openings in which the outer shape becomes wider as it goes upward and the circumferential length becomes longer as it goes upward. The frame member 2731 includes a frame member 2731 and a lens member 2732 which is disposed on the rear side of the frame member 2731 and has a block portion inserted into each opening of the frame member 2731 and has a light transmitting property. In the front right middle outer peripheral decorative body 2730, a frame member 2731 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502, and the lens member 2732 and the front right middle outer peripheral decorative board 2733 are sandwiched between the frame member 2731 and the unit base 2502. It is supposed to be. In the front right middle outer peripheral decorative board 2733, LEDs are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the respective openings of the frame member 2731, so that light emission decoration can be performed for each of the openings (block portions of the lens member 2732). I have.

  In the center role item 2500 of the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2503 above and to the right of the approximate center in the left-right direction in front view is substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the front component 1110A). In the state attached to the game panel 1150, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed along the outer periphery of the upper and right peripheral wall portions 2503 in the center role object 2500. ing. Thus, when the game ball is driven so as to enter the gap on the right outer periphery (so-called right-handed), the ball enters the guide passage 2142a of the attacker unit 2100, and has a very high probability of being gated. A game ball can be passed through the section 2105.

  When the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1150, a region having a predetermined width is formed on the outer periphery on the left side of the center role 2500 with the inner periphery of the game region 1100. . Thus, when the game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the left side of the center role 2500, the game ball flows down in a complicated motion in the area, and a game in which the motion of the game ball can be enjoyed can be performed. It has become. In addition, when the game ball is driven to flow down the left side of the center role 2500, the game ball can enter the warp entrance 2504, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510. In addition to the above, the expectation of the player can be enhanced by whether or not the game ball returned from the stage 2510 to the inside of the game area 1100 is accepted into the first starting port 2101 or the like. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[2-4A. Second embodiment of fixed decorative body in front right middle production unit]
Next, a second embodiment of the fixed decorative body 2620A in the center right presentation unit 2600 of the center role 2500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed decorative body in the front right middle production unit in a disassembled state as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed decorative body in FIG. FIG. 143 (a) is a perspective view of the front cover and the effect sheet of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 viewed from the front, and FIG. 143 (b) is a view of (a) viewed from a position slightly to the left with respect to the front. (C) is a perspective view as viewed from a position further leftward than (b). FIG. 144 (a) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the effect sheet in the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141, FIG. 144 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state when the light is turned off, and FIG. FIG. 7D is an explanatory diagram showing a light emission decoration mode when red light is lit. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the member of the same structure, and detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The fixed decorative body 2620A of the present example can be replaced with the front decorative body 2621 and the rear decorative body 2622 in the fixed decorative body 2620 described above. As shown in the figure, the fixed decorative body 2620A is disposed inside the front cover 2625, a transparent front cover 2625 having a circular outer periphery, a front surface bulging forward and a shallow relief having a predetermined shape formed on the front surface. Thin sheet-like effect sheet 2626, thin sheet-like diffusion lens sheet 2627 having a plurality of fine prisms arranged on the rear side of effect sheet 2626, 2625, and a transparent disk-shaped holding member 2628 inserted into the inside 2626.

  The fixed decorative body 2620A is such that the effect sheet 2626 is made up of a translucent and smoke-colored base film and a colored layer formed on the back surface of the base film, so that it looks black when viewed from the front side. (See FIG. 144 (b)). When viewed from the front, the fixed decorative body 2620A has a relief-shaped decoration formed on the front cover 2625 on the front surface of the effect sheet 2626 (see FIG. 143). Thereby, when the fixed decorative body 2620A is viewed from the front without light-emitting decoration, the relief of the front cover 2625 and the relief reflected on the effect sheet 2626, and the distance between the front of the front cover 2625 and the front of the effect sheet 2626. , The relief of the front cover 2625 looks more three-dimensional like a decoupage, so that a new decoration can be presented to the player, and as shown in FIGS. 143 (b) and (c). In addition, since the appearance changes depending on the position of the player, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained.

  Further, in the fixed decorative body 2620A, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the colored layer of the effect sheet 2626 has a black portion 2626a having almost no translucency, a blue portion 2626b having translucency, and a transparent portion 2626b. It is composed of a red portion 2626c having optical properties and a non-colored uncolored portion 2626d. Accordingly, when the LED located on the rear side of the fixed decorative body 2620A in the front right middle decorative substrate 2640 is not emitting light, the entire pattern becomes blackish due to the smoke color of the base film as shown in FIG. In contrast, when the LED emits blue light, it emits light with a pattern as shown in FIG. 144 (c), and when it emits red light, it emits light with a pattern as shown in FIG. 144 (d). ing.

  More specifically, the colored layer of the effect sheet 2626 in the fixed decorative body 2620A is configured such that when the pattern of FIG. 144C and the pattern of FIG. 2626a, and a portion included in any of the patterns is an uncolored portion 2626d. When the pattern of FIG. 144 (c) and the pattern of FIG. 144 (d) are overlapped, the portion of the pattern only of FIG. 144 (c) is set as the blue portion 2626b and the pattern of only the pattern of FIG. The portion is a red portion 2626c. Therefore, when the LED emits blue light, light is transmitted through the blue portion 2626b and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the red portion 2626c. (Simulated pattern) emits blue light. When the LED emits red light, light is transmitted through the red portion 2626c and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the blue portion 2626b. (Simulated pattern) emits red light. When the LED emits white light, a pattern as shown in FIG. 144 (a) emits light.

  As described above, when the LED of the front right middle decorative board 2640 arranged on the rear side is not emitting light, the relief formed on the front cover 2625 is reflected on the effect sheet 2626 to provide a three-dimensional effect. While a certain decoration can be presented, a different pattern can be displayed by light emission in accordance with the light emission color of the LED, and a variety of effects can be presented to the player so that the player is not bored. Note that the relief of the front cover 2625 has substantially the same shape as the picture that is illuminated and displayed when the LED emits blue light, so that the picture that emits blue light together with the relief of the front cover 2625 has a three-dimensional effect. Can be provided.

[2-5. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 145 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the rear. is there.

  The back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, is open at the front side, and has an opening 3010b through which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the rear wall 3010a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. 3010. The back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape whose front side is opened, a substantially rectangular opening 3010b penetrating in the front-rear direction through the rear wall 3010a, and extends outward from the outer periphery of the front end to be fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150. And a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c. The opening 3010b of the back box 3010 is formed smaller than the external shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a front view.

  Also, the back box 3010 has a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d which is substantially the same size as the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and is recessed forward on the outer periphery of the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a. A liquid crystal fixing portion 3010e formed on the right side and into which the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted, and a liquid crystal fixing hole 3010e are formed on the opposite side (right side in rear view) of the liquid crystal inserting portion 3010d and a lock mechanism 3040. And a lock mechanism mounting portion 3010f to which the. In the back box 3010, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d from the rear side, and the rear surface of the liquid crystal insertion portion frame 3010d on the rear wall 3010a is flat. The front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is configured to abut.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the rear box 3010 is formed with mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting each of the effect units 3100, 3300, and 3500, a board, a cover, and the like at appropriate positions.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 is attached to a position near the front end in the back box 3010 at a position corresponding to the front side unit 2200 and has a lower back left decorative board 3020 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and near the front end in the back box 3010. A lower right back decoration board 3021 mounted at a position corresponding to the guide passage member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and mounted on the front surface of the rear wall 3010a above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. A back upper relay board 3022, a back right relay board 3023 attached to the front of the rear wall 3010a on the right side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and a rear wall 3010a on the left side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. And a back left relay board 3024 attached to the front face.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a panel relay board 3025 attached to the lower left corner of the rear wall 3010a on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a below the opening 3010b in rear view, and a rear box disposed on the right side of the panel relay board 3025 in rear view. 3010 includes a first drive board 3026 attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a, and a second drive board 3027 arranged on the right side of the first drive board 3026 in rear view and attached to the rear face of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010. ing.

  The back unit 3000 also includes a panel relay board cover 3030 that covers the rear side of the panel relay board 3025 and is attached to the back box 3010, and a first drive board cover that covers the rear side of the first drive board 3026 and is attached to the back box 3010. 3031 and a second drive board cover 3032 that covers the rear side of the second drive board 3027 and is attached to the back box 3010.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a lock mechanism 3040 for detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. The lock mechanism 3040 of the present example is configured to be slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the lock mechanism mounting portion 3010f of the back box 3010. When the lock mechanism 3040 is slid upward, the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 moves rearward. When an insertion opening that can be inserted from the side is opened, and the fixing piece 1902 is inserted from the insertion opening and the locking mechanism 3040 is slid upward, the rear end of the insertion opening is closed and the fixing piece 1902 does not come off. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked.

  Further, the back unit 3000 has a vertically extending plate-like back left holder 3050 attached near the front end at the left end in the back box 3010, and a second starting port of the attacker unit 2100 near the front end in the back box 3010. A back right guiding member 3060 attached to a position corresponding to the 2102 and the general winning opening 2104 and capable of guiding a game ball; a first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and a front side unit 2200 near the front end in the back box 3010; And a back left guiding member 3070 attached to a position corresponding to the two general winning openings 2201 and capable of guiding a game ball.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to a predetermined position of the back left holder 3050 and the back right guiding member 3060 and is capable of detecting magnetism. The first starting port sensor 3081 capable of detecting the game ball received at the front and the back right guide member 3060 and the back left guide member 3070 are respectively attached to predetermined positions and detect the game ball received at the general winning opening 2104 and 2201. And a possible general winning opening sensor 3082.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back side effect unit 3100 disposed above the opening 3010b and both left and right sides in the back box 3010, and a back side effect unit 3300 disposed above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. And an underside effecting unit 3500 arranged below the opening 3010b in the back box 3010.

  The back lower left decorative board 3020 of the back unit 3000 can emit light and decorate the front side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 by appropriately emitting light from the LED mounted on the front surface. In addition, the lower right back decoration board 3021 can appropriately illuminate the guide passage member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 by appropriately emitting light from the LED mounted on the front surface.

  The upper back relay board 3022 in the back unit 3000 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the peripheral control board 4010. The back right relay board 3023 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the back side relay board 3112 of the back right effect unit 3100R in the back side effect unit 3100, The back left relay board 3024 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the back and side relay board 3112 of the back and left effect unit 3100L in the back and side effect unit 3100.

  The panel relay board 3025 in the back unit 3000 includes a connection between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010, a connection between the main control board 4100 and the first starting port sensor 3082, the second starting port sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, and a general winning port. This is for relaying connection with the sensor 3082, the gate sensor 2126, the starting port solenoid 2124, the attacker solenoid 2113, and the like.

  The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 in the back unit 3000 are provided on the respective decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 and 256 provided on the door frame 5 based on a control signal (command) from the peripheral control board 4010. 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., and the LED mounted on each of the decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 522, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130 etc. provided on the game board 4. Based on control of light emission or a control signal (command) from the peripheral control board 4010, the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159 provided on the game board 4, and the like. It is for controlling the driving of 3302, 3506 and the like.

  The back left holder 3050 in the back unit 3000 supports the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the warp entrance 2504 in the center item 2500, and guides the game ball to the warp entrance 2504 using a magnet. Illicit acts can be detected.

  The back right guiding member 3060 in the back unit 3000 supports the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the first starting port 2101 in the center role object 2500, and uses a magnet to play the game ball using the first starting port. It is possible to detect a fraudulent activity that leads to 2101.

  The back right guiding member 3060 is arranged on the rear side of the second unit 2120 and the third unit 2130 in the attacker unit 2100, and has an upper opening 3061 which can communicate with the general winning opening 2104 on the upper front surface. And a middle opening 3062 that can communicate with the second starting port 2102 at a substantially central front surface in the vertical direction. Although not shown, the back right guiding member 3060 has a right guiding passage extending from the upper opening 3061 to the lower end so that game balls can flow therethrough and the lower end opened downward. The middle opening 3062 communicates with the middle of the right guiding passage, and the game balls entering the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 are both discharged downward from the lower end by the right guiding passage.

  As a result, the back right guiding member 3060 receives the game ball received at the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and is guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150, and enters the right guiding passage from the upper opening 3061. At the same time, the game ball received by the second starting port 2102 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the right guiding passage from the middle opening 3062. In the back right guiding member 3060, a general winning opening sensor 3082 is attached at a position between the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 in the right guiding passage, and the game ball from the upper opening 3061, that is, the general winning opening 2104 is provided. Only can be detected.

  The back left guiding member 3070 in the back unit 3000 is configured such that the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 is located and the three general winning openings 2201 in the front side unit 2200 are located in such a manner as to straddle them. It is arranged on the rear side. A middle guiding passage 3071 extending vertically in the right end portion in front view and allowing game balls to flow therethrough, and having an upper end portion capable of communicating with the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and a left side in front view of the middle guiding passage 3071. It has three left openings 3072 formed on the front surface and capable of communicating with the respective general winning openings 2201 of the front side unit 2200.

  The middle guiding passage 3071 of the back left guiding member 3070 has a lower end opened downward, and an opened front side is closed by a rear surface of the attacker unit 2100. Thereby, the game ball received by the first starting port 2101 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the middle guidance passage 3071 from the upper end, is guided downward by the middle guidance passage 3071, and is guided from the lower end. It is designed to be discharged downward. In addition, the first starting port sensor 3081 is attached near the upper part and the lower part of the middle guiding passage 3071 so as to detect one game ball twice. In other words, although the details are omitted, acceptance (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 is determined based on the detection pattern of the detection signal of the game ball from the two first starting port sensors 3081. If a detection pattern different from the regular detection pattern set in advance is detected, for example, it is determined that an illegal act such as insertion and removal of an illegal tool with respect to the first starting port 2101 is performed, and A predetermined game process is performed.

  Although not shown, the back left guiding member 3070 is provided with a left guiding passage having a discharge port through which the game ball can pass through at the lower end on the left side when viewed from the front of the middle guiding passage 3071 in communication with the three left openings 3072. Have. A general winning opening sensor 3082 is attached to the outlet of the left guiding passage, so that one general winning opening sensor 3082 can detect which of the three general winning openings 2201 receives a game ball. ing.

[2-6. Back horizontal production unit]
Next, the back horizontal rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 to 156. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back side effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the back side effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit for each main member, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit for each main member, viewed from the front. FIG. Further, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of one rotating decorative body unit in the back and forth effect unit, and FIG. 154 is a perspective view of one rotating decorative unit in the back and side effect unit. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating decorative body unit of the back and forth effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG.

  The back horizontal rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is disposed above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and on both left and right sides, and is attached at positions on the upper and lower sides of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. The back and side effect unit 3100 is formed substantially symmetrically with the back right effect unit 3100R and the back right effect unit 3100R disposed on the right side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The back left production unit 3100L and the back left production unit 3100L and the back right production unit 3100R, which are arranged on the left side in front view, can be independently moved in the left and right direction, and the upper and lower sides of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 can be moved. And a rear horizontal slide unit 3150 arranged at the rear side.

  The back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L in the back horizontal production unit 3100 are supported by the rear horizontal slide unit 3150 so that the upper end and the lower end are slidable in the left and right direction, and the front and the opening 3010b of the back box 3010 are in front. A vertically-long box-shaped back-and-back base 3110 whose side facing the center in the left-right direction is open, and a part of each of the opened front side and the center-facing side of the back-and-horizontal base 3110 can be partially covered, so that the front side of the back-and-back base 3110 , A vertically long back and forth relay board 3112 mounted on an outer surface of the back and side base 3111 opposite to the open side facing the center, and a box-shaped back and side base 3110. And three rotating decorative body units 3120 which are attached in a vertically arranged state.

  The height of the back horizontal base 3110 of the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L is slightly higher than the height of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. Further, the rear horizontal base 3110 protrudes upward from the upper front surface and is connected to the lower end of the right connecting member 3157 or the left connecting member 3162 of the rear horizontal slide unit 3150, and the slider mounting portion 3110a protrudes downward from the lower end and extends in the left-right direction. And a guided portion 3110b that is inserted and guided into the lower right guide member 3170R or the lower left guide member 3170L of the back and side slide unit 3150. This back horizontal base 3110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin.

  The back and side effect members 3111 of the back right effecting unit 3100R and the back and left effect unit 3100L are located at positions corresponding to the rotary effectors 3126 of the three rotary effector units 3120 mounted in the rear and horizontal base 3110, respectively. A plurality of notches 3111a are provided so as to face the front side of 3126 and the side facing the center in the left-right direction of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010. The back side decorative member 3111 can hide the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 located above and below the rotary decorative body 3126 of the rotary decorative body unit 3120 from the player side at a portion between the cutouts 3111a. I can do it.

  In addition, the back and side decoration member 3111 has a shallow relief-shaped decoration on the front surface and a plurality of through-holes penetrating in the front-rear direction along the decoration at positions corresponding to the back and side decoration substrate 3130 in the rotary decoration unit 3120. Opening 3111b. Thus, the light from the back and side decoration substrate 3130 can be directly radiated forward through the opening 3111b of the back and side decoration member 3111.

  The rotary decorative body unit 3120 of the back right effecting unit 3100R and the back left effecting unit 3100L has a plate-like lower base 3121 extending in the left-right direction and the opening 3010b of the back box 3010 from the left-right center of the lower base 3121. A box-shaped upper base 3122 mounted on the upper side opposite to the side facing the center in the left-right direction, and a back-and-side rotation drive mounted on the upper surface of the upper base 3122 so that the rotation shaft extends to the lower base 3121 side. A motor 3123, a drive gear 3124 fixed to the rotation shaft of the back and side rotation drive motor 3123 and rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121, meshing with the drive gear 3124 and formed to have the same diameter as the drive gear 3124. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 3125 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121, A rotating decorative body 3126 which is attached to the upper surface of the moving gear 3125 and has a bottomed cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction and whose outer periphery is formed in a substantially square shape, and a rotating position of the rotating decorative body 3126 which can be detected, is attached to the upper base 3122. A rotation position detection sensor 3127.

  The rotating decorative body unit 3120 includes a semi-cylindrical lens member 3128 which is inserted into the rotating decorative body 3126 from above and has an upper end attached to the upper base 3122 and extends vertically, and a chord side of the lens member 3128. And a vertically elongated rotating decorative body decoration board 3129 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface facing the lens member 3128 side, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on substantially the center of the front surface of the upper base 3122 in the left-right direction. And a decorated back-and-horizontal substrate 3130.

  The lower base 3121 of the rotary decorative body unit 3120 is formed such that the length in the front-rear direction is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the rotary decorative body 3126, and is opposite to the drive gear 3124 across the driven gears 3125 at both left and right ends. The end is formed in a semicircular shape substantially concentric with the axis of the driven gear 3125. The lower base 3121 includes a drive shaft 3121a that rotatably supports the drive gear 3124 and extends upward, and a driven shaft 3121b that rotatably supports the driven gear 3125 and extends upward. . The drive shaft 3121a is inserted into a shaft hole (not shown) formed on the lower surface of the drive gear 3124. The driven shaft portion 3121b is inserted through a bush 3131 into a shaft hole 3125a penetrating the shaft of the driven gear 3125.

  The upper base 3122 of the rotary decorative body unit 3120 is disposed on the side supporting the drive gear 3124 from the center in the left-right direction of the lower base 3121, and the lower side and the driven gear 3125 side (the side facing the center in the left-right direction of the opening 3010b) are open. A box-shaped main body 3122a, an upright wall 3122b extending upward from an open driven gear 3125 at the upper end of the main body 3122a, and a lower base 3121 from the upper end of the upright wall 3122b to the driven gear 3125. And a top plate 3122c extending in parallel. In the rotary decorative body unit 3120 of this example, a rotary decorative body 3126 rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction is disposed between the lower base 3121 and the top plate 3122c of the upper base 3122.

  The upper base 3122 is configured such that the lower end of the main body 3122a is attached to the lower base 3121. The upper base 3122 has a rear horizontal rotation drive motor 3123 attached to the upper surface of the main body 3122a. The upright wall 3122b of the upper base 3122 extends higher and higher than the rear lateral rotation drive motor 3123 attached to the main body 3122a. The top plate 3122c of the upper base 3122 has a semicircular end at the end opposite to the standing wall 3122b, and has a lens member 3128 attached to the lower surface.

  An annular upper guide 3132 having a cylindrical guide tube (not shown) inserted into the rotary decoration 3126 is attached to the lower surface of the top plate 3122c of the upper base 3122. ing. In the upper guide 3132, the outer diameter of the guide tube inserted into the rotary decoration 3126 is slightly smaller than the diameter of the inscribed circle of the rotary decoration 3126, and the upper end side of the rotary decoration 3126. Can be rotatably supported.

  The drive gear 3124 of the rotary decorative body unit 3120 has a shaft portion 3124a whose upper end is fixed to the rotation shaft of the back and side rotation drive motor 3123 and extends downward, and a flat gear formed at the lower end of the shaft portion 3124a and meshing with the driven gear 3125. A gear-shaped gear portion 3124b, a detecting piece 3124c extending in a fan-like shape from a substantially vertical center of the shaft portion 3124a in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a shaft hole recessed upward from the lower surface at the center of the gear portion 3124b (not shown) ). The drive gear 3124 has a shaft hole inserted into the drive shaft portion 3121a of the lower base 3121 so that the rotation axis of the gear portion 3124b disposed far from the back and side rotation drive motor 3123 is unlikely to swing. Has become. The detection piece 3124c is detected by a rotation position detection sensor 3127 attached to the inside of the main body 3122a of the upper base 3122, and by detecting the detection piece 3124c of the drive gear 3124, the rotary decorative body 3126 is detected. Can be detected.

  As shown, the rotary decorative body 3126 of the rotary decorative body unit 3120 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape whose outer periphery extends in a vertical direction having a substantially square shape. It is rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction with the center being substantially the axis. The rotating decorative body 3126 has translucency and has different decorations on the four outer surfaces.

  The lens member 3128 and the rotary decorative body decoration board 3129 of the rotary decorative body unit 3120 have a length extending from the top plate 3122c of the upper base 3122 to the vicinity of the lower end of the rotary decorative body 3126 in an assembled state. The entire 3126 in the up-down direction can be almost uniformly illuminated. In addition, the lens member 3128 having a semicircular cross section has a chord direction extending in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (a surface parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1150) with respect to the left and right of the opening 3101b in the back box 3010. It is attached to the upper base 3122 in a state in which the center in the direction is inclined so as to retreat (for example, in a state inclined about 30 degrees in plan view). Accordingly, the front surface of the rotary decorative body decoration board 3129 attached to the string side of the lens member 3128 faces the player side, so that the player can feel brighter when the rotary decorative body 3126 is illuminated and decorated. Has become.

  The back horizontal decorative board 3130 of the rotary decorative body unit 3120 is attached to the upper base 3122 on the front side of the main body 3122a so as to extend to the upper end of the upright wall 3122b. The back and side decoration substrate 3130 can make the back and side decoration member 3111 emit light from behind by appropriately emitting light from the LED mounted on the front surface.

  As illustrated, the rotary decorative body unit 3120 of the present embodiment, in an assembled state, faces the opposite side to the left-right central side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 of the four outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary decorative body 3126. Except for the three sides can be exposed. In the rotary decorative body unit 3120, the rear surfaces of the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 are respectively mounted in the rear horizontal base 3110.

  In addition, the rotary decorative body unit 3120 is formed bilaterally symmetrically for the back right effecting unit 3100R and for the back left effecting unit 3100L.

  The back horizontal slide unit 3150 of the back horizontal production unit 3100 is attached to a position near the front end in the back box 3010 and above the opening 3010b, and extends in the left-right direction so as to cover substantially the entire width, and a unit base 3151. A right and left back side slide drive motor 3152 mounted on the upper rear surface near the right end of the front view and having a rotation axis extending forward through the unit base 3151, and a flat fixed to the rotation axis of the back side right drive motor 3152 A gear-shaped drive gear 3153, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3154 rotatably supported by the unit base 3151 at a position on the left side of the drive gear 3153 in a front view, and meshing with the drive gear 3153; A first transmission gear 3154 rotatably supported by the unit base 3151 at a position on the left side in front view; It has a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3155 that meshes with it, and a rack gear 3156a that extends in the left-right direction and that meshes with the second transmission gear 3155. The left and right sides of the unit base 3151 are located at lower front surfaces than the second transmission gear 3155. A right slider 3156 that is slidably supported in the right direction, a right connecting member having an upper end attached to a lower end of the right slider 3156 and a lower end attached to a slider attaching portion 3110a of a back horizontal base 3110 in the back right effect unit 3100R. 3157.

  The back and side slide unit 3150 includes a right slide position detection sensor 3158 that is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and that can detect the left and right slide position of the back right effect unit 3100R. The right slide position detection sensor 3158 detects a slide position of the back right effect unit 3100R via the right slider 3156 by detecting a detection piece (not shown in detail) provided on the right slider 3156. Is available.

  Further, the back-side / side-side slide unit 3150 is attached to the upper rear surface on the left side of the center of the unit base 3151 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the back-side / left-side slide drive motor 3159 through which the rotation axis extends forward through the unit base 3151. A drive gear 3160 in the form of a spur gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the back-side left slide drive motor 3159, and a rack gear 3161a extending in the left-right direction meshing with the drive gear 3160, and below the drive gear 3160 in the unit base 3151. A plate-shaped left slider 3161 supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction at the position of the front side, an upper end attached to the lower end of the left slider 3161, and a lower end provided with a slider attachment portion of the back-horizontal base 3110 in the back-left effect unit 3100L. And a left connecting member 3162 attached to the 3110a.

  Further, the back and side slide unit 3150 includes a left slide position detection sensor 3163 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and capable of detecting a left and right slide position of the back and left effect unit 3100L. The left slide position detection sensor 3163 detects a slide position of the back left effect unit 3100L via the left slider 3161 by detecting a detection piece (not shown in detail) provided on the left slider 3161. Is available.

  In addition, the rear horizontal slide unit 3150 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3151, and includes a plate-shaped unit cover 3165 that covers the front side of the drive gears 3153, 3160, the right slider 3156, the left slider 3161, and the like.

  Further, the right and left back slide unit 3150 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, is opened at the top, extends in the left and right direction, and guides the lower end of the back right effect unit 3100R to be slidable in the left and right direction. A lower guide member 3170R and a lower left guide member attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 to open the upper side and extend in the left-right direction to guide the lower end of the back-left effect unit 3100L to slide in the left-right direction. 3170L. The lower right guide member 3170R and the lower left guide member 3170L are configured such that the guided portion 3110b of the back horizontal base 3110 in the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L is slidably inserted from above. The back right effecting unit 3100R and the back left effecting unit 3100L can be guided slidably in the left and right direction via the guided portion 3110b.

  The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 of the back and side slide unit 3150 are respectively formed from rack gears 3156a and 3161a formed at the upper end so as to extend in the left and right direction, and left and right ends of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 near the left and right center. It has a detection piece (not shown) extending upward in a plate shape, and a guide groove (not shown) formed with a rear side opened and extending in the left-right direction and spaced apart in parallel in the vertical direction. I have.

  The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 are configured such that a plurality of rollers (not shown) rotatably supported on the front surface of the unit base 3151 are inserted into guide grooves on the rear surface. Can be slid left and right. The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 are restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by the unit cover 3164 and the unit base 3151.

  The back side slide unit 3150 of the back side extension unit 3100 rotates the back side right slide drive motor 3152 and the back side left slide drive motor 3159 in an appropriate direction to move the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 within a predetermined range. Respectively, and can be independently slid in the left and right directions. Thus, the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering via the right connecting member 3157 and the left connecting member 3162 attached to the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161, respectively. The unit 3100L can be slid in the left-right direction.

  The back side effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment is rotatable around an axis extending in the up and down direction, respectively, in a back right direction unit 3100R and a back left direction unit 3100L that are arranged in the left and right direction in front view. The three rotating decorative bodies 3126 are arranged coaxially in the vertical direction, and the rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged vertically are opposed to each other by the back right effecting unit 3100R and the back left effecting unit 3100L. Are located in The back and side effect unit 3100 of this example is configured such that the back and right effect unit 3100R and the back and left effect unit 3100L are moved away from each other by the back and side slide unit 3150 (the retreat position) and the closest position (appearance position). It can be independently slid in the left and right directions between them. In a state where the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L are at the most separated positions, the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L are respectively located outside the window 2501 of the center role 2500 in front view. , So that the player cannot see it (see FIG. 110, etc.). This state is a normal game state.

  On the other hand, when the back horizontal rendering unit 3100 moves the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L to the position where they are closest to each other, the rotatable decorative bodies 3126 supported rotatably, respectively, are in the center. The three rotary ornaments 3126 arranged vertically above and below the window 2501 of the accessory 2500 and visible from the player side are visible (see FIG. 159). Further, in a state where the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are closest to each other, the size of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 facing the window 2501 of the center role item 2500 is approximately larger than in the normal state. It is designed to be half the size.

  The back and side effect unit 3100 is configured to be movable according to a special lottery result selected by receiving a game ball in the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102.

[2-7. Uragami production unit]
Next, the back upper presentation unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148.

  The back upper presentation unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and is arranged behind the unit base 3151 of the back and side slide unit 3150 in the back and side presentation unit 3100. I have. The back upper presentation unit 3300 is mounted in a back box 3010 and extends in the left-right direction. The unit base 3301 is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3301 near the left end in front view and the rotation axis passes through the unit base 3301. And a drive gear (not shown) in the form of a spur gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive motor 3302, and a rack gear meshing with the drive gear and extending in an arc shape. And an arcuate plate-shaped slider (not shown) supported by the unit base so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction.

  The back upper effect unit 3300 includes a back upper decorative body base 3305 attached to a front surface of a slider (not shown), a back upper decorative body 3306 attached to the front surface of the back upper decorative body base 3305, and provided with a predetermined decoration. A back decoration board (not shown) which is arranged between the back decoration body 3306 and the back decoration body base 3305 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  Further, the back upper presentation unit 3300 is disposed on the back side of the back upper decorative body base 3305 and attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 to cover the front surfaces of the driving gear and the slider, and the unit base cover 3308 Three columnar shaft members (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction, the front end and the rear end of which are supported at predetermined positions by the 3308 and the unit base 3301, are rotatably inserted into the respective shaft members, and the outer periphery is provided. A plurality of bushes (not shown) that can be brought into contact with the slider. In the back upper presentation unit 3300, a slider is supported so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction with respect to the unit base 3301 via a shaft member and a bush.

  Further, the back upper presentation unit 3300 is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3301 and can detect the slide position of the slider (not shown). A relay board (not shown) for relaying the connection between the board and the first drive board 3026.

  Although illustration is omitted, magnets are provided on the right upper end of the back upper decorative body base 3305 in front view and the right end in front view of the unit base 3301, respectively, and the back upper presentation unit 3300 attracts each other. Installed in the orientation.

  Although not shown, the unit base 3301 of the back upper presentation unit 3300 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open front side, and can accommodate a drive gear, a slider, and the like. Although not shown, the unit base 3301 includes three shaft holes that penetrate at predetermined positions in the front-rear direction and into which rear ends of shaft members (not shown) are inserted.

  Although not shown in the drawings, the drive gear of the back upper presentation unit 3300 has an outer diameter of about ／ of the height of the unit base 3301, and has a large-diameter spur gear shape. It is gear.

  Although not shown, the slider of the back upper presentation unit 3300 extends in an arc shape having a center below the unit base 3301 and is formed with a substantially constant width. And a rack gear that meshes with the drive gear is disposed. Further, the slider is formed at both ends in the circumferential direction, and is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the upper back decoration base 3305, a slit penetrating in the front-rear direction at substantially the center in the radial direction and extending in the circumferential direction, and extending in the circumferential direction. A plate-shaped detection piece formed outside the right end of the rack gear when viewed from the front.

  In the slider of the back upper presentation unit 3300, a bush inserted into a shaft member whose rear end is supported by a shaft hole of the unit base 3301 abuts on the inner peripheral surface and the slit in the radial direction. By rotating the bush that is in contact, the bush can be smoothly slid in the circumferential direction. In addition, both ends of the slit of the slider are closed, and a bush abuts on a circumferential end of the slit, so that a sliding range of the slider in the circumferential direction is regulated. Further, the slider of the back upper presentation unit 3300 can detect the detection piece by the slide position detection sensor, and can detect the slider, that is, the slide position of the back upper decoration body by detecting the detection piece. I can do it.

  Although not shown in detail, the back upper decorative body base 3305 of the back upper presentation unit 3300 is formed so as to extend along the slider in front view, and the left end side in front view is attached to the left end of the slider, and the right end side is the unit. The slider is attached to the right end of the slider through a through hole (not shown) of the base cover 3308. The upper back decoration base 3305 is formed in a flat plate shape on the left side in the front view from substantially the center in the left-right direction, and the outer shape is formed along the outer shape of the upper back decoration 3306.

  The back upper decorative body 3306 of the back upper production unit 3300 is formed in a shallow (thin) relief shape imitating a grip fist, and includes a translucent decorative portion 3306a composed of predetermined characters at a portion corresponding to the back of the hand. (See FIG. 160). The back upper decorative body 3306 is formed so as to be almost opaque except for the outer periphery and the decorative portion 3306a, and is given a predetermined color by screen printing or the like. Although not shown, the color of the decoration applied to the front surface of the back upper decorative body 3306 is a color in which the lightness decreases (darkens) as the distance from the outer periphery increases.

  On the back upper decorative board of the back upper effect unit 3300, a plurality of LEDs are mounted at positions corresponding to the outer periphery of the back upper decorative body 3306 and the decorative portion 3306a on the front surface. Thus, the outer periphery of the upper decorative body 3306 and the decorative portion 3306a can be respectively illuminated and decorated by the upper decorative board.

  In the back upper presentation unit 3300 of this example, the slider is supported by the unit base 3301 and the unit base cover 3308 so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in front view. In this slider, a state in which the chord with respect to the arc of the slider is substantially perpendicular to the arc of the slider in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, from a state in which the chord with respect to the arc of the slider is slightly lowered with respect to the horizontal as viewed from the front (retreat position) (The state of the appearance position) can be slid in the circumferential direction.

  In a normal state, the back upper presentation unit 3300 has a state in which the chord for the arc of the slider is slightly lower on the left side with respect to the horizontal, and in this state, the upper back decoration 3306 attached to the front side of the slider. Are in front of the unit base 3301. Therefore, in a normal state, the back decoration unit 3306 of the back production unit 3300 is located above the window 2501 in the center role 2500, and is invisible to the player, that is, in the evacuation position. State (see FIG. 110).

  On the other hand, the back-up presentation unit 3300 slides the slider in a counterclockwise circumferential direction in front view by driving the back-up drive motor 3302, and when the chord with respect to the arc of the slider is substantially vertical, The attached upper back decoration 3306 is located below the front of the unit base 3301 and the fist is facing down. In this state, the back decoration 3306 of the back production unit 3300 hangs down from the upper side of the window 2501 in the center role 2500 into the window 2501 and is positioned substantially at the center of the window 2501, The state is visible from the side, that is, the appearance position (see FIG. 160).

[2-8. Back lower production unit]
Subsequently, the underside rendering unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. The lower back effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, substantially at the center in the left-right direction, and is disposed behind the back left guiding member 3070.

  The underside effecting unit 3500 of this example is formed in a substantially bilaterally symmetrical predetermined shape and has a partially translucent underside decorative body 3501, and is arranged on the rear side of the underside decorative body 3501 and on the front side. A lower back decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a slider (not shown) arranged on the back side of the lower back decoration board and attached to the lower back decoration 3501, and a rear side of the slider And a unit cover 3504 in the form of a shallow box that is slidable in the vertical direction and supports the slider so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3504 is attached to the rear side of the unit cover 3504 and is attached in the back box 3010 and A shallow box-shaped unit base 3505 having an open front side, and a lower back drive motor 3 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3505 for slidingly driving the slider in the vertical direction. It is provided with a 06, a.

  The lower back decoration 3501 of the lower back effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a flame. Although not shown in the drawings, the slider of the underside effecting unit 3500 has a cylindrical support boss that is vertically separated at the left and right ends and protrudes rearward, and a center between the support bosses in the left and right direction. And a pair of slits that are arranged on both left and right sides of the slit and penetrate in the front-back direction and extend in the left-right direction.

  Although not shown, the unit cover 3504 of the underside production unit 3500 is separated in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, extends in the up-down direction, and has a pair of elevating guide grooves into which the support boss of the slider is slidably inserted. And a through-hole portion which is arranged symmetrically with respect to the center in the left-right direction between the pair of lifting / lowering guide grooves, extends in an arc shape so that the center side in the left-right direction swells, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The unit cover 3504 can support the slider in a vertically slidable manner by a pair of elevating guide grooves.

  The external shape of the unit base 3505 of the underside effecting unit 3500 is the same as the external shape of the unit cover 3504, and the unit base 3505 can form a box having a shallow depth in the front-rear direction with the unit cover 3504. . The underside drive motor 3506 of the underside production unit 3500 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3505 at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in front view, and rotates while attached to the unit base 3505. The shaft extends through the unit base 3505 to the front side.

  Although not shown, the lower back effect unit 3500 meshes with a spur gear-shaped drive gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower back drive motor 3506 between the unit cover 3504 and the unit base 3505. And a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear rotatably supported by the unit base 3505, which is disposed on the right side of the drive gear in front view, meshes with the first transmission gear, and is disposed on the right side of the first transmission gear in front view. A second transmission gear in the form of a spur gear rotatably supported by the unit base 3505, meshing with the second transmission gear, and disposed at the same height as the drive gear on the right side of the second transmission gear in a front view, A third transmission gear in the form of a spur gear rotatably supported by the base 3505, and a unit that meshes with the drive gear and is located on the left side in front view of the drive gear. A fan-shaped gear portion rotatably supported by the base 3505, an extension piece extending radially outward from the gear portion, and a front portion of the unit cover 3504 protruding forward from the distal end of the extension piece and facing the front of the unit cover 3504. A left link member having a transmission pin slidably inserted into the slit on the left side of the slider through the through-hole portion; a left transmission member meshing with the third transmission gear; A fan-shaped gear portion rotatably supported by the unit base, an extension piece extending radially outward from the gear portion, and a front portion of the unit cover 3504 which protrudes forward from the tip of the extension piece to the right in front view. A right link member having a transmission pin slidably inserted into the slit on the right side of the slider through the through hole.

  Although illustration is omitted, the lower back effect unit 3500 has a left link member and a right link member arranged symmetrically with respect to the center in the left-right direction, and when the drive gear is rotationally driven by the back left drive motor 3506. , The drive gear and the plurality of transmission gears allow the left link member and the right link member to rotate in directions opposite to each other with the respective transmission pins at the same height. That is, when the left link member and the right link member rotate, the height position of each transmission pin changes, and the slider, that is, the lower back decoration 3501 is slid vertically by the transmission pin. It can be raised and lowered.

  Further, although not shown, the underside production unit 3500 is inserted from behind into a support boss of the slider inserted into the elevation guide groove of the unit cover 3504, and disposed between the support boss and the elevation guide groove. A lifting bush, a transmission bush inserted from the front side with respect to the transmission pin of the left link member and the right link member inserted into the slit of the slider, and disposed between the transmission pin and the slit, and an extension piece in the left link member. An arc-shaped gear press that is arranged between the drive gear and is attached to the unit base 3505, and an ascending and descending position detector that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3505 and can detect the sliding position (elevating position) of the lower back decoration 3501. A sensor and a lower back relay that is attached to the front of the unit cover and relays the connection between the lower back decorative board and the second drive board 3027 And it includes a plate, a.

  Although not shown, the left link member of the underside effecting unit 3500 includes a detection piece extending outward in the radial direction on the opposite side to the gear portion with respect to the rotation axis. The rotation position of the left link member can be detected by detecting with the vertical position detection sensor, and thus the vertical position of the lower back decoration 3501 can be detected.

  In the state where the lower back decorative body 3501 is located at the lower end with respect to the vertical sliding end, the lower back decorative body 3501 is positioned below the window 2501 in the center role item 2500 in the present embodiment. And is in a state where the player cannot see it (the state of the retreat position) (see FIG. 110). On the other hand, in a state where the lower back decoration 3501 is positioned at the upper end with respect to the vertical slide end, the lower back decoration 3501 is positioned in the upper window 2501 from the lower side of the window 2501 in the center role 2500. Thus, the player is in a state where the player can visually recognize the state (the state of the appearance position) (see FIG. 160). As shown in FIG. 160, when the back upper decoration body 3306 of the back upper production unit 3300 and the lower back decoration body 3501 of the lower back production unit 3500 are in the appearance position, the lower end and the upper end of the upper and lower production units 3500 and 3500, respectively. Are so close that they do not touch.

[2-9. Liquid crystal display]
Subsequently, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of the present example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to a game state. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 projecting outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing piece 1902. It has become.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is configured to be inserted from the rear side into a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. After the two fixing pieces 1902 are inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing parts 3010e on the right side of the rear box 3010 when viewed from the rear, the other fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the lock mechanism 3040. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3040 downward to close the insertion opening.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a peripheral control board box 1910 containing a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 161) and the like on the rear side as shown in FIG. And a volume 1912 extending rearward from the lower part of the vehicle. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, the speaker 821 provided on the body frame 3, and the like can be adjusted. Has become.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes an inverter board box 1920 for accommodating an inverter board 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold cathode tube as a backlight, on the left side of the peripheral control board box 1910 when viewed from the rear.

[2-10. Movable effects on gaming boards]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 157 is a front view of the gaming board showing the movement of the center right production unit of the center role in the front unit. FIG. FIG. 4B is a perspective view seen from the front slightly above, and FIG. 4B is a perspective view seen from the front slightly above in a state in which the movable decorative body in the front right is in the appearance position. FIG. 159 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back side production unit in the back unit, and FIG. 160 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back top production unit and the back bottom production unit in the back unit. . In the game board 4 of this example, as shown in FIG. 110 and the like, in a normal state, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side through the window 2501 of the center role 2500 can be visually recognized from the player side. It has become.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 110 and the like, the game board 4 is configured such that the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 of the front right middle production unit 2600 in the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 has a window portion in front view. Located at the right end of 2501, the outer periphery of the circular fixed decorative body 2620 of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is surrounded by the front right outer peripheral decorative member 2730 of the front right outside effect unit 2700. In this normal state, the entire fixed decorative body 2620 of the back right middle movable decorative body 2610 can be visually recognized from the player side, whereas the rotational decorative body 2630 is viewed from the player side except for a part of the left side in front view. It is not visible.

  Furthermore, in a normal state, the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L of the back side production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back decoration 3306 of the back production unit 3300, and the back decoration of the back production unit 3500 are provided. The bodies 3501 are located outside the windows 2501 in the front view center role 2500, respectively, so that they cannot be seen from the player side.

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment, from the normal state, according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting a game ball in the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102, the front right middle rendering unit 2600, The back side effect unit 3100, the back upper effect unit 3300, and the lower back effect unit 3500 can be appropriately moved to perform a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, for example, in the front right middle rendering unit 2600, by rotating the front first drive motor 2651, the circular rotary decorative body 2630 of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction. be able to. At this time, as described above, the rotating decorative body 2630 is in a state where only a part of the left side of the rotating decorative body 2630 can be visually recognized from the player side when viewed from the front. A movable effect in which the left side of the body 2620 flows upward or downward depending on the rotation direction can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the front right middle rendering unit 2600, the front second drive motor 2671 is rotationally driven so that the base member 2660 supporting the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is centered on the bearing portion 2662 formed at the upper end thereof. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be pivotally moved from a normal position, which is the rightmost position in a front view, which is a normal state, to an appearance position, which is located on the front center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 157). ). In the state of this appearance position, as shown in FIG. 157, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 has moved from the front right outside effecting unit 2700 to the left side in front view, and only a part of the left side in front view is from the player side. The rotatable decorative body 2630 of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610, which cannot be visually recognized, comes off the rear side of the front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730, and most of it becomes visible from the player side.

  By rotating the front right middle rendering unit 2600 to the appearance position, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 moves to a position closer to the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the front movable middle decorative body 2610 is moved from the player side. Can be prominent. By rotating the rotary decorative body 2630 by driving the table first drive motor 2651 in a state where the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is moved to the appearance position, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 can be further conspicuous. As a result, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player to the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right.

  As shown in the drawing, in the appearance position, the guide piece 2664 extends to the upper right side of the front of the stage 2510 as shown in the figure. Even if the game ball jumps to the 2610 side, it can be bounced back to the stage 2510 side by the guide piece 2664.

  Note that the guide piece 2664 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 is located on an extension of the right side of the first stage 2511 of the stage 2510 when viewed from the front, and is formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition member 2520. Since the game ball is guided by the arc-shaped groove (space), the game ball deviating rightward from the right end side of the stage 2510 (first stage 2511) is in the groove (space) for guiding the guide piece 2664. 158 (see FIG. 158 (a)), the front right middle rendering unit 2600 (front right middle movable decorative body 2610) moves from the normal position to the appearing position, thereby guiding the stored and held game balls. The piece 2664 can be pushed to the left and returned to the stage 2510 side.

  The guide piece 2664 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 can fly the game ball accommodated and held on the left end side to the stage 2510 side by the speed of moving the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 from the normal position to the appearance position. (Refer to FIG. 158 (b).) Therefore, a movement different from the movement of the game ball rolling the stage 2510 in the frame of the center role 2500 can be shown to the player, and the movement of the game medium to the player can be shown. It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating.

  Also, in the back and side effect unit 3100 of the game board 4, by driving the back and right side slide drive motor 3152 and the back and side left slide drive motor 3159 in the back and side slide unit 3150, the back and right effect unit 3100R and the back and left effect unit The 3100L can be moved from a position (retreat position) invisible from the player side to a center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to a position (appearance position) where it can be viewed from the player side ( See FIG. 159). In a state where the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L have moved to the appearance position, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side is changed in the left and right direction by the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L. The width is narrowed vertically, and at the right and left sides of the display screen visible from the player side, three rows of rotating decorative bodies 3126 are arranged in the up and down direction, respectively. Can be strongly attracted to the back right production unit 3100R, the back left production unit 3100L, and the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In the back and side effect unit 3100, the three rotary decorative bodies 3126 supported by the back and right effect unit 3100R and the back and left effect unit 3100L, respectively, are separately extended vertically by driving the back and side rotation drive motor 3123. It is configured to be able to be rotated around the core, and when each of the rotary decorations 3126 of the back right effecting unit 3100R and the back left effecting unit 3100L is visible from the player side, by rotating them, It is also possible to enjoy a movable effect by rotating the rotary decoration 3126.

  Specifically, for example, when moving the back right production unit 3100R or the back left production unit 3100L of the back horizontal production unit 3100 to the appearance position, the rotary decorative body is driven by the rear horizontal rotation drive motor 3123 in the retracted position. By rotating the 3126, the surface with the predetermined decoration is stopped so as to face the player side, and then moved to the appearance position. The stop positions can be different. Accordingly, the decoration of the rotary decorative body 3126 is different each time the back right effecting unit 3100R and the back left effecting unit 3100L appear, and the player can be entertained by the difference in the appearing decoration.

  Alternatively, when the back right production unit 3100R or the back left production unit 3100L is moved from the retreat position to the appearance position, the back decoration rotating unit 3126 is moved to the appearance position while the rotary decorative body 3126 is rotated by each back horizontal rotation drive motor 3123. Can also. As a result, a plurality of rotating decorations 3126 that roll like rollers on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 appear, so that the player's interest is strongly directed to the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L. Can be attracted.

  Furthermore, after moving the back right production unit 3100R or the back left production unit 3100L to the appearance position, the rotating decoration body 3126 may be rotated by each back horizontal rotation drive motor 3123, whereby the back right production. After the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are covered by the unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L, the rotating decorative body 3126 supported by the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L is rotated, thereby playing the game. The player can be surprised, and the player can pay attention to the rotating decorative body 3126 and the like, and the movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3126 can be enjoyed.

  Also, in the back-up presentation unit 3300 of the game board 4, by driving the back-up drive motor 3302, the back-up decoration 3306 is slid downward in an arc shape from a retreat position invisible from the player side to play a game. It can be moved to an appearance position that can be visually recognized from the user side. In the state where the upper back decoration 3306 is in the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 160, the approximate center of the fist in the upper back decoration 3306 imitating a fist is very close to the player located at the approximate center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. , So that the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Further, in the underside rendering unit 3500 of the game board 4, by driving the underside drive motor 3506, the underside decoration body 3501 is moved from an evacuation position invisible from the player side to an upper side viewable from the player side. It can be moved to the appearance position. In the state where the lower back decoration 3501 is in the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 160, the liquid crystal display device 1900 extends upward from the rear side of the stage 2510 in the center role 2500 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900. .

  As shown in FIG. 160, the gaming board 4 of the present example has the lower end of the upper back decoration 3306 and the lower back decoration as shown in FIG. The upper end of the body 3501 is in a state of approaching each other, and performs a movable effect as if the upper back decoration body 3306 imitating a fist hits the lower back decoration body 3501 imitating fire. Is available.

  Further, although not shown, the game board 4 includes a movable production by the front right middle production unit 2600, a movable production by the back side production unit 3100, or a movable production by the back upper production unit 3300 and the lower production unit 3500. Can be performed, and a variety of movable effects can be presented to the player, so that the player is not bored.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of the main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 for controlling a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 for controlling payout of a game ball and the like. Further, a group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that controls various effects during a game based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display 1900 based on a command from the peripheral control section 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, a main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”) incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), and a function for preventing impropriety. And other functions are also built-in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first starting port sensor 3081 for detecting a game ball received by the first starting port 2101 and a second starting port sensor for detecting a game ball received by the second starting port 2102. 2125 and a detection signal from a general winning opening sensor 3082 for detecting a game ball received by the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, and a gate sensor 2126 and a general winning opening are provided. Detection signals from the sensor 3082, the count sensor 2114, and the magnetic detection sensor 3080 attached to the back unit 3000 are input via the panel relay board 3025 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. Or so.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, and thereby the starting port solenoid 2124 and the attacker via the panel relay board 3025. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2113, and the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, and the first special symbol are displayed via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3025, and the function display board 1191. A drive signal is output to the symbol memory display 1184, the second special symbol memory display 1187, the ordinary symbol indicator 1189, the ordinary symbol memory display 1188, the game state indicator 1183, and the round indicator 1190.

  In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 3081, the second starting port sensor 2125, the gate sensor 2126, and the count sensor 2114. As the general winning opening sensor 3082, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2105, so that the first starting port sensor 3081, the second starting port sensor 2125, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2126 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starting port sensor 3081, the second starting port sensor 2125, and the gate sensor 2126. In addition, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 2114 frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2114. On the other hand, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3082 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 where the game ball does not frequently enter. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3082.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to a peripheral control unit 4140 of a peripheral control board 4010 to be described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). The main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140, as will be described in detail later.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from a power supply board 851, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 includes an electric double-layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. To be described). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e during power-off processing even when power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b and also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game balls and the like controls the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout, the firing control by the firing solenoid 654, and the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 for performing control, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail 731, and a ball release switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to start a ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 161, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. , A payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT4111c”) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. And a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , Is provided. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), as well as to prevent fraud. Functions are built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b, In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the RAM clear switch 4100c being input through the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, and the ball out switch 750 The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 may be input via the winning ball relay board 754.

  A ball out switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply path 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball path 741c formed in the base unit 741. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the winning ball relay board 754 of the winning ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754 first. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first output from the payout control input circuit 4111e. To the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is transmitted to the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal first. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal for displaying on the device 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I / O port 4111b. , And the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is reported that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 4100 Is notified that the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply path 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740). (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotator 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. When That the payout rotator 748 is difficult to rotate because of the engagement with the technical ball near the entrance), and when the number “3” is displayed, it is a “count switch error” (specifically, Is notified based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it is a “retry error” (specifically, payout). The number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, from the full-state detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is notified that the game balls are full of the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout). control That the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, it is “stocking” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the prepaid card return request signal from the return switch 365b are first transmitted via the frequency display plate 365, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is used as the payout control I / O. The data is received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. Further, the CR unit 6 updates a residual value of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of lent game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the residual value on the residual number indicator 365c to a CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the plate 874, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the residual frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control section]
As shown in FIG. 161, the firing control unit 4120 that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585 receives a detection signal from various detection switches related to firing, as shown in FIG. 4120a, an oscillating circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b so that 100 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 1100, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball-feeding reference pulse that is a predetermined number times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid driving circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the front of the rotary handle body 506, and a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether to forcibly stop launching a game ball by a player's will. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal board 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. A signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotary handle main body 506 is first supplied to the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. It is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the plate 880.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d fires, based on a signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512, a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength appropriate for the rotational position of the rotary handle front 506. When the reference pulse is inputted, the pulse is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192. By outputting the ball, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one ball of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is output. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball sending member 584 is sent to the hitting ball firing device 650 side. Thus, while the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated at power-on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, the peripheral control board 4010 performs the effect control based on the command from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the control data from the peripheral control section 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 161, a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140 a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140 b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and performs high-quality sound performance. The sound source IC 4140c includes a sound ROM 4140d that stores sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 3041 or the game board. The game board-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game machine 4 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the motor attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. To transmit a drive signal to the drive substrate 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 A door-side drive comprising door-side drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5. A screen for transmitting light emission data from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, or displaying the screen on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to transmitting the control data (display command) shown from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is transmitted to the sound source IC 4140c. Output.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Have been. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are based on the door frame base board. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, which are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140 a.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The speaker 821 controls the music and sound effects and the like according to various effects to flow, and is provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. The speakers 130, 222, and 262 and the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 are controlled so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding backward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  The peripheral control unit 4140 includes, in addition to a watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, an external watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control external device”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) Bits per second (hereinafter, referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, a door frame side lighting / flashing command, a game board side lighting / flashing command, a movable body driving command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3041 or the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmit a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. A light signal or a light signal is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., provided on the door frame 5, or based on the received game board side light flashing command. The blinking signal is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 522, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130, etc. provided on the game board 4.

  The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmit a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 to the door frame 5. , And the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159, 3302, 3506, etc., provided on the game board 4.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or receives a signal from the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are transmitted to the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. Input is made via a first drive board 3026 or a second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on a sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and relays the first drive board 3026, the second drive board 3027, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral relay. From the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via the terminal plate 882, or via the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, etc. Is controlled so that music, sound effects and the like according to various effects flow from the speaker 821. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged above the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. An acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal or a 4.1ch surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added) as sound information is sent to the bass speaker 821. Thus, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound effect) having a more realistic feeling than before.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 161, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a character ROM 4150d for storing various data of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a character ROM 4150d. A character RAM 4150e to which various stored data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140, and draws images on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Control. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a operates normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-progress signal to be described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the in-progress signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, and control data (display command) for the schedule data. A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines a screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various kinds of data are transferred from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the VDP 4150c does not receive screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. Note that the VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. The “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is sent to the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data, and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored and affects the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. Note that the sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when displaying various people on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing each person is called a “sprite”. Thus, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with a position arranged on the screen and a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite overlapping order”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular regions each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction in order from left to right as viewed from the front. The sub-scan is performed. When the liquid crystal display device 1900 receives one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the liquid crystal display device 1900 sequentially performs one line worth of one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. When the output of one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data of the next line is input, based on the drawing data of the next line. As main scanning, the data is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[4. Game content]
The game contents in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 162 and the like. Note that a functional configuration related to the payout of game balls is omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls, effect control, and the like are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in a ROM (not shown) in advance by the main control MPU 4100a.

  When a detection signal of a game ball is input from the gate sensor 2126 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number which is a lottery result for a normal symbol, The normal symbol hold storage means 4202 for temporarily storing according to the conditions described above, and the normal symbol variation patterns corresponding to the ordinary random numbers stored and executed by the normal symbol hold storage means 4202 are stored in the ROM of the main control board 4100. And a normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 for selecting from a predetermined ordinary symbol variation pattern table stored in the normal symbol variation pattern table, and a normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 1189 based on the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern. 4206 and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 by the ordinary symbol display control means 4206. If the communication random number (ordinary lottery result) is “ordinary hit”, the starting port opening / closing control means 4208 for driving the starting port solenoid 2124 to retreat (immerse) the movable piece 2106 and the normal symbol holding storage means 4202 are stored. And a normal symbol storage number display control means 4210 for displaying the number of ordinary symbol random numbers as a storage number on the ordinary symbol storage display 1188.

  The above-mentioned ordinary symbol holding storage means 4202 stores a predetermined number of ordinary random numbers (for example, four ) And suspend the execution of the stored ordinary random numbers until the variation display of the ordinary symbols becomes possible.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 includes a predetermined first special lottery result for the first special symbol based on a detection signal detected by the first starting port sensor 3081 due to a winning start in the first starting port 2101. A first special random number generation unit 4212 that generates a special random number, a first special symbol holding storage unit 4214 that temporarily stores the first special random number generated in the first special random number generation unit 4212 according to a predetermined condition, The first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the first special random number stored and executed by the first special symbol holding storage unit 4214 is stored in the ROM of the main control board 4100 in a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern selecting means 4216 selected from the table and the first special symbol variation selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selecting means 4216 The first special symbol display control means 4218 for variably displaying the first special symbol of the first special symbol display 1185 based on the pattern, and the number of first special random numbers held and stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 There is provided a first special symbol storage number display control unit 4220 for displaying the first special symbol storage display 1184 as the number of storages.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 includes a second special lottery result for the second special symbol based on a detection signal detected by the second starting port sensor 2125 by the start winning to the second starting port 2102. A second special random number generation unit 4222 that generates a special random number, a second special symbol holding storage unit 4224 that temporarily stores the second special random number generated by the second special random number generation unit 4222 according to a predetermined condition, The second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number stored and executed by the second special symbol holding storage unit 4224 is stored in the ROM of the main control board 4100 in a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern. The second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 selected from the table and the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226. Special symbol display control means 4228 for variably displaying the second special symbol of the second special symbol display 1186 based on the number of the second special random numbers held and stored in the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 Is displayed on the second special symbol storage display 1187 as the number of stored symbols.

  The first special symbol holding storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage unit 4224 are newly provided by the first and second special symbol display control units 4218 and 4228 when the first and second special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. Cannot be displayed in a variable manner, the first special random number and the second special random number triggered by the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3081 and the second starting port sensor 2125 are each set to a predetermined number (for example, four ) And suspend the execution of the stored first special random number and second special random number until the special symbol can be changed and displayed.

  The main control board 4100 stores the first special random number or the second special random number held in the first special symbol holding storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage unit 4224 in the starting openings 2101 and 2102. The priority holding / digestion means 4231 for executing (digesting) the second special random number with higher priority than the timing is provided, and the priority holding / digestion means 4231 controls the second special random number, that is, the second starting port 2102. The holding of the lottery result is executed (digested) with priority.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 includes a first special random number (first special lottery result) and a second special random number (second special random number) stored in the first special symbol holding storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage unit 4224. A special gaming state generating means 4232 for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous based on the special lottery result), and an opening / closing member 2107 for closing the special winning opening 2103 based on an instruction from the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232. Large winning opening opening / closing control means 4234 for controlling driving of the attacker solenoid 2113 so as to open / close in a predetermined pattern is provided.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 includes a first special random number or a second special random number (a first special symbol change pattern or a second special symbol change pattern) in which the advantageous game state is generated by the advantageous game state generating means 4232, A variation pattern table changing unit 4236 for changing the first special symbol variation pattern table and the second special symbol variation pattern table is further provided. The change pattern table changing unit 4236 changes, for example, to a change pattern table (for example, a high-probability change pattern table) in which a change pattern in which an advantageous game state occurs is selected with a higher probability than a normal change pattern table. (A so-called probable change), a change pattern table of a first special symbol or a second special symbol having a shorter variation time than a normal variation pattern table (for example, a time reduction variation pattern table), The probability of occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is higher than usual, and the variation pattern table is changed to a variation pattern table (for example, a probability variation time variation pattern table) in which the variation time of the special symbol is shorter (so-called probability variation / time saving).

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a normal symbol variation pattern, a first symbol variation pattern, a second symbol variation pattern, and a first special symbol storage according to the ordinary random number, the first special random number, and the second special random number. A command generation unit 4238 for generating a predetermined control command such as a production command based on the second special symbol storage or the like, and a command transmission unit 4240 for transmitting the command generated by the command generation unit 4238 to the peripheral control unit 4140 And

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are moved to the game panel 1150. Is hit into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front of the game, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down in the left or right game area 1100 above the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the more the ball is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger it can be driven. Also, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and when the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails, the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game balls, so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the highest portion in the peripheral wall 2503 of the center role 2500, the center is formed by a plurality of obstacle nails or the inclined upper surface of the peripheral wall 2503. The user is guided to the left area of the accessory 2500. Also, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2503 of the center role 2500, the right outer periphery of the center role 2500 and the game area 1100 The air enters the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 in the attacker unit 2100 through a narrow gap with the inner periphery, and is discharged into the game area 1100 immediately above the gate 2105 from the left end opening of the guide passage 2142a in a front view.

  Then, when the game ball flowing down the right side of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100 is guided by the guide passage 2142a and discharged into the game area 1100, it passes through the gate portion 2105 with extremely high probability and the gate sensor 2126. Will be detected. When a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2126, a normal random number is generated by the normal random number generation means 4200 in the main control board 4100 on the basis of the detection signal.

  On the basis of the ordinary random numbers, the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is displayed in a variable manner (for example, the ordinary symbol indicator 1189 composed of two LEDs of red and green alternately emits light) for a predetermined time ( For example, after a lapse of 0.1 second to 1 second), the ordinary symbol extracted based on the ordinary random number (ordinary lottery result) is stopped and displayed (any one of two LEDs of the ordinary symbol display 1189 emits light). You. In this example, the same variable display is also performed on the ordinary symbol display board 1191a provided in the second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100. The normal symbol variation display is performed by the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected from a predetermined ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table.

  More specifically, when the random number selected as a lottery is a “normal hit” random number, the display is stopped with a normal symbol indicating a hit (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the random number selected as a random number is a “normal loss” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol indicating loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). When the normal symbol indicating a hit is stopped and displayed, the movable piece 2106 that closes the second starting port 2102 retreats for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 6 seconds), and the second starting port is closed. A game ball can be awarded to 2102.

  In this example, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is extremely short as compared with the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball passing through the gate portion 2105 and drawing the "normal hit" is the second starting port. The movable piece 2106 is retracted by the starting port solenoid 2124 to be able to be received in the second starting port 2102 at a timing as to whether or not the movable piece 2106 for closing the 2102 is closed. Is accepted to the second starting port 2102 with a very high probability.

  Then, when a game ball is accepted to the second starting port 2102 by passing through the gate section 2104 and lottery of “normal hit” is detected by the second starting port sensor 2125, the detection is performed based on the detection signal of the second starting port sensor 2125. In the main control board 4100, a predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and in accordance with the payout command, the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 so that one game ball is played. , To the upper plate 301. In other words, in this example, when a game ball performs a driving operation (so-called right-handing) that passes on the right side of the center role item 2500, the ball passes through the gate portion 2104 with an extremely high probability and the gate portion 2105. When a game ball that has passed through the game is selected as a “normal hit”, it can be accepted into the second starting port 2102 with a very high probability, so even a beginner or a player unfamiliar with the game can easily win the second starting port 2102. And can entertain the player.

  By the way, as described above, in the present pachinko machine 1, a game ball can be easily won in the second starting port 2102 by the player right-handed. When the number of the game balls to be paid out increases, the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed increases, and there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 1 may be hesitant to install. However, in the present pachinko machine 1, the number of game balls to be paid out by winning a game ball to the second starting port 2102 is set to one. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while increasing the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed without any problem.

  Further, in this example, when the passage of a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2126 while the ordinary symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the ordinary symbol display 1189, the ordinary symbol that has been changed is stopped and the ordinary symbol generated and extracted earlier is detected. Until the result of the random number is determined, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is temporarily stored in the ordinary symbol storage and holding means 4202, and its display is displayed. The number of the stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the reserved number) is displayed on the ordinary symbol storage display 1188. This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is made up of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit indicates the number of storages. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed. ing. When the number of storages exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2126 is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 2104 and the “normal loss” is drawn, the movable piece 2106 disposed immediately below the gate 2105 and closing the second starting port 2102 moves the second starting port 2102 Since the game ball remains closed, the game ball that has passed through the gate 2105 abuts on the upper surface of the movable piece 2106, and rolls leftward on the left shelf 2122g from the left discharge port 2122f. From the left end of the portion 2122g, the game is released into the game area 1100 below the first starting port 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 and above the big winning opening 2103.

  Also, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 and has flowed down the left side of the center role 2500 is brought closer to the center of the game area 1100 below the center role 2500 by the shelf 2202 of the front side unit 2200. It has become. When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 arranged below the center role 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3082, the main control board 4100 performs payout control based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in response to the payout command, so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are raised. It is paid out to the plate 301.

  In addition, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning opening 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the big winning opening 2103, The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear of the game board 4 from an out port 1151 provided at the lower end in the left-right center of the area 1100. Also, regardless of whether the game ball has won any of the general winning opening 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the special winning opening 2103, the winning gaming ball is returned to the gaming area 1100. The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear without being removed.

  By the way, when a game ball flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2504 opened on the left side surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center role 2500. More specifically, the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2504 is supplied from the warp exit 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510, and mainly becomes the lowest portion after rolling the first stage 2511 in the left-right direction. Is released from the front. Then, the game balls released forward from the first stage 2511 are supplied to the second stage 2512 disposed on the front side and below the first stage 2511, and after rolling the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction, the most. From the lowered portion, the water is recirculated and discharged forward into the gaming area 1100 above the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100.

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 enters the chance entrance 2513 opened at the center rear side in the left-right direction of the second stage 2512, it enters the gaming area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 opened just above the first starting port 2101. It is released and can be accepted into the first starting port 2101 with a high probability. Then, when the game balls are received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3081, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are obtained from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is paid out to the upper plate 301.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when it is desired that a game ball be made to win in the first starting port 2101, a driving operation (a so-called left hit) in which the game ball flows down the left side of the center role 2500 is performed. If the player wants the game ball to win in the second starting port 2102, the player can perform a driving operation (so-called right-handed) such that the game ball flows down the right side of the center role 2500. A hit operation of a game ball can be selected in accordance with an interest, a mood, or the like, so that the player can enjoy the game by reflecting a player's wishes.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game ball recirculated and released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 flows down to the lower right side of the first starting port 2101 without being accepted by the first starting port 2101. , There is a possibility of being accepted into the special winning opening 2103. On the other hand, when the game ball recirculated and released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 flows down to the lower left side of the first starting port 2101 without being accepted by the first starting port 2101, the general winning opening of the front side unit 2200 2201.

  In the main control board 4100 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a game ball wins in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 and is detected by the first starting port sensor 3081 and the second starting port sensor 2125. In the first opening 2101, the first special random number generating means 4212 generates and extracts a first special random number. In the second starting port 2102, the second special random number generating means 4222 generates a second special random number. -Each extraction is performed. Then, based on the extracted special random numbers, after the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started, the extracted special symbol is displayed. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 in a manner suggesting a "big hit", the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and during that time, a large number of game balls can be acquired by causing the large winning port 2103 to win game balls. When one game ball wins the special winning opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  In addition, in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 as well, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol change display due to the passing of the game ball to the gate portion 2105. When a special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the device 1186 or when a special symbol such as a big hit game as a special advantageous game state cannot be displayed in a variable manner, a game ball wins in the starting ports 2101 and 2102 and the first starting port sensor. 3081, when detected by the second starting port sensor 2125, it is extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3081 and the second starting port sensor 2125 until the special symbol change display becomes possible. The first special random number and the second special random number are stored in the first special symbol holding storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage unit 4224, and the display thereof is held. And Tsu, which is the number of the stored special random numbers, to be displayed in the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 or the second special symbol memory indicator 1187.

  Each of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 is composed of two LEDs. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed, respectively. When the number of storages exceeds four, the extracted special random numbers are discarded. The second special random number stored (held) in the second special symbol holding storage unit 4224 by the priority holding digestion unit 4231 has priority over the first special random number stored in the first special symbol holding storage unit 4214. To be executed (digested). In other words, the holding of the lottery result for the second starting port 2102 and the third starting port 2415 is executed (digested) in preference to the holding of the lottery result for the first starting port 2101.

  Further, the main control board 4100 uses the first special random number or the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting port sensor 3081 and the second starting port sensor 2125 as the first special symbol variation pattern selection pattern. By comparing with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table) determined by the unit 4216 or the second special symbol variation pattern selecting unit 4226, the special random number is determined to be “losing” or “big hit”. In addition to discriminating which one, the "big hit" is also determined to be any of "4R big hit", "8R big hit", or "16R big hit". In addition, the random number determination table is used to determine “probable change time saving no hit”, “probability change hit”, “time reduction hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, and the like.

  Then, when the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 sets the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 to the open state by the advantageous game state generating means 4232, and then performs a predetermined operation. An opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern) in which the opening / closing member 2107 is closed when a predetermined time (eg, about 30 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number (eg, 10) of gaming balls satisfies a winning condition in the special winning opening 2103. The opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For “4R jackpot”, 4 rounds, for “8R jackpot”, 8 rounds, “16R jackpot” If so, 16 rounds are repeated each to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. After the predetermined number of rounds has been completed, for the "big hit", the variation pattern table changing means 4236 replaces the random number determination table with a high probability time reduction table or the like according to the extracted special random number.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the first special random number or the second special random number which is extracted when the game ball is started to enter the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 (the special lottery result). ), The first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 are variably displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 also responds to a special random number (special lottery result). An effect image is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, the variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows including a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows), and thereafter, sequentially. When the display is stopped and finally all the symbol columns are stopped and displayed, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player side. That is, in accordance with the special lottery result by the start winning, a plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed, and then an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed. Since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols of the first and second special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. You will pay attention to the design.

  As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol columns are variably displayed, a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed while leaving one fluctuating symbol column is displayed so as to satisfy a specific condition (reach). The special lottery results in which the “reach effect image” is displayed include “reach hit” and “reach loss”. There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect image”, and that highlights and displays the remaining symbol columns that are variably displayed after the reach display. That is, the reach effect image and the reach development effect image are images used for performing a reach effect (winning effect) to imply that a jackpot may be won, and as a result of these reach effects, By the stop mode displayed by the symbol row of the variable stop, the player is able to recognize whether a big hit or a loss has occurred. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can display not only an effect display related to the start winning but also a “big hit game effect image” displayed during the “big hit” game.

  The variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 162). The variable display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 based on a command related to a lottery result transmitted from the main control substrate 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. Has become. In this way, since the display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the player pays particular attention to is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like, a certain one related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 is used. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the symbol variation pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The “big hit game effect image” displayed during the “big hit” game and the like is also controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the load of the arithmetic processing on the main control board 4100, and to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining to the player and less tiring. Has become.

  In addition, the peripheral control unit 4140 controls the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159, 3302, 3506, and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 based on the command related to the lottery result, in addition to controlling the effect image. The LED is mounted on each of the decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 522, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130 and the like provided on the game board 4 and emits light appropriately. In this way, the player can be entertained by movable and luminous effects.

  Note that, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the image effect by the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) in the front unit 2000 are used. Effects (collaborative effects) using the liquid crystal display device 1900, and effects using the effect units 2550, 2600, 2700, 3100, 3300, and 3500 provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. Can be performed, and the pachinko machine 1 which makes the player more enjoyable and hard to get tired of can be provided.

[4-1. Production example]
Subsequently, an example of an effect (an example of a collaboration effect) by the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the back and side effect unit 3100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 to 165. FIG. 163 (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a normal state facing the window of the center role, and FIG. 163 (b) shows the back right production unit and the back left production unit while rotating the rotating decorative body. FIGS. 7A and 7B are explanatory diagrams illustrating an effect example in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display unit is divided into three parts, and FIG. 7C is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which the rotary decorative body is stopped following FIG. Further, FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display means is divided into six regarding the appearance of the back right effect unit and the back left effect unit unlike FIG. Further, FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect in which the rotational position of the rotating decorative body is changed to appear before the back right effect unit and the back left effect unit appear.

  First, in the normal state, the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L of the back horizontal production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 are located at the retreat positions separated from each other and away from each other. The right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are respectively located on the left and right outer sides of the window 2501 in the center role item 2500 in front view. Therefore, the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L of the back horizontal production unit 3100 are invisible from the player side by the center role 2500 and the game panel 1150, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 through the window 2501. Is mainly visible from the player side (see FIG. 163 (a)).

  In this state, when the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is received by the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102 and a predetermined special lottery result is drawn, the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left The back and side rotation drive motors 3123 of the three rotating decorative body units 3120 provided in each of the rendering units 3100L are driven, and the three rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged vertically are rotated around the axis extending in the vertical direction. Note that the rotation speed at this time is a speed at which the decoration applied to the outer peripheral surface of the rotary decoration body 3126 is difficult to recognize.

  With the three rotating decorative bodies 3126 provided in the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L, respectively, the back horizontal right slide drive motor 3152 and the back horizontal left slide drive motor 3159 of the back horizontal slide unit 3150 are rotated. Are driven respectively, and the back right effect unit 3100R is slid leftward in front view, and the back left effect unit 3100L is slid rightward in front view.

  On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display screen is vertically divided into three parts so as to correspond to the three rotating rotary bodies 3126 arranged vertically in the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L, respectively. Display a different image.

  Then, when the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L are slid in the approaching direction from the retracted position, from the left and right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on which three different images are displayed vertically. The rotating rotating decorative body 3126 appears, and the player's interest can be attracted to the rotating rotating decorative body 3126 and each of the effect images divided into three.

  The back right effecting unit 3100R and the back left effecting unit 3100L are slid to the closest appearing position with each rotating decorative body 3126 rotated (see FIG. 163 (a)). In the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L, the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L may be slid left and right before reaching the appearance position, and may be slid. And the player can be entertained.

  Then, when the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L reach the appearance positions, the rotating decorative body 3126 that is rotating is stopped. When the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, decorations corresponding to the special lottery result obtained by lottery are applied to the decorations such as the four pictures and the patterns provided on the outer periphery of the rotating decorative body 3126. The player stops the game so that the facing surface faces the player (see FIG. 163 (c)). Thereby, the special lottery result selected by lottery is suggested to the player by the combination of the decorations represented by the plurality (here, six) of the rotary decoration bodies 3126, and the expectation of the player for the game is raised. Is available.

  In addition, in this effect, there are a pattern in which a plurality of rotating decorative ornaments 3126 are stopped all at once, and a pattern in which the rotating decorative objects 3126 are sequentially stopped in accordance with a special lottery result to be selected. Also, during this effect, the LED of the rotating decorative body decoration board 3129 emits light as appropriate.

  As an effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the back and side effect unit 3100, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the above effect as shown in FIG. In order to deal with each separately, it is also possible to perform an effect of dividing into six. In this effect, the back right effecting unit 3100R and the back left effecting unit 3100L are slid to the appearance position while each rotating decorative body 3126 is rotated, and the display screen is divided into six parts so as to correspond to each rotating decorative body 3126. Then, different images are displayed (see FIG. 164 (a)).

  Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the back right effecting unit 3100R and the back left effecting unit 3100L reach the appearance position, the rotating plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 are sequentially stopped to rotate (see FIG. 164 (b)). ). The rotation decoration body 3126 for stopping the rotation is configured such that when the rotation of all the rotation decoration bodies 3126 is stopped, the combination of the decorations facing the player side becomes the combination corresponding to the special lottery result. Then, the respective rotary decorative bodies 3126 are sequentially stopped.

  Thereafter, when the rotation of all the rotary decorations 3126 is stopped, the combination of the decorations in the rotary decorations 3126 that are stopped and turned to the player side suggests a special lottery result drawn to the player, (See FIG. 164 (c)).

  In this effect, in a state where all the rotary decorations 3126 are rotated with the back right effecting unit 3100R and the back left effecting unit 3100L as appearance positions, each light circulates around six effect images. There is a pattern for sequentially turning on the LEDs of the rotating decorative body decoration substrate 3129 provided in the rotating decorative body unit 3120. In addition, there is also a pattern in which the light-emitting decoration of the rotating decorative body 3126 for stopping the rotation is turned on or off, and the LED of the back horizontal decorative board 3130 arranged beside the rotating decorative body 3126 is made to emit light. Further, there is also a pattern in which the rotary decorative body 3126 is illuminated with a color corresponding to the color of the image which is divided into six and displayed respectively.

  Further, as an effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the back side effect unit 3100, a normal state in which the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are located at the retracted position (see FIG. 165 (a)) In other words, after the rotating decorative body 3126 is rotated in a state where the rotating decorative body 3126 is not visible from the player side, the surface on which the specific decoration according to the special lottery result is drawn faces the player side. To stop rotation. Then, in this state, the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L are slid to the appearance positions, respectively, and the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L appear and become visible from the player side. The decoration of the rotary decorative body 3126 (see FIGS. 165 (b1) and (b2)) makes the player suggest the special lottery result, and raises the player's expectation of the game.

  Thus, each time the back right effecting unit 3100R and the back left effecting unit 3100L (a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126) appear, the decoration of the rotating decorative body 3126 seen from the player side is different (FIG. 165 (b1)). , (B2)), so that the player can be excited by what kind of decoration the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L appear in, which makes the player more enjoyable and less entertaining. Can be suppressed.

[5. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board 4100 (in particular, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 166 (a) is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (a), the main control board 4100 according to the present embodiment first stores various registers and RAMs in the process of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. The RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed since the power was turned on, and the main control MPU 4100a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined that the data is present, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process of storing information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is executed. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. When the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state by executing the initialization processing without executing the recovery processing.

  Next, as a process of step S2, a random number which is a number updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to the present embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) to be provided for a lottery process on a display mode when the special symbol change display is stopped, The variable random number provided for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of the above, and the display of the decorative symbol performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is reached. (The left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped at the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol has not been stopped yet, or the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are synchronously changed to be the same symbol. A state random number to be used in the lottery process of determining whether or not to make a big hit, and a symbol random number to be used in a lottery process for determining the type of the big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number. One symbol random number, the second symbol random number), and a random number counter for storing random numbers such like, random numbers to be subjected (usually random) in accordance lottery processing operation triggered become per the Toraku of the movable piece 2105.

  In this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol use the same reach random number, that is, even if the first start port 2101 is started, the second start port 2102 is started. Even in this case, the reach random number is updated from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach random number is updated from a different counter. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second reach symbol corresponding to the reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number may be different from the first reach determination table. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) which are not involved in the random numbers among the random numbers are updated. After the processes in steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process in step S2 is basically repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 166 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (b), in this interrupt control, first, register save processing is performed as the processing of step S11. Next, in step S12, detection signals from various switches, such as the gate sensor 2126, the first starting port sensor 3081, the second starting port sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, and the general winning port sensor 3082, are output. Is entered. Next, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, the random number (special random number, ordinary random number) relating to the display mode when the variable design of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped is updated from among the random numbers described above. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this manner, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner as the process of step S14. Execute Although the special symbol process process will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, a first special symbol process flag) indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is described. The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a hit at the time of operation of the movable piece 2106. In the normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the driving frequency of the movable piece 2106 is higher during the period from the end of the big hit game state (excluding a part of the 4R big hit game state) until the big hit again. The lottery process is executed so that the lottery process is performed (so-called time saving state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased until the jackpot becomes a big hit again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is shortened. When the result is a hit, the opening time of the movable piece 2106 is extended to realize such a time saving state.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the ordinary symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next executes the special symbol process as the process of step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the above-described ordinary symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs an information output process of outputting data such as hit information (15R big hit, 10R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the process of step S18. .

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first starting port sensor 3081, the second starting port sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, the general winning opening sensor 3082, and the like as the process of step S19. When the signals are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. Thereby, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744, and pays out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next executes a storage process for checking an increase or decrease in the number of startup storages as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the constantly operating actuator is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is ended when the interrupt is permitted (step S24). Becomes

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process using a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be performed. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for the various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 167, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses the first starting port sensor 3081 The first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the above random number counter on condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2101) (step S31), and this is obtained from the RAM. A first opening opening passage process such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). On the condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2125 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2102) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is replaced with the random number. A second starting port passage process such as acquiring from the counter and storing this in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S39) is executed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are stopped in the variable display is “4R latent probability big hit (specific 1)”, “4R probability variable big hit”. (Specific 2) ”and“ 4R normal big hit (non-specified) ”, the large winning prize port 2103 is controlled to the open state according to the 4R big hit gaming state, and the“ 8R probable big hit (specific) 4), the large winning opening 2103 is controlled to the open state in accordance with the game state of the 8R jackpot, and the "16R sudden change jackpot (specific 3)" and the "16R probability change jackpot (specific 5) )), A process of controlling the large winning opening 2103 to the open state according to the 16R jackpot game state of short-time opening or long-time opening is executed.

  If the jackpot execution flag is not set, the condition is that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is “0”. (Step S36), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S37), and the second special symbol process stored in the second special symbol holding storage area is performed. On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S36), a second special symbol including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process is executed (Step S38). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first starting port passage processing (step S32).

  Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3081 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2101, as shown in FIG. 168. First, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special first symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly set the variable display control of the first special symbol to a suspended state. The processing of S42 to S44 is performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S44, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. To be stored.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of step S42 to step S44, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held.

  FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passage processing (step S34).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second starting port sensor 2125 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2102, as shown in FIG. 169. First, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special second symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the reserved number of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly set the variable display control of the second special symbol to the suspended state. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S54, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. To be stored.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of reserved special second symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the above-mentioned variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held.

  FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, Only the first special symbol processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which a process of determining the mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )
3. A lottery process for a variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variable random number, and a variation mode of the effect display executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting processing for performing such operations (step S82)
4. First special symbol change processing that waits until the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol display mode 1185 displays the first special symbol variation control stopped mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 166).

  FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first executes step S101. In the process of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the held state based on the counter value of the first special held number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, the process is then stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read out from the RAM. . Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stored in each of the first special symbol reserved storage areas. The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the special symbol change display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the first special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the variable display control suspension is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

  After that, as a process of step S105, a big hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S106) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), the process ends.

  FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time reduction state, high probability non-time reduction state) (step S111), the high probability state shown in FIG. A big hit determination table is selected (step S112). If the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), a large hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 206A is selected (step S113). The calculated big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 173 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and when the gaming state is a low probability state (a normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and a time reduction state (low probability time saving state)). And a large hit determination table used when the game state is a high probability (high probability non-saving time state, high probability time saving state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, the hit determination value indicating that the ten kinds of first special random numbers have won the big hit matches the hit determination value indicating that the 2390 kinds of the first special random numbers are the above-mentioned loss. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the value. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the low probability big hit determination table referred to be compared with the second special random number, the second special symbol process process is compared with the first special random number. Like the big hit determination table at the time of low probability, which is referred to, the 10 kinds of second special random numbers match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and the 2390 kinds of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the outlier determination value indicating the fact.

  In the big hit determination table at the time of high probability, 20 kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability match the big hit determination value, The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the 2380 types of first special random numbers match the loss determination value. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is determined in the low-probability state (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state). ) And time-saving state (low probability time-saving state)). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first special random number is compared. Similarly to the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to, 20 kinds of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with the jackpot determination value indicating that the winning has occurred, and match the 2380 kinds of second special random numbers with the outlier determination value indicating that there is an outlier.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, and determines that it is a big hit (step S115) ), A big hit flag indicating that the change has won the big hit is set, and the process is terminated (step S116), and the selected big hit determination table and the first special read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random numbers, when it is determined that the data is out of position, the reach determination table shown in FIG. 173 (B) is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 173 (B) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the gaming state is a probable change (a high-probability state (a high-probability non-reduction state, a high-probability reduction state)). A reach determination table at the time and a normal reach determination table used when the gaming state is the normal state (normal state) are provided. In the reach determination table at the time of the probability change, the reach random numbers are set so that all of the reach random numbers of 240 types do not match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, and match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not performed. Each is associated. As described above, in the case of the probability change (high probability state), when it is determined that the vehicle is out of reach, it is not determined that the vehicle is out of reach. Therefore, the reach flag described later is not set, and the reach effect is executed. There is no. For this reason, when the reach is formed at the time of the probability change and the reach effect is executed, it can be recognized that a big hit occurs at that time.

  In the reach determination table in the normal state, the reach random numbers are set so that the seven reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, and the 233 reach random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that the reach is not reached. Are associated with each other. As described above, in the normal state (normal state), unlike the case of the probability change state (high-probability state), the reach determination value indicating the reach is provided. For this reason, even if the reach is formed and the reach effect is executed at the normal time, it is not possible to recognize whether or not a big hit will occur until all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117). Is set, and the process is terminated (step S119).

  FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 174, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first sets The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 4100a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 173 (C). (Step S122), the type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is determined (step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 173 (C), the symbol determination table includes, for each determination result (specific 1 4R latent probability change, specific 2 4R probability change, specific 3 16R sudden change, specific 4 8R probability change, Symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are stored in association with specific 5 16R probability variable jackpots and non-specific 4R normal jackpots. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number. In addition, in the symbol determination table of this example, it is set so that the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are different. ing.

In particular,
The 1.4R big hit game state (the opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is repeated four times (four rounds)) is controlled in such a manner that the game ball is difficult to enter, and after the 4R big hit game state ends, The high probability non-shortening state is controlled until a big hit occurs, and a specific 1R 4R latent probability change big hit that executes a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the high probability state 2.4R The big hit game state is controlled in such a manner that the game ball can easily enter the ball, and after the end of the 4R big hit game state, it is controlled to the high probability time saving state until the big hit again. The specific 2R probability variable big hit 3.16R big hit game state ( The opening / closing pattern for opening / closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is repeated 16 times (16 rounds) in such a manner that the game ball is difficult to enter. After the end of the 16R jackpot game state, the specific 3R 16R sudden change big hit 4.8R jackpot game state is controlled to the high probability time saving state until the big hit again. The opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is 8 times. (8 rounds) is controlled in such a manner that the game ball easily enters, and after the end of the 8R jackpot game state, the game is controlled to the high-probability time-saving state until the jackpot again becomes a big hit. The game state is controlled in such a manner that the game ball easily enters the ball, and after the end of the 16R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to the high-probability time-saving state until the big hit again occurs. The ball is controlled in such a manner that it is difficult to enter the ball, and after the end of the 4R jackpot gaming state, the ball is controlled to the low probability non-time saving state (normal state), In the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is determined to be any one of the six types of non-specific 4R normal jackpots for executing a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not a high probability state exists.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. In the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination values is set to be different from that in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each big hit is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 173 (C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the specific 1R 4R latent probability variable hit, the specific 2 4R probability variable hit, the specific 3R 16R sudden probability variable hit, While the determination value distribution is set for the specific 4R probable big hit and the non-specific 4R normal big hit, the specific 1R 4R latent probable big hit is specified in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. The determination value distribution is set for a 2R 4R jackpot, a 5R 16R jackpot, and a non-specific 4R jackpot.

  In this example, the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 per round in the big hit game state of the specific 2, 4, 5 and the specific 1, 3 and non-specific (the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is controlled to be opened) Time). Specifically, in the case of the specific 2, 4, and 5, the control is performed to the long open state in which the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 per round is set to 30 seconds. If it is not specified, the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 per round is controlled to be a short opening state in which the opening time is extremely shorter than the long opening state by 0.05 seconds. When controlled to such a short opening state, the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 per round is too short, so that even if the opening control of the opening and closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is recognized, It is difficult to make a game ball win in the special winning opening 2103. That is, during the control of the short open state in the big hit game state, the game ball hardly wins in the large winning opening 2103, and unlike the control of the long open state, it is expected to obtain many game balls. It is not possible (such a jackpot is also referred to as a "jackpot without a real ball").

  When the type of the big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big hit is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the specific 1R 4R latent probability big hit is determined, the first special symbol 4R latent probability big hit symbol is determined, and when the specific 2R 4R certain probability big hit is determined, the first special symbol 4R is determined. If it is determined to be a probable big hit design, and if it is determined to be a specific 16R sudden change big hit, it is determined to be a 16R sudden probable big hit design of the first special design, and if it is determined to be a specific 4R sudden change big hit, it is a first special design. Is determined to be the 8R probability variable big hit symbol, and when the non-specific 4R normal big hit is determined, the 4R normal big hit symbol of the first special symbol is determined. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, the first special symbol is determined to be a lost symbol as a mode at the time of stopping the change (step S124).

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed, as a process of step S125, these lottery results (one of the jackpot type, the reach loss, and the loss (indicating the stop symbol mode of the first special symbol) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S126, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-described first variation pattern setting process (step S82), this process is ended. The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a specifies, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped changing, from the received judgment result notification command, the specific 2R 4R probability variable jackpot is selected from the jackpots. In this case, it is determined to be a 4R probability variable jackpot (combination of odd and identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", "7"), and the specific 4R probability variable jackpot of the jackpot is specified. In this case, it is determined to be an 8R probability variable jackpot (combination of odd and identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", "7"; common to the 4R variable probability jackpot symbol) and a specific 5R 16R variable jackpot. Is determined, it is determined to be a 16R probability variable jackpot symbol (combination of odd identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", "7"; common to the 4R probability variable jackpot symbol and the 8R probability variable jackpot symbol) And fluctuation pattern command The determined stop symbols at the time lapse of the variation time specified (when the game effects termination) controls display on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the combination of the odd-numbered identical decorative symbols of “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, the decorative symbol stops. It is not possible to determine any of the specific 2R 4R jackpot, the specific 4R 8R jackpot, and the specific 5R 16R jackpot. It can be determined that control is performed to the probability state. Until the effect result in the 4R jackpot game state is derived, it is not possible to determine whether or not to control to the 8R jackpot game state or the 16R jackpot game state after the end of the 4R jackpot game state.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in a state of stopping the change (stop symbol), when the specified determination result notification command specifies a specific one of the big hits of the 4R latent probability variation big hit. Is determined to be a 4R latent probability variable big hit symbol (combination of even numbered same decorative symbols of "2", "4", "6"), and if a non-specific 4R normal big hit among the big hits is specified, the 4R normal Big hit symbol (combination of even numbered same decorative symbols of "2", "4" and "6". Common to 4R latent probability changing big hit symbol) is determined, and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command elapses (game At the end of the effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the combination of the same number of the same decorative symbols of “2”, “4”, and “6” as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, the specific symbol from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined. It is not possible to determine whether it is a 4R latency variable jackpot or an unspecified 4R regular jackpot, and it is difficult to determine whether the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state even after the 4R jackpot gaming state ends. Since the effect is performed, it is not possible to determine whether or not to control to the high-probability state after the end of these jackpot gaming states.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a specifies a specific 3R sudden change probability big hit of the big hit from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop pattern) when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped. Is determined to be a 16R sudden change big hit symbol (combination of predetermined decorative symbols (losing eyes) out of the missing symbols. Specifically, for example, a combination of decorative symbols of "357") and specified from the variation pattern command When the change time elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the combination of the decorative symbols “357” as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, it is determined from the stopped symbol of the decorative symbol whether or not it is a specific 3R sudden sudden change big hit. It is possible to determine that the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state (16R big hit game state in which the game ball is difficult to enter).

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, when the reach error is identified from the received judgment result notification command, the unlock symbol with the reach. (Combinations of decorative designs that are not the same. However, if the decorative patterns on the left and right are the same), if a loss is specified, a loose design without a reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, decorative patterns on the left and right. Are not the same), and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 175, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag to If it has been performed (step S141), the type of the jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table at the time of the jackpot according to the current game state are selected (step S142), and the reach is performed. If the flag is set (step S143), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach according to the current game state is selected (step S144), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal In the case of a loss (a loss that does not execute the reach effect), the fluctuation pattern at the time of the loss Selecting a table (step S145).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S146). The variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S149). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the fluctuation time thus determined.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table includes a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). The variable random numbers are stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU 4100a determines the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Is obtained from the table, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  In the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, it is set to determine the type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect to execute with the variable random number. . For example, among the reach effects, a super reach effect (e.g., equivalent to the SP1 type and SP2 type hit effect in FIGS. 186 and 188 described later) is a normal reach effect (for example, a normal type hit effect in FIGS. 186 and 188 described later). Expectation), and when the super reach effect is executed, the degree of expectation of the player with respect to the jackpot game state is increased. A detailed description of the reach effect in the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described later.

  When the first special symbol variation display control is started, the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) as the process of step S149. At the time of updating, this processing ends.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table during the working hours, variation time information of one type of special symbol set to about one second is associated with all of the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). In this manner, a special pattern variation pattern is set. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table during non-working hours, the variation time information of the plurality of special symbols set in the range of 10 to 120 seconds is associated with each of the special symbol random numbers. The pattern has been set. That is, the variation time table of the special symbol is set such that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is reduced to about 1 second in the variation pattern table in the non-hours time when compared with the variation pattern table in the non-hours variation. ing.

  FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol change process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol change process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 176, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first executes step S171. In the process (1), the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is decremented by one. Then, when the variable time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the lottery variable time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is ended.

  FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 177, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first executes step S181. The display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1185 is performed as the process of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. A stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

  Next, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game state is started (step S187), and the big hit game The standby time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set and the time saving flag is reset (step S189), and the first special symbol process flag is set to the first special symbol normal process which is an initial value. When the process is updated so as to be shifted to the process (step S190), the process ends. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and is determined according to the type of jackpot (4R latent probability jackpot, 4R probability jackpot, 16R sudden probability jackpot, 8R probability jackpot, 16R probability jackpot, 4R regular jackpot). It is prepared individually according to. In step S187, a jackpot start command (4R latent probability variable jackpot start command, 4R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 16R sudden variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, 4R ordinary jackpot) Big hit start command, 16R sudden change big hit start command, 8R certain big change start command, 16R certain big hit start command, 4R normal big hit start command) are set. Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit specified by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol process (step S15).

  Now, in the process of step S801, when it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2105, the main signal is output as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 executes a gate passage process such as acquiring the ordinary random number of the ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S802. I do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal process in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and based on the read ordinary random number, a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped is performed (step S803).
2. Ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process which stands by until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1189 is stopped (step S805).
4. Variation display of the normal symbol so that the normal symbol variation control mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped is displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped becomes a mode suggesting “per-universal pattern”, the movable piece 2106 retreats to accept the game ball to the second starting port 2102. Normal electric accessory opening processing for executing processing for enabling control (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 166).

  FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passing process (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal of the gate sensor 2126 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2105, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value of the ordinary reservation number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of Step S811. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the reserved number of the ordinary symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed in order to newly set the variable display control of the ordinary symbols to the suspended state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the ordinary reservation number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the processing of step S813, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variable random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, as a process of step S814, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S812 to S814, the above-mentioned variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly held.

  FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 180, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 firstly performs the process of step S821 as follows. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value of the ordinary suspended number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state, then, as the process of step S822, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is processed. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, ordinary figure variable random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal count number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stopped. Are shifted in a first-in first-out manner (first-in first-out).

  Specifically, the normal symbol hold storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2105 are sequentially arranged from the first (earliest) area. Remember. When a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2105, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols has been suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is sequentially released from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, if the current game state is a time reduction state (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state) (step S826), a time reduction time ordinary figure hit determination table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time reduction state (low-probability non-reduction state, high-probability non-reduction state) (step S825), a non-reduction time general time chart determination table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S827), and the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol ordinary processing (step S828).

  In addition, the normal figure hit judgment table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the game state is a time reduction (low probability time reduction state and high probability time reduction state). And a non-working time general-purpose hit determination table used when the gaming state is a non-working time reduction (low-probability non-working reduction state, high-probability non-working reduction state). Then, in the time-saving-time ordinary figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all of the 251 types of ordinary random numbers match the universal figure hit determination value indicating that the ordinary figure has been won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with a deviation determination value in a general figure indicating a deviation. As described above, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 during the working hours, the ball is always elected per ordinary drawing, the movable piece 2106 retreats, and the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2102. Is controlled as possible.

  In addition, the movable piece 2106 is generally called an “electric chew”. In addition, when the movable piece 2106 operates (retreats in the present example), the reception of the game ball into the second starting port 2102 is facilitated. The duration is called the open time. In this example, when the winning time per day is reduced during the working hours, the opening time of the movable piece 2106 is set to 5800 ms. By setting a relatively long opening time in this way, the period during which a right-hit game ball can enter the second starting port 2102 can be lengthened. Further, in the later ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S804), the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined. In this example, the variation time of the ordinary symbol during the working hours is set to be shorter than before. In addition, a device is devised to further increase the ratio of the movable piece 2106 being in the open state. Specifically, for example, the time during which the normal symbol fluctuates is set to 80 ms, and the time during which the fluctuation of the normal symbol is displayed is set to 500 ms. In addition, the interval period from when the movable piece 2106 is closed (after the open state ends) to when the next change of the ordinary symbol is started is set to 464 ms.

  In the pachinko machine 1, by setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol as described above, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 during a time saving time, the ordinary symbol is not moved until the game ball reaches the movable piece 2106. Can be completed in time to open the movable piece 2106 by winning in the ordinary drawing. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that substantially all of the game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2105 during working hours are accepted by the second starting port 2102. By providing such a characteristic configuration, the pachinko machine 1 facilitates entry into the second starting port 2102 in the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and the second starting port 2102 The second special lottery that is performed based on the entry of a ball into the game can be continuously executed without interruption. In other words, it is easy to maintain or increase the reserved number of the second special lottery displayed on the second special symbol storage display 1187. In addition, such a feature of the normal hit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in Chapters [5] and [8].

  In addition, in the non-working time general map hit determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is found that all of the 251 types of normal random numbers match the general map hit determination value indicating that the general map random was won. However, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-position figure determination value indicating that the out-of-position figure is out of place. As described above, in non-working hours, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, there is no chance of winning per ordinary drawing, so the movable piece 2106 retreats to the second starting port 2102. There is no possibility to control the acceptance of game balls.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected general symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process, and determines that the normal symbol hit is determined (step S829). ), After setting a general symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won per general symbol (step S830), the general symbol as a mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the normal symbol fluctuation control is stopped. On the other hand, the symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol is lost as a result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process, the variation of the ordinary symbol is determined. A non-normal symbol is determined as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) (step S832). After that, when the above-described ordinary symbol process flag is updated (step S833) so as to proceed to the ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S804), this process is ended.

[6. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 181, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initialization processing, processing for clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every time 2 ms elapses, and executes a 2 ms regular process. In the 2 ms steady-state process, a process of counting up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms elapsed At the same time as setting the flag T, a process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms regular process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, lamps / LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like is executed based on a command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms regular process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T has not been set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the 16 ms regular process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms regular process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of Steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the peripheral control MPU 4140a analyzes a command (for example, a production command) received from the main control board 4100, and outputs a plurality of types of flags stored in the peripheral control RAM 4140e according to the analysis result. Of these, the flag corresponding to the command is set.

  In the effect control processing of step S602, control processing relating to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. The command received from the main control board 4100 is, for example, a variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, a process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process) Process)), the variation pattern command transmitted by being set, and being set in the starting opening passage process (steps S45 and S47 of the first starting opening passage process and steps S55 and S57 of the second starting opening passage process). The command is a command for specifying the number of holdings, a command for specifying a random number, or the like transmitted by the above-mentioned method. In the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010, the “effect pattern” as a display effect pattern performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b in association with each variation pattern based on the variation pattern command. Each is stored. In the effect control processing of step S602, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines an effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, and causes the liquid crystal display MPU 4150a to execute a display effect based on the effect pattern on the liquid crystal display device 1900. . The detailed processing of the effect control processing will be described later.

  In the sound control process of step S603, control processes related to the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like are executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 3013 and the like are executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, prefetch random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16-ms regular processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is started immediately after the start of the 16 ms steady-state process (the command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady processing, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady processing, the 16 ms steady processing is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms regular process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

  Hereinafter, detailed processing of the effect control processing (step S602 in FIG. 182) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. As shown in FIG. 183, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes any one of steps S1210, S1220, and S1230 with reference to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game. The process selection flag is held in, for example, the peripheral control RAM 4140e.

  In the decorative design change start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, if the change pattern command has been received, setting for starting the change display of the decorative design is performed. Specifically, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the fluctuation pattern command and the jackpot command, and the setting such as a notice effect is performed. Here, the jackpot command is one of the commands received by the peripheral control MPU 4140a from the main control board 4100 in step S601 of FIG. 182, and is a command indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. In the received jackpot command, information on the jackpot indicated by the command is analyzed by the command analysis process in step S601.

  In the decorative symbol change process (Step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 ( In particular, a display command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a) to perform control for stopping the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In the big hit display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the liquid crystal display via the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in response to the big hit start command transmitted from the main control board 4100. Control is performed to cause the device 1900 to display an indication of the start of the big hit game state or display during the big hit game state (for example, a round display).

  FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a decorative symbol change start process. As shown in FIG. 184, first, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S1211). The variation pattern reception flag is a flag that is set in the above-described command analysis processing (step S601) and indicates that a variation pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100. The variation pattern reception flag is held in, for example, the peripheral control RAM 4140e. If the variation pattern reception flag has not been set in step S1211, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the variation pattern command has not been received, and ends the process.

  If the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set in step S1211, the peripheral control MPU 4140a resets the fluctuation pattern reception flag (step S1212), and the fluctuation pattern based on the received fluctuation pattern command causes a large hit ( (Step S1213).

  If the variation pattern is a hit pattern in step S1213 (YES in step S1213), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol forming the big hit symbol array indicating the big hit based on the variation pattern ( Step S1214). If the variation pattern is not a hit pattern in step S1213 (NO in step S1213), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines a stop symbol of a decorative symbol forming a loss symbol array indicating a loss based on the variation pattern. (Step S1215).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol is a symbol displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and fluctuates along with the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the stop mode. That is, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a hit (big hit), a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern of the hit pattern is sent from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010 (the peripheral control unit 4140, the peripheral The control symbol is transmitted to the control MPU 4140a), and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop symbol forming the big hit symbol array together with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “out” which is not a hit (big hit), a fluctuation pattern command indicating a fluctuation pattern of a non-hit pattern is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control. It is transmitted to the substrate 4010 (peripheral control unit 4140, peripheral control MPU 4140a), and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in an out-of-position mode. Is displayed.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a notice selection process of determining whether or not to execute a notice effect based on the notice determination random number (step S1216), and generates an effect pattern based on the variation pattern (details will be described later). The effect time (variation time) determined based on the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area, and the decision made in steps S1214 and S1215. A display command corresponding to the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. In the case of a pachinko machine without a notice effect, the notice selection process in step S1216 is unnecessary, and in the processes after step S1217, processing of information related to the notice effect (for example, input / output to the notice type storage area). Processing) becomes unnecessary. After that, the peripheral control MPU 4140a updates the process selection flag to “1” (Step S1218) and ends the process.

  The display command set in step S1217 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in the information output process (step S605 in FIG. 182). The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received display command. When receiving the effect stop command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a transmits the effect stop command to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150. The variable display of is ended.

  When the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1217, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after the notice pattern is read, so that the next change of the decorative pattern is performed. At the time of the display, it is possible to prevent an erroneous execution of a preview effect based on the preview pattern determined at the time of starting the previous variable display of the decorative symbol.

[6-1. Determining the production pattern including the hit production
Next, the “effect pattern based on the fluctuation pattern” described in step S1217 of FIG. 184 will be described in detail. The “effect pattern” is determined by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 based on the (special symbol) variation pattern determined by the main control board 4100. In other words, the “decoration symbol variation pattern” It is. As the effect pattern (decoration pattern of the decorative symbol), a pattern to be executed is determined from a plurality of types of effect patterns stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4140b or the like. Such effect patterns include a variation pattern capable of executing a display effect including a hit effect (effect pattern including a hit effect) and a variation pattern capable of executing a display effect not including the hit effect (an effect pattern not including the hit effect). ). Strictly speaking, the drop production includes a production that forms a reach state, and then a production that suggests whether or not a big hit will occur (post-reach production). (Reach production).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a progresses the effect according to the effect content indicated by the determined effect pattern. In this case, for example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs a sound from the speakers 121 and 391 by outputting a control signal (sound command) to the sound source IC 4140c, and outputs a driving command to the motor driving board 3013a to cause the pistol unit 3075 to output. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is operated to output a display command to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a) to display an image on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Hereinafter, among such effect patterns, an effect pattern including a hit effect will be described in detail.

  FIG. 185 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the determination result and the effect time in the special symbol change pattern. As described above with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175, the main control board 4100 sets a determination result notification command based on the result of the special lottery (step S125) and a variation pattern command according to the variation pattern of the special symbol (step S147). . Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100. FIG. 185 summarizes an example of the relationship between the special lottery result (determination result) and the variation time (effect time) for the special symbol variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 in this manner. In FIG. 185, as an example, the determination result of the special lottery (in this case, the first special lottery result in the normal state) and the rendering time (part of the variation pattern of the first special symbol (see step S146 of FIG. 175)). (Special symbol variation pattern table). In addition, in the following description regarding the drop effect, the first special symbol will be described for simplicity, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  The judgment result column in FIG. 185 is classified into “out”, “low hit”, and “high hit” based on the special lottery result notified by the judgment result notification command. For example, in the “missing” column of FIG. 185, a variation pattern transmitted in combination with a determination result notification command for notifying “missing” or “reach missing” is summarized. Note that in FIG. 185, the fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation time is 20 seconds or more are summarized, and the reach flag is set in all the fluctuation patterns of the shift pattern in such a relatively long fluctuation time (the reach is formed). ). In other words, the variation pattern of “outside” shown in FIG. 185 is a variation pattern corresponding to a special random number such that “reach available” is selected in the reach determination table shown in FIG. 173 (B). This is a variation pattern corresponding to “reach loss” (in the following description in this section, for the sake of simplicity, simply referred to as “loss” or “loss pattern”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a, which has received such a special symbol variation pattern of the outlier pattern, sets a variation pattern in which the display effect including the hit effect is executed (the effect pattern including the hit effect) as the effect pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern. A display command is set based on the selected variation pattern and the like (see step S1217 in FIG. 184).

  In the “low hit” column of FIG. 185, the fluctuation patterns transmitted together with the determination result notification command for notifying the big hit corresponding to “low hit” are summarized, and the “high hit” column of FIG. 185 is collected. , The fluctuation pattern transmitted in combination with the determination result notification command for notifying the big hit corresponding to the "high hit" is summarized.

  Here, the “high hit” and “low hit” used in the present embodiment are temporary names when a plurality of types of big hits in the pachinko machine 1 are classified based on a predetermined standard regarding the degree of advantage. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are prepared. There are jackpots with different numbers. In addition, for example, there is a big hit such as “probable change” or “time saving” in which the game state controlled after the big hit is different. In addition to the above, it is also possible to consider a big hit (a big hit, a relatively short big hit, etc., in which the opening time of the big hit port 2103 is relatively long or a big hit) in which the opening / closing pattern of the big winning port 2103 in each round during the big hit is made different.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, such a plurality of types of big hits are separately handled as a “high hit” having a relatively high degree of advantage and a “low hit” having a lower degree of advantage than the “high hit”. This is characterized in that the distribution ratio of the hit effect described later can be changed depending on whether the big hit is “high hit” or “low hit”.

  In the following description of the embodiment, as an example, the probability variable jackpot is referred to as “high hit”, and the other jackpots (so-called normal jackpots) are referred to as “low hit”. That is, in the case of the specific type of big hit illustrated in FIG. 173 (C), specific 1 to specific 5 correspond to “high hit”, and specific 6 corresponds to “low hit”. According to the example of FIG. 173 (C), in the special lottery using the first special symbol (first special lottery), the case where the first symbol random number is “40-199 (160)” is “high hit”. When the first symbol random number is "0-39 (40 pieces)", "low hit" is given, so the ratio of "high hit" to "low hit" by the first special lottery is 160: 40 = 4: In the following, for the sake of simplicity, the description will be made assuming that the ratio of “high hit” to “low hit” is 1: 1 in the first special lottery. Further, other examples regarding the classification and setting of “high hit” and “low hit” will be described in detail in [6-5].

  FIG. 185 exemplifies the ratio of the effect time (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern at each division of the special symbol determination result. For example, in the case of "missing", 34% has a variation time of 20 seconds, 50% has a variation time of 30 seconds, 15% has a variation time of 60 seconds, and 1% has a variation time of 120 seconds. At this time, the average fluctuation time at the time of “outside” is 32 seconds. Similarly, in the case of “low hit” or “high hit”, 5% of the fluctuation time is 20 seconds, 50% is the fluctuation time of 30 seconds, 60% is the fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and 10% is the fluctuation time of 120 seconds. Time. The average fluctuation time at the time of "low hit" or "high hit" is 56.5 seconds. Therefore, in the case of the special symbol fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 185, when the reach effect appears, the average of the hits (low hits or high hits) is greater than the case where the effect is not successful. Fluctuation time tends to be long.

  Also, considering the breakdown of the determination results in the case where the fluctuation time is the same with reference to FIG. Thus, the appearance ratio of each determination result based on the fluctuation time can be calculated based on the distribution ratio of each determination result. For example, in the case of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, the distribution rate of each determination result is 50 for “out”, 25 for “low hit”, and 25 for “high hit”. : “Low hit”: “high hit” = 50: 25: 25 = 2: 1: 1. Also, since “big hit” is the sum of “low hit” and “high hit”, the appearance ratio of “out” and “big hit” when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds is “out”: “big hit” = 50: 50 = 1: 1. In other words, in the case of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds, the "miss" and the "big hit" appear on a one-to-one basis, and the expectation (reliability) for winning the big hit is 50%.

  When the low hit and the high hit are considered separately, the low hit and the high hit are obtained from the above-described relationship of “out”: “low hit”: “high hit” = 50: 25: 25 = 2: 1: 1. When the appearance ratio of is 1, the appearance ratio of the deviation is 2. At this time, 1/4 (25%) is a low hit or a high hit, and 2/4 (50%) is a miss. Therefore, in the case of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, the degree of expectation of winning in the “low hit” and The expected win rate for the "high hit" is 25% for each.

[6-1-1. Distribution of effect pattern with fluctuation time of 30 seconds (part 1)]
FIG. 186 is a diagram (allocation table 1A) for explaining the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. The effect pattern (decoration pattern of the decorative pattern) is determined based on the change pattern of the special symbol. If the effect pattern determined as such is an effect pattern including a hit effect (reach effect), the hit effect is determined. An effect pattern to be executed (substantially no problem even when read as an executed hit effect) is selected from the plurality of effect patterns. FIG. 186 exemplifies the distribution of the selection of the effect pattern including such a hit effect, and the distribution of the effect pattern used when the fluctuation time is “30 seconds” as the special pattern fluctuation pattern. It is a table, and the production time (decoration time of the decorative design) of each winning effect shown in FIG. 186 is within 30 seconds. As described above with reference to FIG. 185, when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds in the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the big hit is won with a probability of 50% (the reliability is 50%). In other words, when the distribution table shown in FIG. 186 is used, half (50%) of the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and the change time of the special symbol is “30 seconds”. It should be noted that the distribution of the hit effect shown in FIG. 186 is merely an example for simplifying the description, and does not limit the type, the type, and the like of the hit effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The setting content of each distribution is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4140b or the like, and can be read by the peripheral control MPU 4140a as needed.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores a game result in the peripheral control RAM 4140e or the like when an effect pattern including a specific hit effect is selected and executed, and when the decorative pattern stops due to the lost effect due to the hit effect. Then, in the subsequent game, the distribution in which the effect pattern including the hit effect is selected from the plurality of effect patterns can be changed. Specific contents regarding the fluctuation of the distribution will be described with reference to FIG. The effect pattern including “specific hit effect” is an effect pattern in which “specific hit effect” is executed. Selecting and determining such an effect pattern is substantially equivalent to “specific hit effect”. Is synonymous with selecting and determining "." Therefore, in the following description, for the sake of simplicity, there may be a case in which “effect pattern including the hit effect” is described as “hit effect”.

  First, the “type” in FIG. 186 is a type that roughly classifies the winning effect, and “normal”, “SP1”, and “SP2” are provided as examples. The hit effect included in “SP1” and “SP2” corresponds to the hit effect that is generally called “super reach”, and has a bigger hit than when the “normal” type of hit effect is presented. (Reliability) is set relatively high. In FIG. 186, as an example, the type is roughly classified based on the production content of the hit production, and in the production of the “SP1” type, the production proceeds in a manner such that the story progresses, and the big hit ( And its type) are displayed in such a manner as to be recognizable. In the case of the “SP2” type of the drop effect, as an example, the effect in the form of a battle proceeds, and the result is displayed in such a manner that it is possible to recognize whether it is a big hit (and its type) or not depending on the progress result. In addition, the hit effect that has a progress mode different from that of “SP1” and “SP2” is classified as “normal”. Although details will be described later, the distribution of the hit effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is based on the appearance status of the hit effect (which hit effect was selected and executed, and further, the hit effect is linked to a big hit). , Etc.), the distribution contents are changed by the accumulation of the "history" according to the "history", but the "initial setting" (corresponding to the history P) before being changed by the accumulation of the history. , It is assumed that the degree of expectation (reliability) to the big hit for each type is set in the order of “normal”, “SP1”, and then “SP2”. The effect contents of the winning effect described in FIG. 186 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The “effect name” in FIG. 186 is an example of a name of each winning effect. For example, the effect names included in the “normal” type include “normal” and “long”, and the effect names included in the “SP1” type include “story A”, “story B”, and “story C”. , And the effect names included in the “SP2” type include “Battle A”, “Battle B”, and “Battle C”. “A” to “C” in “SP1” and “SP2” are used to distinguish characters, scenes, and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the time of executing each winning effect.

  In addition, the “battle history” in FIG. 186 is a section indicating a combination of distribution of the hit production, and which distribution of the battle history is used is selected based on the appearance situation of the production at the time of the game. Is done. Referring specifically to FIG. 186 for the distribution of the hit effect, for example, when “battle history P” is used, the peripheral control is performed based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the loss pattern is received from the main control board 4100. In the hit effect determined by the MPU 4140a, the “normal” hit effect (normal reach) is selected in 30 distributions (ie, 30%) of the denominator 100, and the “long” hit effect is selected in 14 allocations (14%). The effect (long reach) is selected, and the hit effect (story A reach) of "Story A" is selected with 20 distributions (20%) (corresponding to the distribution "X1-P" in FIG. 186). In the distribution “X1-P”, the normal reach is the most likely to be selected from all the hit effects, and the least likely effect (the battle C reach) of “Battle C” is the least likely to be selected. The permissible effect determined by the peripheral control MPU 4140a based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the low hit pattern is received from the main control board 4100 is the distribution of 1 of the denominator 100 (1%). The "normal" hit effect (normal reach) is selected, the "long" hit effect (long reach) is selected with a distribution of 3 (3%), and the "story A" hit result with a distribution of 3 (3%). An effect (story A reach) is selected (corresponding to the distribution “Y1-P” in FIG. 186). In the distribution “Y1-P”, the most likely to be selected from all the hit effects is the hit effect (Battle C reach) of “Battle C”. In the history P of FIG. 186, the distribution of the high hit pattern (corresponding to the distribution “Z1-P” in FIG. 186) is set to be the same as the distribution “Y1-P” of the low hit pattern. The same applies to the hit effect determined in the case of the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the high hit pattern.

  In FIG. 186, it is set so that at least a part of the distribution of the hit effect selected at the time of a hit (big hit) differs for each battle history. Here, as an example, as an example, the combination of distribution as the initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is “battle history P”, and based on the execution of a specific hit production that stops in a lost symbol array, “battle history Q”, and further, “battle history Q” It is assumed that the selection destination shifts to “R”. For each lottery result of the special lottery, when the selection destination of the battle history is “battle history Q”, the distribution “X1-Q” is “off”, and the distribution “Y1-Q” is “low hit”. At the time of "high hit", the distribution "Z1-Q" is used. Further, when the selection destination of the battle history is “battle history R”, the distribution “X1-R” at the time of “losing”, the distribution “Y1-R” at the time of “low hit”, and the distribution “Z1” at the time of “high hit”. -R "is used. Then, as a specific example of the transition condition under which the selection destination of the battle history shifts, once the hit effect of "Battle A" is selected at the time of "losing" (that is, when the battle A reach of the loss appears), once. Each time a selection is made, the selection destination shifts in the order of "Potential history P" to "Trade history Q", and further to "Trade history R". After the selection destination becomes "Trade history R", until the jackpot is won It is assumed that the selection destination is not changed from “battle history R”. In the following, what effect pattern is selected when FIG. 186 is used according to the transition condition of the battle history will be described.

  First, in the case of the "play history P" which is the selection destination of the distribution in the initial setting, the ratio of selecting the battle A reach among the stray effect patterns is 12%, and the battle among the staging effect patterns. The rate at which A reach is selected is 8%. In response to the display command based on the selected winning effect (including the effect pattern), the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays (appears) the battle A reach. , The decorative symbol stops fluctuating in the loss mode, and in the case of a winning effect pattern, the decorative symbol fluctuates and stops in the big hit mode. The effect pattern to be a hit includes an effect pattern indicating a low hit and an effect pattern indicating a high hit. In such a case, the decorative symbol usually stops changing in a jackpot mode of a big hit, and in the case of an effect pattern indicating a high hit, the decorative symbol stops changing in a big hit mode of a probable big hit. Alternatively, the same decorative pattern may be stopped at a low hit or a high hit in order to indicate whether the hit is a low hit or a high hit during a big hit game. By doing so, even if the result of the special lottery is a low hit, it is possible to allow the player to have a high hit expectation and play the big hit game.

  Here, the distribution table 1A of FIG. 186 is used when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and as described above with reference to FIG. 185, the breakdown of the determination result when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds is “ Outlier: “low hit”: “high hit” = 2: 1: 1, and “out”: “big hit” = 1: 1. Therefore, when the distribution table in FIG. 186 is used, the expected win rate for “low hit” and the expected win rate for “high hit” are 25%, and the expected win rate for “big hit” is 25%. 50%.

Also, by referring to the fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 185) and the distribution table (FIG. 186), it is possible to calculate the degree of expectation to a big hit when a specific hit effect is presented. The degree of expectation of a big hit when a specific hit effect is presented can be calculated by the ratio of "Distribution per distribution of appearance ratio" to "Total sum of each distribution with distribution of individual appearance ratio" . For example, considering the degree of expectation to the big hit when the battle A reach appears in the battle history P, referring to FIG. 186, the low hit distribution is 8 (distribution Y1-P), and the high hit distribution is The distribution is 8 (distribution Z1-P), and the deviation distribution is 12 (distribution X1-P). From FIG. 185, each appearance ratio is 2 for the low hit and 1 for the high hit. From the above, the expectation degree of the jackpot when the battle A reach appears in the history P is
[(8 × 1 + 8 × 1) / ((8 × 1 + 8 × 1) + (12 × 2))] × 100
Is calculated to be “40.0%”.
In addition, when the battle A reach appears in the battle history P, the degree of expectation to the high hit is calculated as [(8 × 1) / ((8 × 1 + 8 × 1) + (12 × 2))] × 100.
Is calculated to be “20.0%”.

  In the following description, the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is calculated using the method described above, but the calculation formula in the middle is omitted as appropriate.

  Next, when the battle A reach out of the battle history P is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not win the jackpot due to a specific hit effect (here, battle A reach) (in other words, the out-of-bounds). When a specific winning effect has appeared, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in a later example, when the flag value of the effect result storage flag is “1”), the subsequent game Is changed to “battle history Q”.

  Here, as a method of “recording a history of battle” to record that a big hit has not been won by a specific winning effect, for example, a predetermined flag (effect result storage flag) is held in the peripheral control RAM 4140e, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a May update (add) the flag value. The update timing of the flag value for the effect result storage flag is not limited to when the battle A reach is selected. For example, a display effect based on the battle A reach appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the decorative pattern is lost. It may be the timing of stopping, the timing of stopping a special symbol in the game, or the like. In any case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the selection destination of the distribution according to the flag value of the effect result storage flag that is rewritten based on the appearance of the specific hit effect (outcome Battle A reach). For example, when the flag value of the effect result storage flag is “0”, the battle history P is selected, and when the flag value is updated (added) to “1”, the battle history Q is selected. Then, when the flag value is updated (added) to “2”, the strategy R may be selected. In addition, the information stored at the time of “recording a battle history” is limited to a form such as a flag (effect result storage flag) whose value is changed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition as described above. is not. For example, a command or data that can specify a reach pattern corresponding to a specific hit effect may be stored. Further, the storage destination is not limited to the storage medium of the peripheral control board 4010. The storage medium 4100 or a storage medium such as a separate substrate, or a plurality of storage mediums may be stored.

  In this example, the information on “record of battle history” is stored in the peripheral control RAM 4140e by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, but when the information on “record of battle history” is managed by the peripheral control board 4010, Since the peripheral control MPU 4140a can select the effect pattern of the decorative symbol based on the “record of the history of the battle” under the condition that the special symbol is within the fluctuation time of the special symbol indicated in the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, Various effect selections that do not correspond one-to-one with the variation pattern can be realized. Further, as another example, when information on “record of battle history” is managed by the main control board 4100, the main control MPU 4100a may select a variation pattern of a special symbol based on “record of battle history”. In addition, it is also possible to change the fluctuation time of the special symbol based on “record of battle history”. Thus, for example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened, the time required for one game digestion is shortened, so that it is expected that the number of revolutions per unit time is improved and the game efficiency is improved. In addition, for example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is extended, the non-rotation period in which the symbol is not variably displayed can be reduced, so that the effect that the period during the game is extended and the interval between games is hardly generated can be expected.

  In “battle history Q”, a part of the distribution in the winning effect pattern is changed as compared with “battle history P”. Referring to FIG. 186, specific changes in the distribution are confirmed. To change each distribution, it is sufficient to compare the distribution X1-P and the distribution X1-Q for the loss pattern, and to compare the distribution Y1-P and the distribution Y1-Q for the low hit pattern. For the high hit pattern, the distribution Z1-P and the distribution Z1-Q may be compared. At this time, in the loss pattern and the low hit pattern, the distribution contents do not change even when the history P is changed to the history Q. However, in the high hit pattern, the distribution of the story A reach is reduced by 2 from “3” to “1”, and the distribution of the story B reach is reduced from “5” to “3” by 2 in the SP1 type of hit production. And the distribution of the story C reach decreases by 5 from “10” to “5”. In total, the distribution of the hit effects (story A to C) of the entire SP1 type is “18” in the battle history P, becomes “9” in the strategy Q, and decreases by nine. Further, in the high hit pattern, among the SP2 types of the hit effects, the distribution of the battle A reach increases by 9 from “8” to “17”, and the distribution of the hit effects (Battle A to C) of the entire SP2 type is: In the career history P, the place where “78” was set is changed to “87” and increases by nine.

  In addition, when the distribution based on "History History Q" is compared with the case of "History History P" based on the degree of expectation (reliability) to a big hit when each hit effect is presented, the following is obtained. The reliability of each winning effect is calculated in the same manner as the reliability of Battle A reach described above.

First, regarding the reliability of the big hit (the sum of the low hit and the high hit) in the “war history P” and the “war history Q”,
In battle history P,
The reliability of Story A reach is 13.0% (6/46 × 100),
Story B Reach has a reliability of 33.3% (10/30 × 100),
The reliability of Story C reach is 62.5% (20/32 × 100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 33.3% (36/108 × 100).
The reliability of Battle A reach is 40.0% (16/40 × 100),
The reliability of Battle B reach is 80.0% (40/50 × 100),
The reliability of Battle C reach is 94.3% (100/106 × 100),
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 79.6% (156/196 × 100).
On the other hand, in battle history Q,
The reliability of Story A reach is 9.1% (4/44 × 100),
The reliability of Story B reach is 28.6% (8/28 × 100),
The reliability of Story C reach is 55.6% (15/27 × 100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 27.3% (27/99 × 100).
Also, the reliability of Battle A reach is 51.0% (25/49 × 100),
The reliability of Battle B Reach is 80.0% (same as P)
The reliability of Battle C Reach is 94.3% (same as P)
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 80.5% (165/205 × 100).

  In other words, when comparing “History P” and “History Q” with respect to the degree of expectation to the big hit, “History Q” shows each hit effect (story A to C) of SP1 type and “History P” compared to “History P”. While the expectation of the big hit in the whole decreases, the expectation to the big hit in the specific hit effect (Battle A) of the SP2 type and the whole type improves. Also, the degree of expectation to the big hit in the hit effect (Battle B, C) other than the specific hit effect in the SP2 type does not change.

The change in the degree of expectation (reliability) as described above becomes remarkable especially at a high hit. Regarding the reliability of high hit (expected degree of high hit) in “History P” and “History Q”,
In battle history P,
The reliability of Story A reach is 6.5% (3/46 × 100),
The reliability of Story B reach is 16.7% (5/30 × 100),
The reliability of Story C reach is 31.3% (10/32 × 100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 16.7% (18/108 × 100).
The reliability of Battle A reach is 20.0% (8/40 × 100),
The reliability of Battle B reach is 40.0% (20/50 × 100),
The reliability of Battle C reach is 47.2% (50/106 × 100),
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 39.8% (78/196 × 100).
On the other hand, in battle history Q,
The reliability of Story A reach is 2.3% (1/44 × 100),
The reliability of Story B reach is 10.7% (3/28 × 100),
The reliability of Story C Reach is 18.5% (5/27 × 100)
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 9.1% (9/99 × 100).
The reliability of Battle A reach is 34.7% (17/49 × 100),
The reliability of Battle B Reach is 40.0% (same as P)
The reliability of Battle C Reach is 47.2% (same as P)
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 42.4% (87/205 × 100).

  In other words, when the “History P” and the “History Q” are compared with respect to the degree of expectation for a high hit, the “History Q” has different SP1 types of hit effects (Story A to C) and the “History P” compared to the “History P”. The expectation for high hits in the entire category is greatly reduced. For example, the reliability of the high hit of the entire SP1 type is 16.7% in the history P, but is reduced to 9.1% in the history Q. On the other hand, the degree of expectation to the specific hit effect (Battle A) of the SP2 type and the high hit in the entire type is greatly improved. For example, the reliability of the high hit in the battle A is 20.0% in the history P, and is improved to 34.7% in the history Q. Further, the expectation to the high hit in the hit effects (Battle B, C) other than the specific hit effect in the SP2 type does not change similarly to the expectation to the big hit.

  Next, in the case where the wrong battle A reach is selected in the battle history Q, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not win the jackpot due to a specific hit effect (here, battle A reach) as in the case of the battle history P. This is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 4140e (effect result storage flag). When the flag value of the effect result storage flag is updated (added) from “1” to “2” by this processing, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the selection destination of the hit effect in the subsequent game to “the battle history R”. To "."

  In “History R”, a part of the distribution in the winning effect pattern is further changed from “History Q”. Referring to FIG. 186, specific changes in the distribution are confirmed. The change of each distribution can be performed by comparing the distribution X1-Q and the distribution X1-R for the loss pattern, and comparing the distribution Y1-Q and the distribution Y1-R for the low hit pattern. For the high hit pattern, the distribution Z1-Q and the distribution Z1-R may be compared. At this time, in the loss pattern and the low hit pattern, the distribution contents do not change even when the battle history Q is changed to the battle history R. However, in the high hit pattern, the distribution of the story A reach is “1” in the hit effect of the SP1 type, but the distribution of the story B reach is reduced from “3” to “1” by 2, The distribution of the story C reach is reduced by 4 from “5” to “1”. In total, the distribution of the hit effects (story A to C) of the entire SP1 type is “9” in the battle history P, becomes “3” in the strategy Q, and decreases by six. Further, in the high hit pattern, among the SP2 types of the hit effects, the distribution of the battle A reach increases from “17” to “23” by 6, and the distribution of the hit effects (Battle A to C) of the entire SP2 type is: In the history P, "87" is changed to "93" and increases by nine.

  At this time, similarly to the description of “battle history P” and “battle history Q”, in the distribution of “battle history R”, the degree of expectation (reliability) to the big hit when each hit effect is presented, and The degree of expectation (reliability) to hit is as follows.

First, regarding the reliability of the big hit (the sum of the low hit and the high hit) in “History R”,
The reliability of Story A reach is 9.1% (4/44 × 100),
The reliability of Story B reach is 23.1% (6/26 × 100),
The reliability of Story C Reach is 47.8% (11/23 × 100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 22.6% (21/93 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A reach is 56.4% (31/55 × 100),
The reliability of Battle B Reach is 80.0% (same as P, Q)
The reliability of Battle C Reach is 94.3% (same as P, Q)
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 81.0% (1711/211 × 100).

  In other words, when the “History Q” and “History R” are compared with respect to the degree of expectation to the big hit, the “History R” shows that the SP1 type of the drop effect (Story B, C) and the overall type The expectation of the big hit in SP2 is reduced, while the expectation of the big hit in the SP2 type is increased. Further, the reliability of the hit effects (Battle B, C) other than the specific hit effects in the SP2 type does not change.

In addition, regarding the reliability of the high hit in “History R”,
The reliability of Story A Reach is 2.3% (same as the history Q),
The reliability of Story B reach is 3.8% (1/26 × 100),
The reliability of Story C Reach is 4.3% (1/23 × 100)
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 3.2% (3/93 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A reach is 34.7% (23/55 × 100),
The reliability of Battle B Reach is 40.0% (same as P, Q)
The reliability of Battle C reach is 47.2% (same as P, Q)
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 44.1% (93/211 × 100).

  In other words, when “combat history Q” and “competition history R” are compared with respect to the degree of expectation for a high hit, “combat history R” is different from “competition history Q” in that each of the SP1 types of hit effects (story B, C) and The expectation for high hits in the entire category is greatly reduced. For example, the reliability of a high hit of the entire SP1 type is 9.1% in the history Q, but is reduced to 3.2% in the history R. On the other hand, the degree of expectation to the specific hit effect (Battle A) of the SP2 type and the high hit in the entire type is greatly improved. For example, the reliability of the high hit in the battle A is 34.7% in the battle history Q, and is improved to 41.8% in the battle history R. Further, the expectation to the high hit in the hit effects (Battle B, C) other than the specific hit effect in the SP2 type does not change similarly to the expectation to the big hit.

  FIG. 187 is a diagram summarizing the reliability when each winning effect is presented using the distribution table 1A. Each column of FIG. 187 describes the reliability obtained by the above-described calculation method.

  As described above, by using the distribution table 1A illustrated in FIG. 186, the combination of distribution can be determined based on the fact that a specific hit effect (Battle A reach) has appeared without a big hit (outside). In the subsequent game after the change, at least some of the hit effects (other hit effects: stories A to C) other than the specific hit effect are selected in a hit pattern (strictly a high hit pattern). While the distribution can be kept low, it is possible to increase the distribution in which a particular hit effect is selected in a hit pattern (strictly, a high hit pattern). It should be noted that, even if the battle history of the selection destination shifts, the distribution of the distribution selected in the loss pattern is not changed. As a result, in the game after the combination (war history) of the distribution is changed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit and the high hit when the “other hit production” in which the distribution is suppressed is displayed in the game with the distribution kept low. Can be lower than the reliability before the change, while the reliability in the case where a specific winning effect is presented can be higher than the reliability before the change.

  In addition, when the selection destination of the combination (fighting history) of the distribution shifts in a plurality of stages, the above-described distribution is changed every time the selection destination is shifted. It is possible to further increase the distribution in which the effect is selected in the hit pattern, and to further increase the degree of expectation for the big hit and the high hit when a specific hit effect is presented.

[6-1-2. Distribution of effect pattern with fluctuation time of 30 seconds (part 2)]
FIG. 188 is a diagram (allocation table 1B) for explaining the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. The distribution table 1B shown in FIG. 188 is another example of the distribution table of the effect patterns that can be used in place of the distribution table 1A shown in FIG. 186. Similar to the distribution table 1A, the distribution table 1B is a distribution table of an effect pattern used when the fluctuation time is "30 seconds" as a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol. Is within 30 seconds. As described above with reference to FIG. 185, when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds in the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the big hit is won with a probability of 50% (the reliability is 50%). In other words, when the distribution table shown in FIG. 186 is used, half (50%) of the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and the change time of the special symbol is “30 seconds”. Note that the distribution of the hit effect shown in FIG. 188 is an example for simple explanation, and does not limit the type, the type, and the like of the hit effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The setting content of each distribution is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4140b or the like, and can be read by the peripheral control MPU 4140a as needed.

  The distribution table 1B shown in FIG. 188 is selected based on the fact that the battle history is recorded based on the fact that a specific hit effect (Battle A Reach) appears in an out-of-way manner, similarly to the distribution table 1A. The previous battle history shifts from “battle history P” to “battle history Q” and “battle history R”. The different point of the distribution table 1B from the distribution table 1A is a breakdown of the distribution due to the transition of the battle history, which will be specifically described below.

  In the distribution table 1B, when transitioning from “battle history P” to “battle history Q”, among the hit effects of the SP2 type, the distribution of the battle A reach of “specific hit effect” is “ From "8" to "23", the value increased by 15 from "20" to "15", and the distribution of Battle B reach from "50" decreased from "20" to "15". Decrease by 10 to “40”. Note that the distribution of the hit effects (battles A to C) of the entire SP2 type in the high hit pattern remains unchanged at “78”. In addition, the distribution of the hit effect included in the normal type or the SP1 type other than the SP2 type (the hit effect group) is not changed.

  In addition, in the distribution table 1B, the distribution in the high hit pattern is also changed when the transition from “competition history Q” to “competition history R” is performed, similarly to the transition from “competition history P” to “competition history Q”. . Such a change in the distribution is performed only between the hit effects included in the SP2 type, and does not affect the hit effects included in the other types. Specifically, among the hit effects of the SP2 type in the high hit pattern, the distribution of the battle A reach, which is “specific hit effect”, increases from “23” to “43” by 20, and the other hit effects of the SP2 type The distribution of Battle B reach, which is an effect, is reduced by 5 from “15” to “10”, and the distribution of Battle C reach is reduced by 15 from “40” to “25”. The distribution of the hit effects (battle A to C) of the entire SP2 type in the high hit pattern remains unchanged at “78”, and the hits included in the normal type and the SP1 type other than the SP2 type (hit effect group). The distribution of the effects is not changed.

  FIG. 189 is a diagram summarizing the reliability when each winning effect is presented using the distribution table 1B. The reliability of each column is calculated using the same calculation formula as that of FIG. 187 in the case of the distribution table 1A, but detailed description is omitted.

  With reference to FIGS. 188 and 189, the reliability when each winning effect is presented using the distribution table 1B does not change in the big hit for each type or the reliability for each hit. It is shown that the expectation to the big hit and the high hit in the hit effect (Battle A) is improved, while the expectation to the big hit and the high hit of other SP2 types of the hit effect (Battle B, C) is reduced. It is. This feature is more pronounced by transitioning from “battle history P” to “battle history R” via “battle history Q”. Specifically, in the case of the battle history P, the reliability of the jackpot when a specific hit effect (Battle A reach) appears is 40.0%, but in the case of the battle history Q, it is 56.4%. Furthermore, in the history R, it has improved to 68.0%. Further, the change in the degree of expectation to the high hit is even more remarkable. The reliability of the high hit when the battle A reach appears is 20.0% in the case of the battle history P, but is in the case of the battle history Q. This is more than doubled to 41.8%, and further becomes 57.3% when the history R is reached, and the reliability is improved to nearly three times as compared with the history P. On the other hand, the distribution of the high hit patterns of the battle A reach and the battle C reach of the same type as the battle A reach which is a specific hit production is suppressed, but the reliability of the whole SP2 type changes due to the transition of the battle history. Not.

  According to such a distribution table, the combination of distribution is changed based on the fact that a specific hit effect (Battle A) has appeared (without) without a big hit, and after that change, In the game, at least some of the attraction effects (other attraction effects in the same type: battles B and C) other than the particular attraction effect in the attraction effect group (type) including the attraction effect include the hit pattern. (Strictly, the high hit pattern) can reduce the distribution selected, while increasing the distribution of the particular hit effect selected in the hit pattern (strictly, the high hit pattern). It should be noted that, even if the battle history of the selection destination shifts, the distribution of the distribution selected in the loss pattern is not changed. As a result, in the game after the combination (fight history) of the distribution is changed, the degree of expectation for the big hit and the high hit when the “other hit production in the same type” with the distribution reduced is displayed in the game. The (reliability) is lower than the reliability before the change, while the reliability in the case where a specific hit effect is appeared can be higher than the reliability before the change.

[6-1-3. Characteristics of production patterns with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds]
As described above, with the use of the distribution table 1A (see FIG. 186) and the distribution table 1B (see FIG. 188), according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific hit effect is present in an outlier manner. The record of the battle history is recorded based on the output, and the combination of distribution is changed based on the record of the battle history (transition of the battle history). In this case, the degree of expectation for the big hit can be increased, and in particular, the degree of expectation for the high hit with a high degree of advantage can be increased.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an effect pattern including a specific hit effect is selected and executed, and when the decorative pattern is lost due to the hit effect and stops in an array of symbols, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the peripheral control RAM 4140e. The "record of battle history" for storing the game result is performed in such a manner as described above, and the information on the hit effect stored in the "record of battle history" is taught to the player (teaching of the history of battle). The teaching of the battle history is realized, for example, by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a displaying a predetermined image or the like on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with an instruction from the peripheral control MPU 4140a so as to indicate that the specific hit effect has shifted. Is done. Then, the player is instructed that the degree of expectation to the jackpot of the hit effect with respect to the content taught is improved by teaching the history of the battle. Specifically, for example, when the battle history is taught in a manner suggesting the character “A” corresponding to the battle A reach (corresponding to a teaching area 1900a shown in FIG. 192 described later), the character “A” is strengthened. A state of powering up (the power-up of the character) is shown, and the player who sees the state can recognize that the expectation of the big hit is increased in the battle A-reach, which is the winning effect for the character “A”. That is, by teaching the history of the battle A, the player can recognize that the character “A” is powered up, and expect a big hit when a battle A reach appears in a subsequent game. Teach situations that are easy to do. In order to supplement the recognition of the situation where the character “A” is powered up, characters such as “Character A is powering up” may be displayed (supplement display of the power-up state). However, even when the supplementary display of the power-up state is performed, an area that does not disturb the display by the hit effect (Battle A Reach) (a so-called “area where the player recognizes whether or not Battle A Reach hits”) is displayed. It is desirable that the information be displayed in a non-overlapping area. In this way, by performing the supplementary display of the power-up state in an area that does not disturb the display of the hit effect, both the recognition of the powered-up character by the supplementary display and the recognition of the hit result by the display of the hit effect are performed. Can be satisfied.

  The image data and the like used for teaching such a history are stored in, for example, a liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and a character ROM 4150d in the liquid crystal control unit 4150. When the history is taught, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a (or the VDP 4150c). Appropriate image data is read out and drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. A specific example of the teaching of the battle history will be described again in the next section. However, when a specific winning effect appears in a game situation in which such teaching is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player is required to Since it is possible to recognize that the reliability of a particular hit effect is higher than in the past (for example, the initial setting), it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation of a big hit and to expect an improvement in interest.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned battle history is taught using the distribution table 1A on the liquid crystal display device 1900, other than the hit effect such as Battle B Reach or Battle C Reach, which has a relatively high reliability from the beginning. Furthermore, even if a specific hit effect (Battle A reach) occurs, the reliability increases, so that the player has a higher expectation for the occurrence of the reach state. In addition, when the above-described battle history is taught using the distribution table 1B, the reliability of the hit effect, such as the battle B reach or the battle C reach, which has a relatively high original reliability, is secured to some extent. Even if a specific hit effect (Battle A Reach) included in the same type occurs while the player is standing (for example, an expectation of 50% or more), the reliability is increased. Have more expectations. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is expected that the player's expectation regarding the progress of the game can be improved, and under the situation where the history of the game is taught, it is inevitable to end the game. It can also be expected to motivate and motivate the player to continue playing.

  Note that the "specific hit effect" used in the above description is an hit effect (or may be read as an effect pattern including the hit effect) in which the distribution of distribution can be increased in accordance with the transition of the battle history. For example, it is predetermined in a design stage. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “specific hit effect” may be a plurality of types of hit effects. Specifically, in FIGS. 186 and 188, the “hit history P” to the “hit history R” that focus on only the “battle A reach” as the specific hit effect are illustrated, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “hit” The present effect is not limited to one type of present effect (or an effect pattern including the present effect). For example, in a case where the battle A reach and the battle B reach are each “specific hit production”, an embodiment in which a multi-stage transition of the battle history for battle A and a multi-stage transition of the battle history for battle B are combined Can be devised. Then, in the transition of the battle history related to battle B, when the distribution table 1A is used, similarly to the transition of the battle history related to battle A, the distribution of the stories A to C in the high hit pattern is reduced and the high hit pattern is used. Battle B may be increased. When the distribution table 1B is used, the distribution of other hit effects (battles A and C) of the SP2 type in the high hit pattern is reduced to increase the distribution of the battle B in the high hit pattern. What should I do? At this time, as the teaching of the battle history, teaching is performed such that the character A corresponding to the battle A and the character B corresponding to the battle B are each powered up.

  In addition, when a plurality of hit effects in the same type are to be recorded as “specific hit effects” using the distribution table 1B, the history of each hit based on the appearance of each hit effect is determined by recording each hit history. It is assumed that the distribution of the distribution will be interfered, but the processing in such a case is not particularly limited, and the distribution is flexibly changed each time the hit production appears and the history is recorded What should be done is. As a specific example, when the battle A reach and the battle B reach are each “specific hit production”, at the time of the transition of the battle history regarding battle A, the distribution of the high hit pattern is changed every one stage by the battle B It is assumed that the distribution of the reach is decreased by "5", the distribution of the battle C reach is decreased by "3" and the distribution of the battle A reach is increased by "8". The distribution of Battle A reach may be decreased by “4”, the distribution of Battle C reach may be decreased by “3”, and the distribution of Battle B reach may be increased by “7”. The increase / decrease width at this time is not limited, and may be set as appropriate. FIGS. 190 to 192, which will be described later, show screen examples when the battle history shifts in each of the battles A to C reach. Also, the “specific hit effect” is not limited to the SP2 type battle reach, but may be another type of hit effect. In such a case, the same type as the hit effect (hit effect group) The distribution of other hit effects included in the 落 is suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of hit effects are set in advance as target candidates for “specific hit effects”, and “special hit effects” are selected from the target candidates according to a request of the player. May be specified. As a specific operation of such designation, for example, an input screen can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with a predetermined operation of the player, and based on that the player has performed an operation on the input screen, “ "Specific hit production" is decided. As an internal process, a distribution table that manages a distribution change regarding the transition of the battle history related to each hit result of the target candidate is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b in advance, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects the distribution by the operation of the player. The distribution table to be used for selecting the winning effect may be determined based on the specified “specific winning effect”.

[6-2. Example of this drop production]
Here, with respect to the hit effects described in FIGS. 186 and 188, the effect contents will be described for each type of the hit effects performed based on the special figure change pattern in which the change time is 30 seconds with reference to FIGS. . The effects illustrated in each figure are executed according to the effect pattern selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display based on the effect pattern.

  FIG. 190 is a diagram for explaining transition of effect images when a normal type of hit effect is executed. FIGS. 190 (A) to 190 (D) each schematically show an effect image on the liquid crystal display device 1900. FIG. In FIG. 190 (A), the teaching areas 1900a, 1900b, 1900c are areas in which information relating to the hit performance at the loss of the record of the battle history is shown. More specifically, for example, the teaching area 1900a is an area for teaching (suggesting) that the history of battle A has been recorded based on the fact that Battle A reach has appeared out of battle. Based on the record of the battle history by A-reach, for example, an image that emits light in a predetermined color is displayed on the background of the character “A”. Similarly, the teaching area 1900b is an area for teaching (suggesting) that the record of the battle history regarding the battle B has been performed based on the fact that the battle B reach has appeared out of the way, and the teaching area 1900c is a battle area. This is an area for teaching (suggesting) that the record of the battle history regarding the battle C has been performed based on the fact that the C-reach has appeared out of the way, and like the teaching area 1900a, "B" and "C" An image that emits light in a predetermined color can be displayed on the background of the character. In FIGS. 190 (A) to 190 (D), it is assumed that the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c are not particularly displayed by light emission, and specific light emission colors and the like will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The image display area 1900d shown in FIG. 190 (A) is an area in which a symbol row of a decorative symbol, an image of a winning effect, and the like are displayed. For example, the arrow shown in the image display area 1900d means a decorative symbol that is changing, and in FIG. 190A, since three arrows are shown in the image display area 1900d, the left, middle, and right arrows are displayed. The decorative design is changing in each row.

  A character display area 1900e shown in FIG. 190 (B) is an area in which characters, symbols, and the like can be displayed in the image display area 1900d, and predetermined characters and the like are displayed according to the effect situation. For example, in FIG. 190 (B), as shown in the image display area 1900d as “7. Arrow. 7”, the decorative pattern in the left and right rows stops at “7” and the decorative pattern in the middle row fluctuates. In this state, the reach state has been formed. At this time, the character "REACH!" Is displayed in the character display area 1900e, so that the player can be reliably notified of the formation of the reach state.

  Note that in FIGS. 190 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 191 (A) to (E) and FIGS. 192 (A) to (E) described later, the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c, the image display area 1900d, and the character display Areas denoted by the same symbols as those in the area 1900e indicate the same area, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 190 (B), an effect screen of a normal type hit effect (normal reach or long reach) is displayed. Specifically, the decoration symbol in the middle row that is changing is stopped at any symbol after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a game result by the hit effect is displayed. When the game result is a hit (big hit), the effect pattern including the hit effect of the hit pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the effect result corresponding to the effect pattern is shown in FIG. 190 (C). Thus, the same symbols (in this case, the symbol "7") as the decorative symbols in the left and right rows in the reach state are stopped. As a result, the player can recognize from the effect result displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the big hit has been won in this game. In addition, depending on the display regulation of the big hit symbol in the pachinko machine 1, it is not necessary to limit to the same symbol arrangement. For example, a specific symbol indicating the big hit may be stopped. When the big hit is won as shown in FIG. 190 (C), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the game is stopped.

  In addition, when the game result is out of order, since the effect pattern including the hit effect of the out-of-shift pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the effect result corresponding to the effect pattern is as shown in FIG. 190 (D). Then, the symbols (here, the symbol "2") different from the decorative symbols in the left and right rows forming the reach state are stopped. As a result, the player can recognize from the effect result displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the big hit could not be won (was out) in this game. When the big hit is not won as shown in FIG. 190 (D), the game is shifted to the next game after the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the game is stopped.

  In addition, although the normal reach and the long reach were illustrated as the normal type of the drop effect, the difference between the two is distinguished, for example, by the rule of the decorative pattern that stops in the middle row, and in the case of the long reach, the middle row that stops at the loss Is a symbol that is numerically or arrangementally close to the symbol in which the reach state is formed (for example, 1 to 2 frames before and after), and in the case of the normal reach, the decorative symbol in the middle row that stops when it comes off is the other, It is assumed that the symbol is numerically or arbitrarily far from the symbol in the reach state. By making the behavior in the long reach different from the normal reach in this way, it can be expected that the player will have a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the normal reach. However, as shown in FIG. 190, the normal type of hit effect is not such that an extraordinary effect screen is displayed after the reach state is formed, and the degree of expectation to the big hit is determined by the SP1 and SP2 types described later. It is not as expensive as this one.

  FIG. 191 is a diagram for explaining transition of the effect image when the SP1 type hit effect is executed. FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 (G) schematically show effect images on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and FIGS. 191 (A) and (B) are the same as FIGS. 190 (A) and (B). The description screen is omitted.

  When the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 191 (B), an effect screen of a hit effect of SP1 type (story A reach, story B reach, or story C reach) is displayed. Here, the “Story Reach”, which is an SP1 type hit effect, is one type of super reach, and a special hit effect screen as shown in FIG. 191 (C) is displayed, and the hit effect types “A” to “ In response to "C", different effects such as a character and a traveling route are performed. More specifically, first, the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the image display area 1900d until FIG. 191 (B) is displayed in the second image display area 1900f, and the image display area 1900d includes A screen is displayed as if the character were moving toward the goal. FIG. 191 (C) illustrates story reach A, and thus character “A” is drawn. In such a story reach presentation screen, a hole (a striped portion in FIG. 191 (C)) is drawn at the destination of the character “A”, and whether the character “A” can reach the goal beyond the hole. Whether or not the game result indicates that the game result is a big hit.

  After that, the production screen of Story A Reach transits following the production screen shown in FIG. 191 (C). Since the pattern is selected, an effect screen indicating that the character “A” has successfully reached the goal is drawn as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 191 (D). At the same time, in the second image display area 1900f, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a big hit (for example, "7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (E), the manner in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is greatly displayed in the image display area 1900d. Be made recognizable. When a big hit is won as shown in FIG. 191 (E), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the game is stopped.

  In addition, when the game result is out of order, since the effect pattern including the hit effect of the out-of-shift pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the effect result corresponding to the effect pattern is as shown in FIG. 191 (F). Then, an effect screen is drawn indicating that the character "A" fits in the hole and could not reach the goal. At the same time, in the second image display area 1900f, a combination of decorative symbols indicating other than a big hit (for example, “7.5.7”) is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (G), the manner in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is greatly displayed in the image display area 1900d, and the jackpot cannot be won in the main game (disconnected) ) Is made recognizable by the player. When a big hit is not won as shown in FIG. 191 (G), the game is shifted to the next game after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped.

  In addition, each of the hit effects (story A to C) of the SP1 type has a reliability in the order of story A, story B, and story C at least in the initial setting (battle history P) so that it can be calculated from, for example, the distribution shown in FIG. Is set high. Therefore, by causing the character “B” to be more useful than the character “A” and the character “C” to be more useful than the character “B”, even if the same SP1 type of hit effect, the player has different expectations. Can be embraced. Also, as described above, the degree of expectation (reliability) to the big hit by the SP1 type of the hit effect is higher than the reliability of the normal type of the hit effect, so that it gives a more special impression than the normal type of the hit effect. It is preferable that the effect screen to be obtained is drawn.

  FIG. 192 is a diagram for describing transition of the effect image when the SP2 type hit effect is executed. First, FIG. 192 (A) shows that the decorative pattern is changing in each of the left, middle, and right columns as in FIGS. 190 (A) and 191 (A). 1900b is shown in a different pattern from the teaching area 1900c.

  Here, in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c, the display of the background changes based on the fact that the battle history is recorded when the corresponding specific hit effect (Battle A to C reach) appears in an out-of-position mode. (Change in power-up display). For example, if the transition stages of the battle history for each of battles A, B, and C are four stages including the initial setting, the background color is set to “white” in the first stage of the initial setting, and the background color is set in the second stage of the next stage. The color is set to “blue”, the background color is set to “green” in the third stage, and the background color is set to “red” in the fourth stage. Then, it is assumed that the hatched pattern in the teaching area 1900a in FIG. 192 (A) indicates “green”, the satin pattern in the teaching area 1900b indicates “blue”, and the plain pattern in the teaching area 1900c indicates “white”. The lattice pattern of the teaching area 1900a shown in FIGS. 192 (F) and (G) indicates “red”. That is, in FIG. 192 (A), the battle history for battle A shifts to the third stage, the battle history for battle B shifts to the second stage, and the battle history for battle C is the first stage, which is the initial setting. I understand. If this state is described in the state of power-up of each character, the character A and the character B are in a state of power-up. However, the character A has more power. The display of each stage in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c as described above basically corresponds to the selection destination of the internal distribution table selected as the distribution combination of the effect pattern including the hit effect. ing.

  Next, in FIG. 192 (B), when the reach state with the “7” symbol is formed, an effect screen of an SP2 type hit effect (Battle A Reach, Battle B Reach, or Battle C Reach) is displayed. Here, the "battle reach" which is the SP2 type of hit effect is one type of super reach, and a special hit effect screen as shown in FIG. 192 (C) is displayed, and the hit effect types "A" to " In response to "C", different effects such as characters and battle formats are performed. Describing more specifically, first, the variable display of the decorative pattern displayed in the image display area 1900d until FIG. 192 (B) is displayed in the second image display area 1900f, and the image display area 1900d includes A screen is displayed in which an ally character battles an enemy character. Since FIG. 192 (C) illustrates Battle Reach A, an ally character “A” is drawn. In such a battle reach effect screen, the ally character “A” confronts the enemy character (“Z” in FIG. 192 (C)), and whether or not the game result is a big hit is suggested depending on whether or not it can be won. You. The gauge area 1900g in FIG. 192 (C) is a display area indicating the physical strength of the enemy character, and indicates that the less the hatched portion, the more the enemy character is damaged and weakened. Note that the enemy character “Z” is another character (for example, an enemy character “X” that looks weak or an enemy character “Y” that looks strong) according to the type of battle reach and the history of the game. May be drawn.

  Further, in FIG. 192 (C), the teaching area 1900a is displayed in a more emphasized manner based on the fact that the battle A reach which is the “specific hit production” in which the history of the battle is recorded is performed. . By highlighting the teaching area 1900a in correspondence with the hit effect that has appeared in this manner, it is clear to the player that the effect pattern based on the "specific hit effect" in which the battle history is recorded is being executed. (For example, visual recognition), and the reliability of the battle A reach at this time is higher than the initial setting, so that an effect of significantly increasing the interest of the player can be expected. It should be noted that, other than visually emphasizing the teaching area 1900, the appearance of the battle A reach, which is a “specific hit effect”, may be made to be recognized by the player by voice, character display, or the like. Further, on the effect screen when the teaching area 1900a is highlighted, the ally character "A" is drawn with a different appearance from the normal battle A reach (for example, a display mode as if the surrounding area emits light). In this way, it may be taught that a special effect is in progress.

  Thereafter, the effect screen of Battle A Reach transits following the effect screen shown in FIG. 192 (C), and when the game result is a hit (big hit), an effect including a hit effect of a hit pattern is performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Since the pattern has been selected, an effect screen indicating that the ally character “A” has defeated the enemy character “Z” is drawn as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 192 (D). You. In the gauge area 1900g, a state in which the shaded portion has disappeared is drawn. At the same time, in the second image display area 1900f, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a big hit (for example, "7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (E), the manner in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is greatly displayed in the image display area 1900d, and the player is informed that the jackpot has been won in this game. Be made recognizable. When the big hit is won as shown in FIG. 192 (E), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the game is stopped. Note that, when the big hit is reached in the battle A reach, as an example of the battle history recording method and the teaching method, the background color in the teaching area 1900a is returned to the initial setting of “white” and the history record of the battle A is erased ( On the other hand, while the background color in the teaching area 1900b remains the current “blue”, a record of the battle history regarding the battle B is left.

  In the case where the game result is a loss, an effect pattern including a hit effect of the loss pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, so that the effect result corresponding to the effect pattern is as shown in FIG. 192 (F). Then, an effect screen indicating that the ally character "A" has been defeated by the enemy character "Z" is drawn. At the same time, in the second image display area 1900f, a combination of decorative symbols indicating other than the big hit (for example, “7.6.7”) is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (G), the manner in which the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f are displayed large in the image display area 1900d, and the jackpot was not won in this game (was lost). ) Is made recognizable by the player. When a big hit is not won as shown in FIG. 192 (G), the game is shifted to the next game after the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the game is stopped.

  In FIG. 192 (F), since the battle A reach of “specific hit effect” appears in an out-of-way manner, the condition of the record of the battle history related to the battle A reach is satisfied. At this time, as shown in an example in FIG. 192 (F), the background color of the teaching area 1900a is changed to a diagonal pattern (as shown in FIG. The pattern is changed from “green” to a lattice pattern (“red” in the fourth stage). Along with the transition of the stage of the battle history regarding the battle A, the selection destination of the combination (allocation of the battle history in the distribution table) regarding the distribution of the hit effect of the hit pattern is also shifted. Then, in the subsequent game, a teaching area 1900a for teaching the record of the battle history related to battle A is displayed in a lattice pattern on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. 192 (A) (character A). If the battle A reach appears again, it is possible to suggest to the player that a more reliable hit performance is achieved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 186, at least in the initial setting (battle history P), the reliability of the respective hit effects (battles A to C) of the SP2 type is determined in the order of battle A, battle B, and battle C at least. Is set high. Therefore, by causing the ally character “B” to appear as a more useful (strong) character than the ally character “A” and the ally character “C” than the ally character “B”, it is the same SP2 type of hit effect. This can also make the player have different expectations. Also, as described above, the degree of expectation (reliability) to the big hit by the SP2 type of the hit effect is higher than the reliability of the normal type and the SP1 type of the hit effect. It is preferable that an effect screen that can embrace is drawn.

  As described using the distribution table 1B in FIG. 188, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the battle A reach, which is a specific hit effect, appears in an out-of-way mode that does not reach the big hit. The history of battle A is recorded and transferred in battle A. When the history of battle A is transferred in multiple stages, the reliability of the big hit (and high hit) when Battle A reach appears is the same type. It may be higher than other hit effects (for example, battle B reach) of a certain SP2 type. When the reliability of a specific hit effect (Battle A reach) is increased so that the order of the reliability in the initial setting is changed, the ally character "A" is changed to the ally character "A" when the battle A appears. A special effect effect may be performed to make the character appear to be more powerful than "B". As a result, it is expected that the player's expectation for the battle A, whose reliability has greatly increased, is invited. Further, in a case where the history of the battle A shifts to a high level to increase the reliability, while the distribution of the battle B decreases and the reliability decreases, the ally character "A" is used as the history of the battle. May be displayed not only in a power-up mode but also in a mode in which the ally character "B" is weaker than usual (power down). By performing such a display, the player's expectation for the battle A reach corresponding to the ally character “A” can be effectively increased.

[6-3. Another example of this production
As described above, the selection of the effect pattern including the hit effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment and the characteristics at the time of execution thereof have been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the above example. It may be realized by an example.

  First, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting of the transition condition between battle histories and the number of distributions in each battle history are not limited to the example conditions. For example, as a transition condition between battle histories, a transition may be made when a specific hit effect in the outlier mode appears a specified number of times, or the specified number may be set to a different number between battle histories. . In addition to this, for example, when a battle A appears at the time of a miss, a so-called “look-ahead hold” is performed for a hold based on a winning of a game ball in the starting port 2101 (this At that time, the expectation degree of the jackpot is increasing). Instead of the one-step shift of the battle history as described above, the battle history may be shifted at a stretch to two steps. In such a case, it is desirable to set the degree of expectation for the big hit after the transition of the battle history to a value higher than the degree of expectation (for example, 50%). Further, the set number of battle histories is not limited, and a “history S” or a history of a further migration destination may be set as a migration destination earlier than the “history R” shown in FIGS. .

  In addition, for example, in the examples of FIGS. 186 and 188, the distribution is described as being set in advance for each battle history, but the present invention is not limited to this. In such a case, the number of assignments of a particular winning effect may be adjusted according to a predetermined rule or probability. Specifically, for example, when the outlier Battle A reach is selected and the transition condition of the battle history is satisfied, the allocation of the SP1 type of the hit effect in the high hit pattern is subtracted from “0” to “5”, respectively. Alternatively, “9” may be added to the distribution at the time of the battle A reach. However, from the viewpoint of efficiently performing internal processing, it is more preferable that the total value of the subtraction number of the distribution and the total value of the addition number are set to be the same.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the teaching area (teaching areas 1900a to 1900c in FIGS. 190 to 192) where the teaching based on the record of the battle history is performed, the background color of the character such as “A” to “C” is changed to the selection destination. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not limit the mode of teaching based on the record of the battle history to the background color. The display method (size, brightness, etc.) of the corresponding teaching area can be changed in accordance with the transition, or the display method (size, color, etc.) of characters such as "A" to "C" that can suggest a specific hit effect May be changed. As another example of the teaching method of the battle history, a character (for example, character “A” to character “C”) corresponding to the hit effect to be recorded in the battle history appears in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. By doing so, it may be possible to suggest a hit production in which the history of the battle is recorded. In any case, a display (enhancement display of “A”, power-up display of character “A”, or the like) that can recognize the correspondence to a specific hit effect (for example, battle A reach) may be performed.

  In addition, as for the timing of teaching the history, in the example of FIG. 192, the latest history is always displayed in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c. However, the present invention is not limited to the above. The next time the recorded specific hit effect is displayed next time, the history of the game related to the specific hit effect may be taught at an arbitrary timing in the display process on the effect screen. In such a case, the player is notified that the present game is a game in which a hit performance with improved reliability is performed based on the record of the battle history when the battle history is taught. Therefore, it is possible to expect an effect of sharply increasing interest in a game and giving a sense of expectation to a big hit and a high hit. Also, for example, when a plurality of hit effects are to be recorded in the “record of battle history”, it is not necessary to perform “teaching of battle history” for all target hit effects, and it is possible to limit the hit effects to a higher appearance frequency. Alternatively, various controls such as performing only "teaching of the history of the game" related to the hit effect of the target appearing during the previous or previous predetermined number of games may be realized.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether or not to display the teaching based on the record of the battle history in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be set so as to be selectable by the player. , Providing a game effect according to the player's preference, such as wanting to enjoy the result while obfuscating whether or not the reliability has been increased by the record of the battle history when the specific hit effect appeared be able to. By enabling “teaching of the history of the game” in various ways as described above, the playability can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the battle history is recorded based on the fact that the specific hit effect has appeared out of order, and the selection destination of the distribution is shifted (shift of the battle history), so that the subsequent Although the description has been given of the case where the reliability of the big hit and the high hit when a specific hit effect is presented in the game is increased, such conditions for shifting and maintaining the history are not limited to the above-described example. For example, the transition condition of the selection destination does not have to be a case where a specific hit effect is continuously displayed in an out-of-way manner, and the recording of the battle history or the transition of the battle history does not always have to be performed. In addition, when a specific winning effect is displayed in an outgoing manner a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period, the selection destination of the battle history may be shifted, or, as described above, other predetermined conditions may be satisfied. May be switched based on the selection.

  In addition, a specific example of the transition of the battle history when a plurality of hit performances are targeted for the record of the battle history will be described. The battle A reach appears in an out-of-position mode, and the history of the battle A is recorded, and the battle A is recorded. After the power-up display of the character "A" has been performed as the teaching of the corresponding battle history, if the battle B reach appears in the off mode, regardless of whether the battle history based on the appearance of the battle B reach is recorded or not. It is preferable that the power-up state of the character “A” be left. With this control, the power-up state of the character “A” is not erased by the appearance of the battle B felt unrelated, so that even after the battle B reach appears, the expectation for the battle A is reached. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of security that the feeling can be maintained. Then, in the case where the battle history corresponding to the battle B is taught separately (power-up of the character “B”) by the deviated battle B reach, the expectation of the player can be further increased.

  An example of the transition condition of the battle history, in which the transition of the battle history is not always performed when the specific hit production that is the target of the battle history is released, the battle A reach of the loss is recorded in the battle history 186 will be described with reference to the distribution table 1A of FIG. Specifically, it is assumed that when the outright Battle A reach appears in the battle history P, a transition to the battle history Q occurs with a probability of 1/2 (50%), and the outright Battle A reach appears in the battle history Q. Suppose that the game shifts to the battle history R with a probability of 1/5 (20%). As described above, in the case where the transition of the battle history is not necessarily performed even when the battle history is recorded, even if the battle history is deviated, if the battle history is taught, the battle A reaches the battle A reach. Since it can be expected that an effect in which the character "A" powers up will be executed, even if a specific hit effect is missed, it is determined whether or not a transition of the battle history is performed. It is possible to direct the enjoyment and expectation of the player, and it is effective in improving the gaming ability. Further, when the condition for transition from the history P to the history Q (probability 50%) is set stricter than the condition for transition from the history Q to the history R (probability 20%), the first stage (initial stage) to the first stage Since it is relatively easy to shift to the two stages, it is easy to teach the history of the character "A" such as power-up. As a result, the opportunity to provide a special state in which the character is powered up can be increased, so that the effect of increasing the interest of the player and promoting the operation can be expected.

  Further, a part or all of the information stored in the “record of battle history” may be appropriately deleted by the peripheral control MPU 4140a or the like when a predetermined condition is satisfied with the transition of the battle history. By erasing the information stored in the “record of battle history” in this way, it is possible to suppress an effect of suppressing excessive retention of data that does not have a use opportunity and to suppress a decrease in processing capacity.

  One opportunity to erase information about a history record is to reset the history. The reset of the history is to return the history to an initial state triggered by a predetermined game result. As a condition for resetting the battle history, for example, a case where a jackpot is won can be considered, but the battle history may be reset to the initial setting at the time of winning a predetermined big hit (for example, a high hit) next time. The game history of the transition destination may be maintained until a predetermined jackpot is won by a specific hit effect, or the battle history is returned by a predetermined level when a predetermined jackpot is won by a specific hit effect. May be selected. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not necessary to reset all the battle histories when a big hit is won. Specifically, for example, when the characters “A” and “B” are in a power-up state (a state in which the battle history relating to battles A and B is being taught), and the battle A reach reaches a high hit, Alternatively, the power-up state of the character "A" may be canceled by resetting only the battle history related to the battle A to the initial state, and the power-up state of the character "B" may be retained while maintaining the battle history related to the battle B. In the case of such control, even if a big hit is won in the battle A reach relating to the character "A", even if the power-up state of the unrelated character "B" is canceled, the unreasonable feeling that the player can have is obtained. Feelings can be suppressed. Then, even after the big hit, the player's expectation for the appearance of the battle B reach related to the character “B” can be maintained, so that the effect of promoting the continuation of the game can be expected. Further, as another example, when a low hit is won due to a specific hit effect, the battle history may be maintained without resetting, and by performing such control, the expectation for the high hit may be increased. The effect of the present embodiment that can be enhanced can be more appropriately experienced by the player.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of performing opening / closing control of the special winning opening 2103 similar to that at the time of a big hit (a so-called small hit) even though a special lottery result different from the big hit is obtained. In such a case, it is preferable that even if the small hit is executed, the information on the record of the battle history is not deleted. Also, even if the game shifts to a special game period (eg, an advantageous period such as a chance zone) triggered by a small hit, it is preferable that the information regarding the record of the battle history is not deleted. By performing such control, even if it seems as if the gaming state has been changed from the player's point of view, information regarding the record of the battle history is changed if the internal gaming state has not been changed. Can prevent the player from winning, so that the player can retain the battle history until the player can substantially obtain the privilege by winning the jackpot, etc., and experience the player's contribution to the improvement of the expectation for the jackpot by recording the history of the battle. We can expect to do.

  In addition, when the distribution is repeatedly changed due to the transition of the battle history, it is possible that the distribution value for a certain omission effect may be “0”, but in order to avoid such a situation, A minimum threshold value may be defined in advance, and control may be performed so as not to fall below the threshold value. If the distribution of the hit effect is "0", the hit effect is not selected, and the selection range of the hit effect is reduced, which may impair the game performance. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a shift of the battle history in which the degree of expectation to a big hit (high hit) is changed while securing the type of the hit effect that can be selected. In addition, from the player's point of view, there is no change in the situation in which a variety of hit effects are provided, and there is an effect that interest is enhanced when a specific hit effect is presented. Similarly, control may be performed so that the upper limit value of the distribution value for a specific winning effect is limited by a threshold value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that a specific hit effect (for example, Battle A Reach) appears in a non-hit mode (out), in the subsequent game, the swing of the specific hit effect at the time of a high hit is determined. By increasing the number of minutes, the expectation of a big hit (high hit) when the particular hitting effect is appeared can be increased. However, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the specific hitting effect is increased. The method of increasing the expectation for the high hit when the effect (Battle A Reach) appears is not limited to this. For example, based on the fact that a specific hit effect (for example, battle A reach) appears in a non-hit mode (out), in the subsequent game, the specific hit in the "miss" and the "low hit" By reducing the distribution of the effect, the degree of expectation for a high hit when the specific hit effect is presented may be relatively increased. However, changing the distribution of hits can increase the chances of the appearance of a game that wins a jackpot in a specific hit effect, so the player's interest in the hit effect that can be expected to hit the jackpot in accordance with the teaching of the battle history Improvement can be further promoted.

[6-4. In the case of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times]
In the description so far, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a variation pattern of a special symbol having a variation time of, for example, 30 seconds is selected, the effect pattern of the decorative symbol determined based on the variation pattern ( We have described how to determine the effect. However, as illustrated in FIG. 185, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol includes a fluctuation pattern having plural kinds of fluctuation times, and a fluctuation pattern different from the fluctuation time of 30 seconds (for example, the fluctuation time of 60 seconds) is selected. In such a case, the effect pattern determination process as described above cannot be performed.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a fluctuation pattern different from a predetermined fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds) that can make a specific effect (for example, battle A reach) appear. Even if it is selected, a “specific effect” can be made to appear by executing an “alternative effect” described in detail later. Hereinafter, such control processing will be described. The “variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern” is “a variation pattern of a special symbol having a variation time of 60 seconds (special symbol variation pattern)”.

  In the following, the distribution of the hit effect determined based on the “special symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds” will be described. Of the special symbol variation pattern and the process of the “special symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds” described in [6-1-1] to [6-1-3] are combined. Can be configured. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation pattern is 30 seconds, the distribution table 1A described in [6-1-1] (FIG. 186) or the distribution table described in [6-1-2] 1B (FIG. 188), and when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is 60 seconds, a distribution table 2A (FIG. 193) of [6-4-1] described later or [6-4-4]. 2] (see FIG. 194).

[6-4-1. Distribution of effect pattern with fluctuation time of 60 seconds (part 1)]
FIG. 193 is a diagram (allocation table 2A) for explaining the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. The distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193 is a distribution table of an effect pattern used when the change time is “60 seconds” as a change pattern of the special symbol, and the effect time of each hit effect shown in FIG. 193. (Fluctuating time of the decorative pattern) is within 60 seconds. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 185, the rate at which the variation pattern of the special symbol having the variation time of 60 seconds is selected based on the special lottery result is 15/100 in the case of “losing” and “low hit”. Or, in the case of "high hit", each is set to 60/100. From another viewpoint, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected, the ratio of each determination result is “out”: “low hit”: “high hit” = 15: 60: 60 = 1: 4. : 4, indicating that 11.1% (1/9) is "missing" and 88.9% (8/9) is a big hit (low hit or high hit). In other words, when the winning effect is sorted using the sorting table 2A shown in FIG. 193, the result of the special lottery is 11.1% is "losing", "88.9%" is a big hit, and The fluctuation time of the special symbol is “60 seconds”. Note that the distribution of the hit effect shown in FIG. 193 is an example for simple explanation, and does not limit the type, the type, and the like of the hit effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The setting content of each distribution is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4140b or the like, and can be read by the peripheral control MPU 4140a as needed.

  The items (type, production name, battle history, etc.) of the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193 are the same as those of the distribution table 1A of FIG. 186 and the distribution table 1B of FIG. 188, and the description is omitted. “SP3” is provided in the “type” of the distribution table 2A. The hit effect included in “SP3” corresponds to a hit effect generally called “super reach”, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is set particularly high among super reach. In the "SP3" type hit effect, as an example, as in the "SP2" type hit effect, the battle-type effect proceeds with a longer fluctuating time than the SP2 type, and depending on the progress result, it may be a big hit (and its type). Is displayed in such a manner as to be recognizable. The SP3 classification includes six drop effects ("Long Battle A", "Long Battle A '", "Long Battle B", "Long Battle B'", "Long Battle C", "Long Battle C '"). )). However, when the types are classified based on the characteristics of the production contents (for example, characters A to C selected as ally characters in a competitive production), three types of “long A”, “long B”, and “long C” are obtained. Can be divided into types.

  Among these SP3 types of hit effects, the outline of the effects of two types of hit effects classified as long (here, long B) of the same type, such as Long Battle B Reach and Long Battle B 'Reach, are outlined. explain. First, as in the case of the battle B reach described in FIGS. 196 and 188, the reach included in the long B is determined based on whether or not the ally character and the enemy character compete against each other and whether or not the enemy character can be won, to determine whether or not the hit is a big hit. This is a match-type reach presentation shown in which the character B is basically selected as a friendly character. However, in the battle period (variation time), the battle B reach is set to 30 seconds or less, while the long B reach is set to 60 seconds or less. Here, in the long battle B reach, the character B is the central character through the reach effect, whereas in the long battle B 'reach, the overall effect contents are similar to the long battle B reach, but the reach effect is the same. It is characterized in that at any timing of the effect, the effect is switched (changed) to another effect content different from the long battle B reach. The switched effect content is an effect based on the record of the battle history. Specifically, for example, when the “record of battle history related to battle A” is performed based on the appearance of battle A reach in an out-of-way mode, when long battle B ′ reach is executed, While the same (or similar) production as Battle B Reach is in progress, the same (or similar) production as the “Battle A Reach” production appears based on “Record of Battle History of Battle A”. . Similarly, if “long battle C ′” is selected when “Record of battle history regarding battle A” is performed, the battle history is the same (or similar) as that of long battle C reach. , An effect that is the same (or similar) as the effect of “Battle A Reach” appears. As described above, the Long Battle B 'Reach and the Long Battle C' Reach are the type of long B or long C hit effect, but at least a part of the effect is a specific effect based on the record of the battle history (Battle A). (Reach production), and can be called “alternative production”. The detailed effect screen of the “alternative effect” and the screen transition thereof will be described later in [6-5].

  In the same manner as described with reference to FIG. 192 and the like in [6-2] (specifically, the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c), the variation time 60 in the game after the “record of battle history” is performed is performed. Even when an SP3 type of hit effect is displayed as a variation display of a decorative symbol based on a variation pattern of seconds, “teaching of a history” is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. Specifically, for example, when a battle history related to Battle A reach is recorded, “Teaching of battle history” is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a manner that the battle A or the character A can be recognized. Further, in this state, when the same (or similar) effect as the effect of the battle A reach appears by executing the long battle B 'reach or the long battle C' reach, it is indicated by "teaching of the battle history". It is preferable that a highlighting is performed so that the player can surely recognize that an effect (effect of Battle A reach) corresponding to the information that has appeared is appearing. Further, the display form of “teaching of the history of battle” may take various forms as in [6-2].

  In the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, the transition conditions of the battle history P, the battle history Q, and the battle history R are also the same as those of the distribution tables 1A and 1B shown in FIGS. When “specific hit production” is set, the history of the battle is recorded based on the appearance of the battle A reach in an outlier mode, and the history of the battle selected in the distribution table 2A based on the record of the history Will migrate.

  Next, in the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, a description will be given of the distribution of the winning effect changed with the transition of the battle history. The distribution (allocation X2-P, Y2-P, Z2-P) of the battle history P is a distribution used in the initial setting. In the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, there is no distribution for the long battle A ′ as an example of a distribution table used when “recording battle history regarding battle A” is performed with battle A reach as a specific hit effect. . It is also assumed that in the initially set battle history P, there is no distribution for the long battle B 'and the long battle C'.

  When the battle history P is selected, the battle history for battle A is recorded, and when a predetermined battle history transition condition is satisfied, the “battle history Q” is selected when determining the winning effect. Become. In the “play history Q”, as compared with the “play history P”, in the long B and the long C, a part of the distribution in each pattern (off, low hit, high hit) is changed.

  Specifically, according to the distribution X2-Q of the outlier pattern, the distribution of the long battle B reach among the long B is reduced by “3” and the distribution of the long battle B ′ reach is shorter than the distribution X2-P. The distribution increases by "3". In the long C, the distribution of the long battle C reach is decreased by “3” and the distribution of the long battle C ′ reach is increased by “3”. Further, according to the distribution Y2-Q of the low hit pattern, the distribution of the long battle B reach among the long B is reduced by "10", and the distribution of the long battle B 'reach is shorter than the distribution Y2-P. Increases by "10". Then, of the long C, the distribution of the long battle C reach is decreased by "10" and the distribution of the long battle C 'reach is increased by "10". Also, the distribution Z2-Q of the high hit pattern is increased or decreased by "10", similarly to the case of the distribution Y2-Q of the low hit pattern. However, the total number of distributions for each type (long A, B, C) is not changed.

  As described above, in the distribution table 2A, the number of distributions for the long battle B reach and the long battle C reach decreases with the transition from the "battle history P" to the "battle history Q", but the distribution is initially The number of distributions for the long battle B 'reach and the long battle C' reach which were "0" increases. However, the increase / decrease in the number of distributions is greater than the increase / decrease number (“3”) in “outside” (“20” when “10” in the low hit and “10” in the high hit are summed). Is determined to be more.

  Next, the record of the battle history relating to the battle A is further recorded in a state in which the “battle history Q” is selected, and when the transition condition of the battle history is satisfied, the “battle history R” is selected when deciding the hit production. Will be done. Compared to "History History Q", in "History History R", in Long B and Long C, a part of the distribution in each pattern (outlier, low hit, high hit) is changed, and the changed content is " This is the same as the change of the contents of the distribution at the time of shifting from the “history P” to the “history Q”.

  As described above, the number of distributions with respect to the long battle B reach and the long battle C reach gradually decreases with the transition from the “battle history P” to the “battle history Q” and further to the “battle history R”. The number of distributions for “0” long battle B ′ reach and long battle C ′ reach gradually increases. Further, the difference between the increase / decrease number of distributions in “outside” and the increase / decrease number of distributions in “big hit” gradually increases. That is, when the battle history selected based on the record of the battle history shifts, a long battle B 'reach is displayed when the long B type hit effect is selected, or the long C type hit effect is selected. Or a long battle C'reach will appear. At the time of performing such a reach effect (long battle B ', C'), as described above, battle A, which is a target of the history record, is performed while the effect contents similar to the long battle B, C reach are in progress. A reach screen (or a screen related to Battle A reach) is displayed. That is, a variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a battle A reach can be selected in a variation time of 30 seconds) (for example, a long battle in a variation time of 60 seconds) different from a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a battle A reach can be selected in a variation time of 30 seconds). Even if a variation pattern in which B can be selected is selected, the specific effect (Battle A reach) can be caused to appear by the fact that an alternative effect (for example, long battle B 'reach) can be made.

  In each of the battle histories P, Q, and R, the degree of expectation (reliability) with respect to the big hit (low hit or high hit) when each hit effect (reach effect) appears is as follows. As described above, each reliability is calculated in consideration of the appearance ratio of “outside”: “low hit”: “high hit” = 1: 4: 4, but details of the calculation formula are omitted. . Also, the reliability of the reach effect whose distribution is “0” is not described.

First, regarding the reliability of the big hit (the sum of the low hit and the high hit) in “History P”,
Long A (Long Battle A) reach has a reliability of 76.2% (160/210 × 100), Long B (Long Battle B) reach has a reliability of 88.9% (240/270 × 100), and Long C (Long Battle C) The reliability of the reach is 95.2% (400/420 × 100),
The reliability of the entire SP3 type is 88.9% (800/900 × 100).

Next, regarding the reliability of the big hit (the sum of the low hit and the high hit) in the "war history Q"
The reliability of Long A (Long Battle A) reach is 76.2% (same as the battle history P),
The reliability of Long Battle B reach is 85.6% (160/187 × 100),
The reliability of Long Battle B 'Reach is 96.4% (80/83 × 100),
The reliability of the entire Long B is 88.9% (same as the history P),
The reliability of Long Battle C Reach is 95.0% (320/337 × 100),
The reliability of Long Battle C 'Reach is 96.4% (80/83 × 100),
The reliability of the entire Long C is 95.2% (same as the history P),
The reliability of the entire SP3 type is 88.9% (same as the history P).

Next, regarding the reliability of the big hit (the sum of the low hit and the high hit) in the “war history R”,
The reliability of Long A (Long Battle A) reach is 76.2% (same as the battle history P),
The reliability of Long Battle B reach is 76.2% (80/105 × 100),
The reliability of Long Battle B 'reach is 97.0% (160/165 × 100),
The reliability of the entire Long B is 88.9% (same as the history P),
The reliability of Long Battle C reach is 94.1% (240/255 × 100),
The reliability of Long Battle C 'Reach is 97.0% (160/165 × 100),
The reliability of the entire Long C is 95.2% (same as the history P),
The reliability of the entire SP3 type is 88.9% (same as the history P).

  As described above, in the case where the transition from the “competition history P” to the “competition history Q” and further to the “competition history R” is performed, the present drop effect (long battle B ′, C ′) with newly added (increased) distribution is present. When it is issued, there is a low probability that "missing" will occur, but it is possible to expect a big hit with a high probability (95% or more). That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the distribution table 2A is used, a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a battle A reach with a variation time of 30 seconds) that allows a specific effect (battle A reach) to appear is achieved. Even if a variation pattern different from the variation pattern that can be selected (for example, a variation pattern in which the long battle B can be selected with a variation time of 60 seconds) is selected, an alternative effect (for example, the long battle B ′ reach) can appear. Thus, the specific effect (Battle A Reach) can appear, but such an alternative effect is selected when the expectation of the big hit is high. In other words, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit while the history of the battle is being recorded, it is assumed that “a variation pattern different from a predetermined variation pattern that can produce a specific effect” is selected. Also, since the "alternative effect" is easily selected as the hit effect, the "specific effect" is more likely to appear. Therefore, when a “specific effect” appears while the battle history is being recorded, a high degree of expectation for a big hit can be realized.

[6-4-2. Distribution of effect pattern with fluctuation time of 60 seconds (part 2)]
FIG. 194 is a diagram (allocation table 2B) for explaining the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. The distribution table 2B shown in FIG. 194 is another example of a distribution table of an effect pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds, which can be used instead of the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. The distribution table 2B is a distribution table similar to the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193 except that the distribution contents according to the transition of the battle history are different. Omitted.

  The distribution table 2B of FIG. 194 differs from the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193 in the amount of distribution for the long battle B and the long battle C in the low hit pattern in the battle history Q and the battle history R. Specifically, in the distribution Y2-Q in the low hit pattern of the battle history Q, the distribution amount for the long battle B reach decreases by "5" as compared with the distribution Y2-P in the low hit pattern of the battle history P. , The distribution amount for the long battle B ′ reach increases by “5”, the distribution amount for the long battle C reach decreases by “5”, and the distribution amount for the long battle C ′ reach increases by “5”. Further, in the distribution Y2-R in the low hit pattern of the battle history R, the distribution amount for the long battle B reach is reduced by "5" as compared with the distribution Y2-Q in the low hit pattern of the battle history Q, and the long battle The distribution amount for the B ′ reach has increased by “5”, the distribution amount for the long battle C reach has decreased by “5”, and the distribution amount for the long battle C ′ reach has increased by “5”. It should be noted that the amount of distribution in the high hit pattern varies by "10" in each of "battle history Q" and "battle history R" as in the distribution table 2A.

  Thus, in the distribution table 2B of FIG. 194, when the battle history shifts based on the record of the battle history regarding the battle A (the battle history Q, R), the long battle B 'reach and the long battle C' in the low hit pattern are performed. The amount of distribution to the reach is made smaller than the amount of distribution to the reach in the high hit pattern. Also, as in the case of the distribution table 2A, the increase / decrease number in the "big hit" ("5" in the battle history P to the battle history Q) is larger than the increase / decrease number in the "miss" ("3" in the history P to the history Q). "And" 10 "of the hit are summed up so that" 15 ") is larger. Furthermore, it is preferable that the number of increase / decrease in “outside” is set to be at least larger than the number of increase / decrease in “high hit”. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment uses the distribution table 2B as described above to provide a predetermined variation pattern that allows a specific effect (battle A reach) to appear in the same manner as when the distribution table 2A is used. Even if a variation pattern different from (for example, a variation pattern in which battle A reach can be selected in a variation time of 30 seconds) (for example, a variation pattern in which long battle B or long battle C can be selected in a variation time of 60 seconds) is selected, Not only can the specific effect (Battle A reach) be revealed by the fact that an alternative effect (eg, Long Battle B 'Reach or Long Battle C' Reach) can be performed, but such an alternate effect can be performed with a low hit. In the case of a high hit, it can be easily selected.

  As described above, regarding the alternative effects (long battle B 'reach, long battle C' reach) that are more likely to be selected in the case of a high hit than in a low hit, each of the alternative effects is present in each battle history (battle history PR). Calculate and verify the reliability when issuing.

  First, in the “History P”, neither the long battle B ′ reach nor the long battle C ′ reach is displayed because there is no distribution.

Next, in "History Q",
The jackpot reliability of Long Battle B 'reach is 95.2% (60/63 × 100),
Breakdown by jackpot is
High hit reliability is 63.5% (40/63 × 100),
The low hitting reliability is 31.7% (20/63 × 100).
The jackpot reliability of the long battle C 'reach is 95.2% (60/63 × 100),
Breakdown by jackpot is
High hit reliability is 63.5% (40/63 × 100),
The low hitting reliability is 31.7% (20/63 × 100).

Next, in "Race History R",
The jackpot reliability of the Long Battle B 'reach is 96.0% (120/125 × 100),
Breakdown by jackpot is
High hit reliability of 64.0% (80/125 × 100),
The low hitting reliability is 32.0% (40/125 × 100).
The jackpot reliability of the long battle C 'reach is 96.0% (120/125 × 100),
Breakdown by jackpot is
High hit reliability of 64.0% (80/125 × 100),
The low hitting reliability is 32.0% (40/125 × 100).

  From the above calculated values, it is shown that when each of the alternative effects is presented, the expectation for the high hit is higher than the low hit, in other words, each alternative effect is higher when the high hit is won than when the low hit is elected. This is an easy-to-execute effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment uses such a sorting table 2B, when the result of the special lottery is a high hit while the history of the battle is being recorded, the “specific effect” Even if a "variation pattern different from a predetermined variation pattern that can cause" is selected, "alternative effect" is likely to be selected as the hit effect, so "specific effect" is more likely to appear. Thus, a high degree of expectation for a high hit can be realized in the case where a “specific effect” appears when the history of the battle is being recorded.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the teaching of the battle history as described in [6-2], the variation pattern (a battle A reach with a variation time of 30 seconds) that can produce a specific effect varies. As described above in [6-3], in the case of the variation pattern with a different time (alternate production with a variation time of 60 seconds), the execution is performed in the same manner as in the case of the "variation pattern with the same variation time". Similarly, another example (processing relating to the timing of teaching the history, resetting of the history, etc.) can be similarly executed in the case of an alternative effect with a variation time of 60 seconds. Each of the alternatives is omitted because it overlaps with the description in [6-3]. In particular, the opportunity to delete the information related to the record of the battle history is triggered by the fact that an alternative effect has been selected and a big hit has occurred. By erasing (or resetting) the information, even if a “fluctuation pattern having a different fluctuating time from the fluctuating pattern that can produce a specific effect” is selected, the information is based on the battle history. It is possible to change the distribution of the production and reflect the fact that the jackpot has been reached by the production (alternative production) in the battle history. The characteristic effect of improving the degree of expectation can be provided more reliably.

[6-5. Production pattern of alternative production]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a battle A reach can be selected in a variation time of 30 seconds) that can cause a specific effect (for example, battle A reach) to appear. Even if a change pattern different from the above (for example, a change pattern in which the SP3 type of hit effect (long B, long C) can be selected with a change time of 60 seconds) is selected, a specific effect based on the record of the battle history is substituted. "Alternative effects (for example, long battle B 'reach or long battle C'reach)" to appear. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transfer of the battle history is performed based on the record of the battle history by using the distribution table such as the distribution table 2A (FIG. 193) or the distribution table 2B (FIG. 194). If a big hit (or a high hit) is won while the player is playing, such an alternative effect is more likely to be selected, and by executing the alternative effect, it is possible to bring out a specific effect in which the history of the battle is recorded. Become. Hereinafter, with respect to a specific effect pattern by such an “alternative effect”, a specific effect will be described as a battle A reach effect, and an alternative effect will be described as a long battle B ′ reach. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to execute a combination of alternative effects indicated by the following effect patterns, and to select an effect pattern to appear as an alternative effect from a plurality of effect patterns. It may be.

  In the description so far, “Battle A reach” has been described as a specific effect. However, in order to be more precise, hereinafter, “Battle A reach effect (also referred to as“ Battle A effect ”)” will be referred to as a specific effect. Production. The “battle A reach effect (Battle A effect)” is a state in which the reach state is “a series of effects by the battle A reach” from the start of the change of the decorative pattern to the stop of the change of the decorative pattern through the formation of the reach state. This means an effect after being formed, and specifically corresponds to a battle-type effect in which the character A appears (for example, an effect after FIG. 192 (C)). That is, the battle A reach includes an effect (a pre-reach effect) until the reach state is formed and a battle A effect. In the display period of the battle A reach, for example, in FIG. 199 described later, the pre-reach effect appears for 8 seconds, and thereafter, the battle A effect appears for 22 seconds.

[6-5-1. First production pattern of alternative production]
First, as a first effect pattern of an alternative effect, an alternative effect that causes a specific effect to appear in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect will be described.

  FIG. 195 and FIG. 196 are diagrams for explaining transition of the effect image when the alternative effect according to the first effect pattern is executed. 195 and 196 show examples of the production screen of the long battle B 'reach displayed when the history of the battle A production is recorded, and FIGS. 195 (A) to 195 (D). Is an example of an effect screen appearing in the first half of the display period of the long battle B 'reach. In each of FIGS. 195 and 196, the effect screen similar to that described in FIGS. 190 to 192 is simply described, and such description is simplified in FIGS. 197 and 198 described later. I do.

  FIG. 195 (A) shows a state in which the decorative pattern before the reach state is formed is changing (pre-reach state), and FIG. 195 (B) shows the same decorative pattern (7 (Legend) has been stopped, and the reach state has been formed. The display state of the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c in FIG. 195 (A) is the same as that in FIG. 192 (A). Specifically, when the transition stage of the battle history is set to four stages including the initial setting (the first stage), the teaching area 1900a in which the record of the battle history related to the battle A effect is displayed is green in the third stage, The teaching area 1900b where the record of the battle history relating to the B effect is displayed is blue in the second stage, and the teaching region 1900c where the record of the battle history relating to the battle C effect is displayed is white in the first stage.

  When the reach state is formed in FIG. 195 (B), an effect screen is displayed by the long battle B 'reach, and at this time (in the first half of the display period of the long battle B' reach), a specific effect is provided. A battle A effect appears (FIG. 195 (C)). In FIG. 195 (C), a confrontation effect between an ally character (character A) and an enemy character (character Z) is displayed. The details of the screen display and the screen transition are described in FIG. It may be the same as the reach, and the detailed description is omitted.

  As described with reference to FIG. 192, also in FIG. 195 (C), the teaching area 1900a is displayed in a more emphasized manner than in the normal case, indicating that the battle A effect in which the battle history is recorded is performed. The player can be clearly recognized (visually recognized). Furthermore, when the performance based on the record of the battle history appears, the degree of reliability is increased. Therefore, the reliability of the battle A performance that appears here is higher than the initial setting, and It can be expected to have the effect of significantly increasing the interest of the people.

  After that, the battle display effect in the battle A effect is displayed in the image display area 1900d. As a result, if the character A wins after the predetermined effect time (for example, 22 seconds) elapses, the victory screen is displayed ( In FIG. 195 (D), if the game is not settled within the elapse of the predetermined effecting time, a confrontation effect by the character A is continuously displayed (FIG. 196 (G)). Here, the predetermined effect time is a time until the first half of the display period of the alternative effect elapses, and is 22 seconds based on an example of a time chart (FIG. 197) described later. When the transition from FIG. 195 (C) to FIG. 195 (D) is made, the character A wins in the first half of the display period of the long battle B ′ reach by the battle effect similar to the battle A reach, and the battle A The production ends.

  In FIG. 195 (D), the character A wins in the image display area 1900d, and the same decorative pattern (“7” in the figure) is displayed in the second image display area 1900d. However, the decorative symbols shown in the second image display area 1900d in FIG. 195 (D) are not stopped and displayed, and at least one or more decorative symbols are in a swinging state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 195 (E), the decorative pattern shown in the second image display area 1900d is displayed on the entire image display area 1900d, and at this time, at least one of the decorative patterns is in a swinging state. Is done. That is, the swinging state of the decorative symbol is maintained in the latter half of the display period of the substitute effect, and after a predetermined time, the decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the jackpot is won. (FIG. 195 (F)). As a result, the player can recognize from the effect result displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the big hit has been won in this game. When the big hit is won as shown in FIG. 195 (F), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the game is stopped. As described above, the effect screen which transits in the order of FIGS. 195 (A) to (F) is displayed in the long battle B 'reach of the big hit pattern.

  On the other hand, after the battle A effect has been started (FIG. 195 (C)), if the game is not settled within the elapse of a predetermined effect time, the character A continues the confrontation effect as shown in FIG. 196 (G). (Extended production of Battle A). The extended effect of the battle A is continuously displayed even after entering the latter half of the display period of the alternative effect, and the battle result of the victory or defeat of the character A is finally displayed according to the result of the special lottery. FIG. 196 (H) is an example of the defeat screen of the character A displayed when the result of the special lottery is out, and thereafter, a combination of decorative patterns (for example, “7. The display is stopped (FIG. 196 (I)). When the big hit is not won as shown in FIG. 196 (I), the game is shifted to the next game after the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the game is stopped. Such an effect screen that transitions from FIG. 195 (A) to (C) to FIG. 196 (G) to (I) is displayed in the long battle B ′ reach of the outlier pattern.

  In the above description, the transition from FIG. 195 (A) to FIG. 195 (C) to FIG. 196 (G) is made in the long battle B ′ reach of the outlier pattern. Such an effect screen may be displayed in the effect. At this time, even if the effect screen of FIG. 196 (G) is displayed without shifting to FIG. 195 (D) in which the character A wins after FIG. 195 (C), it may be the effect screen of the long battle A reach. Since the game result does not mean that the game result is determined to be out, it is possible to prevent the player from giving up the game result. More specifically, when the long battle A reach of the big hit pattern appears, after the extended effect of battle A is displayed in FIG. 196 (G), the effect screen in which the character A wins is displayed and the big hit is displayed. Is shown. In addition, when the long battle A reach of the miss pattern or the long battle B ′ reach of the miss pattern is selected, the effect screens of FIGS. 196 (H) to (I) are displayed, and the game result of the miss is determined. I do.

  By displaying the effect screen as shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 in this way, it is possible to realize an alternative effect of the first effect pattern in which a specific effect appears in the first half of the display period.

  Next, another example of the alternative effect using the first effect pattern will be described. FIGS. 197 and 198 are other diagrams for explaining transition of effect images when an alternative effect based on the first effect pattern is executed. 197 and 198 show examples of the production screen of the long battle B 'reach displayed when the history of the battle A production is recorded, and FIGS. 197 (A) to 197 (D). Is an example of an effect screen appearing in the first half of the display period of the long battle B 'reach. 197 (A)-(D) and FIGS. 198 (H)-(J) are the same effect screens as FIGS. 195 (A)-(D) and FIGS. 196 (G)-(I), respectively. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  197 and 198 show, as another example of the alternative effect according to the first effect pattern, in the first half of the display period of the long battle B ′ reach (alternative effect), the battle A effect appears in a mode where the character A wins. An example of an effect screen in which an effect screen (episode A) relating to the character A is displayed in the latter half of the subsequent display period is shown. More specifically, when the long battle B 'reach of the big hit pattern is selected, after the character A defeats the character Z in FIG. 197 (D), the characters A to 197 (E) to 197 (E) to FIG. Episode A is displayed as shown in (F), and then a stop display of a decorative symbol indicating a big hit is performed (FIG. 197 (G)). On the other hand, when the long battle B ′ reach of the miss pattern is selected, a transition is made to FIG. 198 (I) after FIG. 197 (C), and an effect screen showing the game result of the miss is displayed as in FIG. 196. Will be.

  Thus, also when the effect screens shown in FIGS. 197 and 198 are displayed, a specific effect is caused to appear in the first half of the display period, as in the case of the effect screen examples shown in FIGS. , An alternative effect of the first effect pattern can be realized.

  In addition, in FIG. 196 (H) to (I) and FIG. 198 (I) to (J), although the battle A effect appears, the game result is not a big hit but an outlier. However, this out-of-game may be recorded in the history of battle. At this time, as shown in FIG. 196 (H) and FIG. 198 (I), the display content of the teaching area 1900a corresponding to the battle history of “A” changes, and specifically, from the third stage green to the fourth stage. The color of the stage becomes red (shaded in the figure). In this way, if a special performance (Battle A performance) appears in the alternative performance but a big hit is not obtained, a record of the history of the battle is recorded, and the game result is provided to the player. If a specific effect appears again in a subsequent game without giving a sense of being lost, it is possible to have a higher expectation of a big hit.

  As described above, in the alternative effect using the first effect pattern, a specific effect relating to the record of the battle history appears in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect. Will be described again in chronological order. FIG. 199 is a time chart for describing an alternative effect using the first effect pattern. FIG. 199 (A) shows a case where an alternative effect (long battle B ′ reach) based on the first effect pattern appears, and FIG. 195 (A) to (F) or FIGS. FIG. 199 (B) is a time chart when the big hit is shown in the flow, and FIG. 196 (G) or FIG. It is a time chart at the time of shifting to 198 (I).

  In FIG. 199 (A), first, eight seconds elapse from the “pre-reach state” until the decorative pattern is started to be displayed and the reach state is formed (for example, FIGS. 195 (A) to (B)). Then, triggered by the formation of the reach state, a battle A effect appears for 22 seconds (for example, FIG. 195 (C)). After that, when the character A wins the battle A (for example, FIG. 195 (D)), the decorative symbol of the same symbol is displayed in a swinging state for 30 seconds (for example, FIG. 195 (E)), and then the big hit is made. (For example, FIG. 195 (F)). Note that instead of the decorative symbol of the same symbol being displayed in a swinging state, episode A may be displayed for 30 seconds (for example, FIGS. 197 (E) to (F)).

  In FIG. 199 (A), the entire display period of the substitute effect is 60 seconds, and the special symbol change pattern in which the SP3 type of hit effect (including the long battle B ′ reach) can be selected is changed. Yes, it is. Then, it can be seen that the battle A effect, which is a specific effect, has appeared by the time 30 seconds in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect has elapsed. The time chart shown in FIG. 199 (A) shows a case of an alternative effect (long battle B ') of the big hit pattern.

  Further, in FIG. 199 (B), after the state in which the decorative pattern is started to be changed and the reach state is formed (pre-reach state), the battle A effect is performed for 22 seconds in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect. The battle A effect is continuously displayed in the latter half of the display period of the alternative effect as “extended effect of battle A” (for example, FIG. 196 (G)). . After that, the conclusion of the battle is displayed, and the player is shown whether or not the game result of this game is a big hit (miss). The time chart shown in FIG. 199 (B) shows a case of an alternative effect (long battle B ′) of a missing pattern or a case of a hit effect (long battle A) of the same type (SP3 type) different from the alternative effect. I have.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 199, in the alternative effect using the first effect pattern, a specific effect appears in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect based on the recorded (and taught) history. Therefore, the player can increase the sense of expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit) by recognizing that a specific effect has appeared from the beginning of the alternative effect. Then, a specific effect (for example, a battle A effect) appears as an alternative effect based on the record of the battle history even if the degree of expectation for the specific effect (that is, the reliability in the battle A reach) is relatively low. When the game is performed, the effect is highly reliable, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit), which has an effect of increasing the interest of the player.

  In the description with reference to FIGS. 195 to 199 described above, when the battle history in which the battle A effect is a specific effect is recorded, when the long battle B ′ reach is executed as an alternative effect, after the reach state is formed, Since the battle A effect appears immediately, the battle A effect appears even though the B-type (non-A type) hit effect that is internally unrelated to the character A is selected. That is not recognized by the player. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as another example, the battle A effect is displayed after the player recognizes that the non-A-system hit effect has been selected during the execution of the alternative effect. You may make it. Specifically, for example, after a reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 195 (B), a screen for selecting a character to be confronted (a character selection screen) or the like is displayed before shifting to a confrontation effect. To Then, on the character selection screen, the initial state is set to a state in which the character B is selected, and the character A is selected at the time of determination, so that the battle A effect by the character A appears in the subsequent confrontation effect. do it.

  By doing so, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that it is a hit effect relating to the character B, and to cause the battle A effect, which is a specific effect, to appear in the first half of the alternative effect. In such a case, the change of the selected character from B to A is clearly indicated, so that the player's expectation can be increased. More specifically, for example, even if the degree of expectation to the jackpot regarding the character B is not relatively high, by changing to a specific effect (battle A effect) based on the record of the battle history, the player's The degree of expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit) can be sharply increased. Also, in the initial state of the character selection screen, a non-A hit effect (in this case, for example, a battle B-type reach) is expected, so that the player has expectations of a big hit by the hit effect, and thereafter, By selecting the character A corresponding to the record of the battle history, the player can have a higher sense of expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit). Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, If this is the case, the interest of the player can be increased in stages.

[6-5-2. Second production pattern of alternative production]
Next, as a second effect pattern of the alternative effect, a specific effect is caused to appear within the display period of the alternative effect, and a related effect related to the specific effect is displayed between the specific effects to appear. A description will be given of an alternative effect to appear. In addition, when a specific effect (Battle A effect) appears in the second effect pattern and the third and fourth effect patterns described later, FIGS. As shown in 198, the confrontation effect of the character A with the enemy character is displayed, but details thereof are omitted because they are duplicated.

  FIG. 200 is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect by the second effect pattern. FIG. 200 (A) is a time chart of a first example of an alternative effect according to the second effect pattern, and FIG. 200 (B) is a time chart of a second example of the alternative effect according to the second effect pattern. Although the timing at which the related effects are displayed is different between the first example and the second example, a specific effect (battle A effect) appears during the display period of the alternative effect (long battle B 'reach), In addition, there is no change in the point that related effects appear between the specific effects. In the second effect pattern, as in the case of battle A1 to battle A4 shown in FIG. 200 (A), in the case of another effect pattern, a specific effect (battle A effect) displayed continuously is performed a plurality of times. Appears separately.

  First, in the first example of the alternative effect according to the second effect pattern shown in FIG. 200 (A), the battle A effect (Battle A1 to Battle A4) appearing during the display period of the alternative effect causes the battle A to take place. Related effects (cut-in 1 to cut-in 3) related to the effect appear multiple times.

  Specifically, when the reach state is formed 8 seconds after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the battle A effect is first started (battle A1). In the battle A1, for example, the start of a confrontation effect between the character A as an ally and the character Z as an enemy is displayed. When six seconds during which the image related to the battle A1 is displayed, the first related effect is displayed (cut-in 1). In the cut-in 1, for example, it is displayed whether the character A makes a punch attack on the character Z and whether or not the attack is successful. Whether the attack hits or not may be determined by performing an internal calculation based on the result of the special lottery in the present game (whether a big hit or not). When the attack hits, the physical strength of the enemy character shown in the gauge area 1900g (see, for example, FIG. 195 (C)) is reduced to give the player an impression of approaching victory.

  When the display period of cut-in 1 (8 seconds) elapses, the continuation of the battle A effect is displayed again for 4 seconds (battle A2). After that, the second related effect is displayed for 8 seconds (cut-in 2). In the cut-in 2, for example, similar to the punch attack in the cut-in 1, the character A makes a kick attack on the character Z, and it is displayed whether or not the attack is successful. When the hit is successful, the enemy character's physical strength shown in the gauge area 1900g is further reduced, giving the player an impression of approaching victory.

  After that, the process returns to the continuation of the battle A effect again (battle A3), and after 4 seconds, the third related effect is displayed for 14 seconds (cut-in 3). In the cut-in 3, for example, a mysterious attack is displayed as a stronger attack than the attacks in the cut-in 1 and the cut-in 2. If the result of the special lottery in this game is a big hit, the mysterious attack is targeted at the enemy character. An intermediate display is performed. Then, when the mysterious attack hits, in the battle A effect (battle A4) displayed subsequently, the enemy character's physical strength shown in the gauge area 1900g is reduced to 0, indicating the victory of the character A, The player is made aware that the game result of the game is a big hit. If the mysterious attack did not hit (failed), it indicates that the character A has been defeated in the battle A4, and makes the player recognize that the game result of this game has been lost. The effect time of battle A4 shown in FIG. 200 (A) is eight seconds, which is the longest among the divided battle A effects (battle A1 to battle A4).

  According to the effect of the first example, the related effect is presented a plurality of times during the time when the battle A, which is a specific effect, appears. It can be increased or decreased for each related effect, and the sense of expectation of the player can be varied in various ways. More specifically, the greater the number of successful punch and kick attacks described above, the greater the chance of a big hit, and even if both the punch and kick attacks were unsuccessful, as long as the last mysterious attack was successful You can expect a reversal victory.

  Further, the content of the related effect in the first example is not limited to the attack of the character A as described above, and may be various effects having a meaning to excite a specific effect. For example, it may be determined whether the attack of the enemy character Z can be avoided by displaying the attack, or the degree of expectation may be changed according to an attack pattern (type of technique) that appears between the characters. Further, the display color may be changed to change the degree of expectation. This is performed not only in the related effects (cut-in 1 to cut-in 3) but also in a specific effect (battle A1 to battle A4). Good.

  Next, in the second example of the alternative effect according to the second effect pattern shown in FIG. 200 (B), the battle A effect (Battle A1 and Battle A4) appearing during the display period of the alternative effect is performed in the battle. Related effects (cut-in) related to the A effect appear continuously.

  Specifically, when the reach state is formed 8 seconds after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the battle A effect is first started (battle A1). In the battle A1, for example, the start of a confrontation effect between the character A as an ally and the character Z as an enemy is displayed. After 10 seconds when the image related to the battle A1 is displayed, the related effect of the battle A is displayed (cut-in). In the cut-in, for example, a conversation between the character A and the character Z is displayed, and thereafter, a display as if the character A is powered up is performed. The effect result by cut-in may be determined by internal calculation based on the result of the special lottery. Depending on the content and display color of the conversation between the character A and the character Z, the degree of expectation of the big hit is changed, and if the power of the character A succeeds, the attack power of the character A is increased. Gives the player the impression of approaching victory.

  Then, after the effect of the cut-in is displayed for 30 seconds, the continuation of the battle A effect is displayed for 12 seconds, and it is determined whether or not the character A wins (Battle A4). When the long battle B 'reach of the big hit pattern is selected, the character A wins in the battle A4, and the player is made aware that the game result of this game is a big hit. When the long battle B 'reach of the outlier pattern is selected, the character A is defeated in the battle A4, and the player is made aware that the game result of this game is outlier.

  According to the effect of the second example, a long-time related effect (cut-in) of 30 seconds appears between the time when the battle A, which is the specific effect, appears. Over a period longer than the original fluctuating time (30 seconds for the entire Battle A reach including the Battle A effect) (in FIG. 200 (B), the total of the battle A1, A4, and cut-in is 52 seconds), and the specific effect is performed. An effect having relevance will appear. As a result, the degree of attention and expectation of the player for a specific effect can be improved, and the sense of expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit) can be increased.

  As described in the first and second examples, the battle A4 indicates the final determination result of the hit effect by the alternative effect (in short, whether it is a big hit or not). Can be said to be one of the most important production periods in the progress of alternative production. Therefore, in the second pattern of the alternative effect, of the battle A effects (battle A1 to battle A4) appearing in a plurality of times, the effect time of the last appearing battle A effect (that is, battle A4) Is preferably set to be the longest. For example, in FIG. 200A of the first example, the effect time of the battle A4 is 8 seconds, which is longer than the effect time of a maximum of 6 seconds by the other battle A effects (Battle A1 to Battle A3). Further, for example, in FIG. 200 (B) of the second example, the effect time of battle A4 is 12 seconds, which is longer than the effect time of 10 seconds by another battle A effect (battle A1).

  As described above, in the second effect pattern of the alternative effect, among the specific effects (battle A effect) appearing a plurality of times during the display period of the alternative effect, the determination result in the alternative effect is displayed. When the effect time of the effect (battle A4) is set longer than the effect time of the other specific effects (battle A1 to battle A3), the “judgment result (for example, whether or not a big hit)” is set. Since a longer display period can be ensured, the effect of sufficiently attracting the interest of the player and increasing interest can be expected.

  In the second effect pattern of the alternative effect, a display pattern of a related effect that appears during a time when a specific effect appears is selected from a plurality of types (for example, a first example and a second example). And the degree of expectation to the big hit can be made different for each display pattern. In such a case, the degree of improvement in the player's sense of expectation can be made different, so that it is possible to expect an increase in the playability. Also, as described above, even if a specific effect is an effect with relatively low reliability in the initial setting, the reliability is increased when appearing in an alternative effect, so that the The effect that the fall of can be suppressed is produced.

  Note that, with reference to FIGS. 200 (A) and (B), an example of an effect has been described in which a long battle B ′ reach is selected as an alternative effect when a battle history regarding the battle A effect is recorded. However, the effect of another hit effect (specifically, Long Battle A Reach) of SP3 type having the same fluctuation time as the long battle B 'reach of the alternative effect is similar to the effect content excluding the related effect of the alternative effect. You may make it. In such a case, when the long A battle reach is compared with the alternative effect (long battle B 'reach), the point that the fluctuation time is 60 seconds and the point that the battle type effect screen by the character A is displayed are as follows. The difference is whether cut-in as a related effect occurs in common. As described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194, the degree of expectation to the big hit (or the high hit) is higher in the alternative effect. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish between the long battle A reach and the long battle B 'reach (alternative effect) until the cut-in (related effect) occurs, and further, when the cut-in occurs, the expected degree of the reach is not reached. Since a high long battle B 'reach can be estimated, expectations can be given to the progress of the production.

  In addition, the production of Long Battle A Reach can also display a production screen that is similar to the related production in Long Battle B 'Reach, making the production more similar to Long Battle B' Reach than the Long Battle A Reach described in the previous paragraph. You may. In such a case, it becomes more difficult to distinguish between the long battle A reach and the long battle B 'reach, and the player can enjoy the display result until the effect is completed.

  In the second effect pattern of the alternative effect, a short battle of 30 seconds including a specific effect (for example, in FIGS. 200 (A) and (B), a state before reach of 8 seconds and a battle A effect of 22 seconds in total) Insertion control for inserting an intermission effect (e.g., equivalent to a cut-in effect in FIGS. 200 (A) and (B)) when the effect appearance control for producing a 30-second effect including (e.g. When the insertion control is performed, the interruption control for interrupting the presentation appearance control may be performed. The interruption control suspends the execution of the interruption control after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds corresponding to cut-in 1 in the case of the interruption control after the battle A1 in FIG. 200 (A)), and the interruption timing By performing control such that the effect appearance control is restarted (an effect screen corresponding to battle A2 is displayed), an alternative effect can be caused to appear.

  In addition, when the variation time of 60 seconds is selected, an effect pattern may be provided on the peripheral control board 4010 side as effect data capable of displaying the alternative effect itself. By providing an effect pattern as an alternative effect from the beginning in this way, even if any of the first to fourth effect patterns is selected, an alternative effect can be made available.

[6-5-3. Third production pattern of alternative production]
Next, as a third effect pattern of the alternative effect, an alternative effect that suggests that a specific effect is started during the display period of the alternative effect and that causes the suggested specific effect to appear will be described.

  FIG. 201 is a time chart for describing an alternative effect using the third effect pattern. In the time chart of FIG. 201, a change in the effect screen with the lapse of time when an alternative effect (for example, long battle B ′ reach) is selected when the battle history is recorded with the battle A effect as a specific effect. It is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 201, first, in the initial eight seconds of the display period of the alternative effect, there is a period (pre-reach state) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the formation of the reach state. After that, a suggestion effect appears for 30 seconds (suggestion effect A). This suggestion effect A is an effect of a content indicating that the display of the “specific effect (battle A effect)” in which the battle history is recorded is started. It may be made to appear by selecting from a plurality of types of suggested effects with differences. In addition, the suggested effect A may be made to appear between the pre-reach states.

  A specific effect example of the suggestion effect A is shown below. For example, in the early stage of the suggestive effect, a notice-like effect display such as "something happens" is performed, the mid-stage notice is given that the "competitive effect" is performed, and the character A is in the form of "scheduled appearance of character A" at the end. This suggests that a battle effect (ie, battle A effect) is started.

  Also, for example, by performing an effect such that an enemy character appears in the early stage of the suggested effect A, a crisis situation of the enemy by the enemy character is displayed in the middle stage, and the character A is asked for help in the final stage, the character is provided after the suggested effect A. This indicates that the battle with the enemy character by A (that is, battle A effect) is started.

  Also, for example, in the early stage of the suggestion effect A, a screen in which the battle B effect by the character B is likely to start is displayed, and in the middle stage, the character A appears before the battle B effect starts and takes the place of the character B. At the end of the conversation, a screen indicating that the character B is changed to the character A is displayed at the end, thereby suggesting that the battle effect by the character A (that is, the battle A effect) is started after the suggestion effect A.

  Then, after such a suggestion effect (suggestion effect A) appears for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), a specific effect whose start is suggested by the suggestion effect appears for 22 seconds. (Battle A). In the battle A, a battle effect in which the character A battles the enemy character is displayed. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the character A finally shows the victory, and the game result of this game is a big hit Is recognized by the player. Further, when the result of the special lottery is not a big hit (losing), it finally indicates the defeat of the character A, and makes the player recognize that the game result of the main game is a loss.

  In the alternative production using the third production pattern, it is emphasized that in the latter half of the battle A production, a specific production (battle A production) corresponding to the record of the battle history appears. It is preferred to teach. Further, at the stage of the suggestive effect, an expected effect such as blinking the teaching area 1900a relating to the battle A is displayed so as to indicate that there is a possibility that a specific effect may be started without performing such emphasized instruction. It may be performed. In this way, the player is clearly taught the relationship between the record of the battle history and the appearance of a specific effect, so that the player can surely produce an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit). It is possible to visually recognize what is being issued.

  When the alternative effect according to the third effect pattern as described above is performed, at the time when the suggested effect appears, a specific effect (Battle A effect) despite the fact that the battle A effect is actually started. ) Can create an expected period that enhances the player's expectation of the appearing of). Then, when the battle A effect appears, the expectation for the big hit (especially the high hit) is high. Over time, the player's expectation and interest can be increased.

  In addition, when the suggested effect appears, the “start of a specific effect” may be determined with certainty or with a relatively high probability. In such a case, the player is required to display the suggested effect. In the early stages of alternative productions, you can be confident that a specific production with high reliability will appear, so you can expect a favorable game development (big hit or high hit) with a sense of security .

  Also, a so-called "false suggestion effect" may be included so that even if a suggestion effect appears, the "start of a specific effect" is not necessarily determined. It is possible to raise the expectation that a specific production with high reliability will appear than usual, and to enjoy the game development with a thrilling feeling until the specific production actually appears it can.

  Further, the suggestion effect in the third effect pattern of the alternative effect is not necessarily limited to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, but may be a mode that can indicate that a specific effect is started in the latter half of the alternative effect. For example, another effect method such as an operation effect of an accessory and a lighting effect of an LED lamp may be adopted, and these effect methods may be combined.

[6-5-4. Fourth production pattern of alternative production]
Next, as a fourth production pattern of the alternative production, a “different production” in which it is difficult to recall a specific production (which is less relevant to the specific production) in the first half of the display period of the substitution production, Will be described in the latter half of the display period.

  FIG. 202 is a time chart for describing an alternative effect using the fourth effect pattern. In the time chart of FIG. 202, a change in the effect screen with the lapse of time when an alternative effect (for example, long battle B ′ reach) is selected when the battle history is performed with the battle A effect as a specific effect. It is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 202, first, in the initial eight seconds of the display period of the substitute effect, there is a period (a state before reach) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the formation of the reach state. After that, an “unusual effect” appears for 30 seconds (for example, battle B as an unusual effect A). As described above, the “different production” is a production in which it is difficult to recall a specific production (here, a battle A production), and it is sufficient that the production has little relevance to the specific production. Here, it is assumed that a battle B effect in which the character B plays against the enemy character appears as the different effect A in the long battle B 'reach, but an effect in which other characters compete (for example, a battle C effect) or In addition, an effect (for example, story B described in FIG. 186 or the like) other than the battle style may be provided by a character or a story unrelated to the character A.

  In addition, in the different production, there is no need to attach or not to some kind of conclusion (for example, the character B loses or wins) as the production content, but in any case, the fluctuation of all the decorative patterns does not stop, and The decorative design fluctuates until the battle A effect that appears in the latter half of the effect ends.

  Then, after the different effect A appears for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), a specific effect appears (Battle A). In the battle A, a battle effect in which the character A battles the enemy character is displayed. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the character A finally shows the victory, and the game result of this game is a big hit Is recognized by the player. Further, when the result of the special lottery is not a big hit (losing), it finally indicates the defeat of the character A, and makes the player recognize that the game result of the main game is a loss.

  In the alternative production using the fourth production pattern, it is emphasized that a specific production (battle A production) corresponding to the record of the battle history is displayed in the latter half of the battle A production. It is preferred to teach. In this way, the player is clearly taught the relevance between the record of the battle history and the appearance of the specific effect, and the player can see that the specific effect has appeared in the second half of the alternative effect, It can be visually recognized that the degree of expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit) is high.

  Here, the connection in the production of the different production and the subsequent specific production will be described in detail with a specific example. For example, when the battle B effect appears as the different effect A, an effect is displayed in which the character B, which is an ally character, competes with the character Z, which is an enemy character. Then, as an example of the different effect A, a screen in which the character B is defeated by the character Z in the battle B effect is displayed, and it is made to feel that this game has been lost from the player's viewpoint. Thereafter, the character A appears after a predetermined time has elapsed, and a screen is displayed in which the character A challenges the character Z for a rematch. According to such an alternative effect, after the different effect A is performed in the first half of the alternative effect, a specific effect (battle A effect) appears in the second half of the alternative effect, so that the character B is once defeated. After that, a humiliation battle by the character A is started, and if the character A wins in the battle A production, the big hit is indicated to the player, so that the player is once conscious of the loss of the game and then goes to the big hit. Expectations can be restored, and interest can be expected to increase sharply.

  Further, as another example of the different production, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the different production A is used as a part of the production for changing the decorative pattern aligned with the image display area 1900d according to the advantage degree of the big hit. It may be. That is, a screen is displayed in which the character B wins the character Z in the first half of the different effect A (battle B effect), and at this time, the decorative pattern indicating the large hit (low hit) with a relatively low degree of advantage is temporarily displayed. Display (in rocking state). Then, at the end of the different production A, the character A is suddenly made to appear and the promotion of the jackpot is started, so that a specific production (battle A production) appears as the promotion production. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit (high hit) having a relatively high degree of advantage, the character A is won in the battle A effect, and the arrangement of the decorative patterns is changed to the high hit. . If the result of the special lottery is not a big hit (high hit) with a relatively high degree of advantage, a display is made such that the character A cannot win (for example, a draw) in the battle A effect, and the manner in which the decorative patterns are aligned is changed. What should be done is not. According to such an alternative production, after giving the player the pleasure that the big hit is indicated by the different production, the specific production as the promotion production is suddenly made to appear, so that the big hit has a relatively low degree of advantage. The player is provided with an opportunity to dispel a player's remorse for being a big hit (low hit), and can be given great joy to the player when converted into a big hit having a great advantage. The effect of giving multi-stage satisfaction to the person is achieved.

  As described above, in the alternative production using the fourth production pattern, a specific production is presented after the appearance of a different production that makes it difficult to recall the specific production, which can make the player surprise and expect. Thus, it is possible to expect an effect of increasing the interest of the player for various effects that can appear in the pachinko machine 1.

  More specifically, when an alternative effect according to the fourth effect pattern is performed, a different effect irrelevant to the specific effect is performed in the first half of the alternative effect, so that the player is conscious of the specific effect at this stage. Without having to play the game, you can enjoy the development of games with different productions. Then, when a specific effect is suddenly displayed, it is possible to provide surprised playability, and when the specific effect is displayed, the degree of expectation to a big hit (particularly, a high hit) can be provided. Can be raised, which can enhance the interest.

  In addition, as described above, in the alternative effect using the fourth effect pattern, as long as the fluctuation time for displaying the specific effect can be secured, the specific effect appears after the different effect appears. The timing can be arbitrarily changed. In the pachinko machine 1 in which such an alternative effect can be executed, it is not known from the player's point of view at what timing a specific effect (battle A effect) appears. For example, when the battle B reach of the SP2 type or the long battle B reach of the SP3 type is selected, the battle effect by the character B is started, but the battle effect is thereafter performed without the battle A effect appearing. finish. However, when the long battle B 'reach is selected, even if the character B cannot win by the battle B production, the battle A production by the character A appears, and the expectation for the big hit again is obtained. Since the player can be embraced, the player can enjoy the development of the production while always having an expectation for a specific production that may occur.

  In addition, in the alternative production of the fourth production pattern, as described above, the different production may be a production that is not closely related to the specific production. A relationship may be consciously formed in which there is a difference in the reliability of each jackpot with respect to the hit effect recalled from a different effect.

  For example, when a specific effect is a battle A effect, and a different effect is a battle B effect, referring to each of the distribution tables (1A, 1B) described above and the like, a specific effect is recalled from the battle A effect, which is a specific effect. The effect (for example, SP2 type) is battle A reach, and the hit effect (for example, SP2 type) recalled from the battle B effect of the different effect A is battle B reach. Comparing the reliability of the jackpot in the initial stage (battle history P) of each of these hit productions, the battle B reach has a higher reliability than the battle A reach (see FIGS. 187 and 189). When the B effect is viewed as a single effect, the degree of expectation for a big hit (or a high hit) is higher when the battle B effect is presented than when the battle A effect is presented. In addition, even when comparing the SP3 type of hit performances, the long battle B reach recalled from the battle B performance has higher reliability than the long battle A reach recalled from the battle A performance ([6-4] -1], “6-4-2”), the battle B effect has a higher expectation of the big hit than the battle A effect. As described above, in the alternative effect of the fourth effect pattern in which the different effect A (Battle B effect) is performed in a combination having a higher reliability than the specific effect (Battle A effect), the difference of the high reliability is performed in the first half. With the effect A appearing, it is possible to increase a player's expectation of a big hit. Then, if it is impossible to reach the jackpot in the different production A (defeat in the battle B production), the player will be discouraged once, but after that, a specific production (battle A production) will appear, It is possible to make the player expect the big hit again. In other words, even if a high-reliability production that appeared in the first half of the alternative production does not show a big hit, it can be expected to be a big success again by the subsequent development (specific production appears). A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Also, for example, when a specific effect is a battle A effect, an effect with a lower reliability than the battle A effect may be set as a different effect A to perform an alternative effect using the fourth effect pattern. Strictly speaking, “production with lower reliability than the battle A production” is a production that can recall a hit production with lower reliability than that of the battle production recalled by the battle A production. At this time, even if a low-reliability alternate production appears in the first half of the alternative production, it may not be possible for the player to have a high expectation for the jackpot, but then, in the second half of the alternative production, The appearance of a specific effect (Battle A effect) can drastically increase the player's expectation of a big hit. In other words, even if an effect with a relatively low reliability appears in the first half of the alternative effect, the effect becomes highly reliable as long as a specific effect (Battle A effect) appears thereafter. , The feeling of expectation for a big hit or a high hit can be given, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when a specific production based on the record of the battle history appears after a different production, the expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit) is increased, so that the specific production suddenly appears. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect that enhances not only the pleasure in the effect but also the expectation in the actual profit (acquisition of the privilege).

  Also, as described above in the specific example of the different production, when the battle A production by the character A appears after the character B is defeated in the battle B production, the recreation pattern is produced, so that one game is performed. Since it is possible to make the player feel that the winning effect is performed a plurality of times in the effect (there is a plurality of winning opportunities), it is expected that the interest of the player is enhanced. Furthermore, if a different production that leads to such a resurrection pattern is made to appear more than once in the first half period of a single alternative production, it is possible to realize a continuous production that further increases the chances of hitting. Can be more and more interesting.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the specific effect (Battle A effect) based on the record of the battle history is performed by performing the alternative effects according to the first to fourth effect patterns. Even if a display time longer than the display time (the battle A effect is 22 seconds, and the battle A reach as a whole is 30 seconds) is selected (in this case, an alternative effect of 60 seconds), it can be made to appear. Generally, as the display time is longer, the player's expectation that the game result will be a big hit or a high hit tends to increase, so a specific effect is displayed with a display time longer than the original display time By doing so, an effect of making the player feel the importance and high reliability of the game can be expected.

  Further, as described in [6-4-1] to [6-4-2], the ratio of executing the substitute effect when a big hit (or a high hit) occurs while the record of the battle history is being recorded is as follows. , Higher than when no history is recorded. Therefore, when the specific performance is displayed while the history of the battle for the specific performance (Battle A performance) is being stored and taught, the player increases the degree of expectation for the big hit (or high hit). However, such a specific effect can be expressed by an alternative effect even if it is a hit effect with a different fluctuation time from the original fluctuation time (Battle A reach of 30 seconds) corresponding to the battle A effect. Therefore, it can be expected that a specific effect will appear irrespective of the fluctuation time of the special fluctuation pattern, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a plurality of types of hit effects.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the reliability of a specific effect (reliability in a drop effect in which a specific effect appears) is improved by the transition of the history of the battle, the specific effect is relatively low in the initial setting. Even if the degree of expectation to the jackpot is low and the degree of reliability is low, after the history of the battle has been recorded, it is possible to expect a high degree of expectation for a specific direction. As a result, an effect of suppressing a decrease in interest of the player due to the appearance of the low-reliability effect as seen in the conventional gaming machine is exerted.

[6-6. Supplement on decision of production pattern]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when using the distribution tables described in [6-1] to [6-4], it is not always necessary to change the distribution in the low hit pattern. . However, when the distribution is changed in the low hit pattern, the change is made so as not to exceed the increase amount of the distribution in the high hit pattern. Specifically, in the case of the distribution tables 1A and 1B, the change is made so as not to exceed a rise amount of the specific hit effect (Battle A reach) in the high hit pattern. By doing so, even if the distribution for the low hit pattern is changed, by increasing the amount of distribution in the high hit pattern, a specific hit effect will appear in the game after the record of the battle history is performed When this is done, the degree of expectation for a high hit can be increased. Further, in the case of the distribution tables 2A and 2B, the change is made so as not to exceed an increase amount of the distribution of the high hit pattern in the hit effect (long battle B 'reach, long battle C' reach) in which the distribution is increased. It shall be. In this way, even if the distribution for the low hit pattern is changed, by increasing the distribution amount in the high hit pattern, in the game after the record of the battle history is performed, a specific hit effect (Battle A reach) (For example, a variation pattern in which a battle A reach can be selected in a variation time of 30 seconds) (for example, a variation pattern in which a long battle B can be selected in a variation time of 60 seconds) is selected. Even if it is performed, the specific effect (Battle A reach) can be caused by the appearance of the long battle B 'reach, and the degree of expectation for a high hit can be increased.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the “Battle A reach (strictly Battle A effect)” that can be selected when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds has been described as a specific effect (a specific hit effect). It may be a specific effect. Further, the target of a specific effect is not limited to one reach effect, and a plurality of relevant reach effects may be set as targets of the specific effect. Specifically, for example, by setting the reach effect relating to the character A to a specific effect, not only the battle A reach that can be selected when the change pattern has a change time of 30 seconds, but also when the change pattern has a change time of 60 seconds. The long battle A reach that can be selected can also be included in the “specific production” of the same category. If a battle history is recorded for such a “specific effect”, not only when Battle A Reach appears in the off mode, but also when Long Battle A Reach appears in the off mode. Also, his history is recorded. As a result, since the result of the battle history that "the reach for character A appeared in an out-of-position mode" is recorded collectively, a big hit cannot be obtained even though a plurality of hit effects for character A appeared. In such a case, the power of the character A can be increased, and the degree of expectation for a big hit (and a high hit) when such a hit effect appears next can be increased.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the probability change jackpot is set to “high hit” having a high degree of advantage, and the normal jackpot is set to “low hit” having a low degree of advantage. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, “high hit” is used. The category of "low hit" is not particularly limited. For example, the high hit and the low hit may be classified based on other conditions related to the game state after the hit game (whether or not the time-saving game is provided, the number of time-saving games provided, and the like). When such a division is made with respect to "high hit" and "low hit", an advantage (e.g., payout) expected value that the player can obtain through a series of advantageous states controlled based on the big hit is advantageous. It can be understood that the degree of the degree is classified.

  Further, as another example of the classification of “high hit” and “low hit”, the classification may be based on a difference in opening / closing control of the special winning opening 2103 in the big hit game. Specifically, for example, the classification can be made based on the number of rounds in the jackpot game (16R jackpot or jackpot of less than 16R). Further, for example, a big hit can be classified into a big hit with a relatively long opening time of the special winning opening 2103 in each round during the big hit and a relatively short big hit. Further, for example, the classification can be made based on a difference in the number of rounds (substantial round number) in which the opening control for easily entering the game medium during the big hit is performed. In the case of performing such a classification with respect to “high hit” and “low hit”, the degree of advantage is classified based on the number of game balls that can be obtained by the big hit (expected ball acquisition value). It can be understood that it is.

  Then, "high hit" and "low hit" may be classified by combining the above-described classification criteria. As an example, if the criteria for “probably a big hit” and “the expected expected value of a payout by the big hit exceeds a predetermined amount” are the criteria for classifying the “high hit”, a so-called “high hit” Big hits, such as "hidden hits", for which it is not expected to obtain a substantial payout, can be excluded from the high hits. That is, taking the example of the jackpot type shown in FIG. 173 (C) as an example, only “specific 4R probable jackpot”, “specific 4R probable jackpot”, and “specific 16R probable jackpot” are “high hits”. It is also possible to classify “specific 1R latent probability big hit” or “specific 3R sudden probability big hit” together with “non-specific 4R normal big hit” into “low hit”. In such a case, if it is possible to increase the expectation of the big hit to the "high hit" by the appearance of the "specific effect" while the history of the battle is being recorded, the actual hitting in the probable big hit , It is possible to improve the degree of expectation of the jackpot, which is the most advantageous in that the player can obtain the game, so that the player's sense of expectation can be further increased.

  Further, the classification based on the difference in the degree of advantage does not need to be two types of high and low, and three or more types may be performed. Further, “high hit” and “low hit” may be determined according to the type of hit. By doing so, an effect can be expected to shorten the development period and the development cost. Specifically, for example, in a certain model, it is assumed that the types A and B, which are low hits, are classified into “low hits”, and the type C, which is high hits, are classified into “high hits”. . Here, in developing another model, if the type A is to be changed to a higher hit, the type A may be changed to the “high hit” category according to the change. Changes are possible. In other words, when "high hit" and "low hit" are determined by the type of hit, there is no need to change the setting for each hit included in each type, and it is expected that the development burden will be reduced. it can.

  Further, it is preferable that such a classification of “high hit” and “low hit” is set by the peripheral control board 4010 (may be other than the main control board 4100). In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the distribution of the effect pattern including the hit effect can be changed in a different manner between “high hit” and “low hit”. Since the control is performed by the board 4010 (particularly, the peripheral control MPU 4140a), when the “high hit” and “low hit” are set on the same peripheral control board 4010, the processing load on the main control board 4100 side is reduced. In addition to this, it is possible to reduce the amount of communication between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010, and it is expected that the processing efficiency in the peripheral control board 4010 is improved.

  As described above, “high hit” and “low hit” are tentative names used for easy explanation, and it is not necessary to use such terms in the internal design. May be managed so that a classification corresponding to “high hit” or “low hit” is made. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the characteristic distribution of the hit effect is set by consciously classifying the degree of advantage based on various criteria, thereby achieving different characteristics for each gaming machine. It is possible to realize a change in the degree of expectation for the appearance of a specific hit production while reflecting the specifications and specifications.

[6-7. Effects related to this production
As described mainly in [6-1] to [6-3], in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an effect pattern including a specific hit effect (specific effect) appears in an outlier mode. The result of this game is stored (record of the history of the game), and thereafter, the game effect is performed while teaching the record of the history of the game. , It is possible to make it easier to select an effect pattern including the specific winning effect when a big hit is won in a subsequent game. Therefore, even if the specific hit production does not become a big hit, the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is increased when the specific hit production appears next time in a subsequent game, so that the player's A decrease in willingness to play can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described in [6-1-1] to [6-1-3], in a state where the history of a specific hit effect is recorded, a specific hit When the effect is displayed, the degree of expectation for a high-gain advantageous game (that is, a high hit) among the advantageous games (low hit and high hit) having different degrees of advantage is increased. More specifically, the battle A reach is set as a specific hit production, and the battle history is recorded and taught based on the appearance of the battle A reach in an off state, and the distribution destination of the hit production is changed (battle history). (For example, see the distribution table 1A in FIG. 186) (see, for example, the distribution table 1A in FIG. 186), so that the number of battle A reach in the high hit pattern in subsequent games increases. Degree (reliability) is increased.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the hit effect is displayed using the distribution table 1A and the distribution table 1B in FIG. 186, so that the specific hit effect is transferred after the transition of the battle history related to the specific hit effect. Is displayed, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for a highly advantageous game (high hit). Then, even if the specific hitting effect is an effect in which the expectation for the big hit (or the high hit) is not relatively high in the initial state, the specific history is recorded and the teaching is performed. When the hit effect is presented, the degree of expectation for a high hit can be increased, so that it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced in the appearance of the particular hit effect.

  In addition, by providing the player with the instruction based on the record of the loss due to the specific hit production (record of battle history), when the specific hit production appears again, a big hit (especially a high hit) is made. It is possible for the player to easily recognize that the hit effect with high expectation is being performed, and it is easier to enhance the interest of the player. Furthermore, such teachings indicate that there is a hit effect that has a high degree of reliability when presented, so that the player wants the appearance of a specific hit effect to be stronger than usual. Can be expected, and new fun in the game can be provided.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of a specific hit effect is changed according to the game situation by changing the distribution of the hit effect of the hit pattern (particularly the high hit pattern) as described above. Therefore, even if the reliability of “specific hit production” is relatively low at the time of initial setting and the reach performance is low reliability, the expectation when the specific hit production is presented again is higher than before. And the effect of increasing the expectation of the player can be expected. In the first place, with conventional gaming machines, low-reliability reach production is a hit production that has a relatively high chance of occurring than other term-reliability reach productions. Although there was a risk that the player's willingness to play would be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment appears as a specific hit effect despite the low reliability reach effect. When this is done, it is not a low reliability, but a hit effect with increased reliability. Therefore, it is possible not only to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play as described above, but also to expect a big hit (particularly a high hit). It has a special effect of creating a feeling.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described mainly in [6-4-1], the record and teaching of the battle history are performed based on the fact that the “specific effect” appears in the out-of-way mode. Is performed, and the transition of the battle history is performed with respect to the distribution of the winning effect to be executed, so that a variation pattern different from a predetermined variation pattern that can cause the “specific effect” to appear is selected. Can also produce a “specific effect”.

  To explain with a specific example, if the battle A reach is “specific effect”, the “predetermined fluctuation pattern that can cause“ specific effect ”to appear” has a fluctuation time of 30 seconds during which battle A reach can appear. The special symbol variation pattern, and the “variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern” is, for example, a special symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds. At this time, the battle history is recorded and taught based on the appearance of the battle A reach in an out-of-match mode, and the battle history of the selection destination is changed to “battle history Q” or “battle history R” in the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193. By performing the change (transition of the battle history), the “alternative effect” related to the battle A reach at the time of the big hit, that is, the distribution amount to the long battle B ′ reach and the long battle C ′ reach at the time of the big hit is increased. Then, if a special lottery result is obtained by a special lottery after such a transition of the battle history is performed and a special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected, the amount of distribution is increased, "alternative effect". Is increased, and the “alternative effect” appears, so that a battle A-reach effect (ie, “specific effect”) can appear during the effect.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the transition of the battle history related to the specific effect, at the time of the big hit in which the special symbol change pattern with the change time of 60 seconds is selected, the alternative effect is currently displayed using the distribution table 2A of FIG. Since the specific performance is easily performed and the specific performance is easily displayed, when a specific performance is performed while the history of the battle related to the specific performance is stored, the player's expectation of the big hit is increased. be able to. Such an effect can be applied even if the specific effect is a low-reliability effect in which the expectation of the jackpot is relatively high in the initial setting, so that such a low-reliability effect appears. It is possible to solve the conventional problem in which the interest of the player may be reduced when the game is performed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the distribution table 2A in FIG. 193 is used, in each of the transitioning battle histories (battle histories Q, R), an alternative effect in the big hit pattern (low hit pattern and high hit pattern) is obtained. Although the distribution number is increased, the distribution number of the substitute effect in the deviation pattern is set to a degree smaller than the distribution number of the big hit pattern. By preparing the distribution in such an off-pattern, even if a specific effect (effect of Battle A Reach) appears in the alternative effect, there is a possibility that the effect will not be connected to the jackpot with a low probability. In one way, it can be expected that the player will not get bored until the final stop mode is determined. It should be noted that the assignment of the alternative effect in such a loss pattern is not always necessary. By not dare to perform the assignment, a specific effect appears in the alternative effect when the history of the battle is remembered and taught. It may be a special hit production where the big hit is decided at the time of the execution.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described mainly in [6-4-2], the record and teaching of the battle history are performed based on the fact that the “specific effect” appears in an out-of-order mode. Is performed, and the transition of the battle history is performed with respect to the distribution of the winning effect to be performed, so that a variation pattern different from a predetermined variation pattern that can cause the “specific effect” to appear is selected. Can also produce a “specific effect”.

  To explain with a specific example, if the battle A reach is “specific effect”, the “predetermined fluctuation pattern that can cause“ specific effect ”to appear” has a fluctuation time of 30 seconds during which battle A reach can appear. The special symbol variation pattern, and the “variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern” is, for example, a special symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds. At this time, the battle history is recorded and taught based on the appearance of the battle A reach in an out-of-play mode, and the battle history of the selection destination is changed to “battle history Q” or “battle history R” in the distribution table 2B of FIG. By performing the change (transition of the battle history), the “alternative effect” related to the battle A reach at the time of the high hit, that is, the distribution amount to the long battle B ′ reach and the long battle C ′ the reach at the time of the high hit is increased. If the result of the advantageous game (high hit) having a high degree of advantage is obtained by the special lottery after such a transition of the battle history, and the special symbol variation pattern with the variation time of 60 seconds is selected, the swing is performed. Since the ratio of the “alternative effect” with the increased amount is increased, by causing the “alternative effect” to appear, the effect of Battle A Reach (ie, “specific effect”) is performed during the effect. You can make it appear.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the transition of the battle history related to the specific effect, when the special symbol change pattern with the change time of 60 seconds is selected and the high hit is selected, the substitute effect is performed using the distribution table 2B of FIG. Since the particular performance is easily displayed and the specific performance is likely to appear, when the specific performance appears and the game shifts to the jackpot game while the history of the battle for the specific performance is stored, the big hit is not performed. Expectations for a high hit can be increased. In other words, when a specific effect appears while the history of the battle is being stored, the player can have a sense of expectation for a high hit. Such an effect can be applied even if the specific effect is a low-reliability effect in which the expectation of the jackpot is relatively high in the initial setting, so that such a low-reliability effect appears. It is possible to solve the conventional problem in which the interest of the player may be reduced when the game is performed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the distribution table 2B in FIG. 194 is used, in each of the transitional battle histories (battle histories Q and R), it is lower than the distribution number of the substitute effect in the high hit pattern. Although the allocation numbers of the alternative effects in the hit pattern and the loss pattern are set, the allocation of the alternative effects in the low hit pattern and the loss pattern are not necessarily set. For example, in the case where the distribution of the substitute effect in the outlier pattern is not performed, it is determined that a big hit is obtained at the time when the specific effect appears in the substitute effect when the history of the battle is stored and taught, Furthermore, the special hit has a high probability of being a high hit, and a special effect can be realized. In addition, when the distribution of the alternative effect in the low hit pattern is not performed, the possibility of the low hit is eliminated when the specific effect appears in the alternative effect when the history and the history are stored and taught. If it hits, it will be a big hit. Furthermore, if the alternate effect is not distributed for either the missed pattern or the low hit pattern, if the specific effect appears in the alternative effect while the history of the battle is stored and taught, the high hit is determined. Can achieve a special effect that is determined.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the record of the battle history is recorded in any of the distribution table 1A in FIG. 186, the distribution table 1B in FIG. 188, the distribution table 2A in FIG. 193, and the distribution table 2B in FIG. The transition of the battle history is performed based on the following. After such a transition of the battle history is performed, the expectation for the big hit or the high hit at the time when the specific effect (the hit effect) appears is increased, and the battle history is changed. The more the transition, the higher the expectation. Therefore, for example, assuming that Battle A Reach is a specific production, the more the Battle A Reach appears in a distorted manner, the more unpleasant the player feels about the lack of a big hit, while the history of battle is recorded and the history of battle is recorded. Can be expected to progress, and the expectation that the battle A reach will appear in subsequent games will be increased. Then, when a big hit is obtained by the appearance of the battle A reach (or the appearance of the battle A reach production by the alternative production), the player feels the sense of accomplishment that can wipe out the history of the previous battle A reach. Further, when the distribution tables 1A, 1B, 2B are used, such a big hit is a high hit, and the expectation that the hit is high is high, so that a greater sense of achievement can be given to the player. it can.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the “alternative effect” that can be executed when the record of the battle history related to the specific effect is performed is a predetermined effect that can cause the specific effect to appear. Even if a change pattern different from the change pattern is selected, a specific effect based on the record of the battle history can be made to appear alternatively, and such an "alternate effect" is recorded in the record of the battle history. Accordingly, each time the history of the game shifts, the degree of expectation of a big hit (or a high hit) is increased. According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a specific effect (for example, battle A effect) based on the record of the battle history is changed to the original display time (the battle A effect is 22 seconds. The entire battle A reach is 30 seconds). ) Can be made to appear by an alternative effect even if a display time longer than (e.g., 60 seconds) is selected. In general, as the display time is longer, the player's expectation that the game result will be a big hit (or a high hit) tends to be increased, so that the specific display time is longer than the original display time. By making the effect appear, an effect of making the player feel the importance and high reliability of the game can be expected.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the special effects described in [6-5-1] to [6-5-4] are performed according to each effect pattern (first to fourth effect patterns) of the alternative effect. It has a special effect.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment described above as the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a) is configured so that the game medium fired toward the game area passes through the predetermined area. Is an example of lottery means for selecting any one of a plurality of types of lottery results including at least one of the advantage games having different degrees of advantage and loss. The predetermined area corresponds to, for example, the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an example of an effect display unit capable of displaying an effect based on a lottery result by the lottery unit. Further, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a and the peripheral control RAM 4140e) provides a specific effect when a lottery result of the advantageous game is not obtained despite the lottery performed by the lottery means. This is an example of an effect storage means capable of storing that the specific effect has appeared on the basis of the appearance on the effect display means. As a specific processing example, a battle A reach of SP2 type When the (specific effect) is executed in the out-of-order mode, this corresponds to the peripheral control MPU 4140a recording the history of the battle in the peripheral control RAM 4140e. The peripheral control board 4010 (mainly, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, and the VDP 4150c) and the liquid crystal display device 1900 are examples of information teaching means for teaching information on the specific effect stored in the effect storage means. The information relating to the specific effect corresponds to, for example, “image data used for teaching the history of battle” stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b or the character ROM 4150d in the liquid crystal control unit 4150. A specific teaching example is a display in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c shown in FIG.

  Further, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly, the peripheral control MPU 4140a) selects the variable time during which the special effect longer than the specific effect can appear when the memory by the effect storage unit is being performed. Is also an example of special effect control means that can cause the special effect to appear in a mode that includes the specific effect, and in the first half of the display period of the special effect, a different effect that makes it difficult to recall the specific effect. Is an example of a different effect execution unit that causes the effect display unit to appear, and a specific effect execution unit that causes the effect display unit to cause the specific effect to appear in the second half of the display period of the special effect. Here, the “special effect” corresponds to an alternative effect according to the fourth effect pattern, and the effect produced by the effect directing means corresponds to, for example, battle B (effect A) in FIG. 202. The specific effect appearing by the specific effect executing means corresponds to the battle A in FIG. In addition, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a) can display the specific effect by the special effect control means, so that the specific effect is stored when the effect is stored by the effect storage means. This is an example of a high privilege expectation increasing means that can increase the expectation that the shifted advantageous game is the advantageous game having the high degree of advantage when an effect is displayed and the game shifts to the advantageous game. Specifically, when the battle history for the Battle A production is being recorded, a winning pattern is won with a variation pattern of a variation time of 60 seconds instead of a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds that can make the battle A reach appear. In this case, a special effect, that is, “alternative effect (long battle B 'reach or long battle C' reach)” is easily selected by the distribution based on the battle history Q and the battle history R in the distribution table 2B. When a battle A effect (specific effect) appears and the game shifts to a jackpot game while the battle history related to the battle A effect is being recorded, this is equivalent to a high expectation that the jackpot is a high hit. I do.

[7. Continuous destruction effect using an induction decorative member (object detection sensor)]
In the present embodiment, an image effect based on the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a composite effect using the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) in the table unit 2000. As a result, when the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 detect the player's operation on the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213, a continuous defeat effect in which the enemy character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be defeated is provided. Running. In this continuous defeat effect, as will be described in detail later, as the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, after the display of the decoration pattern is started to be changed, three images corresponding to each of the three guide decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are displayed. A human enemy character appears, and an instruction is given as to which order should the three enemy characters be defeated (in which order should the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 be operated). After the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are operated in the designated order (the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 are detected in the designated order), the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated. Is instructed to be operated once by the player. Then, when the enemy character is defeated by operating the pressing operation unit 405, the pseudo continuous change is continued (all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the off symbol that does not become the reach mode in the decorative symbol variation display). After that, the control for starting the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is performed again), and in the case where the enemy character remains, an effect of forming the reach mode and developing the reach effect without continuing the pseudo continuous variation is executed. doing.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the middle object detection sensor 2116 and the middle guiding decoration member 2117 are both provided in the first unit 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the middle guiding decoration member 2117 is provided in the middle. It is arranged to be adjacent to the lower side of the object detection sensor 2116. The medium object detection sensor 2116 is an optical sensor having a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and is provided with a player through a transparent glass unit 590 that enables a player to visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. Can detect whether the hand has touched the middle guiding decorative member 2117.

  In addition, the middle guiding decorative member 2117 is arranged below the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the first starting port 2101 and is located at a lower peripheral portion (out port 1115) of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by a player. (Except for the position near the inner periphery of the game area 1100). In addition, the middle guiding decorative member 2117 is disposed substantially at the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 1100, and is disposed below the right guiding decorative member 2144 and the left guiding decorative member 2213, and the player is seated. In order to touch the right guiding decorative member 2144 with the left hand while rotating the handle device 500 with the right hand in this state, it is not necessary to lift the arms more than the right guiding decorative member 2144 and the left guiding decorative member 2213, and the three guiding decorative members 2117 are provided. , 2144 and 2213, the operation is easy. In addition, the middle guiding decorative member 2117 is directed downward in a circular shape on the front surface in correspondence with being positioned relatively lower as viewed from the player among the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213. Decorated with arrows.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the right object detection sensor 2143 and the right guiding decorative member 2144 are both provided on the fourth unit 2140 of the attacker unit 2100 attached to the front of the game panel 1150, and the right guiding decorative member 2144 is provided. Is disposed adjacent to the right side of the right object detection sensor 2143. Further, the right object detection sensor 2143 is an optical sensor having a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and is provided through a transparent glass unit 590 that enables the player to visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. Can be detected whether or not the hand touches the right guiding decorative member 2144.

  The right guiding decorative member 2144 is disposed on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and has a slightly lower right peripheral portion of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the game area 1100) which can be visually recognized by a player. (A position close to). The right guiding decorative member 2144 is disposed on the right side in the horizontal direction of the game area 1100, and touches the right guiding decorative member 2144 with the left hand while rotating the handle device 500 with the right hand while the player is sitting. Since the distance from the left hand is farther than the middle guide decoration member 2117 and the left guide decoration member 2213, it is difficult to operate the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213. Note that the right guiding decorative member 2144 corresponds to the right guiding decoration member 2117, 2144, and 2213, which corresponds to the right guiding decoration member 2144. Decorated with arrows.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the left object detection sensor 2212 and the left guiding decorative member 2213 are both provided on the front side unit 2200 attached to the front of the game panel 1150, and the left guiding decorative member 2213 detects the left object. The sensor 2212 is disposed adjacent to the left side. Further, the left object detection sensor 2212 is an optical sensor having a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and is provided with a player through a transparent glass unit 590 that enables the player to visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. Can detect whether the hand has touched the left guiding decorative member 2213.

  In addition, the left guiding decoration member 2213 is arranged on the lower left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and is a slightly lower left peripheral portion of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the game area 1100) which can be visually recognized by the player. (Adjacent position). Further, the left guiding decorative member 2213 is disposed on the left side in the horizontal direction of the game area 1100, and is disposed at the same height as the right guiding decorative member 2144, but the handle device 500 is placed in a state where the player is seated. In order to touch the left guiding decorative member 2213 with the left hand while rotating with the right hand, since the distance from the left hand is shorter than the right guiding decorative member 2144, the operation is performed within the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213. It's easier. Since the left guiding decorative member 2213 is disposed relatively to the left as viewed from the player among the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144 and 2213, a left-pointing arrow is shown in a circle on the front surface. Decorated arrangement is given.

  In this example, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) are all disposed below the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the object detection sensor is arranged around the liquid crystal display device (for example, in the center accessory) as in the related art, when the player operates to detect the object detection sensor, the player's own hand is It is located on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, which hinders visual recognition of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and there is a possibility that the effect contents may not be sufficiently understood. However, since the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are all disposed below the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player can detect any one of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212. Does not have its own hand on the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and does not hinder the user from visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, even if the player operates so as to detect any of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, it is not necessary to lift the arm to the height of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or higher, and the three guide decoration members 2117, Each of operations 2144 and 2213 is easy to perform.

  In addition, a transparent glass unit 590 is provided on the front surface of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can detect any one of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212. In some cases, the user touched the surface of the glass unit 590 to make the surface dirty. At this time, if the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is soiled, it will be difficult to visually recognize the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, but the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 Even if the player operates to detect any of them, it only stains the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144 and 2213, and visually recognizes the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. There is no problem.

  Further, in the present example, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) are all located at the periphery (game area) of the game area 1100 which can be visually recognized by the player. 1100). That is, the three guiding decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) allow the game ball to roll in the game area 1100 which can be visually recognized by the player. Even if the player operates so as to detect any of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212, the player's own hand is placed on the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Not only is it not located, but also located in the front of the rolling area, especially the area around the game start whether or not the game ball wins the first starting port 2101, the game ball wins the first starting port 2101. It does not prevent visual recognition of whether or not. Further, if the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the rolling area is soiled, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether or not a game ball wins at the first starting port 2101. However, the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, Even if the player operates to detect any one of 2212, it only stains the surface of the glass unit 590 in front of the guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213, and the game ball wins the first starting port 2101. There is no trouble in visually confirming whether or not.

  Further, in this example, the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 are arranged so as to be adjacent to the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, respectively, and the effect using the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 is executed. At this time, the player does not touch the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212, but guides the player to touch the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 (for example, the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and the like). 2213), an effect of emitting and decorating only the designated guiding decorative member. For this reason, even if the player operates to detect any of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212, it only stains the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213. The surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is not stained. That is, if the surface of the glass unit 590 in front of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is soiled, it becomes difficult to detect the hand of the player who has touched the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213, but the object detection sensor 2116 , 2143, 2212, the hand of the player touching the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 can be detected without fail.

  Further, in this example, during the control in the non-time saving state, a game is performed in which a game ball is hit on the left side of the center role object 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2101, but can be visually recognized from the player. The three guiding decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 316) are located on the side of the rolling region where the game ball can roll from the left side of the center role item 2500 in the main gaming area 1100. 2143, 2212), a middle guiding decorative member 2117 and a left guiding decorative member 2213 (a middle object detecting sensor 2116 and a left object detecting sensor 2212) are arranged. On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, a game is performed in which a game ball is driven into the right side of the center role object 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2102, but the game area 1100 in which the player can visually recognize the game ball is played. Of the three guiding decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212), a rolling area where the game ball can roll from the right side of the center role 2500 is located. Among them, a right guide decoration member 2144 (right object detection sensor 2143) is arranged. As described above, as the rolling area, only one of the left and right sides of the center role 2500 is used depending on the gaming state, and the gaming area 1100 may give a narrow impression. When an effect using 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) is executed, both left and right sides of the center role 2500, that is, the entire game area 1100 are used. It can give an impression of what is going on.

  Further, in this example, the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are arranged at the periphery of the game area 1100 (a position close to the inner circumference of the game area 1100) which can be visually recognized by the player. During the period in which the effect using the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 (the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212) is not performed, the guidance decoration member 2117 serves as a decoration portion of the game area 1100 (for example, a light emission decoration). . As described above, since the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 also serve as a decoration portion of the game area 1100, an area for arranging the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 is a decoration portion. There is no need to provide a separate area, and a sufficient rolling area in which the game balls can roll can be ensured while the area of the game area 1100 is limited.

  In this example, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212) are all lower than the liquid crystal display device 1900 and are located at the periphery (game area) of the game area 1100. (A position close to the inner periphery of the area 1100), but is displayed on at least the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the player operates to detect any of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212. The position may be any position that does not prevent the effect image to be viewed from being visually recognized. In addition, not only the liquid crystal display device 1900 but also a start port for determining whether or not a game ball wins (a region around the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102, and other information display related to effects (for the player) An area for displaying information that can be useful information (for example, a front right middle production unit 2600, a front right outside production unit 2700, a back upper production unit 3300, a lower back production unit 3500, etc., provided at the periphery of the game area) In addition, when a player operates to detect any one of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 even for a simple decoration area (such as a lamp), the player does not visually recognize the decoration area. It is desirable that the position be such that it does not hinder the operation.

  Next, a specific effect example of the continuous defeat effect using the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present effect example, in the first change pattern setting process (step S82) or the second change pattern setting process processed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, “pseudo continuous change” is performed before the reach effect is executed. A variation pattern set to execute a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times temporary display of a lost symbol that does not become the reach mode) is determined (a variation pattern that does not execute the pseudo continuous variation may be used). Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, in the effect control processing (step S602) performed by the peripheral control MPU 4101a of the peripheral control board 4010, it is determined that the continuous defeat effect is to be executed. Show.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (A), in the continuous defeat effect performed after the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is started, an instruction “touch a sensor to attack an enemy!” Is displayed above the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. At the same time, three enemy characters are displayed side by side in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, in front of each of the three enemy characters, one of numbers 1 to 3 is assigned, and an instruction is given in which order the three enemy characters should be defeated (in this example, medium The order of the enemy character → the left enemy character → the right enemy character). Note that in this example, the three enemy characters are displayed so as to be larger as the enemy character is earlier in the order, so that it is easy to recognize in which order the three enemy characters should be defeated. ing.

  Further, on the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, leftward arrows corresponding to the left guiding decorative member 2213 are displayed in order from the left as member displays 1900a to 1900c, which respectively represent the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144 and 2213. Is displayed, a middle member display 1900b in which a downward arrow is drawn corresponding to the middle guide decorative member 2117, and a right member display 1900c in which a right arrow is drawn corresponding to the right guide decorative member 2144. Is displayed. These member displays 1900a to 1900c are displayed below each of the three enemy characters. In order to defeat the three enemy characters in the designated order, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are displayed. The user is instructed which operation should be performed. That is, in the present example, it is instructed to defeat the enemy character in the order of the middle enemy character → the left enemy character → the right enemy character, and correspondingly, the middle guiding decorative member 2117 → the left guiding decorative member. 2213 → the right guiding decorative member 2144 can be recognized in that order by the player. However, in this example, it is required that the player touches in the order of the center guiding decorative member 2117 → the left guiding decorative member 2213 → the right guiding decorative member 2144, but the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are required. The player may request to touch in any order. As described above, every time the continuous defeat effect is performed, the order instructed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, the order of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 to be touched by the player is changed, so that the game area 1100 is provided. The trajectory drawn by the player's hand changes above, so that the continuous defeating effect using the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 can be an effect that does not make the user bored.

  Also, the remaining time of the effective time permitted to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is displayed slightly below the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this example, the valid time is started, and first, only the detection by the middle object detection sensor 2116 among the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is permitted, and only the middle member display 1900b displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is predetermined. , And only the middle guiding decorative member 2117 corresponding to the middle member display 1900b is lit in the same color, thereby instructing the player to touch the middle guiding decorative member 2117. In this example, the effective time is set to 5 seconds, and it is required that the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 that are separated from each other be touched in a short time. As described above, since the remaining time of the effective time is clearly shown on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the time limit for the player to complete the touch on the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 is required. Can be reliably recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (B), when the player touches the middle guiding decorative member 2117 and the middle object detection sensor 2116 detects the middle guiding decoration member 2117, the number assigned to the middle enemy character is deleted and the number is deleted. By displaying the character "HIT!" By attacking the middle enemy character, it is possible to reliably recognize that the middle object detection sensor 2116 has detected the hand of the player. Then, only the detection by the left object detection sensor 2212 among the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is permitted, and only the left member display 1900a displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is lit in a predetermined color and the left member display 1900a Is turned on in the same color, thereby instructing the player to touch the left guide decorative member 2213.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (C), when the player touches the left guiding decorative member 2213 and the left object detection sensor 2212 detects the left guiding decorative member 2213, the number 2 assigned to the left enemy character is deleted and By displaying the character "HIT!" By attacking the left enemy character, it is possible to reliably recognize that the left object detection sensor 2212 has detected the player's hand. Then, only the detection by the right object detection sensor 2143 among the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is permitted, only the right member display 1900c displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is lit in a predetermined color, and the right member display 1900c is turned on. By lighting only the right guide decorative member 2144 corresponding to the same color in the same color, it is instructed that the player touches the right guide decorative member 2144.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (D), when the player touches the right guiding decoration member 2144 and the right object detection sensor 2143 detects the right guiding decoration member 2144, the number 3 assigned to the right enemy character is deleted and the number is deleted. By attacking the right enemy character and displaying the characters "HIT!", It is possible to reliably recognize that the right object detection sensor 2143 has detected the hand of the player. Then, after all three enemy characters have been attacked, the valid period in which detection by the pressure detection sensor 432c is permitted starts, and the permission of detection by the pressure detection sensor 432c is started. As shown in FIG. 204 (E), the character “Blow off!” Is displayed almost at the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and an image simulating the pressing operation unit 405 is displayed. The operation unit 405 is instructed to be operated by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 204 (F), during the effective period of the press detection sensor 432c, after the player operates the press operation unit 405 and the press detection sensor 432c detects the explosion, an explosion occurs on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. If it occurs and three enemy characters can be defeated, it is determined that the continuous defeat effect has been successful. Then, as shown in FIG. 204 (G), the decoration display of the decorative pattern is displayed in the order of the left decorative pattern → the right decorative pattern → the middle decorative pattern in the order of the decorative pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation is continued (in this example, “ The pseudo-continuous change is continued by displaying the temporary stop so as to be "7, pseudo-run, 8". That is, when three enemy characters can be defeated, it can be recognized that the continuous defeat effect is successful and the pseudo continuous fluctuation is continued. In this example, as the combination of the decorative symbols that continue the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, the right and left decorative symbols are the out-of-the-way symbols that do not reach the reach mode, and the symbol in which the middle decorative symbol is drawn as “pseudo-serial” is used. Then, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is continued, the display of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started again, and the continuous defeat effect as shown in FIGS. 203 and 204 is executed again.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204 (H), during the effective period of the press detection sensor 432c, after the player operates the press operation unit 405 and the press detection sensor 432c detects, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. If no explosion occurs and three enemy characters cannot be defeated, it is determined that the continuous defeat effect has failed. Then, as shown in FIG. 204 (I), the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped so as to form the reach mode (the reach symbol of “7” in this example) in the order of the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol. By displaying, after that, reach production is executed. That is, when the three enemy characters cannot be defeated, it is possible to recognize that the continuous defeat effect has failed and that the pseudo continuous fluctuation does not continue as in the case of the success of the continuous defeat effect.

  In this example, three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are adjacent to the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212, respectively, and are separated from the front surface of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by a player. When a continuous defeat effect is executed, the player is caused to sequentially touch the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 as instructed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the separated position is determined by the player. Must be moved, and a lively motion can be performed in the area of the game area 1100. In addition, by using the game area 1100 as an area for the player to operate, the game ball not only rolls or displays an image on the liquid crystal display device 1900, but a large area of the game area 1100 is effectively used. In addition to the above, it is possible to give the player a sense of unity with the game.

  Further, in this example, three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are provided at three spaced positions on the front surface of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player, and the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 respectively. Are provided adjacent to each other. For example, if only the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 are provided in the game area 1100, the positions detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 cannot be clearly recognized. By providing the guide decoration members 2117, 2144 and 2213, it is possible to clearly recognize where the player touches the object detection sensors 2116, 2143 and 2212 to detect. Therefore, while the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 are provided at spaced positions on the front surface of the game area 1100, the player does not get lost as to where to touch, and executes a continuous defeat effect. At this time, it is possible for the player to quickly touch so that the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 sequentially detect the object. Therefore, in the continuous defeat effect, the remaining time of the effective time allowed to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is clearly shown, but the effective time is set to be short (5 seconds in this example). ), It is possible for the player to complete the touch on the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 within the effective time without panic.

  Further, in this example, in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, not only which one of the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 should be touched by the player, but also the guide decoration member 2117 instructed is specified. , 2144, and 221 are turned on, so that the player can quickly touch without being lost in the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 to be touched.

  Further, in this example, optical sensors are used as the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212, and the player passes through a transparent glass unit 590 that enables the player to visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. Of the user touches the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213. The detection range of these object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 can be detected not only in the area in front of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 but also in the area around the area in front of it. It is not necessary for the player to touch the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 through the transparent glass unit 590, and the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 pass through the area including the front region of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 (the game unit and the glass unit 590). It is possible to detect even if the user's hand is only slightly separated. That is, it is possible to detect the player's hand in a wider range than the area of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213, while allowing the player to clearly recognize the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213. . For this reason, when the player operates the guidance decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213 quickly, even if the player operates ambiguously, the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 can detect them. Therefore, in the continuous defeat effect, the remaining time of the effective time allowed to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is clearly shown, but the effective time is set to be short (5 seconds in this example). ), It is possible for the player to complete the touch on the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 within the effective time without panic.

  In the case where an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 405 that can be directly operated by the player is provided on the game area 1100, the vibration when the player operates (presses) is generated by the game. Although it may be transmitted to the area 1100 and affect the rolling of the game ball on the game area 1100, the player can directly use the guidance decoration members 2117, 2144, 221 and the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212. There is no need to perform such operations, and such problems do not occur.

  Further, in this example, three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 are provided on the game area 1100 that is parallel to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, while the pressing operation unit 405 is provided on the game window. Of the plate unit 300 having an upper plate 301 which projects forward below the 101 and stores game balls, the plate unit 300 is provided at the upper center of the plate unit 300 which is perpendicular to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In other words, the object to be touched by the player in the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 forms a plane parallel to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, whereas the player in the pressing operation unit 405 should operate. The target forms a vertical plane with the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when a plurality of pressing operation units are provided on the plate unit 300, the player who has visually viewed the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces downward to recognize the pressing operation unit to be operated by the player. In this case, there is a possibility that the effect contents displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be overlooked. On the other hand, when the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 are provided on the game area 1100, the player who is viewing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not face down and touches the screen. It is possible to recognize the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 to be performed, so that the effect contents displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are not overlooked. Note that the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 are provided closer to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 than the pressing operation unit 405, and more effect the player (displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900). You can make yourself feel like you are participating in the production.

  Further, in this example, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 are provided on the game area 1100, that is, in an area that can enter the field of view of the player while viewing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. On the other hand, the pressing operation unit 405 is provided on the plate unit 300, that is, in an area where it is difficult to enter the field of view of the player while visually recognizing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 are not only on the game area 1100 but also on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and can enter the field of view of the player, for example. It is provided in an area on the game board 4 that is visible from the player side through the game window 101 formed in the door frame 5 (an area other than the game area 1100 in the game board 4), or is provided at a position lower than the lower end of the game area 1100. If it is above, it may be provided on the side of the door frame base body 110 which is the periphery of the game area 1100.

  Further, in this example, the player does not touch all of the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 within the valid time allowed to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212. When all of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 do not detect, or without the player touching the last designated guiding decoration member among the three guiding decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213, 3 When only one or two of the two object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 are detected, all three enemy characters have not been attacked. In such a case, after the expiration of the effective time (five seconds in this example), as shown in FIG. The same effect as after attacking all of the characters is executed.

  In this example, if the player does not operate the pressing operation unit 405 within the valid time permitted to be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c and the pressing detection sensor 432c does not detect the pressing operation, the pressing is performed. After the expiration of the validity period of the detection sensor 432c, it is determined whether or not three enemy characters can be defeated based on the explosion occurring on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, whether or not the continuous defeat effect is successful. Can be determined. In such a case, it is not possible to recognize whether or not to continue the pseudo-continuous fluctuation until after the end of the effective period of the pressing detection sensor 432c, and the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 (continuous defeat effect). To join).

  The “pseudo-continuous fluctuation” in the present example is similar to “normal fluctuation” (a fluctuation that is stopped and displayed in a non-reachable pattern without a reach mode), and all the decorative symbols are displayed in the fluctuation mode in the decorative pattern. Temporary stop display with a non-existent design (however, in this example, the middle decorative design is drawn as “pseudo-ream”) (for example, a small vertical swing and a complete stop: swing variation display) ), The display of the decorative symbols is started to change again, and the display is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined number of times (the number of times set in the change pattern). In addition, as long as the temporary stop display is performed on the off symbol that does not become the reach mode in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again. On the other hand, when the reach mode is formed, the reach effect ( (Reach effect) set in the fluctuation pattern. Also, in this example, the “pseudo continuous fluctuation” is executed before the reach effect is performed, but in the “pseudo continuous fluctuation”, the lost symbol that does not become the reach mode is any one of 1 to 3 times. Only the temporary stop can be displayed.

  Further, in this example, in the variation pattern table referred to in the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) or the second variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern for executing “pseudo continuous variation” is not in the reach mode. A variation pattern in which the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed one to three times is set. In the fluctuation pattern table, when the “pseudo-continuous fluctuation” is executed, the larger the number of temporary stop displays of the outlying symbols that do not reach the reach mode, the larger the big hit expectation (big hit expectation = appearance rate at big hit / all appearances). The determination value is assigned to the variation pattern so that the ratio increases. That is, when the determination result is a big hit, when the “pseudo-continuous fluctuation” is executed, the number of times of the temporary stop display of the non-reachable symbol that does not become the reach mode at a higher rate than at the time of the non-determination is executed. For this reason, when the “pseudo continuous fluctuation” is executed, the larger the number of times of temporarily stopping and displaying the out-of-reach symbol that does not reach the reach mode is executed, the higher the ratio of the judgment result to the big hit becomes, and the sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased. Is increasing.

  Further, in this example, in the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) or the second variation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100, when the variation pattern of “pseudo continuous variation” is determined. The main control board 4100 transmits a fluctuation pattern command capable of specifying the fluctuation pattern to the peripheral control board 4010. In the effect control processing (step S602) performed by the peripheral control MPU 4101a of the peripheral control board 4010, when a fluctuation pattern of “pseudo continuous fluctuation” is specified from the fluctuation pattern command, a continuous defeat effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern. It is determined whether or not to execute, and if it is determined to execute the continuous defeat effect, the continuous defeat effect is succeeded according to the number of times the non-reachable symbols in the `` pseudo continuous fluctuation '' are temporarily stopped and displayed. Determine the number of times to do. For example, when a symbol that does not reach the reach mode in the “pseudo-continuous fluctuation” is temporarily stopped and displayed only three times, the continuous defeating effect succeeds only three times, similarly to the number of times. In addition, when performing the “pseudo continuous fluctuation”, the more the number of times of temporarily stopping and displaying the lost symbol that does not become the reach mode is executed, that is, the more the number of times the continuous defeat effect is successful, the larger the determination result becomes. The percentage is high. For this reason, in the continuous defeat effect, it is desired that the effect succeeds and the “pseudo continuous fluctuation” continues, and the player touches the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 or operates the pressing operation unit 405 by the player. And participate in the continuous destruction production.

  In addition, in this example, not only when a fluctuation pattern for performing “pseudo continuous fluctuation” is determined, but also when a fluctuation pattern for not performing “pseudo continuous fluctuation” is determined, a continuous destruction effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern. May be determined. At this time, even if it is determined that the continuous defeat effect is to be executed, a failure symbol that does not reach the reach mode such as “pseudo continuous fluctuation” is not temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the first continuous defeat effect fails. It has become.

  Further, in this example, when executing the “pseudo continuous fluctuation”, a non-reachable symbol (in this example, a temporary stop symbol of “7 / pseudo / eight”) that is not in the reach mode is temporarily stopped and displayed. Regardless of the number of times of temporary stop display of a lost symbol that does not become the reach mode in "continuous fluctuation", the same temporary stop symbol is repeatedly temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, the left decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed first in the “pseudo continuous fluctuation” is the same as the reach pattern (reach symbol “7” in this example) formed after the execution of the “pseudo continuous fluctuation”. It is controlled to become. That is, in the effect control processing (step S602) processed by the peripheral control MPU 4101a of the peripheral control board 4010, first, after determining the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the determination result notification command transmitted from the main control board 4100, If the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo continuous fluctuation” is specified from the fluctuation pattern command, the left decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed first in “pseudo continuous fluctuation” is stopped first among the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbol. The left decorative symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the displayed left decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped after the left decorative symbol in the “pseudo continuous change” is different from the temporary stop symbol of the left decorative symbol. It is determined to be a symbol (in this example, the symbol of the left decorative symbol +1), and the middle decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and finally displayed in “pseudo continuous variation” is drawn as “pseudo symbol”. It is adapted to determine to be a symbol.

  Further, in the present example, when the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo continuous variation” is determined, after the player sequentially touches the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213, the player operates the pressing operation unit 405. Is performed, but a continuous defeat effect using only one of them may be performed, and the guidance decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are played as instructed in the continuous defeat effect. When the player sequentially touches or when the player operates the pressing operation unit 405, it is determined whether or not the continuous defeat effect is successful, so that it is possible to recognize whether or not to continue the pseudo continuous fluctuation. Good.

  In addition, in this example, in addition to the continuous defeat effect, an effect using the pressing operation unit 405 is performed, and the pressing operation unit 405 is used at a higher rate than the effect using the guidance decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213. I'm trying to perform a production. For example, in the “normal fluctuation” (period from the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol to the stop of the display of the decorative symbol indicating whether or not the reach mode is formed) before the execution of the reach effect, the liquid crystal display device A “box” is displayed on the screen 1900, and an instruction is given to the player to operate the pressing operation unit 405. At this time, the valid period in which the detection by the pressure detection sensor 432c is permitted is started, and the permission of the detection by the pressure detection sensor 432c is started. Then, when the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 and detects the pressing detection sensor 432c during the valid period of the pressing detection sensor 432c, the character A is displayed from the “box” displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. An effect in which any one of .about.C appears is executed. In such an effect, the characters to appear are determined such that the big hit expectation (big hit expectation = appearance rate at the time of big hit / total appearance rate) increases in the order of character A → character B → character C. For example, when the character C appears, the probability that the determination result is a big hit is high, and the sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

[8. Game in high probability time saving state]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a characteristic game can be provided when the game state is controlled to the high probability time saving state. In this chapter, a game in such a high probability time saving state will be described in detail. In this chapter, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, a numerical value or the like different from the setting contents used in the above description may be newly set, but unless otherwise specified, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment is used. The device 1 takes over the setting contents and configuration used in the description so far.

  Hereinafter, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment when it is controlled to the high probability time saving state will be described in detail. First, in [8-1], a game method in a time saving state (including a high probability time saving state) will be described, and in [8-2] and thereafter, a game progress and the like in a high probability time saving state will be described.

  Note that, in this chapter, if the type of the big hit illustrated in FIG. 173 (C) is won as the specific 1, the gaming state after the big hit is controlled to the high probability non-time saving state, and the specific 2 to the specific In the case of winning, the gaming state after the big hit game is controlled to the high probability time reduction state, and in the case of non-specifically winning, the gaming state after the big hit game is controlled to the low probability non-time saving state. That is, Specified 2 to Specified 5 are big hits in which a game state advantageous to a player, that is, a high probability time saving state after a big hit game is given, is also referred to as “advantageous big hit” below. On the other hand, the specific 1 or non-specific is a big hit controlled to a non-time saving state after the big hit game, and is less advantageous for the player than “advantageous big hit”.

[8-1. Right-handed game]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 4 drives the game ball to the right side of the center role 2500 (hits with a predetermined strength or more), and passes through the right outer periphery of the center role 2500 to form an attacker unit. In 2100, it flows down to the guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140, is guided by the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142, and is discharged downward from just above the gate portion 2105, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 with extremely high probability. It is designed to pass. That is, the game ball can be easily entered into the gate unit 2105 by performing a so-called right strike.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state, a right-handed game is recommended, and the right-handed game is performed, so that the game ball entering the gate portion 2105 is extremely reduced. This allows the ball to enter the second starting port 2102 with a high probability.

  More specifically, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 100% (for example, 251/251) so that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol always wins. Further, regarding the variable display control of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 80 ms, the stop display time is set to 500 ms, and the interval period from the closing of the movable piece 2106 to the start of the next ordinary symbol change is set to 464 ms. The time during which the variable display control is performed is set to a predetermined time that is extremely short as compared with a conventional gaming machine. Further, when a win is obtained by a lottery of a normal symbol, by setting the opening time of the second starting port 2102 by the movable piece 2106 to a predetermined time of 5800 ms, an open state in which the second starting port 2102 can easily enter a ball is set. I try to keep it for a long time.

  In other words, by controlling with the above setting, in the time saving state, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit is extremely high (all hits), and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is constant and short. The long opening time of the second starting port 2102 and the like make it much easier for the second starting port 2102 to win game balls. A right-handed shot aiming at the mouth 2102 allows game balls to be efficiently won.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the time reduction state, the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is set to a fixed short time, and the opening time of the movable piece 2106 accompanying the winning of the ordinary symbol (the second start port 2102). (Which may be read as the opening time) is a fixed long time, so that a series of operations from the start of the normal lottery based on the passage of the game ball of the gate portion 2105 to the opening and closing of the movable piece 2106 are performed in a fixed time Can be done. Then, by setting a short time from when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 to when the movable piece 2106 is opened and a long time from when the movable piece 2106 is opened to when the movable piece 2106 is closed, the game passing through the gate portion 2105 is performed. The ball is easily received in the second starting port 2102 as it is. In addition, since the time during which the movable piece 2106 is in the closed state is a short time including the interval period, it is possible to reduce the ratio of game balls that go to the out port 1151 without being accepted by any winning port. . In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by controlling the display of the variation of the ordinary symbols and the opening of the movable piece 2106 at the set time as described above, substantially all of the game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2105 during the time reduction are reduced. The second starting port 2102 can be received.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to realizing a situation in which substantially all of the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2105 can be received in the second starting port 2102 as described above, The average required time for the variation processing of the second special symbol performed based on the entry into the ball 2102 is set to one cycle when the game balls are continuously launched (for example, one shot for 100 shots per minute) Per 60 ms), when the right-handed game is continuously performed in a time-saving state, the number of reserves of the second special symbol can be maintained or increased, and the second special lottery can be performed. It can be executed continuously without interruption.

  In the present embodiment, by setting the number of game balls to be paid out by winning a game ball to the second starting port 2102 to “1”, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is frequently performed. Even if it occurs, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of game balls held by the player, and to reduce the burden on the game hall while increasing the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the non-time saving state of the gaming state (for example, the low probability non-time saving state), it is recommended that a gaming ball be driven into the left side of the center role 2500 (so-called left-handed). When a left hit is performed in such a game state, the game balls are guided in the direction of the front side unit 2200 or the attacker unit 2100 by the plurality of implanted obstacle nails, so that the general operation of the front side unit 2200 is performed. It is possible to cause a game ball to win to the winning opening 2201, the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the general winning opening 2104, and the like. When a game ball enters the warp entrance 2504 by being guided to the warp entrance 2504 connected to the stage 2510 of the center role 2500, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center role 2500. The game ball supplied to the 2510 rolls on the stage 2510 in the left and right direction, and can enjoy a movement different from the movement by the obstacle nail, and the game ball enters the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510. When released, it is possible to make the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 win with a high probability.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a right-handed hit is made in the non-time saving state, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the non-time saving state so that it is not easy to enter the second starting port 2102. , The winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0% (for example, 0/251). By doing in this way, it is possible to make the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol a hit, so that even if a right-handed aiming at the second starting port 2102 is performed, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port 2102. You can prevent the ball.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the time saving state is controlled, it is possible to win the game balls more efficiently by aiming at the second starting port 2102 than at the first starting port 2101. The player performs a right-handed game aiming at the right side of the center role object 2500 so that the game ball can win the second starting port 2102. Also, due to the structure of the game board 4, when the second starting port 2102 is opened and a game ball is hit on the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2102, the game ball passing through the gate portion 2105 is , The second starting port 2102 is winning with an extremely high probability. For this reason, during the control of the time reduction state, the game ball hit into the right side of the center role item 2500 is hardly wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1151), and the first during the control of the non-time reduction state. In comparison with the starting port 2101, the game ball comes to the second starting port 2102 extremely efficiently.

[8-2. Overview of game progress (high probability time saving state)]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special lottery or the second special lottery is performed to win a predetermined big hit, and after the big hit game of the big hit ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high-probability time-saving state. . Such a predetermined jackpot is the “advantageous jackpot” described above in [8], and corresponds to the specific jackpot of the specific type 2 to the specific 5 in the type of the jackpot illustrated in FIG. 173 (C).

  FIG. 205 is a view for explaining the progress of the game when the winning big win is won. In FIG. 205, as the progress stages of the game after winning the big hit, "big hit", "big hit ED (ending)", "maker guide", "PC (prepaid card) alert", "mode selection", "mode" "Determination" and "mode-only effect" are shown. The number attached to each progression stage in FIG. 205 indicates an example of the stay time allocated to each progression stage. In addition, each stage other than the "big hit" is also referred to as "production mode". FIG. 206 is a view for explaining an example of the effect display accompanying the game progress shown in FIG. 205. FIG. 206 shows a representative example of a display screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in each progressing stage. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 205 and FIG. 206, a description will be given in the order of the effect modes in which the game progresses when the big hit is won is presented.

  The various effects described below are effects mainly displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and are controlled by the peripheral control board 4010.

  First, “during big hit” is an effect mode indicating that the big hit game is being consumed (during the big hit game state). In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the time of a big hit with a payout (specific 2, specific 4, specific 5), the big hit game is consumed by the right-handed game. Then, after the big hit game of the big hit, since all are controlled to the high probability time saving state, the recommendation of the right-handed game continues at least until the next big hit winning.

  FIG. 206A is an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in “big hit”. In the display screen of FIG. 206 (A), “Final” in the upper left means that the last round (for example, the 16th round) is being executed, and “V” in the center means that a big hit is in progress. I have. “333” shown in the lower right display area 1900p indicates a decorative pattern arrangement corresponding to the big hit during digestion. In the display area 1900q, a display (right-handed display) for instructing that the big hit game be consumed in a right-handed manner is displayed.

  Note that these display positions on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in FIG. 206A are merely examples, and an arbitrary image or the like can be displayed at an arbitrary place at the time of design. Such degrees of freedom are the same in FIGS. 206 (B) to 206 (G) described later.

  Next, the "big hit ED (ending)" is an effect mode in which a transition is made after the last round of the big hit game in "big hit". According to FIG. 205, a stay time of 6780 ms (500 + 6280) is assigned. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery process for the winning of a special symbol (when there is no hold for the second special lottery, the first special lottery and the second special lottery If there is a hold, the second special lottery) is started, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery process, and the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol is set within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Is determined, and the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started according to the determined variation pattern. In the following, such a series of flows will be considered in a broad sense, and a description such as “a fluctuation pattern of a symbol (special symbol, decorative symbol) is determined based on the result of the lottery process (special symbol)” will be given. There is.

  Regarding the start of such a special lottery, FIG. 205 shows that the above-mentioned lottery process is started when 500 ms has elapsed after the transition to the “big hit ED” (point P). In other words, the main control board 4100 (especially the main control MPU 4100a) controls the gaming state to the normal gaming state (low-probability non-saving time state) from the timing of the "big hit" to the point P of the "big hit ED". In addition, the lottery processing and the fluctuation processing relating to the winning of the special symbol are not performed. Then, at the timing of the point P, the main control board 4100 (especially the main control MPU 4100a) shifts the gaming state to the high-probability time-saving state, and can execute the lottery process for the high-probability time regarding the special symbol hit.

  In addition, with respect to the lottery of the ordinary symbols (ordinary lottery), the lottery is performed in a normal low probability state at the timing until the point P is reached, including during the big hit. If the symbol usually changes when the point P is reached, the change is determined after a predetermined time has elapsed. Then, after that, a normal lottery is performed in a high probability state for time saving. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, both the case where the normal lottery in the low probability state (normal) is won or the case where the normal lottery in the high probability state (for time saving) is won is extremely short. Normally, the fluctuation time of the symbol is selected.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the right-handed player is hit in a time-saving state, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 with a high probability, and then the game ball is moved with a very high probability to the second starting port 2102. Therefore, if right-handing is performed immediately before reaching point P, the second special lottery is started immediately after the start of the high-probability game state, even if the special symbol change is not suspended. And the right-handing is continued thereafter, so that the second special lottery can be continuously performed.

  FIG. 206B is an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the “big hit ED”. In FIG. 206 (B), a predetermined image indicating the end of the big hit game is displayed on the display screen, and by displaying such an image, it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game is finished. The display in the display area 1900r and the display area 1900s in FIG. 206B is also described in the “manufacturer guidance” illustrated in FIG. 206C, and thus will be described there.

  Next, the “manufacturer's guidance” is an effect mode in which a transition is made after the stay time assigned to the “big hit ED” elapses. According to FIG. 205, a stay time of 6280 ms is assigned.

  FIG. 206C illustrates an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in “Manufacturer guidance”. In FIG. 206 (C), a predetermined image indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. Further, a display (right-handed display) for instructing that the time saving state be digested by right-handing is displayed in the display area 1900s in the upper center of FIG. 206C. Note that the right-handed display of the display area 1900s in FIG. 206C is a display mode that is more emphasized than the right-handed display of the display area 1900q in FIGS. 206A and 206G. Is displayed so that the player can appeal to the player more strongly.

  Further, one numeral is shown in each of display regions 1900r provided at three corners of the display screen in FIG. 206C. The display area 1900r is a display area for displaying a decorative pattern in a variable manner, and a decorative pattern row is formed by combining the display of the three display areas 1900r (for example, provided at three corners). When "7" is displayed in all of the displayed areas 1900r, the combination of the odd number of identical decorative symbols described above is obtained). The display of the decorative symbol in the display area 1900r is displayed in a specific effect mode (specifically, the effect mode included from the point P to the point Q in FIG. 205) in the high-probability time-saving state. This is a mode in which it is more difficult for the player to recognize the decorative symbol sequence than to display the decorative symbols in the game situation. For example, in comparison with a decorative symbol row ("arrow" means a changing decorative symbol) displayed in a large manner near the center of the display screen in FIG. 206 (G), three decorative symbols are shown in FIG. 206 (G). Decorative pattern rows are displayed in one place (near the center of the display screen), and the display area 1900r in which a plurality of decorative patterns are displayed at independent positions has a lower degree of recognition of the decorative pattern rows for the player. Obviously.

  In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbol in the above-described “specific effect mode in the high-probability time saving state” is not limited to the display example of the display area 1900r in FIG. 206 (C). It is sufficient if the recognition degree can be suppressed. For example, the degree of recognition of the decorative symbol row (or the decorative symbol itself) may be reduced by reducing the display area per decorative symbol or reducing the display brightness, or a combination of these. You may. As described above, by suppressing the degree of recognition of the decorative symbol sequence (or the decorative symbol itself), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the variation of the decorative symbol. Since many players play a game while looking mainly at the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a special lottery is internally performed by realizing a game state in which the display of the change of the decorative pattern is hard to notice. Can be expected not to be noticed by the player.

  The example of the display screen in the effect mode of the “manufacturer guidance” has been described with reference to FIG. 206 (C). The “decorated symbol display” is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a predetermined timing after the end of the big hit game. Specifically, the display is started from the timing of transition to the “big hit ED” (see FIG. 206B). When displaying “right-handed display by emphasis mode” or “decorative symbol display with reduced recognition degree” in addition to other display images, the display method is a superimposed display using a plurality of transparent layers. Or a switching display for periodically switching and displaying a plurality of display images.

  Next, “PC alert” is an effect mode that transits after “manufacturer guidance”. According to FIG. 205, a stay time of 12560 ms is assigned. In the "PC alert", useful information is provided so that players do not suffer disadvantages, such as taking care not to forget the prepaid card (PC) required for lending game balls in the ball lending machine. The "cautionary effect" provided is performed. Such a cautionary effect is a function effect (or a special effect lottery) in that it provides predetermined useful information to the player regardless of whether or not a lottery relating to a game such as a special symbol lottery or a normal symbol lottery is performed. Functional production). As a function effect, there is a “setting effect” in which the volume, light amount, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted, in addition to the caution effect described above.

  FIG. 206D illustrates an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in “PC alert”. In FIG. 206 (D), on the display screen, an alert message stating “Please be careful about forgetting to take or steal the prepaid card” and an alert image for instructing the user to remove the prepaid card (PC) from the ball rental machine are displayed. ing. By performing such a display, the player is reminded again in a situation where the interest in the prepaid card in the ball lending machine has diminished after the jackpot game, and the disadvantage of the player is suppressed. be able to.

  In the display screen of FIG. 206 (D), “right-handed display by emphasis mode” and “decorative symbol display with reduced recognition degree” are displayed as in the case of FIG. 206 (C). Note that the right-handed display in the display area 1900t is slightly less noticeable than the right-handed display in the display area 1900r in FIG. , "Right-handed display in the emphasized mode". Such display of “right-handed display by emphasis mode” and “decorative symbol display with suppressed recognition degree” is displayed in “mode selection (FIG. 206 (E))” or “mode determination (FIG. 206 (F))”. Is the same.

  Next, “mode selection” is an effect mode in which a transition is made after the stay time assigned to “PC alert” has elapsed, and according to FIG. 205, a stay time of 12560 ms is assigned.

  FIG. 206E is an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in “mode selection”. In FIG. 206 (E), two types of characters are displayed so as to be selectable at the center of the display screen, and an instruction to “select a character” is displayed at the bottom. The mode selection screen is a screen for selecting a character to be used in a subsequent mode-specific effect (FIG. 206 (G)). The selection method is, for example, that a player operates a jog dial or the like for a predetermined time. The character displayed on the foreground (desired to be selected) may be determined at the time of elapse, or a different character may be selected periodically so that the player can select a button at a desired timing. May be pressed. Here, the selection of a character is performed as an example, but any other selection mode such as selection of a story type and selection of an effect type can be prepared.

  Next, “mode determination” is an effect mode that transits after the stay time assigned to “mode selection” elapses, and according to FIG. 205, a stay time of 14444 ms is assigned.

  FIG. 206 (F) is an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in “mode determination”, and indicates that the selection of the character selected in “mode selection” has been confirmed. However, the production mode in the “mode decision” indicates that the selection result of the “mode selection” is confirmed, and the production in which the selection result is validated starts from the next “mode-specific production” stage. Be executed. In the example of the display screen in FIG. 206 (F), a screen in which the selected character speaks a predetermined line is displayed in the center of the display screen, and after that, an effect corresponding to the character is performed in the “mode-specific effect” that transits. Is shown.

  The “mode-specific effect” is an effect mode that transits after the stay time assigned to “mode determination” has elapsed, and continues until the next big hit is won. In the “mode-specific effect”, a special effect prepared in advance is performed based on the mode determined in “mode determination”.

  FIG. 206 (G) is an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in “mode-only effect”, and shows a state in which “dedicated effect” based on the character indicated by “mode decision” has been started. ing. Specifically, in the example of the display screen in FIG. 206 (G), an image as if the selected character is walking toward the destination is displayed, and a special effect centering on the character is displayed. Have been. Note that the special effect here is one of the effects in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and for example, the one in which the background and the display character of the screen display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are “special effects”. Can be assumed.

  In the lower display area 1900u of the example of the display screen in FIG. 206 (G), the status of the decoration symbol change suspension (three are suspended with four being the maximum number of suspensions) is displayed. In the display area 1900p, the decorative design sequence is displayed in a variable manner. Such a display of the decorative design sequence is performed by the “decorative design with suppressed recognition degree” from point P to point Q in FIG. Unlike the “display”, the display is a decorative pattern that is easily recognized by the player. As described above, after shifting to the effect mode of “mode-specific effect” (after point Q), unlike the effect mode up to the effect of “mode determination”, the player can easily recognize or recognize the change display of the decorative symbol. The effect display according to the mode is performed, and the player can be given an impression as if the symbol change had started from the timing of the Q point.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is controlled to the high probability time saving state after the big hit game indicated by “big hit”, the mode is changed from the “big hit ED” (FIG. 206 (B)) to the “mode”. The respective effect modes up to “dedicated effect” (FIG. 206 (G)) transition in a predetermined order. Among these, from "big hit ED" to "mode only effect" are effect modes that transition in a fixed order, and the effect content of each effect mode is not related to the execution result of the special lottery. . Hereinafter, the effect mode group based on the "big hit ED" and the "mode-specific effect" displayed independently of the special lottery will be referred to as a "series of effect mode groups". When the transition is determined by the stay time as illustrated in FIG. 205, each of the effect modes of the “sequence of effect mode group” is the same as the effect mode that appears regardless of the execution of the special lottery. I can say.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a game progress when an advantageous big hit (a big hit controlled in a high probability time saving state after the big hit game) is performed, the game progresses from the middle of the “big hit ED” (point P in FIG. 205). The special lottery (the first special lottery if there is no hold on the second special lottery, the second special lottery if there is a hold on the second special lottery) is started, and further until "mode decision" ( 205) is a display mode in which the variable display of the decorative symbols performed in association with the special lottery is difficult for the player to recognize. Then, after the "mode-only effect", the display of the change of the decorative symbol is easily recognized by the player. By doing so, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the execution of a series of effect mode groups up to “mode determination”, the execution of the special lottery and the design (mainly Since the variable display of the decorative pattern can be advanced, it is possible to suppress the prolongation of the game situation in which a winning result cannot be obtained while the variable effect of the symbol accompanying the execution of the second special lottery is displayed. .

  In the present example, the “mode-specific effect” is an effect that can appear only when controlled to the high-probability gaming state. That is, when the effect mode of “mode-specific effect” is displayed, it is suggested (or taught) to the player that the game is in the high-probability game state. Then, as an effect mode for determining a character in such a “mode-only effect”, since “mode selection” and “mode determination” exist before the “mode-only effect”, “mode selection” and “mode selection” The “mode determination” is an “effect indicating the start of the high-probability gaming state” to the player, apparently, although the mode is already internally controlled to the high-probability gaming state.

[8-3. Fluctuating pattern in high probability time saving state]
In the following, a description will be given of a determination of a variation pattern in each effect mode of the high-probability time-saving state described in [8-2], a special effect when a big hit is won in the high-probability time-saving state, and the like.

  First, as described above, in the high-probability time-saving state, the second special lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 2102 becomes the center of the special lottery, and according to the big hit determination table used in the second special lottery, The second special random number that becomes a big hit is selected with a winning probability of 1/120 (FIG. 173 (A)). Further, according to the reach determination table at the time of a miss, in the high probability time saving state (probable change), a reach effect is not selected at the time of a miss. In addition, at the time of winning a big hit, a reach effect is always selected. Therefore, when a reach effect appears in a high-probability time-saving state (probable change), a big hit always occurs (FIG. 173 (B)). Then, the type of jackpot that can be won by the second special lottery in the high probability time saving state (probable change) is any one of specific 1, specific 2, specific 5, and non-specific.

  In addition, for the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol selected in the high-probability time-saving state, the fluctuation time in the case where there is no reach (that is, at the time of a loss) is a total of a fluctuation state of 128 ms and a stop state of 500 ms in a state where there is a hold. It is assumed that a fluctuation time of 628 ms is selected, and in a state where there is no hold, a fluctuation time of 1920 ms and a stop state of 500 ms is selected for a total of 2420 ms. In the present example, it is assumed that the change time of the special symbol and the change time of the decorative symbol match.

[8-3-1. Variation pattern according to the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit]
FIG. 207 is a diagram for explaining a fluctuation pattern in the high probability time saving state. In FIG. 207, the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a) changes the variation pattern (until the symbol is determined) according to the number of rotations of the special symbol after the end of the advantageous big hit, the lottery result of the hit, and the hit type. Fluctuating time). Then, it is shown that the peripheral control substrate 4010 (the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150) determines which effect to execute based on those conditions determined by the main control substrate 4100. . As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right-hitting game is continued from the “big hit” to each of the subsequent effect modes, so that the ball entering the second starting port 2102 is continuously provided. The special lottery (mainly the second special lottery) can be started from the middle of the "big hit ED", and the display of the symbols (special symbol, decorative symbol) based on the result of the special lottery is continuously displayed. Can be executed. At the time of the loss, the fixed time fluctuation time of 628 ms is selected, and the stay time of each effect mode is set in advance as shown in FIG. 205. "And the stay status of each effect mode after that. The correspondence between the "rotation speed after big hit end" and the "effect mode" in FIG. 207 is established from such a background.

  The variation pattern shown in FIG. 207 is a variation pattern of the decorative symbol selected based on the result of the special lottery. The change time of the decorative symbol is equal to the change time of the special symbol determined based on the result of the special lottery. According to FIG. 207, when the result of the special lottery is out of order, the normal variation is selected as the effect of the variation pattern, and the variation time is fixed to 628 ms. In addition, since the fluctuation time of 628 ms is a short time of less than 1 second, the display mode may be such that the decorative pattern stops almost immediately in the effect of the normal fluctuation.

  In addition, according to FIG. 207, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the number of revolutions (hereinafter, may be simply abbreviated as “number of revolutions”) after the end of the big hit at the time of the big hit and the type of the big hit are determined. Based on the selection, a variation pattern is selected.

  When the type of the big hit is not specified (4R normal hit without a ball), “forced battle” is selected as the effect of the variation pattern regardless of the number of revolutions, and the variation time is fixed to 30,000 ms. “Forced battle” is one of the reach effects, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  If the type of big hit is specific 1 (4R certain hits with a ball), specific 2 (4R certain hits with a hit), and specific 5 (16R certain hits with a hit), Is selected as described above.

  First, when the number of rotations is 1 to 10 times (the effect mode corresponds to "big hit ED"), or when the number of rotations is 11 to 20 times (the effect mode corresponds to "manufacturer guidance"), “Forced battle” is selected as the effect of the variation pattern, and the variation time is selected to be 30,000 ms or 40,000 ms. As the fluctuation time of the “forced battle” when the big hit is a positive change, 30,000 ms or 40000 ms is selected according to the type of the big hit, which will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the number of rotations is 21 to 40 (the effect mode corresponds to “PC alert”), the effect of the fluctuation pattern is such that either “forced battle” or “special PC image” is 1: 1. The variation time is selected to be 30,000 ms or 40000 ms in the case of “forced battle”, and 2000 ms in the case of “special PC image”. The “special PC image” is one of special effects in which a specific jackpot is determined, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the number of rotations is 41 to 60 (the effect mode corresponds to “mode selection”), the effect of the fluctuation pattern is such that either “forced battle” or “special selection mode” is 1: 1. The selected time is selected to be 30,000 ms or 40000 ms in the case of the “forced battle”, and 6000 ms in the case of the “special selection mode”. The “special selection mode” is one of special effects in which a specific jackpot is determined, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the number of rotations is from 61 to 83 (the effect mode corresponds to "mode decision"), the effect of the fluctuation pattern is selected by selecting either "forced battle" or "special speech" in a 1: 1 manner. The variation time is selected to be 30,000 ms or 40000 ms in the case of “compulsory battle” and 10,000 ms in the case of “special dialogue”. The “special dialogue” is one of special effects in which a specific jackpot is determined, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Finally, when the number of revolutions is 84 or more (the effect mode corresponds to “mode-specific effect”), “forced battle” is selected as the effect of the variation pattern, and the variation time is selected to be 30000 ms or 40000 ms. When the number of rotations is 84 or more (“mode-specific effect”), other variation patterns and effects not illustrated in this example may be prepared. In addition, since the specific 1 is controlled to the high probability non-time saving state after the big hit game, the degree of advantage is lower than the “advantageous big hit” controlled to the high probability time saving state after the big hit game, and as described above, 207, a variation pattern similar to that of the normal hit may be selected in FIG.

  In this manner, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 207, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, based on the rotation speed after the big hit and the type of the big hit when the big hit is won. A variation pattern is selected. The selection of such a variation pattern has the following characteristics. In other words, when the jackpot is won when the number of rotations is 1 to 20 ("big hit ED" or "manufacturer guidance"), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern indicating the big hit is at least 30,000 ms, At least 30,000 ms elapses before the stop indicates the jackpot. Here, considering that each of the “big hit ED” and “manufacturer's guidance” stay time after the special lottery is permitted is 6280 ms (12560 ms in total), the effect mode is “big hit ED” or “ Even if a big hit is won when the "manufacturer's guide", the effect mode is changed to "PC alert" when the change display of the symbol is finished and the big hit is taught.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special lottery can be executed in the middle of the "big hit ED". It is controlled not to be taught to the player but to be taught in at least the effect mode after "PC alert".

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a period of a series of effect mode groups appearing in an effect mode unrelated to the execution result of the special lottery (more strictly, the rotation speed of the post-big hit rotation speed corresponding to the period) When the big hit is won in the period), “forced battle” is prepared as an option of the display effect. Furthermore, when a special jackpot is won in a specific presentation mode (“PC alert”, “mode selection”, “mode decision”) in the above-described series of presentation mode groups, special special modes other than “forced battle” are selected. Display effects ("special PC image", "special selection mode", "special dialogue") are also prepared as options.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect of the effect mode included in the “sequence of effect mode group” is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the variation pattern (FIG. For example, even if "forced battle", which will be described in detail later, is selected, it is not always necessary to display all the effects of the selected forced battle on the display screen. For example, while the effect display of the effect mode being executed is displayed on the display screen, the effect of the forced battle is advanced without being displayed on the display screen (without showing to the player), and a specific part in the effect of the forced battle (for example, When the timing of an important portion that changes the expected ratio to the big hit comes), the specific portion may be displayed on the display screen, and thereafter, the display indicating the winning result may be finally displayed. In addition, for the effect display in the effect mode and the effect display in the forced battle, both are displayed so as to be visible to the player (superimposed display), or the display visible to the player is switched and displayed one by one. Is also good.

[8-3-2. Forced battle]
Hereinafter, the “forced battle” will be described in detail. “Forced battle” is a display effect that is performed such that a predetermined battle effect (reach effect) is forcibly interrupted regardless of what effect mode the user is in.

  FIG. 208 is a diagram for describing a fluctuation pattern of the forced battle based on the type of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 208, in the “forced battle” effect that can be selected at the time of winning the jackpot, different fluctuation patterns are prepared depending on the type of the jackpot. If the result of the “forced battle” production is a defeat, the winning of a relatively disadvantageous jackpot (there is no substantial payout in the jackpot game, and it is not controlled to the high probability time saving state after the jackpot) In the event that the result of the “forced battle” production is a victory, a relatively advantageous big hit (a payout is obtained in a big hit game, and after the big hit is continuously controlled in a high probability time saving state) Means winning. However, even if it is a relatively disadvantageous jackpot, the possibility that the jackpot is the specific 1 is included, so that it can be expected that the jackpot is in the high probability state without being controlled to the time saving state after the jackpot. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from being completely impaired by the defeat result.

  When the big hit is the specific one, the variation time of 30,000 ms is selected as the variation pattern A, and the effect content in which the battle result is defeated is selected. The progress and results of the battle will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the big hit is the specific 2, the variation time of 40,000 ms is selected as the variation pattern B, and the effect content in which the battle result wins is selected.

  When the big hit is the specific 5, the variation pattern C or variation pattern D due to the variation time of 40000 ms is selected at a ratio of 1: 1. In the variation pattern C, after the battle result has been defeated, the effect content in which the player recovers from the defeat and displays “7” symbol alignment is selected. In the effect of the fluctuation pattern C, a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms is used as in the fluctuation pattern A until the result of the battle is defeated, and then a resurrection effect from the defeat is performed using the fluctuation time of 10,000 ms. In the variation pattern D, after the battle result is won, the effect content is changed again, and the effect content in which “7” symbol alignment is displayed is selected. In the effect of the fluctuation pattern D, a fluctuation time of 40000 ms is used for the entire effect until the “7” symbol alignment is displayed. In this example, the display of the symbol "7" is a special display indicating the winning of the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage of "16R probability change big hit (specific 5)".

  When the big hit is not specified, the fluctuation time of 30,000 ms is selected as the fluctuation pattern E, and the effect content in which the battle result is defeated is selected.

  Next, a specific display effect example by the forced battle will be described. FIG. 209 is a diagram for describing a display effect by a forced battle. FIGS. 209 (A) to 209 (I) show display screens of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as the forced battle progresses. In the forced battle, for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is developed. In this example, if the battle result of the forced battle is a victory of the friendly character, it means the winning of an advantageous big hit (a big hit in which the high-probability time saving state continues after the big hit game), and the match result is the defeat of the friendly character. In the case of, it means the winning of a disadvantageous big hit (a big hit in which the high-probability time-saving state ends and the non-time-saving state is controlled after the big hit game).

  First, FIG. 209 (A) shows an example of an effect image when a forced battle occurs. When the forced battle is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the effect image at the time of the occurrence of the forced battle is displayed in a manner of interrupting the display of the effect mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, in FIG. 209 (A), the decorative symbols that are changing are displayed collectively at the lower right of the display screen. However, the change of the decorative symbols during the forced battle is displayed as shown in FIG. 206 (C). May be displayed in a display area 1900r divided into the corners of.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 209 (B), the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is started. Before the result of the battle is displayed, a cut-in or the like for increasing the degree of expectation may be displayed as shown in FIG. In the effect of improving the degree of expectation as shown in FIG. 209 (C), the appearance ratio may be changed or different based on the type of the variation pattern (for example, variation patterns A to E shown in FIG. 208). For example, an effect of improving the degree of expectation of the type may be displayed.

  After that, the result of the match is displayed. First, a description will be given of an example of an effect transition when the match result is victory. FIG. 209 (D) is an example of a display screen showing that the ally character has won. According to the distribution of the fluctuation pattern of the forced battle described in FIG. 208, when the fluctuation pattern B or the fluctuation pattern D is selected ( 2 or 5 big hits). In this example, when the victory result is displayed as shown in FIG. 209 (D), the winning of the advantageous big hit is determined. Have been. Then, when the variation pattern B (specific 2) is selected, the effect of the forced battle is determined by the effect display of FIG. 209 (D), and thereafter, the big hit game (4R certain change) of specific 2 is started.

  In the case of the variation pattern D, as described with reference to FIG. 208, after the victory result is displayed, the symbols are re-varied and “7” symbol alignment is displayed. FIGS. 209 (E) and 209 (F) show transition examples of such effect display, and FIG. 209 (E) suggests a change from the display result of FIG. 209 (D). CHARGE! "Is displayed, and FIG. 209 (F) thereafter shows a decorative pattern arrangement of" 777 ". At this time, the symbol display column of the display area 1900p also changes again, and “777” is stopped and displayed. In the variation pattern D, by finally displaying the “7” symbol arrangement, the player is taught the big hit having the highest degree of advantage (“16R certain variable big hit with payout”). Then, thereafter, the specific 5 big hit game (16R certain change) is started.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect transition when the battle result is defeat. FIG. 209 (G) is an example of a display screen showing that the ally character has been defeated. According to the distribution of the fluctuation pattern of the forced battle described in FIG. 208, the fluctuation pattern A, the fluctuation pattern C or the fluctuation pattern E is It is displayed when selected (specific 1, specific 5, non-specific big hit). Among them, in the case of the variation pattern A (specific 1) or the variation pattern E (non-specific), the result of the forced battle is determined by the effect display of FIG. 209 (G), and thereafter, the big hit game (4R (Unknown, 4R normal if not specified) is started.

  However, in this example, even if the defeat result is displayed as shown in FIG. 209 (G), the possibility of a resurrection pattern from an unfavorable jackpot to an advantageous jackpot remains due to a further change in the effect. I have. Specifically, when the variation pattern C has been selected, as shown in FIG. 209 (H), the effect display of FIG. 209 (G) suggests that the effect display is not the final form, but “Not yet!” 209 is displayed, and in FIG. 209 (H), the decorative pattern arrangement of “777” is shown. At this time, the symbol display column of the display area 1900p also changes again, and “777” is stopped and displayed. In the variation pattern C, by finally displaying the "7" symbol arrangement, the player is taught the big hit with the highest degree of advantage ("16R certain variable big hit with payout"). Then, thereafter, the specific 5 big hit game (16R certain change) is started.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even during the period in which the “series of effect mode groups” appearing in the effect mode not related to the execution result of the special lottery, the forced battle is performed. When this occurs, the effect as shown in FIGS. 209 (A) to (I) is performed, and the result of the big hit (advantageous big hit or disadvantageous big hit) is taught to the player.

[8-3-3. Special display effect]
In a special production mode (“PC alert”, “mode selection”, “mode decision”) of a “series of production mode groups” that appear in a production mode that is not related to the special lottery execution result, Special display effects (“special PC image”, “special selection mode”, “special dialogue”) other than “forced battle” that can be executed when a winning is performed will be described. In this example, when the special display effect appears, the winning of the big hit is determined.

  Hereinafter, the above special display effects will be described with specific examples. In these specific examples, a special display effect is realized by changing a part of the display contents of the effect mode currently staying to special display contents.

  First, the “special PC image” will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 207, the “special PC image” indicates that, in the high-probability time-saving state, when the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit is 21 to 40, the next big hit is won. This is an effect of a variation pattern that can be selected when the hit selected in the hit is an advantageous hit. In such a case, it is presumed that the user is staying in the “PC alert” effect mode. However, when the “special PC image” effect is selected, the display screen of the “special PC image” is used. The effect of "PC alert" is performed.

  FIG. 210 is a diagram for describing a display effect using a special PC image. FIG. 210 shows a display screen example of “special PC image”. When the display screen example of FIG. 210 is compared with the display screen example of “PC alert” in FIG. 206 (D), the display mode of the prepaid card (PC) is more conspicuous (specifically, for example, Increase the size or change the color of the prepaid card to golden or rainbow). As described above, by using an image of a PC different from a normal image (an image of PC alert), it is possible to remind the player that the player is in a special game situation and to provide an advantageous result. I can make you feel. Also, without using the "PC alert" display screen, it is possible to alert the player to forget to take the prepaid card, etc., and the functional role imposed on the "PC alert" production mode Can also be fulfilled.

  Note that the display screen of FIG. 210 is merely an example, and for example, another image may be displayed instead of the prepaid card, or an alert sentence in PC alert may be changed. However, even in such a case, it is preferable to leave the image of the original display image that prompts attention regarding the prepaid card so as to fulfill the above-described functional role.

  Next, the “special selection mode” will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 207, in the “special selection mode”, in the high-probability time-saving state, when the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit is 41 to 60, the next big hit is won. This is an effect of a fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the hit selected in the hit is an advantageous hit. In such a case, it is estimated that the user is staying in the “mode selection” effect mode. However, if the “special selection mode” effect is selected, the display screen of the “special selection mode” is used. An effect of “mode selection” is performed.

  FIG. 211 is a diagram for describing a display effect in the special selection mode. FIG. 211 shows a display screen example in the “special selection mode”. When comparing the example of the display screen of FIG. 211 with the example of the display screen of “mode selection” in FIG. 206 (E), in “mode selection”, the selectable objects are two characters, but the “special selection mode” ", A plate having a phrase" WIN "can be selected in addition to the two characters. The phrase "WIN" means victory, that is, a special indication of a jackpot. On the display screen of the "special selection mode", such a special display is performed so that the player can select the plate of "WIN" to be informed that it is a big hit. Further, even if the player selects any character without selecting the “WIN” plate, if the display is changed to “WIN” when the determination operation is performed, it is a big hit. A player can be taught.

  Note that the display screen of FIG. 211 is merely an example. For example, instead of the “WIN” plate, characters that are not displayed as options in the normal “mode selection” may be displayed so as to be selectable, or the number of characters that can be selected. May be displayed differently than usual. However, even in such a case, it is preferable that the display screen has a display effect based on “mode selection”, and that the player recognize that the display effect is a special effect similar to “mode selection”. Thus, the player can have a sense of superiority that a special effect has appeared.

  Next, “special dialogue” will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 207, the “special dialogue” is one of the cases where the number of revolutions after the end of the jackpot is between 61 and 83 in the high probability time saving state and the next jackpot is won. This is an effect of a fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the winning jackpot is an advantageous jackpot. In such a case, it is presumed that the user is staying in the production mode of “mode decision”. However, when the production of “special speech” is selected, the “special speech” display screen is used to display “special speech”. The production of "line" is performed.

  FIG. 212 is a diagram for describing a display effect using special dialogue. FIG. 212 illustrates an example of a display screen using “special dialogue”. When the display screen example in FIG. 212 is compared with the display screen example in “mode decision” in FIG. 206 (F), the dialogue by the character selected in the previous “mode selection” is changed from “leave it!” To “big hit!” Has been changed to. As described above, by setting the dialog of the character to be different from the normal image (the image of the mode selection), the player can be made aware that the character is in a special game situation, and an advantageous result can be provided. Expectations can be made.

  Note that the display screen in FIG. 212 is merely an example, and for example, another line is displayed, the display mode (color, size, drawing touch, etc.) of a character or a line is changed, or the screen is selected by mode selection. A special character different from the character may be displayed. In any case, the effect is performed in a mode different from the normal effect (mode determination), so that the player can have a sense of superiority that a special effect has appeared.

  The above is a description of a special production mode (“PC alert”, “PC attention”, “a series of production mode groups (“ big hit ED ”to“ mode decision ”)) appearing in a production mode unrelated to the special lottery execution result. This is a special display effect that can be executed when a winning big win is won in “mode selection” and “mode determination”. When these special display effects are executed, it is preferable to display a symbol arrangement that teaches a big hit at the end of the special display effect, so that the player can easily recognize that the big hit has been won. In addition, when the stay time of the corresponding normal effect mode is exceeded during execution of the special display effect, for example, the special display effect being executed is displayed as it is (the next effect mode to be transitioned is displayed. It is only necessary to start the big hit game after displaying the symbol arrangement for teaching the big hit at the end.

[8-4. Characteristic effect of game control in high probability time saving state]
So far, the features of the game control in the high-probability time-saving state have been described mainly with reference to the chapter [8]. Can be realized.

[8-4-1. First characteristic effect]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, while a lottery (mainly a special lottery) is executed and a symbol variation display is displayed, it is possible to suppress a prolonged game situation in which a winning result by the lottery is not obtained. It is possible to realize a gaming machine that obtains. According to such a gaming machine, as a first characteristic effect, it is possible to suppress a so-called addictive game period, thereby suppressing an aversion of the player who is likely to have an addictive state. This will be described in detail below.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving state controlled after the big hit, as shown in FIG. The special lottery and the variable display of symbols (especially, the variable display of decorative symbols) are controlled to be executable even during staying in these effect modes. On the other hand, the display screens in these effect modes are effect modes that are not related to the execution result of the special lottery, and as described with reference to the example of FIG. 206, it is difficult for the player to recognize the decorative pattern sequence. Therefore, the special lottery executed during the stay of the series of effect mode groups and the variable display of the symbols are hardly recognized by the player.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel that the variation display of the symbols is started after the display of the series of effect mode groups is completed. Even if the result of the special lottery is incorrect during the period in which is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the loss result and not feeling the so-called "added" state.

  In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an effect mode (mode selection and mode determination) indicating that the high-probability game state is started after the big hit game is ended is displayed. In addition, when an effect mode (big hit ED to mode determination) that is not related to the execution result of the special lottery is displayed, the symbols can be changed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize. Thus, it is possible to suppress a prolonged game situation in which a winning result by the special lottery is not obtained while the special lottery is executed and the symbol variation display is displayed.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment having the above-described first characteristic effect will be described with specific numerical values using examples of FIGS. 173, 205, 207, and the like. First, the jackpot probability of the special lottery in the high-probability time-saving state is 1/120, the variation time at the time of loss is 628 ms, and the reach effect is not selected. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the right hitting game is continued from the big hit game, the ball entry into the second starting port 2102 is extremely facilitated, so that the special lottery can be executed. Special lottery is executed continuously from the timing (point P in FIG. 205). Here, referring to FIG. 205, in a period in which a series of effect mode groups appear in such a manner that the decorative symbol sequence is difficult for the player to recognize, the time during which the special lottery can be executed is from point P to Q 52124 ms to the point. As described above, since the time required for one symbol change executed based on the result of one special lottery is 628 ms, 83 special lotteries and symbol changes are possible during 52124 ms ( 52124/628 = 83). Considering that the probability of winning a jackpot in a special lottery is 1/120, the rate of winning a jackpot during 83 special lotteries is about 50.07% (details of calculation are omitted). ). In addition, the variation time 628 ms at the time of a loss in this example is extremely short compared to the variation time of a general symbol. There is a contrivance to increase the number of possible special lottery trials.

  Then, according to the calculation based on the above specific example, in the high-probability time-saving state, even if the result of the special lottery is incorrect, a "series of effect mode groups" that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the result of the loss is displayed. Within a given period, the next big hit can be won with a probability exceeding 50%, and by obtaining such a big hit, the player can be prevented from feeling addicted. Further, even if the next jackpot cannot be won even if the display period of the “series of effect mode groups” exceeds 83 times, the execution period of the special lottery for 83 times is difficult to be recognized by the player, Again, it is possible to suppress a prolonged game situation in which a winning result by the special lottery is not obtained for the player. In other words, in the high-probability time-saving state, a big hit of less than half (50%) will be a big hit with the number of times exceeding the above-mentioned predetermined number of times (83 times). Is recognized by the player as not being drawn, so even if the player hits the jackpot at 100 rotations, for example, the player recognizes that the player has won the jackpot at 17 rotations (100-83 = 17). It is difficult to recognize the state.

  The selection rate of the fluctuation pattern in the high probability state, the setting of the time value of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), the production time of a series of production mode groups, and the like, as in the above example, are not determined by lottery. It is only necessary to design on the basis of the design concept of winning a half (50%) or more of the hits to a big hit in the staging period of a series of stitching mode groups to be recognized, and is not limited to the above numerical values.

  In addition, such a configuration by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment realizes the next big hit with a special random number held before the end of the big hit game when the game is controlled to the high-probability game state (so-called, It is not intended to realize the next big hit immediately after the big hit game is completed (so-called immediate succession), and in the course of the game progress in which it is not decided when to win the next big hit, One of the features is that the aim is to suppress the prolongation of a game situation in which a winning result by a special lottery cannot be obtained from a player's viewpoint.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may be appropriately provided with the following configuration in order to further ensure the first characteristic effect described above.

  For example, an effect mode (“mode selection” or “mode decision”) indicating the start of a high-probability game state in a “series of effect mode groups” and an effect mode indicating a high-probability game state (“mode-only effect”) )), The display positions of the decorative symbols on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be different. Specifically, for example, comparing FIG. 206 (E) exemplifying a display screen for mode selection and FIG. 206 (G) exemplifying a display screen for mode-specific effects, the decorative pattern is divided into three places in the former. The display is displayed in a display area 1900r, and in the latter case, the decorative symbol is displayed as a symbol row in one display area 1900p. In addition, the size of the display area (the size of the displayed decorative pattern) assigned to one decorative pattern is larger in the latter than in the former. With such a configuration, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is difficult to recognize the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol in the effect mode indicating the start of the game in the high-probability game state, while the high-probability game state is set. In the presentation mode shown, it is possible not only to make it easy to recognize the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol, but also to make it easy for the player to recognize that the decorative symbol is in a high-probability gaming state by the appearance (size and display position) of the decorative symbol. Can be recognized.

  Further, for example, in the description so far, since it is displayed irrespective of the special lottery and the transition order of each effect mode is determined in advance, "big hit ED", "maker guidance", "PC alert", "PC alert" Although a "series of effect mode groups" is formed by "mode selection" and "mode determination", these effect modes can be classified differently based on display contents.

  Specifically, first, the "big hit ED" indicates the end of the big hit game executed so far, and thus can be said to be a part of the big hit effect. In addition, the “manufacturer's guidance” and “PC alert” are not only displayed irrespective of the special lottery, but also the display contents are weakly related to the special lottery. Is not related to the special lottery), it can be said that this is a fixed production mode. As described above, the “mode selection” and the “mode decision” are the production mode of the stage before the “mode-only production” indicating that the game is in the high-probability game state, and indicate the start of the high-probability game state. It can be said that this is a production mode. However, at this point, the game in the high-probability game state is internally started, and this is an apparent effect for the player as described above.

  When classifying the production modes in this way, the production mode indicating the start of the high-probability gaming state is not a series of productions from the jackpot production, but the fixed production mode is interposed therebetween. At this time, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the effect mode indicating that the high-probability gaming state is started as an effect different from the effect related to the big hit is displayed after the end of the effect related to the big hit. By changing the symbols, it is possible to suppress a prolonged period during which a jackpot cannot be won when the effect mode indicating the high-probability gaming state is displayed.

[8-4-2. Second characteristic effect]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when a function effect unrelated to the effect indicating the result of the lottery (mainly the special lottery) is displayed, the special effect for teaching the result of the lottery is displayed. A displayable gaming machine can be realized. According to such a gaming machine, as a second characteristic effect, even when a function effect irrelevant to whether or not a privilege is obtained is displayed, the player is interested in the function effect. You can hug me. Further, according to such a gaming machine, it is possible to teach the player without delaying the result of the special lottery while displaying the function effect. This will be described in detail below.

  First, the above-described function effect is an effect that provides information useful to a player regardless of whether or not a lottery (mainly a special lottery) is performed. For example, “PC alert” corresponds to the function effect. . As described with reference to the example of FIG. 207 and the like, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the special lottery is continuously executed from a predetermined timing (point P in FIG. 205) during the big hit ED, after the big hit ends. When the number of rotations is between 21 and 40 times, the effect mode is "PC alert". As shown in FIG. 206 (D), the display screen in the “PC alert” effect mode is displayed irrespective of whether or not a special lottery is executed and the execution result. By alerting the player to a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, such as “theft”, useful information is provided to the player. Then, even when staying in such a PC alerting effect mode, if the special lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 207, the fluctuation pattern of the “forced battle” or the “special PC image” Is selected, the jackpot is taught.

  Here, as illustrated in FIG. 210, the “special PC image” has a display mode similar to the display screen of “PC alert” as a whole, but a part (for example, a drawing part of a prepaid card) is displayed. By making the modes different, a special effect corresponding to “PC alert” is provided. Then, when such an effect of “special PC image” is selected as a fluctuation pattern, the alert for forgetting to take the prepaid card or the like is continuously performed (maintenance of the function effect), but the advantage of the big hit is maintained. The jackpot can be taught to the player (teaching of the result of the lottery).

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when a function effect such as “PC alert” is displayed, a special effect such as a “special PC image” that teaches the result of the lottery. Is prepared, the result of the lottery can be taught to the player without delay (after the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern), while maintaining the effect of the function effect. As a result, even when a function effect that is not originally related to whether or not a privilege is obtained is displayed, the player can be interested in the function effect. In particular, when the function effect is a caution effect, an effect of impressing the player with the caution content can be expected.

  The effect of the “PC special image” illustrated in FIG. 210 has a role as a function effect in that it alerts the user to forget to take or steal the prepaid card, and has a big hit (advantageous) depending on the display mode of the prepaid card. The “PC special image” itself has a role as a winning effect in that it teaches or suggests the winning of the “big hit”. That is, by adopting the “PC special image” as shown in FIG. 210, it is possible to simultaneously display the function effect and the display effect related to the result of the lottery.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following configuration may be appropriately provided in order to further ensure the second characteristic effect described above.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the function effect can be displayed while teaching the result of the lottery (for example, a big hit) without delay, but the type of the lottery result and the result of the lottery are The function effect may not be displayed depending on the obtained timing or the like.

  For example, when the winning of the big hit (advantageous big hit) controlled to the advantageous game state (for example, the high probability time saving state) continuously after the big hit game is determined before the function effect is displayed, the function The display by the effect may be stopped and replaced with another effect having no role as a function effect without displaying the effect appearing on the display screen. This is because even if the display by the function effect is stopped, the opportunity for the function effect to be displayed again is secured after the subsequent jackpot game. If it is secured, it can play the role of a function effect of providing useful information to the player.

  More specifically, in FIG. 207, when the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit is won from 1 to 20 times, the timing of stopping the change of the symbol indicating the winning is set to the PC alerting effect mode. At this time, the effect of the forced battle selected as the variation pattern may be controlled so that “the effect of the PC alert is displayed without being displayed”.

  Further, for example, when the winning of the big hit is determined by the symbol change stopped during the period in which the function effect is displayed, the display by the function effect is interrupted, and the effect appearing on the display screen is changed to the function effect. You may make it replace with another production which does not have a role as a production. Even in the case of such control, the appearance opportunity of the function effect is secured, and the role of the function effect can be fulfilled.

  More specifically, in FIG. 207, in the case where the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit is won from 21 to 40 times as an advantageous big hit, it is determined that the forced battle is selected as the fluctuation pattern, and The effect may be controlled so that “the effect is switched from the effect of alerting the PC”. Alternatively, assuming that a special effect different from the special PC image is prepared, the special effect may be selected as the effect of the variation pattern, and control may be performed such that “the effect is switched from the effect of alerting the PC”.

  On the other hand, for example, a winning of a big hit (unfavorable big hit) controlled after a big hit game to a game state (for example, a low probability state or a non-time saving state) which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state is determined before the function effect is displayed. In such a case, in order to secure the display opportunity of the function effect and fulfill its role, it is preferable to execute the function effect together with the effect indicating the winning by performing superimposed display or the like.

  Further, for example, in the case where the result of the lottery is determined to be out of place or disadvantageous due to a symbol change stopped during the period in which the function effect is displayed, to secure the display opportunity of the function effect and fulfill its role. Then, it is preferable to execute a function effect together with an effect indicating the result of the lottery by performing superimposed display or the like.

  As described in [8-2], in addition to the cautionary effect such as “PC alert”, the function effect includes “setting effect” such that the volume and light amount of the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Is included. The “function effect” described for the second characteristic effect can be appropriately replaced with the “setting effect”.

  Specifically, for example, on a screen (a so-called demonstration screen) that is automatically displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses when a lottery is not performed, the “setting effect” in which the volume and light amount can be adjusted. Is displayed. In a conventional gaming machine, even when such a setting effect is displayed, if there is a ball in the starting port, the display is immediately erased and switched to a display relating to the game, so that the player who is adjusting is displayed. May be uncomfortable. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, while the volume and light amount are being adjusted in the setting effect, the adjustment in the setting effect is determined even if the ball enters the starting port and a lottery is performed. Until the control is performed, control for continuing the display without erasing may be performed. However, even in such a case, in order to display the result of the lottery without delay, it is preferable to superimpose the effect mode of the set effect and the effect mode related to the result of the lottery. According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing such control, the result of the lottery is displayed without delay, and at the same time the function effect is completed (the adjustment of the volume and the like is determined). Therefore, dissatisfaction and discomfort that the player may have can be suppressed.

[8-4-3. Third characteristic effect]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is executed based on the result of the lottery and the normal effect executed within a predetermined period regardless of whether the lottery is executed, and the result of the lottery is a hit. In a gaming machine that controls the display so that a specific effect that can change the expected ratio with respect to a specific effect appears at a specific timing, the execution of the expected effect when the normal effect is displayed When a specific timing is reached, a gaming machine capable of displaying a specific effect in an expected effect with a higher priority than the normal effect when a specific timing comes, while the effect of the normal effect is continued when is determined. Can be. According to such a gaming machine, as a third characteristic effect, even when a fixed effect such as the above-described normal effect is being performed, an effect that gives unexpected surprises to the player is displayed. Person's tiredness can be suppressed. This will be described in detail below.

  The third characteristic effect is realized by controlling the game control in the high-probability time-saving state in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment as follows. That is, the effect mode included in the "series of effect mode groups" is "normal effect performed within a predetermined period regardless of the execution of the lottery", and when the effect mode is displayed, The lottery and the change of the symbol are made executable. Then, as a variation pattern of the decorative symbol, a specific effect that is executed based on the result of the lottery, such as a cut-in effect illustrated in FIG. Is prepared at a specific timing. As for the production mode of the expected production, for example, as in a forced battle shown in FIG. 209, if a predetermined production is performed while sandwiching “expected production”, and a winning or losing is shown by a final win or loss, Good.

  In such a pachinko machine 1, if the variation pattern of “expected effect” is selected while the effect mode is displayed on the display screen, the “expected effect” is displayed while the effect mode is displayed on the display screen. Is controlled internally so that only the cut-in effect is displayed on the display screen at the timing of the cut-in effect (specific effect). By performing such control, the specific effect in the expected effect can be displayed with priority over the normal effect. It is assumed that the display regarding the final winning due to the expected effect is finally displayed on the display screen.

  In such a pachinko machine 1, even if the result of the special lottery is not a big hit but a hit, the expected effect can be selected as the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, so that the specific effect in the expected effect is displayed on the display screen. May suddenly appear.

  Also, it is preferable not to notify the player that the expected effect is being executed internally until the specific timing at which the specific effect appears appears.By controlling in this way, The specific effect suddenly appears, and the effect of making the player feel unexpected is enhanced.

  Further, the specific effect included in the expected effect is not limited to the cut-in effect as long as the effect can change the expected ratio with respect to the winning of the lottery. In other words, the specific effect may be a specific effect part that can change the degree of expectation of a hit result before and after the specific effect in the expected effect. Specifically, for example, it may be a premier production in which the big hit is determined, or a production that suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit. In addition, when a plurality of specific effects are included in the expected effect, all the specific effects may suddenly appear at each specific timing, or only an important specific effect may suddenly appear. You may make it do. The important specific effect may be, for example, a cut-in effect that can be displayed at the final stage of the expected effect, or an effect part that displays the hands and feet of the character before the finalization.

  Further, as described above, as the display control for causing the specific effect to suddenly appear while the expected effect is internally executed during the display of the effect mode (normal effect), the normal effect and the expected effect are executed in parallel. However, each display priority (priority) may be appropriately changed. When performing such display control, it is not possible to change the display position and the display size of each effect in the effect mode and the specific effect, but it is only necessary to change the display priority at a specific timing, so the peripheral control The processing load on the substrate 4010 can be reduced.

  Further, as another display control, display control may be performed on the display screen in combination with the effect mode (normal effect) and the expected effect. At this time, the display of the expected effect other than the specific timing at which the specific effect appears. What is necessary is just to make the concentration difficult to be recognized by the player by making the concentration extremely low. When such display control is performed, a specific effect can be emphasized and displayed at the specific timing, and an effect with high importance can be preferentially displayed on the display screen at an arbitrary timing. Further, when the display timing of a presentation with a high importance is caused between the normal presentation and the expected presentation, fine display control such as shifting the display position or adjusting the display size can be performed.

[8-4-4. Fourth characteristic effect]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, for at least a part of the effects that can be displayed on the display means, the player can select an effect from a plurality of effect candidates, and the selected effect is displayed on the display means. In the gaming machine provided with the control means for controlling, the result of the lottery is displayed while the selection of the effect is suppressed until the number of executions of the lottery by the lottery means reaches the specific number after being controlled to the high-probability gaming state. On the other hand, when the number of executions of the lottery exceeds a specific number, a gaming machine capable of displaying the result of the lottery on the display means while permitting the selection of the effect can be realized. According to such a gaming machine, as a fourth characteristic effect, a display means (for example, a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900) can be used when a gaming situation that does not win a jackpot can be prolonged beyond a specific number of times of change. By allowing the player to select the type of effect appearing in ()), it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored due to the prolonged game situation in which the jackpot is not won, and to suppress a decrease in interest. This will be described in detail below.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving state controlled after the big hit, the effect to be executed cannot be selected if the number of changes is less than a specific number of times after the end of the big hit game, but the selected effect is not less than the specific number of times of change. Can be executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 205 and FIG. 207, when the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit exceeds 83, the mode-only effect is executed. The effect corresponding to the character selected through the effect mode of mode selection and mode determination is performed, and the result of the special lottery is displayed. In addition, in the effects of a series of effect modes executed before the mode-specific effects (big hit ED to mode determination), the result of the special lottery (for example, big hit) can be displayed.

  Therefore, the effect by the mode-specific effect that is executed after the end of the jackpot at the number of rotations of 84 or more can be regarded as "the effect in which the player can select from a plurality of effect candidates", and the earlier jackpot. An effect in a series of effect mode groups executed up to the number of rotations of 83 after the end can be regarded as "effect in which the player is not allowed to select from a plurality of effect candidates". By performing such a display control of the effect, a series of effect mode groups are effected until the number of executions of the lottery reaches a specific number (for example, 83). Displays the result of the winning. Then, when the number of times of execution of the lottery exceeds a specific number of times (for example, 83 times), it is possible to display the result of the lottery while permitting the selection of the effect.

  According to such a pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game in which the number of executions of the special lottery is up to a specific number of times (83 times), an effect in which the player has no selection right is displayed. Is a relatively short period of time since the end of the jackpot game, so it is assumed that the player can enjoy the effect even if the player does not have the right to select an effect (the end of the jackpot game). If it is immediately after, it is assumed that the expectation for the big hit is maintained.) On the other hand, if the number of times exceeds a certain number, at least a certain time has elapsed since the end of the big hit game, but by enabling the player to display effects selectable at such timing, the big hit is won. It can be expected to prevent the player from getting tired due to the continuation of the impossible period (getting tired because the expectation of the big hit cannot be maintained), and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In particular, in the specific example shown in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 207, a jackpot result can be obtained with a probability exceeding 50% before the special lottery is performed 83 times. Therefore, by setting the specific number of times to 83, in a case of more than half, the big hit result is displayed during the effect display by the transition of a series of effect modes set in advance, while in the remaining cases, a slight addictive state is displayed. Can be selected by the player during a period in which the player is expected to start feeling, and it is expected that the player will be given a new interest at an effective timing.

  The setting of such a specific number of times can be arbitrarily set at the stage of manufacturing the gaming machine, but in a gaming situation in which the player is supposed to feel addicted, the specific number of times can be selected for the effect. Is preferably set. Here, a specific definition for the addicted game situation can also be arbitrarily determined. For example, as in the above-mentioned “83 times”, the lottery number (or fluctuation number) in which the expected value of the jackpot exceeds 50% is obtained. Alternatively, the number of lotteries (or the number of fluctuations) indicating the probability denominator of the jackpot winning probability (for example, “128” when the winning probability is 1/128) may be used. The basis for these definitions is that if more than half of the cases exceed the period that can be expected to win the jackpot, or if the number of lotteries exceeds the probability denominator of the winning probability, it is easy to feel addicted.

  Further, the specific number does not need to be fixed to a certain number, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, in the case of consecutive big hits less than the set specific number of times, since it is difficult to obtain a chance for the player to select the effect, the specific number of times is reduced by a predetermined number of times in order to expand the gameability. You may make it reset.

  Further, when a winning result with a high degree of advantage is obtained (for example, an advantageous big hit) during execution of the effect selected by the player, such as a mode-specific effect based on the character selected by the player, the effect is Since it is a production with a good impression for the player, from the time when the next big hit game ends, it is controlled so that it is possible to select so that the production continues to appear without waiting for a specific number of times to elapse. (In this case, the effect of the “series of effect mode groups” described above may be displayed on the display screen, or may be overlapped). In such a case, other effects may be selectable, but by setting the effect when the advantageous big hit is obtained as the default effect, the player does not have to perform the operation of selecting again. However, since it is possible to continuously produce a presentation that has a good impression for the player, it is possible to enhance the interest without having to take the trouble of the player.

  In addition, when the player selects a winning result with a high degree of advantage (for example, a big hit) during the execution of the performance selected by the player, an effect based on the effect is displayed during the big hit game of the big hit. May be controlled. For example, when a special jackpot is won when the mode-specific effect by the character A is selected and executed, a predetermined episode effect related to the character A is executed as a display effect of the jackpot game executed thereafter. Control may be performed. By performing such control, the effect selected by the player and the winning result with a high degree of advantage can be deeply related and impressed, so that the player can feel that the selection of the player is correct and Satisfaction can be enhanced.

[8-5. Synchronization between the number of changes and the effect mode]
Until now, in [8-1] to [8-3], when the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is controlled to the high-probability time-saving state after the jackpot game, the pachinko machine 1 continuously starts from the timing at which the start of the special lottery is enabled. , The variable display of symbols based on the result of the special lottery (variable display of special symbols and variable display of decorative symbols) is performed continuously without delay from the above timing. Was. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, such a game situation is referred to as a “continuously varying game situation”.

  In order to realize such a continuously fluctuating game situation, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a very high probability that a game (specifically, right-handed) is performed by the recommended game method in the time saving state. The game ball is passed through the gate portion 2105, and the game ball that has entered the gate portion 2105 is allowed to enter the second starting port 2102 with an extremely high probability (see [8-1] for details). As a result, as shown in FIG. 207, as shown in FIG. 207, the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game, the effect timing of each exercise mode included in the “series of effect mode groups” displayed after the end of the big hit game, and (See [8-3-1] for details).

  However, in [8-1] to [8-3], the transition schedule of each of the above-described effect modes is set on the basis of realizing a continuously fluctuating game situation (see FIG. 207). If the game situation is not realized (for example, if the player stops launching due to various reasons such as meal breaks and toilets), the number of revolutions after the big hit game and each effect There is a deviation from the mode production timing (for example, if 20,000 ms elapses when the launch is stopped after the big hit game ends, the number of revolutions after the big hit game ends is 0 times (if there is no hold) ), The effect is in accordance with the variation pattern of the decorative symbol selected based on the rotation speed, for example, transition to the PC alert in FIG. 205). Become a thing that does not correspond to the performance of the outgoing mode, there is a possibility that a director certain aspects of the discomfort.

  Specifically, for example, the right-handed game is temporarily stopped, and the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the “mode selection” effect mode. A game situation where the number of revolutions is less than 30 is assumed. At this time, assuming that the result of the special lottery becomes an advantageous big hit and the variation pattern of the “special PC image” is selected (see FIG. 207), the effect of “mode selection” is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. The display is suddenly switched from the state of FIG. 206 (E) to the effect mode of the “special PC image” (see FIG. 210).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following control is performed in order to suppress such a situation that “a difference occurs between the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game and the production timing of each production mode”. It may be. First, in [8-5-1], control for maintaining a continuously fluctuating gaming state will be described. And in [8-5-2] and [8-5-3], even if the game state of the continuous fluctuation is not realized, the number of rotations after the end of the big hit game and the production timing of a series of production mode groups are determined. Control (control for non-continuous fluctuations) that does not cause a sense of incongruity due to the deviation will be described. In the following [8-5-1] to [8-5-3], the "recommended game method" is right-handed in the jackpot game state and the subsequent high-probability time-saving state, as described above. This will be described as a game.

  The control described in [8-5-1] can be executed in combination with any of the control described in [8-5-2] or the control described in [8-5-3]. However, the control described in [8-5-2] and the control described in [8-5-3] cannot be combined because the setting regarding the transition of the effect mode is different.

[8-5-1. Promotion of continuous fluctuation]
Control for maintaining the continuously fluctuating game state in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is preferable that the continuously fluctuating gaming state be maintained in the high probability time saving state. In a conventional gaming machine, when a right-handed game is taught as an advantageous game method for a player, a right-handed display is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. Even if a hitting game is performed, launching of a game ball may be temporarily stopped for a meal break, a toilet, or the like, when the game is controlled to a high probability time saving state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to maintain the continuous fluctuation in the high probability time saving state after the end of the big hit game, the right-handed display in the high probability time saving state is different from the display during the big hit game. Control for displaying in an aspect can be performed. By such a change of the display mode, the player can be alerted to the right-handed display.

  Specifically, for example, FIG. 206 (B) shows an example of a display screen in the effect mode of the jackpot ED, but shows an example of a right-handed display in the display area 1900s that can promote continuous fluctuation. . The right-handed display in the display area 1900s is larger than the right-handed display displayed during the big hit game (the display area 1900q in FIG. 206A) in the size of the decorative character and the right-pointing arrow of “right-handed”. Since the display mode is set, it is possible to strongly recommend the player to right-hand. In addition, the display position of the right-handed display is the upper right portion of the display screen in the big hit game (display area 1900q), whereas it is set near the center of the display screen in the big hit ED (display area 1900s). Since the player who views the display screen of the apparatus 1900 is displayed at a position that is more noticeable, the player can strongly appeal for a right-handed game.

  FIGS. 206 (D) to 206 (F) show examples of display screens in the effect mode of PC alert, mode selection, and mode determination, respectively. These display screens are shown in a display area 1900t. The displayed right-handed display is also an example of a right-handed display that can promote continuous fluctuation. The right-handed display shown in the display area 1900t has a lower degree of emphasis than the right-handed display in the maker guidance (display area 1900s), but is more "right-handed" than the right-handed display in the big hit game (display area 1900q). Since the size of the characters and the right-pointing arrow is set to be large, it is possible to expect an effect of strongly recommending the player to strike right more than during the big hit game.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, of the “series of effect mode groups” that can be executed after the big hit game, in each of the effect modes in which the execution of the special lottery is permitted, the emphasis is made more than during the big hit game. The right-handed display can be performed in the displayed mode, and in this way, the player is encouraged to continuously play without interrupting or stopping the right-handed game in each of the effect modes. be able to. Then, continuous fluctuation of symbols can be realized by performing continuous right-handed games.

  Note that FIG. 206 (G) shows an example of a display screen in a mode-specific effect that transits after a series of effect mode groups. The display mode is the same as the hit display (display area 1900q in FIG. 206A). This is because it is not necessary to maintain continuous fluctuations in the mode-specific effects after the end of the effects in the series of effect modes.

  In this manner, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment causes the right-handed display to be performed in a display mode different from the right-handed display during the big-hit game for a predetermined period after the end of the big-hit game, during which the continuous fluctuation is preferably maintained. In this manner, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the control may be performed such that the right-handed display is performed in a display mode similar to the right-handed display during the big hit game. At this time, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment changes the display mode (right-handed display) for teaching a predetermined game method according to the game situation to the display mode of a specific game state (big hit game). Different display modes can be provided. It should be noted that the right-handed display during the jackpot game and the right-handed display in the mode-specific effect need not be performed in completely the same display manner, but at least the degree of emphasis is higher than that of the right-handed display during the above-mentioned predetermined period. Is low.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following control may be performed in addition to the above control in order to promote continuous fluctuation.

  Not only the above-mentioned predetermined period of the high-probability time reduction state, but also a specific period from the end of the big hit game to the start of the special lottery in the high-probability time reduction state (that is, the special lottery is not performed because the big hit game is not being performed) Also during the period, control for performing a right-handed display different from the big hit game may be performed.

  The display mode of the right-handed display displayed in a specific period is more preferably the display mode of “emphasized right-handed display” displayed in a predetermined period in the high-probability time-saving state. Then, as another example of the change of the display mode including before and after the specific period, the following display control may be performed.

  For example, during a specific period, the display density of the right-handed display displayed during the big hit game is gradually reduced or blinked. Such a display mode is an example of a display mode in which the end of the right-handed display is foreseen. By showing a display mode that indicates the end of the right-handed display, it is possible to give the impression that the right-handed display will be continued or revived by the right-handed game, and to motivate the user to continue the right-handed game. it can. Such a change in the display mode may be started from the last round of the big hit game, or may be made only during the production of the big hit ED.

  In addition, the change of the display mode such as the decrease in the display density or the blinking display is performed when the right-handed game is not performed, or when it can be estimated that the right-handed game is not performed. Is also good. Specifically, for example, this corresponds to a case where the player's hand is separated from the handle device 500 or a case where a game other than a right-handed game is performed. However, such a situation corresponds to the case where the handle device 500 or the hit ball firing device 650 is used. The determination can be made based on the operation status and the like. As described above, by dynamically changing the display mode when the right-handed game is not performed, it is strongly required to perform the right-handed game for the player who has seen the right-handed display of the changed display mode. We can expect effect to recommend.

  In addition, immediately before the right-handed display is performed for a specific period, that is, in the final round of the big hit game, the display mode is changed to the right-handed display mode that is particularly emphasized as compared with the display mode during the big hit game until then. In this way, the right-handed game may not be stopped with the end of the big hit game. Specifically, for example, the display screen of the last round of the big hit game is displayed with a right-handed display using an extra-large size or a special pattern. Further, decorative characters such as “DANGER (danger)” and “WARNING (warning)” may be additionally displayed to further emphasize the necessity of performing a right-handed game. By performing the right-handed display in such a display mode, it is possible to fuel the necessity of the right-handed game before reaching a specific period (the last round of the big hit game). The effect of inducing the continuation of the right-handed game after the end can be expected. The “particularly emphasized right-handed display mode” may be continuously displayed even in a “specific period” after the last round of the jackpot game, but the visibility of other effect displays is secured. For this purpose, only the last round may be displayed.

  In addition, it is possible to promote continuous fluctuation by shortening the effect time allocated to the period in which the special lottery cannot be executed in the jackpot ED (for example, in FIG. 205, the portion of 500 ms can be reduced to a minimum of 8 ms).

  As described above, various right-handed displays different from the display mode in the big hit game have been described in order to promote the continuous fluctuation in the high probability time saving state. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the big hit game is By controlling such different right-handed display, a game method (right-handed game) that does not cause a disadvantage to the player can be recommended, and the game according to the game method can be continued.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment controls the gaming machine in which a lottery can be performed in a limited gaming time by performing control for maintaining the gaming state of the continuous fluctuation as described above. Can be provided. Conventionally, a jackpot hit result in a gaming machine is taught after a predetermined lottery time has elapsed since a special lottery is performed, so that limited gaming time (for example, business hours of a The number of times a player can take a special lottery during the game) is limited. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above in the specific example, any one of the predetermined periods from the big hit game state to immediately after the big hit game state ends (for example, point P in FIG. 205). At the timing (for example, at the start of the display of the big hit ED), a control is performed to display “highlighted right-handed display” (refer to the display area 1900 s in FIG. 206B), so that the high-probability game state after the big hit game is over In this case, the special lottery is started immediately at the timing when the special lottery can be executed (point P in FIG. 205), so that the continuous fluctuation of the symbols can be promoted. Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effective game method for executing the special lottery is instructed to the player, and a lot of lotteries can be performed in a limited game time.

[8-5-2. Control for non-continuous fluctuations (1)]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the continuously fluctuating game state is not realized, the pachinko machine 1 does not give a sense of incongruity due to the difference between the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game and the production timing of a series of production mode groups. The first control for preparing for the non-continuous fluctuation will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a first control in preparation for discontinuous fluctuations, a special control is performed when a series of effect mode groups in which the display content changes based on the passage of time after the end of the big hit game is displayed on the display screen. When the lottery is executed, control is performed to determine a symbol fluctuating effect based on the result of the special lottery and the effect mode (a display stage of a series of effect mode groups) displayed on the display screen. In addition, since the display stage of a series of effect mode groups transits based on the lapse of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game, the effect mode (the effect mode currently being executed) displayed on the display screen is the end of the jackpot game. The determination can be made based on the elapsed time later.

  By performing the first control for the discontinuous fluctuation, the fluctuation effect of the symbol (the effect of the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol) is determined so as to be in a mode corresponding to the effect mode currently being executed. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can display the display screen in the effect mode and the decorative symbol even if a period in which the recommended game (for example, a continuous right-handed game) is not performed and the symbol is not continuously changed is inserted. It is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity with the display screen of the fluctuation effect, and to provide a comfortable game effect to the player.

  The first control for the non-continuous fluctuation will be described with a specific example. First, in FIG. 207 described above, based on the result of the special lottery, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected from a set of variation patterns that differ according to the zone of the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game. In FIG. 207, it is assumed that the continuous fluctuation of the symbols is maintained, so that the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game and the effect mode being executed are associated one-to-one, and based on the association. Variation pattern candidates were prepared. Specifically, for example, when the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game is 21 to 40 times, it is assumed that the PC alerting effect mode is being executed, and when a special lottery wins an advantageous big hit, , A variation pattern of a special PC image (variation time: 2000 ms) is selected at a rate of 50%. However, when the continuous fluctuation of the symbols is interrupted, only the effect mode that transits with the lapse of time precedes the rotational speed after the end of the big hit game, so the rotational speed after the end of the big hit game and the effect mode being executed. There is a risk that the association with "" may be lost. Specifically, when the rotation mode after the end of the big hit game has passed only 30 rotations due to the non-continuous fluctuation and the effect mode of the mode determination is being executed, in this case, the main control board 4100 has the fluctuation. There is a possibility that a fluctuation time of 2000 ms may be selected as a pattern, but the peripheral control unit 4140 does not prepare 2000 ms as a time for effect (see FIG. 207).

  Therefore, in the first control for the non-continuous fluctuation, as a control capable of coping with the case where the association between the rotation speed after the end of the above-mentioned big hit game and the effect mode being executed is broken, a decorative pattern fluctuation pattern In the selection of, even if different fluctuation times are selected based on the zone of the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game, control is performed such that an effect is selected from the effect candidates based on the effect mode being executed. Note that FIGS. 173 and 205 to 212 (except for FIG. 207) used in the description of [8-1] to [8-3] are used as they are for the first control for the non-continuous fluctuation. I do.

  With reference to FIG. 207, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol by the first control for the non-continuous variation will be specifically described. Note that in FIG. 207, when the result of the special lottery is a loss or an unfavorable big hit (normal hit), the change pattern is determined from the same change pattern candidates regardless of the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game. In such a case, even if the association between the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game and the effect mode being executed is lost, there is no shift in the effect display. Therefore, the following description is limited to the case where a different fluctuation pattern is selected depending on the zone of the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game, that is, the case where the result of the special lottery is an advantageous big hit (probable change hit in the figure). Advance.

  In the following description, regarding the transition control of the effect mode, a control is not added to the effect of shifting to the “mode-only effect” until the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game reaches 84 times. In other words, a series of effect mode groups from "big hit ED" to "mode decision" transitions with the passage of time even if a special lottery is not executed, but the "mode only effect" is performed after the big hit game ends. No transition is made until the symbol change at the 84th rotation is started. At this time, for example, when the player resumes the game after taking a 30-minute meal break after the end of the big hit, as illustrated in FIG. 206 (F) until the symbol change of 83 rotations is consumed. The determined image of the appropriate character is continuously displayed. By performing the transition control regarding the “mode-only effect”, the “mode-only effect” is not executed in each zone where the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game is 1 to 83.

  First, in the zone where the number of revolutions after the end of the jackpot game is 1 to 10 times, considering the case where the continuous fluctuation of the symbols is interrupted, not only the jackpot ED effect mode, but also the mode exclusive effect from the following manufacturer guidance Each production mode up to may be displayed. Further, in the zone where the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game is from 11 to 20 times, not only the maker guidance effect mode but also each effect mode from the subsequent PC alert to the mode determination may be displayed. . However, in these rotation speed zones, the fluctuation pattern selected when the winning big hit is won is only a forced battle (the fluctuation time is 30,000 ms or 40000 ms), and when the winning big jackpot is won in the other rotation speed zones. Since there is no deviation from the forced battle variation pattern that can be selected, there is no need to prepare variation pattern candidates other than those illustrated in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the zone where the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game is 21 to 40, in consideration of the case where the continuous fluctuation of the symbols is interrupted, not only the effect mode of PC alert, but also the subsequent mode selection to mode determination. There is a possibility that each production mode will be displayed. In FIG. 207, a special PC image (fluctuation time: 2000 ms) is selected as “special effect” at 50% of the time when an advantageous jackpot is won in the zone, but the effect mode is the effect mode after the PC alert. Is performed, if an effect based on such a fluctuation pattern is performed, a shift occurs.

  In order to cope with such a deviation, in the first control for the non-continuous fluctuation, when the fluctuation pattern of “special effect” is selected at 50% of the case where the winning big hit is won, the “special effect” is selected. Is an effect corresponding to the effect mode currently being executed. For example, when the effect mode currently being executed is “PC alert”, the variation pattern of the special PC image (variation time 2000 ms) is selected as in FIG. However, when the effect mode currently being executed is “mode selection”, the fluctuation pattern of the special selection mode (fluctuation time 2000 ms) is selected, and the effect mode currently being executed is “mode decision”. If there is, the variation pattern of the special dialogue (variation time 2000 ms) is selected.

  In addition, even when the variation effect of the decorative symbol is different based on the effect mode being executed, the variation time of the decorative symbol is not changed (for example, fixed at 2000 ms). This is because the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined based on the zone based on the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game, and the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol is determined based on the fluctuation time of the special symbol. That is, the effect is executed in a form corresponding to the fluctuation time determined by the main control board 4100, and the execution of the effect is controlled by the peripheral control board 4010.

  To summarize the variation pattern candidates in the zone in which the number of revolutions after the jackpot game is 21 to 40 times, the special PC image (variation time 2000ms), "special selection mode (fluctuation time 2000ms)", or "special dialogue (fluctuation time 2000ms)". In the remaining 50%, “forced battle (fluctuation time: 30000 ms or 40000 ms)” is selected as in the case of FIG.

  In the zones where the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game is 41 to 83, variation pattern candidates are similarly prepared according to the respective zones.

  In the zone where the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game is 41 to 60, each effect mode after the mode selection may be displayed. , An effect variation pattern corresponding to the effect mode being executed is selected. To summarize the fluctuation pattern candidates in the zone, 50% of the cases where the big hit is won, "special selection mode (variation time 6000 ms)" or "special speech (variation time 6000 ms)" based on the effect mode being executed Is selected. In the remaining 50%, “forced battle (fluctuation time: 30000 ms or 40000 ms)” is selected as in the case of FIG.

  In the zone where the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game is 61 to 83, there is a possibility that only the mode determination effect mode is displayed (additional control so that the mode-specific effect is not executed until the 84th time). At 50 in the case of winning a big hit, a variation pattern of “special dialogue (variation time 10000 ms)” is selected as “special effect”. In the remaining 50%, “forced battle (fluctuation time of 30,000 ms or 40000 ms)” is selected. These selections are the same as in the case of FIG.

  Zones with a rotation speed of 84 or more after the end of the big hit game will not be described in particular because a mode-only effect is not executed.

  When the variation pattern candidates related to “special effect” are summarized for each effect, the difference from the change pattern shown in FIG. 207 is that the “special selection mode” has two types of change times of 6000 ms and 10000 ms. The “special dialogue” is prepared with three types of fluctuation times of 2000 ms, 6000 ms, and 10000 ms.

  In the above specific example, it has been described that the mode is not shifted to the “mode only effect” until the number of revolutions after the big hit game ends reaches 84 times. The transition may be made according to the passage. However, in such a case, when the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game is less than 84 times and the "special effect" is selected at 50% of the case where the advantageous big hit is won while the "mode only effect" is being executed. It is necessary to newly prepare a "special effect" corresponding to the "mode-specific effect".

  As described above, by performing the first control for the non-continuous fluctuation, when a series of effect mode groups in which the display content changes based on the passage of time after the end of the big hit game is displayed on the display screen, Even if the situation does not maintain the fluctuation, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the symbol based on the result of the special lottery, refer to the production mode currently being executed, and perform the fluctuation production from the candidate corresponding to the production mode. Can be controlled so that the difference between the effect mode and the variable effect can be suppressed.

  By performing such first control, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment does not perform the recommended normal game method (for example, continuation of the right-handed game), and the originally assumed game. Even if the situation (for example, the continuous fluctuation of the symbols) is not realized, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in the game progress such as a shift in the effect. That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a follow-up that has not existed in the past even for a game method different from a normal game method. In the specific example described above, it is assumed that if a game method different from the recommended normal game method (right-handed game) is performed in the high-probability time-saving state, the continuous fluctuation of the symbol cannot be maintained. However, even in the case of such a discontinuous fluctuation situation, the above-described difference can be selected by making it possible to select an appropriate effect that does not give the player an uncomfortable feeling with respect to the fluctuation pattern determined by the main control board 4100. This corresponds to preventing a problem (mismatch between the fluctuation pattern and the effect) that can occur when the game method is performed.

  Further, when the first control for the discontinuous fluctuation is performed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the effect at the time of the discontinuous fluctuation of the symbol as described above can be realized, but also the continuous fluctuation of the symbol can be realized. The effect when maintained (for example, see [8-4]) can also be realized.

  In addition, in order to perform the first control in preparation for the discontinuous fluctuation, it is necessary to prepare more fluctuation pattern candidates than the fluctuation pattern candidates illustrated in FIG. (For example, the amount of data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b) increases. However, an increase in the data amount is suppressed by keeping the variation pattern candidates to the minimum necessary in consideration of the effect mode that can be executed for each zone of the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game. In the specific example described above, only a total of three variation pattern candidates of the special selection mode (2000 ms) and the special dialogue (2000 ms, 6000 ms) are added. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can realize a game effect that is comfortable for the player by suppressing the increase in the amount of data to be stored by performing the first control in preparation for the non-continuous fluctuation. .

[8-5-3. Control for Discontinuous Fluctuation (Part 2)]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the continuously fluctuating game state is not realized, the pachinko machine 1 does not give a sense of incongruity due to the difference between the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game and the production timing of a series of production mode groups. The following describes the second control for preparing for the non-continuous fluctuation.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a second control for non-continuous fluctuation, when a series of effect mode groups formed from a plurality of effect modes in which the transition order is determined after the end of the big hit game is displayed, A variation pattern candidate is prepared so that a variation pattern is selected from different candidates according to the zone of the number of revolutions after the big hit game, and control is performed so that the effect mode is transitioned based on the number of revolutions after the big hit game. can do.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment performs the second control for the non-continuous fluctuation, thereby performing the number of rotations after the end of the big hit game (that is, the number of times the special lottery is executed, or the number of fluctuations of the symbol). )), The effect mode to be executed is determined based on the accumulation state, so that the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game and the effect mode being executed are not broken, and the zone of the speed after the end of the big hit game is maintained. Can be selected and executed. Thus, even if a recommended game (for example, a continuous right-handed game) is not performed and a continuous variation of the symbol is not maintained, a sense of incongruity between the effect mode and the variation display of the symbol on the effect screen is displayed. A comfortable game presentation can be provided to the player without causing it.

  The second control for non-continuous fluctuation will be described with a specific example. First, FIG. 205 described above shows a series of effect mode groups in which effect modes to be executed change over time after the end of the big hit game. When such effect mode transition control is performed, if the continuous change of symbols is interrupted due to interruption of the game or the like, the effect mode proceeds first without increasing the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game. A gap sometimes occurred.

  Therefore, when performing the second control to prepare for the discontinuous fluctuation, instead of the transition control of the effect mode shown in FIG. 205, based on the accumulation state of the number of revolutions after the big hit game (the number of revolutions mode). Then, each effect mode of the series of effect modes is changed. FIG. 213 is a diagram for describing a second control example that prepares for discontinuous fluctuation. FIG. 213 shows an example of the progress stage of the game after the winning of the advantageous big hit, and the configuration of a series of effect mode groups is the same as that of FIG. Also, the point where the execution of the special lottery is started from the middle of the big hit ED (point P) is the same as in FIG. 206. When FIG. 213 is compared with FIG. 206, in FIG. 206, the staying time is set in advance for each effect mode, whereas in FIG. Is determined based on the “number of rotations” of each effect mode). Note that FIGS. 173 and FIGS. 206 to 212 used in the description of [8-1] to [8-3] are directly used for the second control for the non-continuous fluctuation.

  At this time, by controlling the transition of the effect mode as shown in FIG. 213 above, the effect mode executed at the same time for each of the plurality of zones according to the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game has a one-to-one relationship. Can be made to correspond. Therefore, the pattern illustrated in FIG. 207 can be used as the pattern variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery, even when the symbol continuous variation is not maintained.

  For example, suppose that after the end of the big hit game, after the number of rotations of 30 has been consumed, the right-handed game is stopped and the continuous fluctuation of the symbols is interrupted. At this time, according to FIG. 213, the PC alerting effect mode is executed, so that the PC alerting effect screen as illustrated in FIG. 206 (D) is displayed on the display screen. Thereafter, when the right-handed game is resumed again, regardless of the elapse of time during the period, until the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game reaches 40 times, the pattern in which the PC alerting effect mode is executed is executed. Is displayed. At this time, the variation pattern of the variation display is executed on the display screen because the rotation speed after the end of the big hit in FIG. 207 is selected from the variation pattern candidates shown in the row of “21 to 40 times”. There is no deviation between the effect mode and the selected variation pattern.

  In addition, when the continuous fluctuation of the symbol is maintained when the second control for the non-continuous fluctuation is performed, the transition of the effect mode as shown in FIG. 213 is continuously performed. These transitions are the same as those shown in FIG. 205 from the viewpoint of elapse of time, so that the effects described above in [8-1] to [8-4] can also be realized. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment performs the second control in preparation for the discontinuous variation, not only the effect at the time of the discontinuous variation of the symbol as described above can be realized, but also the continuous variation of the symbol can be realized. The effect in the case where it is maintained can also be realized.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when performing the second control in preparation for the non-continuous fluctuation, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, etc., it is suggested (or taught) about the transition of the effect mode. A predetermined effect display may be superimposed and displayed. Specifically, for example, an empty gauge is displayed when a new effect mode is displayed, and an effect display is performed such that the index of the gauge is increased each time the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game is accumulated, and the gauge is displayed. The next production mode may be displayed when the index reaches the upper limit. According to such an effect display, since the gauge is filled in accordance with the number of executions of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery), a series of effect mode groups can be displayed in a mode linked to the game progress. Thus, it is possible to enhance the sense of realism of the game progress and entertain the display of each effect mode.

  As described above, by performing the second control for the non-continuous fluctuation, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the mode in which the game progress is recommended in the predetermined game state (high probability time reduction state) (the pattern of the continuous fluctuation of the symbol) is performed. Even if it is different from “maintenance”, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity from being produced between the effect mode executed on the display screen and the effect (variation pattern) related to the variable display. Further, since the zone of the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game and the effect mode to be executed can be associated with each other in a one-to-one relationship, there is no need to prepare a plurality of sets of variation patterns for each of the zones. An increase in the amount of data stored in a storage area (for example, the peripheral control ROM 4140b) of the board 4010 can be suppressed. Thus, by performing the second control for the non-continuous fluctuation, the lottery (mainly the second special lottery) can be performed while maintaining the assumed transition of the effect mode without preparing an excessive fluctuation pattern. A variable display of the symbol based on the result can be appropriately and naturally made to appear.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving state, the right-handed game is recommended, and the execution of the second special lottery and the fluctuation of the second special symbol play a central role in the game. Due to various circumstances (e.g., when a launch other than right-handed is performed and a game ball enters the first starting port 2101, or when the launch itself is not performed and a hold on the first special lottery remains). In addition, the first special lottery may be executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol may be performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special lottery is more advantageous than the first special lottery (see FIG. 173 (C)). Is desirable. In order to solve such a problem, regarding the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the high probability time saving state, regardless of the presence or absence of the suspension, the variation time that is long enough to expect to secure the suspension for the second special lottery (for example, 10 Second).

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the second control for the non-continuous fluctuation, thereby performing the high-rate lottery (special lottery at the time of the probability change) in which the jackpot is won at a higher rate than usual. Only when the gaming state (for example, high probability time saving state), based on the number of executions of the winning effect based on the result of the high percentage lottery performed after the end of the big hit game (the number of rotations after the end of the big hit game), It is possible to control display transition of effects included in a series of effect mode groups.

  According to such a pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, while the jackpot lottery is performed in a high probability state, it is only possible to change the effect mode to be executed based on the rotation speed after the end of the jackpot game. Even if such a change of the effect mode is involved, the high probability state can be maintained without changing the degree of expectation of the big hit.

  Therefore, even if it is difficult to maintain the interest of the player only by executing the jackpot in a high probability state as in the conventional gaming machine, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 In addition, while maintaining a gaming state in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, it is possible to show different effect modes based on the game progress (the number of revolutions after the end of the big hit game), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player. Can be.

[8-6. Other special effects]
Up to now, the chapter [8] has described the characteristic game in the high-probability time-saving state, but in the following, the transfer effect is described as a special effect that can be executed by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment in other game states. I do.

  The transition effect of the present embodiment is such that the pachinko machine 1 can execute a demonstration effect in which a part of a specific effect (highly expected effect) of the fluctuation pattern effects is displayed on a display screen even if a special lottery is not performed. When the special lottery is performed during the execution of the demonstration effect, the effect is to be presented in a production mode using the high expectation effect displayed in the demonstration effect and to teach the result of the special lottery. . It is assumed that the handover effect is executed mainly by the control of the peripheral control board 4010 when the game state is controlled to the low probability non-time saving state, for example.

  Note that the execution condition of the demonstration effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may be the same as that of a conventional general gaming machine. Specifically, for example, in a game situation in which all the holdings have been exhausted and no symbol fluctuation display is performed (the special lottery is not executed), when a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed) or when the operation unit A case where a specific operation is performed (for example, pressing of the pressing operation unit 405) or the like is considered. When such an execution condition is satisfied in the pachinko machine 1, a predetermined demonstration screen is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (demonstration effect).

  In addition, the effect pattern of the demonstration effect may be one, but a plurality of patterns may be prepared. When a plurality of effect patterns are prepared, an effect pattern to be executed may be selected at random or an effect pattern may be selected in a predetermined order based on a past execution history. Then, in the demonstration effect, a high expectation effect having a relatively high degree of expectation for the jackpot result is introduced.

  Originally, a high-expected production has a higher degree of expectation of the jackpot result, so the appearance rate during the game is lower than other productions with a lower degree of expectation, providing the player with the opportunity to experience the high expected production Hard to do. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, at least a part of the high expectation effect is introduced in the demonstration effect in order to teach the player of such a high expectation effect and to expect the appearance of the high expectation effect. Like that. The details will be described later as an introduction of highly expected actions.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the starting port (the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102) and the special lottery is performed during the execution of the demonstration effect as described above. As a variation effect of a design that teaches the result of the special lottery (a variation pattern of a decorative design), a takeover effect can be made selectable. In addition, the conditions for enabling the selection of the takeover effect can be arbitrarily set in advance.Specifically, for example, a specific game state, winning in a predetermined execution lottery, special symbol It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern time is relatively short. Then, when the takeover effect is selected, the result of the special lottery is taught through the display of the effect mode using the high expected effect introduced in the demonstration effect.

  Hereinafter, the handover effect will be described more specifically. FIG. 214 is a diagram for explaining the transition from the demonstration effect to the takeover effect. In FIG. 214, a game ball enters the starting opening (first starting opening 2101, second starting opening 2102) in a state where the display screen (demo screen) by the demonstration effect is displayed on the display screen, and the entering ball is entered. 5 shows a transition example of the screen display when the execution of the takeover effect is selected based on.

  In FIG. 214, when the demonstration effect is being performed, the decorative character “DEMO” is displayed at the bottom of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that it is not confused with the display screen related to the game based on the special lottery. I have to. That is, in the case of FIG. 214, FIG. 214 (A) to FIG. 214 (D) are examples of display screens by demonstration effects, and FIG. 214 (E) to FIG. 214 (F) are displays related to a game based on a special lottery. It is an example of a screen.

  In FIG. 214 (A), first, as an example of the start screen of the demonstration effect, a decorative character “Introduction of high expected action” is displayed. This is to introduce a part (highly expected action) of a high expected effect in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot result is relatively high among the effects prepared in the pachinko machine 1.

  It should be noted that the effect form of the demonstration effect introduced in the high-expected action introduction does not have to display all the effects of the corresponding fluctuation pattern, and may be any mode in which some characteristic effects are extracted. That is, an effect display of a scene where a rare character appears in the effect or an effect display of a scene where a rare cut-in appears may be introduced. The mode as introduced may be sufficient. In addition, since the high expectation effect including the high expectation action is an effect in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot result is relatively high, the appearance rate in the normal game is set to be much lower than other effects.

  FIG. 214 (B) shows a decorative pattern before the high expectation action starts. Next, FIG. 214 (C) shows a cut-in effect screen in which an ally character shouts a determined line. The cut-in effect shown in FIG. 214 (C) is one of the highly anticipated actions, and when the cut-in effect is displayed, the degree of expectation for a big hit is significantly higher.

  Next, FIG. 214 (D) shows how the technique “final mystery” by the ally character is advanced in a manner following the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 214 (C). The “final mystery” effect screen shown in FIG. 214 (D) is also one of the highly expected actions, and when the effect screen is displayed, the jackpot with a considerably high probability (for example, 80% or more) is obtained. Suppose that leads to the result.

  As described above, a series of demonstration effects shown in FIGS. 214 (B) to 214 (D) show an example of a high expectation action as a part of the high expectation effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. It is assumed that a game ball is launched and enters a starting port (for example, the first starting port 2101).

  When the game ball enters the starting port, a special lottery is executed, a symbol variation pattern is selected, and symbol variation display is started. At this time, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the “conditions for enabling the selection of the takeover effect” as described above are satisfied, the execution of the takeover effect from the demonstration screen can be selected.

  FIG. 214 (E) shows an example of an effect screen at the start of a handover effect. In the takeover effect, the effect display is performed in a manner in which at least a part of the effect contents of the highly expected action displayed in the immediately preceding demonstration effect is taken over.

  In addition, the production mode in the takeover production does not need to completely match the production mode of the high expectation action displayed in the immediately preceding demonstration production, and it is at least a production having a production mode similar to the high expectation action or the high expectation production. I just need. By performing the transition effect in such an effect mode, an effect mode including a highly expected effect can be made to appear. However, even if a transition effect is executed and a production mode including a high expected production appears, the winning result of the special lottery taught by the transition production does not change, and the high expected action in the transition production is performed. Does not change the actual degree of expectation of the jackpot.

  Also, in the takeover effect, at least one of the highly expected actions displayed in the immediately preceding demonstration effect is displayed. However, the “highly expected action displayed in the immediately preceding demonstration effect” is not necessarily the same as the takeover effect. The action is not limited to the high expectation action that has been completed by the time of the start. For example, when four highly expected actions A, B, C, and D are sequentially displayed in one demonstration effect, a takeover effect is performed at a timing when only the high expected action B is displayed in the "last demonstration effect". Is performed, in the transition effect, the displayed high expected action A or B may be displayed (for example, in the case of FIG. 214), or the high expected action C or D may not be displayed. . In particular, in the case where the production display of the succeeding production is started from the highly expected action (highly expected action C in this case) that was scheduled to be displayed next in the interrupted “last demonstration production”. This is more preferable as a mode to be succeeded from the demonstration.

  In FIG. 214 (E), the cut-in effect introduced in the demonstration effect of FIG. 214 (C) is displayed as an example of the effect screen at the start of the transition effect. However, since the display screen of FIG. 214 (E) is not a demonstration effect but a fluctuation effect of the symbol determined based on the result of the special lottery, “DEMO” is not displayed on the display screen and the display area 1900u is displayed. Indicates a suspended state, and a decorative pattern that is changing is shown in the display area 1900p. Note that the takeover effect is started in an interlocked manner from the immediately preceding demonstration effect. For example, in the transition of the effect screen from FIG. 214 (D) to FIG. 214 (E), it appears that the display contents are repeated, but a part of the immediately preceding demonstration effect (cut-in effect) is displayed again. As a result, the production mode is linked from the demonstration production.

  Next, in FIG. 214 (F), the effect of “final mystery” introduced in the demonstration effect of FIG. 214 (D) is displayed as an example of an effect screen of a succeeding effect following FIG. 214 (E). In FIG. 214 (E) and FIG. 214 (F), since a part of the demonstration effect is reproduced and displayed, a highly-expected action appears as a hand-over effect, and thus the degree of expectation to the big hit by the hand-over effect is high. And let the player feel.

  In the effect mode following FIG. 214 (F), the hit result of the big hit may be displayed as it is, or another effect may be executed, and then the hit result of the big hit may be finally displayed. It may be. What kind of effect form should be set in the entire succeeding effect may be appropriately adjusted based on the fluctuation time and the effect of the selected variation pattern.

  As described above, as illustrated in FIG. 214, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a part of the high expected effect (high expected action) can be displayed by the demonstration effect even if the special lottery is not performed. When the special lottery is executed during the execution of the demonstration effect, the effect using the high expected action displayed in the demonstration effect is displayed by the takeover effect, and the result of the special lottery can be taught.

  In addition, in order for the peripheral control board 4010 to execute the takeover effect, for example, a plurality of types of change effects including a highly expected action are prepared in advance, and when the takeover effect is executed, the change effect that matches the change pattern in the change is performed. May be selected, or a partial effect that is completed in a relatively short time in a mode including a highly expected action is prepared, and when the takeover effect is executed, the partial effect is displayed after the partial effect is displayed. A normal effect indicating a hit by time may be displayed.

  According to such a hand-over effect, at least a part of the high-expected effect that originally has a low appearance rate appears, so that the appearance rate of the high-expected effect can be increased. If the chance of appearance of the high expected effect is small, the interest of the player may decrease. However, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can reduce the interest of the player by enabling the takeover effect. We can expect effect to control.

  Note that, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a takeover effect that is executed in an interlocked manner from the demonstration effect is not always executable at the time of executing the special lottery during the demonstration effect, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is preferable that the control is performed so as to be executable. Hereinafter, specific examples of the predetermined condition will be described.

  As a first example, when a variation pattern of a variation time is selected such that the reach of the reach effect is determined, the execution of the takeover effect is not permitted, and the effect of the selected variation pattern is executed. May be controlled.

  In the takeover effect, at least a part of the high expected effect (high expected action) is displayed in a manner linked to the demonstration effect, but the entire high expected effect is not displayed, and the display of the high expected action is not so long. Takes no time. Here, the variation time in which the route of the reach effect is determined is relatively long, for example, 60 seconds or more. Therefore, when such a variation pattern of the variation time is selected, the takeover effect will be executed. Then, it is expected that the production time will be excessive. Therefore, when a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time as described above is selected, execution of a takeover effect is not selected, so that it is possible to suppress a problem in the effect.

  In addition, if a fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time is selected so that the reach of the reach production is decided, the reach production will appear in the first place, even if the takeover production is not executed and the high expected production is produced. Thus, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is equal to or higher than a certain level, and it is possible to give the player interest. Further, by not performing the takeover effect, it is possible to provide an opportunity to enjoy the original reach effect.

  As a second example, when the selected fluctuation time is a predetermined short time (specifically, a fluctuation time that is short enough that the reach of the reach effect is not determined), control is performed to execute the takeover effect. You may. The fluctuation pattern due to the predetermined short fluctuation time is, for example, a “normal fluctuation pattern (for example, selection in a state where there is no suspension in a low-probability non-short-time state) that is selected at a frequency higher than a predetermined time in a normal state (at the time of a failure). (A fluctuation pattern having the highest frequency) ", and the fluctuation time is, for example, about 10 seconds.

  At this time, in accordance with the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation pattern (for example, 10 seconds), a transition effect that is displayed in an interlocking manner from the demonstration effect being displayed is prepared with the effect contents starting from a plurality of timings during the demonstration effect. If so, based on the display stage of the demonstration effect at the start of the transition effect, it is possible to select a transition effect with the effect content at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to smoothly realize the transition effect from the demonstration effect. .

  Also, by enabling the takeover effect to be executed when the normal variation pattern that is easy to be selected from the normal time is selected, the execution frequency of the takeover effect can be increased. It is possible to increase the opportunity to show at least a part (highly expected action) to the player, and it is possible to increase the appearance opportunity of the effect that can enhance the interest of the player.

  In addition, in the takeover effect, at least a part of the high expected effect can be displayed, but only a specific portion such as the most important effect scene may not be displayed in the takeover effect. In the case where the specific part is concealed and at least a part of the high expected production is shown in this way, the outline of the high expected production can be grasped by the succeeding production, so that the player can obtain a certain degree of satisfaction while maintaining a certain level of satisfaction. The effect is to increase the willingness to play the game by causing the user to want to know the whole picture of the expected production and to produce the high expected production with a low appearance rate.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main frame 4 Gaming board 5 Door frame 1100 Gaming area 1150 Gaming panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2000 Front unit 2500 Center role 2600 Front right middle production unit 2601 Support pin 2610 Front right middle movable decorative body 2620A Fixed Decorative body 2623 Light shielding member 2623a Partition piece 2625 Front cover (cover)
2626 Direction sheet (picture film, smoke sheet)
2626a Black part (picture film)
2626b Blue part (Pattern film)
2626c Red part (Pattern film)
2626d Uncolored part (smoke sheet)
2627 Diffusion lens sheet 2628 Holding member 2640 Front right middle decorative board (decorative board)
4000 Main board 4010 Peripheral control board 4100 Main control board 4100a Main control MPU
4140 Peripheral control unit 4140a Peripheral control MPU
4140b Peripheral control ROM
4140e Peripheral control RAM
4150 LCD controller 4150a LCD controller MPU
4150c VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine in which a lottery according to a win is executed, and a game is performed based on a result of the lottery to determine whether or not to give a player an advantageous gaming state,
Display means having a predetermined display area;
Display control means for controlling the display means to display a predetermined effect,
With
The predetermined effect includes an expected effect that is performed based on the result of the lottery, and a normal effect that is performed within a predetermined period regardless of whether the lottery is performed,
The expected effect is configured such that a specific effect that can change an expected ratio of the result of the lottery to a hit appears at a specific timing,
When the execution of the expected effect is determined when the normal effect is displayed on the display means, while the effect of the normal effect is continued on the display means, when the specific timing comes. An effect projecting means capable of displaying the specific effect in the expected effect on the display means in preference to the normal effect,
A gaming machine comprising: